2021 Audi q8 78209

Owner's Manual
2021 Q8
Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

Foreword
Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trust in us.
Your new Audi will allow you to experience the best in groundbreaking technology and premium quality
equipment that a vehicle has to offer. Audi recommends that you read your Owner's Manual thoroughly
so that you quickly become acquainted with your Audi and make use of all of its features.
In addition to explaining how the different features work, there are many useful tips and information
concerning your safety, how to care for your vehicle, and how to maintain your vehicle's value. Audi also
gives you useful tips and information on how to drive your vehicle more efficiently and in an environ-
mentally-friendly manner.
Audi hopes you enjoy driving your vehicle and wishes you safe and pleasant motoring.
ZA\ warNiNc
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or
off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals includ-
ing engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize expo-
sure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.
ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
4M8012721BF
Table of contents
About this Owner's Manual...... Panoramic glass roof................. 47

Garage door opener..........--.00 eee 48
SUMIMAry: < = exe : eens:
Seen cs sens
NOD OO
QutckeaeCe ssh: «i esis se ois a eaves @ Lights and Vision................. 51
Cockpit. ...... 0... eee eee eee eee Exterior lighting...................4. 51
Indicator lights overview...........4.. Interior liQhting ss =e aves ss eews so eos 54
ViSIOMsn « 3 ses 3 3 ema oo wena vo ae © ove 55
Display and operation........... 12 Windshield wipers.............-..45- 57
Instrument cluster............... 12 Digital compass.............-.-0000- 60
Instrument cluster overview........... 12
Operating. ecccuse w+ were oo wens oo ayes 9 ¥ 13 Sitting correctly and safely...... 62
Adjusting the display................. 13 Correct passenger seating position...... 62
Coolant temperature display........... 14 Frontseats:: » ssw. « ¢ sews & » saws +s ewe < 62
Tachometer’ series i ewe so snes ¥ & ome 14 Rear SOats cravina so suamie si sxomare va aueens 8 a ana 65
Odometer.............. cee eee eee ee 14 Steering wheel..............--000005 66
Outside temperature display........... 15 Head restraints ss = ¢ sao xs eee xo pews ee 67
Engine oil temperature indicator....... 15 Safety belts:. scscce ss cmsne a eee o & were 68
Boost indicator...............0--000. 15 Memory function...............00005 71
Shift light indicator.................. 15 Airbag SySt€M eves 2s eeen es pean ce ees 72
Sportidisplaystens « scwne x » eum os vomew «02 15) Child safety'seats wos cs eva. wemwe + ees 76
Vehicle functions ..............00000. 16
Storage and convenience........ 82
TOUCKHAISPLAYS « esis 6 6 sccm 6 x wees 18 POWEPSOUICES sess ce wives 2 2 erecem a a eee 82
General touch display operation........ 18 Cup holders. ... 0.2.00... c eee eee eee 82
Multi Media Interface................ 20 Storage and compartments............ 83
Luggage compartment............... 83
Head-up display.................. 27 ROOF TAGKE. 5 2 cxcnoes «x cecwece = at sammie = = omeween @ 88
Description............0..
ee cee eee 27
Warm and Coles: « ecee ss ene esis 90
Voice recognition system........ 28 Climate control system............... 90
General information..............00. 28 Steering wheel heating............... 93
DESGriptiOns « = seen ¢ = seme xs eee st eee 28 Fluids in the A/C system. .........0065 93
External voice operation.............. 29
Driving ..............
0.0... eee eee 95
Global functions................. 3d: Starting the vehicle...............0.0. 95
Additional function buttons........... 31 When driving isis ss iovsvie se aerswce oo anes oe 96
Drive system... 2.2...
ee eee eee eee 102
Starting and driving............. 32 Start/Stop system .........ee cece eee 103
Personalization.................. 32 BrakeS's so isemi 2 wane w aman a 2 oer as ie 104
32 Electromechanical parking brake....... 106
Special driving situations.............. 107
Opening and closing............. 35
Central locking) sani x x swasien © x sponae 2 aaaonor 35 Driving: dynamic. . « sic. 6 6 see a 6 se Ld
Keys... eee 39 Audi drive select..................00. Tay
Luggage compartment lid............. 42 SUSPENSION es « + exes ¢ ¢ eres +o ees vv eae 112
Childisafety lock seis 2 « sere ¥ © were 3 ¢ overs 45 SUECOMIING 6 vessse oo csisweue io & stone 6 a toma ww Bs 114
Power windows............000eeeeee 46
Table of contents
All wheel drive (quattro).............. 115 Using the telephone.................. 185

Electronic Stabilization Control......... 116 SettingS 00... . cece cee eee eee eee 188
MOSSAGES cours « s eauu § 2 eueeS Fo EGE FE BS 189
TrailersQow tigi cece
a 6 eens 4 o eaees 118 Troubleshooting sic ss wes oe ween es owe 191
Driving with atrailer................. 118
Audi CONNECE : «6: = i e665 st ees so 192
Assist systems................... 1241 General information................. 192
Assist systems................... 121 Audi connect Infotainment............ 192
General information. . 121 Using a Wi-Fi hotspot 193
Surrounding area detection............ 122 Audi connect Infotainment services..... 193
Switching the systems on and off....... 124 Functions on demand................ 194
Audi connect vehicle control services.... 194
Driving information.............. 126 SOttingS sews + 9 cae ¥ eee ¥ perms we pee 195
Speed warning system................ 126 Troubleshooting..............--.0005 196
Camera-based traffic sign recognition... 126
Traffic light information.............. 128 Emergency call................... 197
Lapetimerion + 3 scans oo sess a ¥ soweene 6 stain 129 OVERVIEW. secs. 6 x sxcvers 6 emutes @ a eavaens vw ame
Acceleration measurement............ 130 Emergency call
Nightivision aSSisti=x = «wm : > ase e s eon 131 Online roadside assistance............ 198
Integrated Toll Module............... 132
Navigation.....................05. 200
Driver assistance................. 134 Opening navigation.................. 200
Cruise control system............00-5 134 myAudi navigation................00. 200
Efficiency assist.............02.-000. 135 Entering adestination..............0- 201
Adaptive cruise assist................ 137 Stopping route guidance.............. 204
Distance warning ..............00005. 146 Mapes & 5 saves © 2 saws yo sme @ & Hew 2 2 Be 204
Lane departure warning............... 147 Alternative routes................04. 206
Audi presense...........0 cece eee 149 Additional functions...............0-- 206
Sid@vassist sews: = s sexs = 2 sews & e Ae & ne 153 Satellite Map’s + 6 gare = cama a e weep os oe 207
EXE Warning sowsea so ccvena vo aseoa wo eons ao 155 Mapreipdates » cmos + x sre: «2 anes aw onnens 208
Intersection assistant................ 156 Traffic incidents.............. 000 eee 209
EMiergency assists: « eswy wave a ¥ ware a Fi 157 SOtuiNGS wows ¢ « eeen ¢ nae 2 Bees doe 210
Parking and maneuvering....... 159 Radio........

0... eee eee ee 212
ThitrOdUCtiON « s sees ¢ = sees 5 ¢ sere ge ees 159 Generalinformation................. 212
Parking‘aid plus « sissies
avis oe aretes so aoe 159 Radio functions sss < eins 2 + wen 3 6 eacern 213
Rearview camera and peripheral cameras. 162 Online radio... .... eee eee eee 216
Rear cross-traffic assist............... 166 Options and settings................. 217
Assisted parking..............---00 ee 167 Troubleshooting wisi « s wen» 6 eae o + wae 218
Park assist plus..............000000- 170
Remote controlled parking............ 173 Media.................
0c cece eee 220
ManetVEraSSistt: « + aswu sx nowy ¢ wasn a ¢ g 178 General information................. 220
DVD drive...... 0... eee eee eee 220
Infotainment system............ 181 Bluetooth audio player............... 221
Telephone..............cece eee 181 Amazon Alexa..........-.:se
eee ee eee 221
TMEROGUCTION « & cess wo wcinase we a oraeni ow awenaie 181 Multimedia connections.............. 222
4M8012721BF
Setup... 2.2... cee eee

eee eee 181 Playing media..............00. 0.0 ee 223
Using the Audi phone box............. 183 Options and settings................. 227
Table of contents
Supported media and file formats...... 228 JUIMIPFSTANEING 5 x exces 6 w erates @ a cawcens vw ae 293
Troubleshooting..............000eeee 229 TOWING... cece ete 295
Audi smartphone interface...... 231: Fuses and bulbs.................. 298

Setup... .. 0... eee eee eee 231 Fuses... 0... eee ee eee eee 298
Troubleshooting «cx «sess
se eee s 3 ves 232 BUILDS: sss s = wavs & & ees 5 2 ctetDs sb eG ee 302
Additional settings.............. 233 Customer information........... 303

System settingS..............e ee eee 233 Data privacy................000 eee 303
Software update: « ccs ss e054 een ee ve 234 Privacy NOLICE « naw, 2 w aay ¥ Kaew + Meee © 303
Connected devices............00.000s 235 Timage reGOrding). « « canew + sect ws caver a os 303
Legalinformation................... 236 Data memories............00.00e eee 303
Transmitted information.............. 305
Additional information.......... 237
Brands and licenses..........-...0-5- 237 Accessories and technical
CINERGSS:. « » sem: : x ews ce ee be ee ee 308
Maintenance and Care........... 238 Warranty’ « = eon x 2 manors 6 o ois wv ee 6 308
Checking and Filling............. 238 Audi Literature Shop.............000- 308
FilClae « ¢ agisu @ & maven 2 e SINS BE SePeE YE ee 238 Driving in other countries............. 308
RePUCLINGiecs + 2 mein oo een eae ¥ wer 239 Maintenance, repairs, and technical
Emissions control system............. 241 modifications..................00008 308
Engine compartment................. 242 Accessories and parts..............-. 310
EMGine Oils: seas 2 = wave = ¢ eoume 5 y couse 6 2g 245 Reporting Safety Defects.............. 310
Cooling systeM...........00 0-2 ee eee 248 Declaration of compliance for
Brake fllid. 0.2...
eee eee eee ee 250 telecommunications equipment and
ElectricalsysteM esa. ecw + y pews se ee 251 electroniesystems's « «cows
se mean 2 news 314,
Battenyis « o masse © o cxasane «a sincere « a averse © ere 2511,
Windshield washer system...........- 254 Technical data.................... 373
Service interval display............... 254 Identification data................... 313
Vehicle datatics ss saves o srewa sv awe 0 ve 313
Wheels .......... 66. cece eee eee eee 256
Whieelsiaind Tires « caus « « cara sv eee eo 9 256 TAAGK es = see « = wee « = owe Be nee eg oe 315
Tire pressure monitoring system....... 274
Tire pressure monitoring system....... 276
Care and cleaning................ 280

General information 0... ..c.6 eee 280
Car washes....................0000. 280
Cleaning and care information......... 281
Taking your vehicle out of service....... 285
DoOuUlt YOuUrSELT ios «pases

s yas ss eRe 286
Emergency assistance........... 286
Generalinformation................. 286
EQUIPITIONE sce + & wswu + wowe xe eee a ee 286
Tire MObILity Kit esses se seceoe a x oneivens ea ares 286
Replacing wheels..............000005 288
Collapsible spare tire...............2. 292
About this Owner's Manual
In this manual, Audi provides important informa- => A\ Cross reference to a “WARNING” within a
tion, tips, suggestions, and warnings for using section. Ifa page number is indicated, the
your vehicle. “Audi” refers to AUDI AG, the re- WARNING is located outside of the section.
spective importer in a country, as well as joint
ventures. IN WARNING
It has always been Audi's policy to continuously Text with this symbol contains information
improve its products. Audi reserves the right to about safety and how to reduce the risk of se-
make changes in design and specifications, and rious personal injury or death.
to make additions or improvements in its prod-
ucts without incurring any obligation to install C) Note
them on products previously manufactured. This Text with this symbol contains information
owner's manual is based on the current data about reducing the risk of damage to your ve-
available when it was printed. Text, illustrations, hicle.
and specifications in this owner's manual are
based on the most current information available (@) For the sake of the environment
at the time of printing, and shall not constitute a Text with this symbol contains information on
basis for liability claims. protecting the environment.
KEEP THIS GUIDE
G) Tips
Keep this manual and any other applicable docu-
Text with this symbol contains additional use-
ments in your vehicle at all times. This is espe-
ful information.
cially important if you loan your vehicle to others
or sell it.
This owner's manual describes the equipment

range for all model versions of this vehicle at the
time of printing. Individual equipment options
described may only be available at a later date or
may only be offered in certain countries.
Some sections in this manual do not apply to all

vehicles. When this is the case, the beginning of
the section indicates the validity, for example
“Applies to: vehicles with speed warning sys-
tem”. Optional or vehicle-specific equipment is
also identified with an asterisk ugn “*”.
The illustrations in this manual are a guide.

Some of the details in your vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
All directions, such as “Left”, “right”, “front” and

“rear”, are based on the vehicle's direction of
travel.
* — Optional equipment or vehicle-specific equip-

ment
b> The section continues on the next page.
4M8012721BF
Quick access
Quick access
Cockpit
&
Fig. 1 Cockpit
Door handle ® Lockable glove compartment with:

©O®OOO
Central locking switch —CD/DVD drive ...........0005. 220

Memory function buttons @ Front passenger's airbag 72
Vent @ Depending on equipment, buttons
Lever for: for:
—Turn signals and high beams .... —drive select ...............00. 01,
—High beam assistant .......... — Electronic Stabilization Control
— Lane departure warning (ESC) 116
— Lane guidance — Emergency flashers 53
Multifunction steering wheel with: — Defrosting 90
©
— Rear window defogger ......... 90

— Horn be
— Driver's airbag MMI On/Off button 20, 31
@®
— Operating buttons Depending on equipment, buttons

= Shift paddles: « « coi e ewes sv ove for:
Instrument cluster ............. — Parking systems 159

Head-up display ............... — Park assist plus ............... 170
OOOO
— Driver assistance systems ...... 124

Windshield washer system lever . .
Depending on equipment:
Upper display .................
— Starting the engine if there is a
Lower display .................
malfunction 96>
Quick access
Cup holden asce es cscvene wv omens x v oe 82 displays. To show them again, select the second
ESOGKE « 2 santice wm aconens we < emommiee © osm 82 tab for messages with the multifunction steering
— Vehicle key holder wheel > page 13.
Depending on equipment: Some indicator lights in the display can display in
— Audi music interface .......... 222 several colors.
—Audi phone box ............... 183
@® Electromechanical parking brake Peer ele tela his
BUERON sese ¢ eevee ¢ x mew © 2 pee 4 106
If the A\| or AN] indicator light turns on, check
@9 Automatic transmission selector
the message in the instrument cluster.
EVER” scowp: « 2 gave & o eee Go eee Ee 97
@) [START ENGINE STOP] button .... 95
Coad)
@) Steering wheel adjustment ...... 66
@3) Lever for: The following indicator lights may be available,
— Cruise control system ......... 134 depending on the vehicle equipment:
— Adaptive cruise assist .......... 137
Red indicator lights
@4 Connection port for the On Board
Central indicator light
Diagnostic System (OBD) ........ 303
=> page 7,
@5) Buttons for:
Instrument cluster
LIQHts: as 5 2 sacs 5 2 eqws 3 o ees ss 51 =>page 12
—All-weather lights ............ 51
Safety belt
@8 Hood release ..............002. 243 => page 70
@2 Button for:
Engine start system
— Luggage compartment lid ...... 42
=> page 96
Exterior mirror adjustment ...... 55
Transmission
@9) Buttons for:
=> page 101
— Power windows ......... 00005 46
Drive system
—Child safety lock .............. 45
=> page 103,
G) Tips Electrical system
=> page 251
Some the equipment listed here is only instal-
Electromechanical parking brake
led in certain models or is available as an op-
=> page 106
tion.
Indicator lights overview => page 107
Brake system
=> page 105, > page 107,
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster = page 250
blink or turn on. They indicate functions or mal- Brake system
functions. Some warning and indicator lights => page 105, > page 107,
turn on when you switch the ignition on and must => page 250
turn off when the drive system is switched on or Steering
while driving. =>page 114
4M8012721BF
With some indicator lights, messages may ap- Steering lock

pear and warning signals may sound. The indica- =>page 114
tor lights and messages may be covered by other
Quick access
Air suspension Transmission

=> page 113 => page 101
Electrical system Drive system
=> page 251 => page 103
Engine oil level (MIN) Cooling system
=> page 245 => page 248
Engine start system
Engine oil pressure
=>page 245 => page 96
Keys
Cooling system
=> page 96
=> page 248
Hood
=> page 243 => page 107
Brake system
Loose wheel warning
=>page 105
=> page 272
Electronic Stabilization Control
Night vision assist
=> page 132 (ESC)
=>page 116
Night vision assist
=> page 132
(ESC)
Distance warning =>page 116
=> page 146
Steering intervention request (ESC)
=> page 141 =>page 116
Safe start monitor Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
=> page 144, =>page 117
Driver intervention request Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
=>page 145 => page 117
Adaptive cruise assist
Steering
=> page 138 >page 114
Lane departure warning
Steering lock
=> page 148,
=> page 114
Emergency assist
=>page 157 All wheel drive
=>page 115
Audi pre sense
= page 150, Suspension control
Intersection assist => page 113
=> page 157 Air suspension

= page 113
Yellow indicator lights
Active roll stabilization
Central indicator light
=> page 113
=> page 7
Engine speed limitation
Safety systems
=> page 14
=> page 72
Tank system
=> page 239
Quick access
Electrical system Side assist

=> page 251 => page 155;
Engine oil level (MIN) Exit warning
=>page 245 =page 155
Rear cross-traffic assist
Engine oil level (MAX)
=> page 166
=> page 245
Engine oil sensor
=>page 245 =>page 146
Steering intervention request
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
=> page 141, > page 148
> page 241,
Engine warm-up request
=> page 245 =>page 149
Distance warning
Washer fluid level
=> page 146
=> page 254
Audi pre sense
Windshield wipers
=> page 153
=> page 60
Emergency assist
Parking systems
=>page 157
=> page 161
Emergency call function
Park assist plus
=> page 173
=>page 198
Maneuver assist Other indicator lights

=> page 180 Rear safety belt
Tire pressure => page 70
=> page 274, > page 276 Start/Stop system
Tire pressure = page 103
=> page 274, > page 276 Hill hold assist
Loose wheel warning = page 109
=> page 272
Low beam headlights
Bulb failure indicator => page 51
=> page 54
Parking lights
Adaptive light => page 51
=> page 54
Turn signals
Light/rain sensor => page 52, > page 53
=> page 54, > page 60 Cruise control system
Door lock => page 134
=> page 37 Cruise control system
Battery in vehicle key => page 134
> page 41 Efficiency assist
Night vision assist =>page 135
=> page 132 Efficiency assist
4M8012721BF
Intersection assist =>page 135 >

>page 157
Quick access
Efficiency assist Park assist plus

>page 135 => page 173
Efficiency assist Park assist plus
=>page 135 => page 173
Efficiency assist Maneuver assist
>page 135 => page 180
Adaptive cruise assist High beam assistant
=>page 138 => page 52
Adaptive cruise assist Door lock
=> page 138 => page 37
Adaptive cruise assist Child safety lock
=>page 138 =>page45
=> page 138
Adaptive cruise assist Speed warning system
=> page 138 =>page 126
Park assist plus Speed warning system

=>page 171 => page 126
Lane departure warning Camera-based traffic sign recog-

=> page 148 nition
=> page 127
High beam headlights
=> page 52 Night vision assist
=> page 132
High beam assistant
=> page 134
Rear safety belt
=> page 134
Rear safety belt
=> page 70 Intersection assist
=>page 157
Transmission
=> page 101 Side assist
=>page 155
Convenience key
=> page 96 Distance warning
=> page 146
=> page 107 py Rear cross-traffic assist
hers => page 166
=> page 107 Adaptive cruise assist
=> page 146,
Hill hold assist
Efficiency assist
=> page 109
=> page 142
Air suspension
=> page 113
» 4 > page 138
Parking systems Adaptive cruise assist
=>page 161 => page 143 >
10
Quick access

=> page 148
f,—~\\ Lane departure warning
=>page 149
Audi pre sense
=> page 153
Emergency assist
=>page 157
4M8012721BF
11
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster overview
12/5/2019
2800 mi 210 mi
RTO Pad
Fig. 2 Instrument cluster overview (Audi virtual cockpit)
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- @ Tips

ing items may appear in the instrument cluster:
— You can select the units used for tempera-
@ Display .
. ture, speed, and other measurements in the
— Engine coolant temperature -E . . 14 :
: Infotainment system > page 233.
@ left dial — Speeds are displayed in mph (miles per
~ Tachometer ......... 1.05.04. 14 hour) or km/h (kilometers per hour).
Tab area .......6. sees eee eee ee 13 — If there is a malfunction in the instrument
©OO8®O
Genitiralzarea yan ss ance oo sauise 0 0 13 cluster, DEF will appear in the trip odometer
Status line (one or two lines) display. Have the malfunction corrected as
Right dial soon as possible.
— Certain instrument cluster content can also
— Convenience display
be displayed in the head-up display*
FueblevelEd) « = secsaw « a secsise vo wena © 239
=> page 27.
©8®
Right additional display with speed-

ometer
Left additional display with:
©
—Gear .. eee eee eee eee eee 97

— Audi drive select mode ......... 111
ZX WARNING
If there is a severe malfunction in the instru-
ment cluster, the display may turn off. The /\|
indicator light may also turn on. Stop the ve-
hicle safely. See an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
12
Instrument cluster
Operating The following tabs may be available, depending

on vehicle equipment:
First tab Vehicle functions > page 16

Second tab | Driver messages (this is only dis-
-5QPM played if at least one indicator
ce light/message is being displayed)
12/05/2017 Third tab Night vision assist (this is only dis-
played if the night vision assist
has been activated) > page 131
Fig. 3 Instrument cluster: driver information system
Fourth tab |Radio > page 212
Media > page 223
Fifth tab Telephone > page 185
Sixth tab Navigation > page 200
Adjusting the display

=IeR
S|
>|
nN
xec
Fig. 4 Left side of multifunction steering wheel
Information is organized within various tabs @)

in the instrument cluster. The tab contents are
displayed in the central area (2).
i Bad P Fig. 5 Upper display: adjusting the display
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
Selecting a tab Switching the view

> Press the VIEW button to switch between the
> Press the <J/ > button @) repeatedly until the
desired tab is selected.
® default view
@ and the enhanced view (2).
Returning to functions at higher levels Adjusting the layout

> Press the + button 6). Depending on the vehicle equipment, various lay-
outs may be available.
Opening and closing the menu
P 9 9 > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
> Press the [=] button ©). SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Audi virtu-
al cockpit.
Selecti d firmi functi
erecting ane’ confirming a function > To adjust the desired layout, press @).
Requirement: a menu or list must be displayed.
Setting the automatic layout change
> To select a function, turn the left thumbwheel Applies to: RS models
@ to the desired function.
Requirement: depending on vehicle equipment,
> To confirm a selection, press the left thumb-
the RS Performance or RS Runway layout must
wheel (7).
be set.
Switching the view >» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
4M8012721BF
> Press the VIEW button @). SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Audi virtu-
al cockpit > Configure > Automatic activation
of RS layout. >
13
Instrument cluster
— The front spoiler also helps to distribute

Depending on vehicle equipment, the RS Per-
cooling air correctly while driving. If the
formance or RS Runway layout will be automati-
spoiler is damaged, the cooling effect will
cally set when switching into the RS modes
be impaired and the risk of the engine over-
=>page 111.
heating will increase. See an authorized
Adjusting the additional display Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility for assistance.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the addi-
tional displays that can be selected may vary.
Tachometer
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Audi virtu- The tachometer (2) 9 page 12 displays the engine
al cockpit > Configure. speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). The be-
> Select the desired additional display. ginning of the red zone in the tachometer indi-
cates the maximum permissible engine speed for
Reducing the display all gears once the engine has been broken in. Be-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can fore reaching the red zone, you should shift into
hide the central area in the instrument cluster. the next higher gear, select the "D" or "S" selec-
tor lever position, or remove your foot from the
> Select on the instrument cluster: vehicle func-
accelerator pedal.
tions tab > [=] button > Reduced display.
Engine speed limitation
Coolant temperature If the BA indicator light turns on, the engine will
display be automatically limited to the RPM displayed in
the instrument cluster. This will protect the en-
The coolant temperature display @) > page 12
gine components, for example during a cold start
only functions when the ignition is switched on.
or from overheating.
To reduce the risk of engine damage, please ob-
serve the following notes about the temperature The engine speed limitation is deactivated if you
ranges. release the accelerator pedal while the engine is
at normal operating temperature.
Cold range
If the engine speed limitation was activated by
If only the LEDs at the bottom of the gauge turn
an engine control malfunction, the By indicator
on, the engine has not reached operating tem- light also turns on. Make sure the engine speed
perature yet. Avoid high engine speeds, full accel-
does not go above the speed displayed, for exam-
eration, and heavy engine loads. ple when downshifting. Drive to an authorized
Normal range Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
mediately to have the malfunction corrected.
The engine has reached its operating tempera-
ture once the LEDs up to the center of the gauge C) Note
turn on. If the g indicator light in the instru-
The needle in the tachometer may only be in
ment cluster display turns on, the coolant tem-
the red area of the gauge for a short period of
perature is too high > page 248.
time before there is a risk of damaging the
@) Note engine. The location where the red zone be-
gins varies depending on the engine.
— Auxiliary headlights and other accessories in
front of the air intake impair the cooling ef-
fect of the coolant. This increases the risk of
Odometer
the engine overheating during high outside The trip odometer and odometer are displayed in
temperatures and heavy engine load. the status bar G) > page 12.
14
Instrument cluster
The trip odometer shows the distance driven tween 176 °F (80 °C) and 248 °F (120 °C) under
since it was last reset. It can be used to measure normal driving conditions. The engine oil temper-
short distances. The odometer shows the total ature may be higher if there is heavy engine load
distance that the vehicle has been driven. and high temperatures outside. This is not a
cause for concern as long as the E or = indica-
Resetting the trip odometer
tor lights do not turn on.
tions tab > | button > Reset mi. Boost indicator
Applies to: vehicles with boost indicator
@) Tips
Depending on vehicle equipment, the current en-
Distances are displayed in mi (miles) or km gine load (meaning the current boost pressure)
(kilometers). may be indicated by a bar in the instrument clus-
ter.
Outside temperature
> Open the vehicle functions tab and switch to
display the enhanced view > page 13.
The outside temperature is displayed in the sta-
tus bar©) > page 12. Shift light indicator
Applies to: RS models
If your vehicle is stationary or if you are driving at
very low speeds, the temperature displayed in The shift light indicator informs the driver when
the instrument cluster may be slightly higher the RPM limit is reached.
than the actual temperature outside due to heat
> Select the RS Performance or RS Runway lay-
radiating from the engine.
out if necessary > page 13.
At temperatures below 41 °F (+5 °C), a snowflake
The shift light indicator is displayed with green,
symbol appears in front of the temperature dis-
yellow and red ranges in the upper areas of the
play > A\.
tachometer. The shift light indicator will blink red
ZA\ WARNING when approaching the engine speed limit. Shift

to the next highest gear at the right time.
Do not assume the roads are free of ice based
on the outside temperature display. Be aware
Sport displays
that there may be ice on roads even when the
outside temperature is around 41 °F (+5 °C)
and that ice can increase the risk of accidents. Various sport displays, such as a G meter or tire
pressure indicator, may be available depending
Engine oil temperature on vehicle equipment.
indicator Opening sport displays in the instrument

cluster
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the engine
> Select in the instrument cluster: Vehicle func-
oil temperature 7 may be indicated by a bar in
the instrument cluster. tions tab > =| button > Sport displays.
> Turn the left thumbwheel on the multifunction
> Open the vehicle functions tab and switch to steering wheel until the desired sport display
the enhanced view > page 13. appears in the instrument cluster.
When engine oil temperatures are low, the dis- Opening sport displays in the MMI
4M8012721BF
play --- °F (--- °C) appears in the instrument clus-

> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
ter. The engine has reached its operating temper-
HICLE > RS monitor. >
ature when the engine oil temperature is be-
15
Instrument cluster
> Browse to the desired display if necessary. — Reset trip odometer > page 14
— Sport displays > page 15
G meter
—Lap times > page 129
The G meter displays the longitudinal and lateral — Lap statistics > page 130
acceleration. The current values are displayed in — Acceleration measurement > page 130
the instrument cluster while driving. The maxi-
mum values that are reached are stored and dis-
On-board computer
played when the vehicle is stationary. Only the
maximum values that are reached are displayed Resetting values to zero
in the MMI.
Requirement: the Consumption, Short-term
> To reset the stored values, press and hold the memory, or Long-term memory display must be
left thumbwheel on the multifunction steering selected.
wheel for one second.
> To reset the values in one of the memories to
Tire pressure zero, press and hold the left thumbwheel on
the multifunction steering wheel for one sec-
The tire pressure monitoring system displays the
ond, or
current tire pressures and temperatures. Also see
= page 276, Tire pressure monitoring system.
tions tab > I button > Reset mi.
Engine data
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can call
The engine data in the instrument cluster shows up the following displays in the on-board com-
which percentage of the maximum output or puter one at a time by turning the left thumb-
maximum torque is currently being used. wheel on the multifunction steering wheel:
Temperature — Time and date > page 233

— Average consumption > page 16
The temperature display in the MMI shows the
— Short-term memory overview
temperature of various fluids and vehicle compo-
nents, such as the engine oil or sport differential. — Long-term memory overview
— Energy consumers > page 17
Inclinometer — Driver assistance
The inclinometer in the MMI shows the sideways — Traffic sign recognition and traffic light infor-
and lengthwise angle of the vehicle in relation to mation
the horizon. It shows both the current values and
Short-term memory and long-term memory
the maximum values that were reached
=> page 108. The short-term memory collects driving informa-
tion from the time the ignition is switched on un-
til it is switched off. If you continue driving within
Vehicle functions
two hours after switching the ignition off, the
LO TaV TN] new values will be included when calculating the
current trip information.
The trip computer is displayed in the first tab of
the driver information system. Additional vehicle Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term
functions can be accessed depending on the vehi- memory is not erased automatically. You can se-
cle equipment. lect the time period for evaluating trip informa-
tion yourself.
> Press the =] button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel. Average consumption
— Trip computer > page 16 The current consumption can be shown using a
— Reduced display > page 14 bar graph. The average consumption stored in >
16
Instrument cluster
the short-term memory is also displayed. If the

bar is green, your vehicle is saving energy (for ex-
ample, using recuperation).
Energy consumers
The Energy consumers view lists other equip-
ment that is currently affecting fuel consump-
tion. The display shows up to three equipment
items. The equipment using the most power is
listed first. If more than three items using power
are switched on, the equipment that is currently
using the most power is displayed. A gauge also
shows the current total consumption of all other
equipment.
G) Tips
The date, time of day, and time and date for-
mat can be set in the Infotainment system
=> page 233.
4M8012721BF
17
Touch displays
Touch displ Accessing options

For some items, you can access additional op-
General touch display tions that are not directly visible.
operation
> Press and hold an item until the associated op-
tions are displayed.
Applies to: touch displays
The touch display is controlled through the

touchscreen. Operation is very similar to operat- Applies to: touch displays
ing a smartphone.
All touch displays in the vehicle can be operated

with the gestures described in the following in-
formation.
@) Tips
Certain gestures may not be available on all
touch displays or in every menu.
Fig. 8 Touch display: pressing and pulling
LT ecet Tale}
Moving an item
You can position some items at any location on
the screen.
> Press and hold an item, and then use your fin-
ger to pull it to the desired location.
Pinching fingers together and pulling ap.

Fig. 6 Touch display: pressing
Selecting a function or button

> Press the desired function or button.
S LCS ed SLL}
Fig. 9 Touch display: pinching fingers together and pulling

them apart
Zooming in and out on an item

> To increase the size of an item, touch it with
two fingers and pull your fingers apart.
> To decrease the size of an item, touch it with
two fingers and pull your fingers together.
Fig. 7 Touch display: pressing and holding
18
Touch displays
tating Dragging away from/toward the edge of

Applies to: touch displays the screen
Fig. 10 Touch display: rotating

Fig. 12 Touch display: dragging away from the edge of the
Rotating the view or perspective screen
> Rotate the item using two fingers. Opening hidden menus
The E=] symbol indicates that there is a hidden
gging menu.
> Use your finger to drag inward from the upper
or lower edge of the screen, or
> Press the =] button.
Closing hidden menus

> Press within the menu and drag it toward the
upper or lower edge of the screen.
nformation about menu paths

Fig. 11 Touch display: @ dragging with one finger, @
dragging with two fingers This guide shows you at a glance the paths for
opening a desired menu and its settings and
Scrolling or browsing through menus/lists functions.
> To scroll through menus and lists, swipe up-
Example of a path
ward or downward with one finger.
> To browse through menus and lists, swipe to > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
the right or left with one finger. SETTINGS > General > Date & time.
Tilting 3D displays Following the path

> Drag upward or downward with two fingers. > First, determine in which display the path
should be entered. In this example, it is the
MMI display.
>» Applies to MMI: To open the home screen,
press ().
> If the SETTINGS button is not displayed, use
your finger to swipe to the left or right until it
appears.
> Press the SETTINGS button.
4M8012721BF
19
Touch displays
> If the General button is not displayed, swipe Wiis mela mel mela
toward the left or right with one finger until it
appears. Switching the MMI on or off
>» Press the General button. > To switch the MMI off, press and hold the
> If the Date & time button is not displayed, On/Off knob > page 31, fig. 19 until the up-
swipe upward or downward with one finger un- per display and all Infotainment system func-
tilit appears. tions are switched off.
> Press the Date & time button. > To switch the MMI on, press the On/Off knob.
Restarting the MMI

@) Tips
Ifa menu or symbol is in parentheses in the >» Press and hold the On/Off knob for at least 10
path, for example, (General) or (423), then it is seconds.
an optional menu item that does not need to Switching displays on or off
be used in every system.
> To switch the upper display off, press [oJ on the
lower display.
> To switch the upper display on, touch the upper
You can adjust or turn off the MMI touch display display or press (Jon the lower display.
feedback. > To switch both displays on or off, press and hold
Co] on the lower display.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Display & Brightness > MMI.
Introduction
Possible settings:
You can display and operate Infotainment system
— Brightness and vehicle functions using both of the Multi Me-
— Touchscreen feedback dia Interface (MMI) touch displays.
Configuration wizard
Multi Media Interface
After starting for the first time, the configuration
Traffic safety information wizard helps you to set up the vehicle, for exam-
ple to set the desired system language and con-
Audi recommends performing certain Infotain-
nect a telephone.
ment system functions, such as entering a desti-
nation, only when the vehicle is stationary. Al- > Follow the instructions in the display.
ways be prepared to stop operating the Infotain- > Applies to: MMI: To access the configuration
ment system in the interest of your safety and wizard at a later time, select on the home
the safety of other road users. screen: HELP > Configuration wizard.
ZA\ WARNING Tool tips
Only use the Infotainment system when road, You can have tool tips displayed if necessary.
traffic, weather, and visibility conditions per- They introduce various MMI functions to you.
mit and always in a way that allows you to > Applies to: MMI: To open the tool tips, select on
maintain complete control over your vehicle. the home screen: HELP > Tool tips > Basic in-
formation or Expert information.
@ Tips > Follow the instructions in the display.
Certain functions are not available while driv-
ing.
20
Touch displays
Menus and symbols
RAX-0175|
m< bo
CeCe
% @ 8 OFh: 350m
ce
| 2
ee ice
Co) CoN ens PINTS}

AS 4
\\
any CW Pa LS OauNCS
Ce eC cc)
\
SD
Turn on climate control
Fig. 13 MMI: upper/lower display
Label Description
Displays selected information tiles and provides quick access to
Overview screen
certain functions > page 22
© | ©
®|@|
Return to the home screen or the overview page, open menus

Quick access bar
quickly > page 22
Display area Select a menu, apply settings, display content > page 22
Favorites Use or manage favorites > page 22
Displays existing notifications © > page 23, status display @)
Status bar
=> page 23, time
Function bar Activate functions or access attached content > page 24
Shortcuts Use shortcuts > page 24
Climate control settings Adjust the climate control system settings > page 90
Description of common symbols

You can operate the default functions using the Search for content
symbols that follow. The symbols may be found Open explanations for a menu
in any menu, depending on the context.
Open settings for the selected
Symbol Description menu
4M8012721BF
Go back one level Open the submenu

Close the menu Adjust the settings
21
Touch displays
Symbol Description > To move a button to the quick access bar, pull it
Set as favorite
from the display area to the quick access bar.
> To adjust the placement of the buttons in the
LJ Switch functions on or off
quick access bar, pull them to the desired posi-
ony (a Switch functions on or off tion in the bar.
O/@ Switch functions on or off > Press Done to complete the configuration.
Open additional actions
Open additional information for G) Tips
the selected menu The position of © cannot be adjusted.
Overview screen Display area
The overview screen is the first menu page in the You can freely change the location of the buttons
MMI. Information about certain vehicle functions on the home screen display area.
such as media, time, and phone is displayed in
Configuring the display area
tiles. The available information tiles can be rear-
ranged on the overview screen or replaced with > Press and hold a button on the home screen
others. Depending on the system context, you display area.
may be able to operate certain functions directly, > To adjust the placement of the buttons, pull
such as muting the sound. them to the desired locations.
> Press Done to complete the configuration.
Switching between the overview screen and
the home screen Switching between menu pages
> Press () repeatedly until the desired view ap- Ifa menu contains multiple menu pages, Eee] is
pears. displayed in the display area. The white bar
shows the location of the current menu page.
Configuring the overview screen
> To switch between menu pages, swipe your fin-
> Press and hold an information tile on the over-
ger to the right or left.
view screen.
> To change the position of an information tile,
press and hold it and then slide it to the desired Favorites
position.
By creating favorites, you can have quick access
> To replace an information tile, press Z and se-
to various items, such as radio stations, frequent-
lect the desired information tile.
ly-used contacts, or vehicle settings. In the FA-
> Press Done to complete the configuration. VORITES menu, the stored favorites are sorted
by topic into information tiles.
Quick access
Adding a favorite
With quick access, you can return to the home
A YY button indicates if you can add a favorite,
screen and quickly switch between four menus
such as a selected radio station. Depending on
that can be individually configured.
the context, you may also be able to add items
Returning to the home screen or opening a without the YY button to the favorites, such as
menu quickly entries in a list.
> Press ( or one of the four buttons. > Press YY, or
> Press and hold an item ina list.
Configuring quick access
> Press Store as favorite. The selected item will
> Press and hold a button on the home screen be added as a favorite.
display area or in the quick access bar.
22
Touch displays
Using favorites Description

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: A user is selected. If a question mark ap-
FAVORITES. The stored favorites will be dis- pears in the symbol ;h, the guest user is ac-
©
played. tive.
> To access a stored favorite, press that favorite.
© |Q|
A Bluetooth device is connected.
Stored favorites can only be deleted or config- Bluetooth is switched on, but no Bluetooth
ured in the corresponding menu (such as RADIO). device is connected.
Audio playback was interrupted.
Arranging information tiles
©|©
The audio source is muted.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Privacy settings are enabled. The additional
FAVORITES.
symbol indicates which privacy settings are
> Press and hold the desired information tile.
©
currently activated > page 305.
> Pull the information tile into the desired posi-
tion. The Integrated Toll Module is switched on.
> Press Done to confirm the configuration. The numbers 1 - 3+ indicate how many pas-
©
sengers are selected in the MMI.
Notification center
Off O88 o8 of
[RAZ-1078
feo}
RAX-0013
O88 o8 af Re it
Cres
Cea)
O88 o8 of ef
oe
Pere
eo En
Fig. 14 Upper display: common symbols in the status bar

Fig. 15 Upper display: notification center
The symbols in the status bar show you informa-
tion at a glance, such as if a mobile device is con- Notifications can be displayed in the upper dis-
nected or if there is a data connection. The most play. After a specified time, they will be hidden
common symbols are listed in the table. and a corresponding symbol will appear in the
status bar ©) > page 21, fig. 13. In the notifica-
Description tion center, you can view these notifications @
There is a data connection. The bar indi- = fig. 15 and apply quick settings @.
@ | cates the signal strength of the data con-
nection. Data is being transmitted now. Using the notification center
There is a data connection. The bar indi- > To open the notification center, pull the status
@ | cates the signal strength of the data con- bar downward, or
nection. No data is being transmitted now. > Press the =] button on the status bar.
> To apply quick settings, press the respective
A mobile device is connected. The bar indi-
@ | cates the signal strength of the cell phone
symbol @).
> To obtain additional information about a notifi-
connection.
cation, press it.
There is no data connection.
> To delete a notification, pull it toward the right
®
An error occurred with the mobile device edge of the screen.

4M8012721BF
connection to the MMI. > If there are more than four notifications in the
notification center, the older notifications will >
23
Touch displays
be hidden. To display the older notifications, Symbol Description

drag your finger upward on the screen.
Press: switches the upper display
Setting which content is displayed on or off
Press and hold: switches both dis-
You can set whether some notifications should be
plays on or off
displayed.
> To set the displayed content, press &S, or

Shortcuts
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Notifications. By creating shortcuts, you have quick access to
> Select and confirm which notifications should various items, such as radio stations, frequently
be displayed. used contacts, or vehicle settings.
Possible quick settings Adding shortcuts
Symbol Description A+++ button in the upper display indicates, for ex-
ample, ifa selected radio station can be added to
Apply sound settings
the shortcuts. Depending on the context, you
Open menu settings
may also be able to add items from a list to the
Manage connected devices shortcuts.
Manage users
> Press +++ or press and hold an item ina list.
Set date and time > Press Save as a shortcut. The selected item will
= Set displayed content in the noti- be added to the shortcuts on the lower display
fication center and displayed as a tile. A favorite is also stored
=> page 22.
Using shortcuts
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can op- > Press the 0000 (8) > page 21, fig. 13 button in
erate various functions in the function bar. the function bar on the lower screen. The saved
shortcuts will be displayed or hidden.
Description
> To access the stored function, press the respec-
Switch Start/Stop system on or tive tile.
off
Moving or deleting shortcuts
Switch hill descent assist on or off
Opens the garage door opener > Press and hold a shortcut on the lower display.
function > To adjust the order of the shortcuts, drag a
shortcut to the desired location.
Press: shows settings for the
> To delete a shortcut, press ®. If the shortcut is
head-up display
deleted, the favorite will also be deleted.
Press and hold: switches the
head-up display on or off
24
Touch displays
acuta ole)
[RAZ-0711
[ee Gye esl
< >
les, CA, 90012
Pe)
les, Los Feliz, CA, 90027
Pt)
(eer Com es NET)
Peas
Fig. 16 Upper/lower display: text input
In the input fields of various menus, you can en- out having to move your finger over after writ-
ter letters, numbers and characters, for example ing a character. When you end the entry, the
to find an address in navigation. writing is interpreted by the system.
> Applies to: the on-screen keyboard: To enter
On the lower section of the screen, you can enter
text, press the buttons on the keyboard. De-
the text with handwriting or using the on-screen
pending on the usage context, you may also be
keyboard. The current text input is displayed on
able to swipe over the letters )).
the upper section of the screen @). Depending on
> Applies to: the on-screen keyboard with an in-
the context, word suggestions may be given
put language that uses accented characters: To
based on the characters that have been entered
enter accented characters (such as 4, ¢, fi, 6),
@ and a results list may be shown @).
press and hold a character that has accented
Opening text input versions available and select the desired ac-
cented character.
> Tap inside the input field @.
> Applies to: handwriting input: To enter a space,
Switching input languages drag a line from left to right in the input sec-
tion ©.
Requirement: multiple input languages must be
> To select a location in the text input, press on
defined in the MMI > page 26.
the desired location in the input field. You can
> To switch between the defined input languages, control the location more accurately using the
press the button @). slider in the display ©).
> To delete individual characters, press <I @), or
Switching the input methods
> Applies to: handwriting input: Drag a line from
> To switch between handwriting input or the on- right to left in the input section ©.
screen keyboard, press the button (7). > To delete multiple characters, press and hold
Entering text
> To delete all characters at a specific location,
> Applies to handwriting input: To enter text, press and hold <]@) and drag up to the desired
simply write in the input area using one finger location ). When released, the highlighted
©. You can write the separate characters next characters are deleted.
to each other or one on top of the other with-
4M8012721BF
D In certain countries.
25
Touch displays
Accepting suggested words or selecting

entries from the results list
> To accept a suggested word (2) or select an en-
try from the results list @), press on it.
> To display more content in the results list, drag
your finger upward or downward on the screen.
Setting the input language or keyboard

layout
SETTINGS > Language & keyboard > Keyboard.
> To define additional input languages, press the
© button.
> To change the keyboard layout for an input lan-
guage, press >. For example, you can select be-
tween QWERTZ and QWERTY.
26
Head-up display
Head-up display — For information on cleaning, see > table In-

terior cleaning on page 282.
Description
Applies to: vehicles with head-up display
The head-up display projects certain warnings or

selected information from the assist systems on
the windshield. The display appears within the
driver's field of vision.
Switching on and off

The Y button is located in the function bar on
the lower display > page 21.
> To switch the head-up display on or off, press

and hold the Y button.
Settings in the Infotainment system
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Head-up
display, or
> Press the Y button.
Possible settings:
— Display rotation
— Brightness
— Display height: you can adjust the height of the
display. Sit in the correct seating position
= page 62 and adjust the head-up display.
— Display contents: you can set which informa-
tion should be displayed. The display of certain
information and some of the red indicator
lights cannot be hidden.
@) Note
To reduce the risk of scratches on the glass
covering the head-up display, do not place any
objects in the projection opening.
@ Tips
— Sunglasses with polarization filters and un-
favorable lighting conditions can impair visi-
bility of the display.
— An optimal display depends on the seat po-
sition and the height adjustment of the
head-up display.
4M8012721BF
— A special windshield is needed for the head-

up display function.
27
Voice recognition system
Voice recognition system Description

General information Operating the voice recognition system
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system
(2) ieiS]
You can operate many functions in the vehicle STEN
>|
easily using voice commands. Daa) re
|
Neer) a
Using the voice recognition system optimally Connect 5
Pre)
oy c a
> Speak clearly and distinctly at a normal volume. ey
Cesc >
Speak louder when driving faster. coy
> Emphasize the words in the commands evenly
and do not leave long pauses. Fig. 17 Upper display: voice recognition system
> Close the doors, the windows, and the sunroof*

to reduce background noise. Make sure that Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be
passengers are not speaking when you are giv- switched on. A system language supported by
ing a voice command. the voice recognition system must be set. There
> Do not direct the vents toward the hands-free must be no phone calls in progress and the park-
microphone, which is in the roof headliner near ing aid must not be active.
the front interior lights. Operating by button «¢
> Only the driver should speak to the system, be-
cause the handsfree microphone is aimed to- > Briefly press the «€ button on the multifunction
ward this seating position. steering wheel, or depending on the context,
press we in the upper display.
ZA\ WARNING > Say the desired command after the signal tone.
> To switch the voice recognition system off,
— Direct your full attention to driving. As the press and hold the «€ button on the multifunc-
driver, you have complete responsibility for tion steering wheel, or say or press Cancel (@)
safety in traffic. Only use the functions in > fig. 17.
such a way that you always maintain com-
plete control over your vehicle in all traffic Operating with voice commands
situations. > Applies to: MMI: To operate the voice recogni-
— Do not use the voice recognition system in tion system using voice commands, select on
emergencies because your voice may change the home screen: SETTINGS > General >
in stressful situations. The system may take (Speech dialog system) > Activate the speech
longer to dial the number or may not be dialog system with "Hey Audi".
able to dial it at all. Dial the emergency > Say the activation phrase Hey Audi together
number manually. with the desired command.
> To switch the voice recognition system off, say
G) Tips Cancel or press and hold the «£ button on the
There are no voice guidance* prompts when a multifunction steering wheel, or press @)
dialog is active. > fig. 17.
Commands and assistance

In the voice recognition system menu, possible
commands or help settings are displayed for the
current dialog @).
> To receive additional help for the current dia-
log, say or press Help (2).
28
> To pause voice recognition, say or press Pause screen: SETTINGS > General > (Speech dialog
@). To reactivate voice recognition, press () system) > Activate the speech dialog system
again or briefly press the «€ button on the mul- with "Hey Audi".
tifunction steering wheel. >» Say the activation phrase “Alexa” together with
the desired command.
Additional functions
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system () Note
Command during voice output Read the information about Audi connect, and
be sure to note the connectivity costs section
If the function is switched on, you can simply say =>© in General information on page 192.
a new command during a prompt.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: @ Tips

SETTINGS > General > Speech dialog system > Audi provides access to services from third
Allow commands during voice output. party providers. Permanent availability cannot
be guaranteed, because that depends on the
Online recognizer
third party provider.
Applies to: vehicles with online recognizer
You can activate the online recognizer for addi-

External voice operation
tional functions and to improve the results of
Applies to: vehicles with external speech dialog system
voice recognition. A supported menu language
must be selected. When there is an active Inter- You can access and control the voice operation on
net connection, the spoken command is evaluat- a connected mobile device through your vehicle.
ed in the vehicle and online.
Switching external voice operation on or off
> When you switch on the voice recognition sys-
Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be
tem for the first time, a menu for the online
switched on. A cell phone must be connected to
recognizer will open, or
the MMI with the Handsfree profile > page 181.
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
The mobile device being connected must have
SETTINGS > General > Speech dialog system >
voice control that can be controlled externally.
Consent to online speech recognizer.
There must be no phone calls in progress and the
> Read the licensing agreements and accept
parking aid must not be active.
them.
> To switch on the external voice operation, press
Amazon Alexa and hold the «€ button longer on the multifunc-
Applies to: vehicles with Amazon Alexa Integration
tion steering wheel.
You can activate Amazon Alexa to access certain > To switch off the external voice operation, press
functions. A reduced number of commands for and hold the «€ button longer on the multifunc-
Amazon Alexa are available during this. tion steering wheel or press Cancel.
Requirement: you must be logged in to your Using external voice operation
myAudi account in the vehicle. The online recog-
nizer must be activated. A system language that » Say the desired command after the signal tone.
> To reactivate voice recognition when it is
is supported by both the voice recognition system
paused, press the w£ button briefly on the mul-
and Amazon Alexa must be selected.
tifunction steering wheel or press Resume.
USER > Connect to Amazon Alexa. @) Tips
4M8012721BF
> Follow the instructions in the display.

Audi simply provides access to control your
>» Applies to: MMI: To operate Amazon Alexa us-
cell phone with voice operation and does not >
ing voice commands, select on the home
29
take any responsibility for the contents and

commands within the external voice control.
30
Global functions
Global functions Quick access steering wheel button

Depending on vehicle equipment, the button @)
Additional function
may provide quick access to various functions.
buttons
> Applies to: RS models far button, see
=> page 111.
You can program the >K button with various func-

tions.
> To bring up the function that is currently set,
press the >K button.
> To perform the function that is currently set,
press and hold the > button, or:
HICLE > Settings & Service > Steering wheel
button assignment.
> Select and confirm the desired function.
Switching the voice recognition system on or

off
w& button @), see > page 28.
Using the telephone functions
button @, see > page 185.
Fig. 19 MMI On/Off knob with joystick function ZA WARNING

Adjust the volume of the audio system so that
Adjusting the volume signals from outside the vehicle, such as po-
You can adjust the volume of an audio source or a lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all
system message (for example, from the voice times.
recognition system) when the sound is playing.
> To increase or decrease the volume, turn the

right thumbwheel @) © fig. 18 upward or
downward, or turn the On/Off knob @) 9 fig. 19
to the right or left.
> To mute, push the right thumbwheel or the
On/Off knob.
Selecting the previous/next track or station

> Press the <1 / DPI button @ or briefly press
the On/Off knob to the left/right.
Fast forward/rewind
> Press and hold the ld<1/ DD] button @, or
press the On/Off knob to the left or right until
the desired playback position is reached.
4M8012721BF
31
Personalization
Personalization G) Tips
Users — Certain Infotainment and vehicle settings
(such as mirrors, last radio stations) may be
(eT e e eeu) stored, depending on vehicle equipment.
Applies to: vehicles with personalized user settings
You can find additional information in the
Depending on vehicle equipment and your coun- MMI. Select on the home screen: SETTINGS
try, your vehicle may be able to manage various > General > Legal notes > About Audi con-
users in the MMI. Each user will be assigned the nect.
settings that they last used. — Applies to: myAudi users: The stored set-
tings can only be transferred to vehicles
Before you begin driving, you can select a user in
that are capable of receiving the transmit-
the MMI and load personalized Infotainment and
ted information. There may be restrictions
vehicle settings.
that prevent this, particularly in other coun-
Possible users in the MMI: tries.
— myAudi user: as a myAudi user, you can use — Applies to: myAudi users: The settings can
Audi connect services that require a myAudi ac- only be transferred and loaded when there
count. Certain settings are transferred online to is coverage from the applicable mobile
your myAudi account. If you log into your phone service provider.
myAudi account in another vehicle, you can — Applies to: myAudi users with PIN protec-
load your settings in the other vehicle. tion switched on: If the MMI displays a de-
— Local user: as a local user, you can only store tected user but you simply start driving or
settings in the current vehicle. Your settings wait without entering the 4-digit PIN, then
cannot be transferred to other vehicles. Audi the guest user will be selected. Some set-
connect services that can only be used with a tings for the detected myAudi user will be
myAudi account will not be available. transferred to the guest user.
— Guest: as a guest, you can store settings in the
vehicle without changing the settings for other OTe le le (a4
users. Audi recommends only using the guest Applies to: vehicles with user management
user temporarily, because settings can be over-

Opening user management
written by other users.
Applies to: MMI
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following > Press USER on the home screen.
options may be used to detect the active user so
that the user settings can be loaded automatical- Selecting a user
Applies to: MMI
ly before you start driving.
— Vehicle key > Press on the desired user.
> Enter the 4-digit myAudi PIN, if necessary.
Requirement: the driver's door has been opened.
Adding myAudi users
The detected user must be shown in the MMI.
Applies to MMI and Audi connect
Confirm the user shown, select another user
= page 32, or add another user > page 32. Requirement: you must have successfully regis-
tered at my.audi.com and have created a 4-digit
ZA\ WARNING myAudi PIN.
It may not be possible to load Infotainment > Press Add user.
and vehicle settings, or they may only load > Press Log in now to log in with your myAudi
partially. The driver is always responsible for credentials.
the Infotainment and vehicle settings in order > Follow the system instructions.
to reduce the risk of an accident.
32
Personalization
To transfer existing destinations from the MMI to

your myAudi account one time, confirm the sys- Applies to: vehicles with key user management
tem prompts with Yes.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the vehicle
You can set a profile pictured for your myAudi owner must be set as the key user for certain
user at my.audi.com. Audi connect vehicle control services and possibly
for functions on demand.
Adding a local user
Applies to: MMI The key user automatically has remote access au-
> Press Add user. thorization that allows control of certain func-
> Press Initiate setup. tions such as Audi connect vehicle control serv-
> Press Local user. ices through the myAudi app.
> Follow the system instructions.
Setting the key user
Editing users Requirement: a key user must not be set yet.
Applies to: MMI
> To set a key user for the vehicle, you will need a
Requirement: the user must be selected and that
myAudi account. Register at my.audi.com.
user’s settings must be loaded. > Add your vehicle at my.audi.com and then veri-
> Press on the user. fy your myAudi account using the verification
process that is provided.
Depending on the user type, available options
may include the following.
USER > © > Set key user.
PIN protection: when this function is switched > Follow the system instructions and enter the
on, the 4-digit myAudi PIN must be entered be- 10-digit vehicle code > page 39. The key user
fore any settings for this user can be loaded. is set. You have the rights to use the Audi con-
nect vehicle control services > page 194 that
Remove the user from the vehicle: the user will
depend on vehicle equipment as well as the
only be deleted in the vehicle from the list in the
ability to manage other vehicle functions and
MMI.
any other users.
Change name: you can change the name of the
local user. Managing additional users
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
Removing users
grant authorization for additional users to use
Applies to: MMI
Audi connect vehicle control services at my.audi.
> Select on the home screen: Users > Z > one or com.
more entries > Delete. The user will only be de-
leted from the list in the MMI. The authoriza- Removing the key user
tions for the user in the vehicle (such as key If you remove the key user, all other users that
user) will not be removed. were stored by the key user at my.audi.com and
their authorizations will be deleted. It will no
@ Tips longer be possible to use the Audi connect vehi-
— The guest user cannot be renamed. cle control services, depending on the vehicle
— When changing users, the new user settings equipment.
are loaded in the vehicle. Requirement: a key user must be set.
— Ifa user has the & symbol, PIN protection is
active. To switch off PIN protection, you can > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
USER > ©} > Remove key user.
4M8012721BF
edit the user.

— Depending on the country, you may be able
to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
33
Personalization
@ Tips
— You do not need to log into the vehicle with
a myAudi user in order to use Audi connect
vehicle control services, which depend on
the vehicle equipment.
— If you sell your vehicle, reset all settings to
the factory default settings.
— Store the vehicle code in a secure place. It
may be necessary to re-enter the vehicle
code.
— When entering the vehicle code, please note
that the code is case-sensitive.
— If you do not have the 10-digit vehicle code,
contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility.
34
Opening and closing
Opening and closing Power closing*

When closing a door or the luggage compart-
Central locking ment lid, you only have to Let it fall lightly into
General information the latch. It then closes automatically > A.
Automatic locking
Z\ WARNING
If you unlock the vehicle but then do not open
— If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition
any of the doors, the luggage compartment, or
off and take the key with you. This applies
the hood within a short period time, the vehicle
particularly when children remain in the ve-
locks again automatically. This feature prevents
hicle. Otherwise, children could start the ve-
the vehicle from being accidentally left unlocked
hicle or operate electrical equipment (such
for a long period of time.
as power windows), which increases the risk
of an accident. Automatic locking (Auto Lock)
— Applies to vehicles with anti-theft alarm sys-
The Auto Lock function locks all doors and the
tem: When the vehicle is locked from the
luggage compartment lid once the speed has ex-
outside, no one - especially children - should
ceeded approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). The ve-
remain in the vehicle, because the windows
hicle will unlock again if the unlock function in
can no longer open from the inside
the central locking switch is pressed, the “P” gear
=> page 38, Anti-theft alarm system.
is engaged, or the ignition is switched off.
Locked doors make it more difficult for
emergency workers to enter the vehicle, You can open the doors individually from the in-
which puts lives at risk. side by pulling the door handle one time. To open
the rear doors individually, you must pull the
door handle twice.
In the event ofa crash with airbag deployment,

All doors and the luggage compartment lid can
the doors will also automatically unlock to allow
be centrally unlocked and locked at once. You can
access to the vehicle.
select in the MMI if the entire vehicle or only the
driver's door should unlock when unlocking the Unintentionally locking yourself out
vehicle > page 36. The turn signals flash twice
Only lock your vehicle when all of the doors and
when you unlock the vehicle and flash once when the luggage compartment lid are closed and
you lock the vehicle. If they do not flash when
there is no key in the vehicle. This reduces the
locking, check if all doors and lids are closed.
risk of locking yourself out accidentally.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may
The following features help to reduce the risk of
have different options for centrally unlocking and locking your vehicle key in the vehicle:
locking your vehicle.
— If the driver's door is open, the vehicle cannot
— Vehicle key > page 40
be locked by pressing the & button on the re-
— Sensors in the door handles > page 40 mote control key or by touching the locking
— Lock cylinder in the driver's door > page 38 sensor* on a door.
— Interior central locking switch > page 37 — If the vehicle key that was used most recently is
Vehicle key inside the luggage compartment, the luggage
compartment lid will automatically open again
The term “vehicle key” refers to the remote con- after it closes > ©.
trol key or convenience key*. The convenience — If the vehicle key that was last used is detected
4M8012721BF
key* is a remote control key with special func- inside the vehicle, then the vehicle cannot be
tions > page 40 and > page 95. locked from the outside > ©.
35
Opening and closing
ZA\ WARNING G) Tips

Observe the safety precautions > page 35. — Do not leave valuables unattended in the ve-
hicle. A locked vehicle is not a safe!
ZA\ WARNING —The LED in the driver's door rail blinks when
Applies to: vehicles with power closing you lock the vehicle. If the LED turns on for
—To reduce the risk of injury, make sure that approximately 30 seconds after locking,
the area where the door is closing is clear there is a malfunction in the central locking
during the closing process. system. Have the problem corrected by an
— The closing process can be stopped at any authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
time by pulling on the outer or inner door Service Facility.
handle.
Setting the central locking system
@) Note
You can adjust the central locking system to your
The following applies when locking the vehi- preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle
cles equipment.
— If the vehicle key that was last used is de-
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
tected inside the passenger compartment,
then the vehicle cannot be locked from the HICLE > Settings & Service > Central locking.
outside using the sensor. Take the vehicle Door unlocking
key with you and lock the vehicle again. Oth-
erwise, the vehicle will not be protected
— Ifyou select All, all doors and the luggage
compartment lid will be unlocked when unlock-
against unauthorized access.
ing the vehicle.
— If you try to lock the vehicle using the but-
ton on the vehicle key while the front pas- — If you select Driver's door, only the driver's
senger's or rear door is open, and you acci- door will be unlocked. To unlock all doors and
dentally place the vehicle key inside the pas- the luggage compartment lid, press the & but-
ton on the vehicle key twice. In vehicles with a
senger compartment and close the door,
the vehicle will lock at first. But if the key- convenience key*, only the driver's door will un-
less system detects a vehicle key inside the lock when you pull the driver's door handle. If
vehicle after it locks, then the vehicle will you pull another door handle, the entire vehicle
unlock again. The turn signals will flash sev- will be unlocked.
eral times to indicate this. If you do not The entire vehicle will always be locked f you
open the vehicle to remove the vehicle key press the @ button.
within a brief period, then the vehicle will
lock automatically. This prevents the vehicle Long press to open windows
from being left unlocked for long periods of You can select if all windows and the panoramic
time. The vehicle key will then be locked in- glass roof* should open using the vehicle key
side the vehicle. = page 47, Convenience opening and closing. If
— If the luggage compartment lid closes and you press and hold the ff button on the vehicle
the system detects that the last vehicle key key, all of the windows and the panoramic glass
that was used is inside the luggage com- roof* will close.
partment, then the luggage compartment
lid will open again. The turn signals will Disable rear lid handle
flash several times to indicate this. The You can select if the luggage compartment lid
doors will lock. Always take the vehicle key can open with the handle. If you activate this
with you, or unauthorized persons may be function, the luggage compartment lid can only
able to enter the vehicle. be opened with the 4s button the vehicle key or >
36
Opening and closing
on the driver's door. In vehicles with a conven- open the rear doors individually, you must pull
ience key*, you can still open the luggage com- the door handle twice.
partment lid using the handle if an authorized — In the event of a crash with airbag deployment,
convenience key is detected > page 42. the doors unlock automatically to allow access
to the vehicle.
Fold mirrors
You can select if the exterior mirrors automatical- ZA\ WARNING
ly fold in when locking. — Observe the safety precautions > page 35.
Tone when locking!) — The central locking button works when the
ignition is switched off.
You can select if an audio signal sounds when — The central locking switch is inoperative
locking the vehicle. when the vehicle is locked from the outside.
Open with convenience key
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key Messages
You can deactivate the feature for unlocking us-
3} Driver's door: malfunction! Shift to P before
ing the sensor. The function for locking via the
leaving vehicle. See owner's manual
sensor will still be enabled > page 40.
There is a malfunction in the driver's door. Secure
ete mole <ul Rudi the vehicle before exiting by selecting the “P” se-
lector lever position. Drive immediately to an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
2B Central locking: malfunction! See owner's

manual
There is a central locking malfunction. If the

doors cannot lock, you can emergency lock the
doors > page 38. Drive to an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immedi-
Fig. 20 Driver's door: central locking switch ately to have the malfunction corrected.
Door lock: Opening while driving is only pos-

> To lock or unlock the vehicle, press the & or B
sible with the emergency release. See owner's
button > /\.
manual
When locking the vehicle with the central locking It is not possible to power unlock the doors at
switch, the following applies: speeds above approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). If
— The doors and the luggage compartment lid you must open doors at higher speeds in cases of
cannot be opened from the outside for security emergency, you can manually unlock the door by
reasons, for example, to reduce the risk of un- forcefully pulling the door handle beyond its no-
authorized entry while stopped at a light. ticeable resistance two times. Then press the
— The LED in the central locking switch turns on door handle back into its original position, if nec-
when all doors are closed and locked. essary.
— You can open the doors individually from the in-
side by pulling the door handle one time. To
4M8012721BF
)_ This function is not available in all countries.
37
Opening and closing
Mechanically unlocking and locking the > Insert the mechanical key into the slot on the
doors inside and turn it all the way to the left (when
locking the right door), or to the right (when
If the central locking fails, you must unlock or
locking the left door).
lock the doors separately.
> Install the cap in the opening and close the
door.
[RAz-0026|
Once the doors are closed, it is no longer possible
to open them from the outside. The front doors
can be opened from the inside by pulling the
door handle one time. The rear doors can be un-
locked from the inside by pulling the door handle
one time and then opened by pulling the door
handle again. If the vehicle is without power, the
doors can be unlocked from the inside by first
pulling the door handle beyond its noticeable re-
5
a
S
sistance. The doors can then can be opened by
3
<x pulling the handle again. If the child safety lock
go
a in one of the rear doors is activated, you must
first pull the door handle from the inside. Then
you can open the door from the outside.
ZA WARNING
Observe the safety precautions > page 35.
Fig. 22 Door: mechanically locking

A age eta)
Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft alarm system
Unlocking or locking the driver's door with
the mechanical key If the anti-theft alarm system detects a vehicle
> Remove the mechanical key > page 39. break-in, audio and visual warning signals are
> Insert the mechanical key into the slot under triggered. The anti-theft alarm system is switch-
the door handle and pry the cap off > fig. 21. ed on or off when locking or unlocking your vehi-
> To unlock the driver's door, turn the mechanical cle. If the alarm is triggered, it will shut off auto-
key to the unlock position in the direction of ar- matically after a certain amount of time.
row (2) > fig. 21.
Switching the alarm off manually
> Pull firmly on the door handle to open the driv-
er's door. The door handle swings out slightly > To switch the alarm off, press the G button on
farther than normal. the vehicle key or switch the ignition on.
> To lock the driver's door, select the "P" position Depending on the vehicle equipment, the anti-
and turn the key once to the close position theft alarm system may have the following fea-
@°A. tures:
Locking the front passenger's door and rear Break-in security feature
doors using the mechanical key
The alarm will sound if there is a break-in at the
The mechanical lock is located on the edge of the
doors, hood, and/or luggage compartment lid. >
doors. It is only visible when the door is open.
> Remove the mechanical key > page 39.

> Remove the cap from the opening > fig. 22.
38
Opening and closing
Interior/towing protection monitor

The alarm will be triggered if there are move-
ments detected in the vehicle interior (for exam-
ple, by animals) or if there is a change in the vehi-
cle angle (for example, when the vehicle is being
.
towed).
:
=
You can prevent the alarm from being triggered
by deactivating the interior/towing protection
eS oe
monitor. D
Deactivating the interior/towing protection

monitor
There are the following options for deactivating Fig. 23 Your vehicle key set
the interior/towing protection monitor:
@ Vehicle key
> Press the @ button on the vehicle key a second
You can unlock and lock your vehicle with the ve-
time within two seconds. Or
hicle key.
» Applies to: vehicles with convenience key:
Touch the sensor on the door handle a second @ Mechanical key and release button for
time within two seconds. Or mechanical key
> Turn the mechanical key in the door lock to the
A mechanical key is integrated in the vehicle key.
close position a second time within two sec-
To remove it, press the release button and re-
onds.
move the mechanical key.
> Applies to: vehicles with MMI: Select on the
home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Using the mechanical key, you can:
Interior monitoring.
— Lock or unlock the glove compartment.
If you lock the vehicle, then the interior/towing — Manually unlock and lock the doors > page 38.
protection monitor will stay off until the next — Unlock the luggage compartment lid using the
time the vehicle is unlocked. emergency release > page 45.
@ Key fob with vehicle code

ZA\ WARNING Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
No one, especially children, should stay in the
Open the key tag and scratch to reveal the vehicle
vehicle when it is locked from the outside, be-
code. You can unlock the Audi connect vehicle
cause the windows can no longer be opened
control services* for your vehicle with this vehicle
from the inside. Locked doors make it more
code. For additional information, see
difficult for emergency workers to enter the
= page 194. If a key fob is lost, contact an au-
vehicle, which puts lives at risk.
Facility.
@) Tips
The interior/towing protection monitor only @ PANIC button
functions correctly when the windows and the In an emergency, you can press the PANIC button
panorama glass roof* are closed. to trigger the alarm for the anti-theft alarm sys-
tem. The vehicle horn and emergency flashers
will turn on if you trigger the alarm.
4M8012721BF
—To trigger the alarm, press the [PANIC] but-

ton @ © fig. 23.
39
Opening and closing
—To turn the alarm off, press the PANIC button — Applies to MMI: You can view the number of
again. keys programmed to the vehicle by selecting
on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings &
Lost key/replacing a key
Service > Vehicle information.
If a vehicle key is lost, contact an authorized Audi — The system complies with United States FCC
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have regulations and ISED regulations
this vehicle key deactivated. It is important to => page 311.
bring all keys with you.
If a key is lost, you should report it to your insur- Unlocking and locking the vehicle
ance company.
[RAZ-0025]
Electronic immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized use of
the vehicle.
In some cases, it may not be possible to start the

my
vehicle if there is a vehicle key from a different
vehicle manufacturer on the key chain.
Data in the vehicle key

Fig. 24 Door handle: sensor for locking
When driving, service and maintenance-relevant
data is continuously stored in your vehicle key. An Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service have various options for unlocking and locking
Facility can read out this data and tell you about your vehicle. The settings in the MMI specify
the work your vehicle needs. which doors will unlock > page 36.
ZA WARNING Unlocking or locking using the vehicle key

buttons
> To unlock the vehicle, press the & button
@) Note => page 39, fig. 23.

> To lock the vehicle, press the ff button once.
Protect the key against high temperatures
and direct sunlight. Unlocking or locking using the sensors
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
@ For the sake of the environment > To unlock a door or the luggage compartment
XE Do not dispose of vehicle keys in household lid, grasp the door handle or luggage compart-
trash. They contain materials that can be re- ment lid handle.
cycled. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or > To lock the vehicle, close the door and touch
authorized Audi Service Facility for more in- the sensor on the door handle once > fig. 24.
formation. Do not grasp the door handle while locking the
vehicle, or else the vehicle will not lock. The
@) Tips door cannot be opened for a brief period direct-
— The vehicle key function can be temporarily ly after locking it. This way you have the oppor-
disrupted by interference from transmitters tunity to check if the doors locked correctly. >
near the vehicle working in the same fre-
quency range (such as a mobile device or ra-
dio equipment). Always check if your vehicle
is locked.
40
Opening and closing
Unlocking and locking with the Audi connect BS Tey ae-e am ala BC
vehicle control service)’
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
Requirement: Audi connect vehicle control serv-

ices must be set up > page 194, Audi connect ve-
hicle control services. The vehicle must be park-
ing and the ignition must be switched off.
ZA WARNING
@) Tips Fig. 25 Vehicle key: removing the battery holder
— Only use the vehicle key when you can see LED in the vehicle key
the vehicle. The LED (@) indicates the vehicle key function.
— The vehicle can only be locked when the "P”
selector lever position is engaged. > If you press a button briefly, the LED blinks
— Do not use the vehicle key to lock and un- once.
lock when you are inside the vehicle. Other- > If you press and hold a button (convenience
wise, you could trigger the anti-theft opening/closing), the LED blinks several times.
alarm*. If this happens, press the @ unlock >» If the LED does not blink, the vehicle key bat-
button. tery is drained. Replace the battery in the vehi-
cle key.
@) Tips Replacing the vehicle key battery
> Remove the mechanical key > page 39 and in-
— When unlocking or locking the vehicle, the
sert it at an angle into the opening > fig. 25.
convenience key cannot be more than ap-
> Push the mechanical key in the opening in the
proximately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the
direction of the arrow to operate the release
door handle or luggage compartment.
button on the inside @). To reduce the risk of
— Unlocking with the convenience key (keyless
damage, do not try to pry off the cover.
access) can be deactivated in the MMI sys-
> Remove the cover from the battery tray.
tem > page 36.
> Insert the new battery with the “+” symbol fac-
—To prevent the vehicle battery from dis-
ing up.
charging, the energy management gradual- > Close the battery tray with the cover.
ly switches off convenience functions that
> Insert the mechanical key.
are not needed. You then may no longer be
able to unlock your vehicle with the sensors.
Z\ WARNING
If batteries or coin cell batteries are swal-
lowed or enter the body in any other way, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries within a
short period of time. There is a risk of chemi-
cal burns.
— Keep vehicle keys and key fobs with batter-
ies out of the reach of children. >
4M8012721BF
41
Opening and closing
— Keep new or used batteries away from chil- — After closing the luggage compartment lid,
dren. make sure that it is latched. The luggage
— If the battery compartment on a vehicle key compartment lid could open suddenly while
does not close securely, stop using the key driving, which would increase the risk of an
and keep it away from children. accident.
— Seek medical attention immediately if you — Never drive with the luggage compartment
suspect that a battery was swallowed or has lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases
entered the body in any other way. from the surrounding area can enter the ve-
hicle interior and increase the risk of asphyx-
@ For the sake of the environment iation.
Discharged batteries must be disposed of us- — If there is a luggage rack (such as a bicycle
ing methods that will not harm the environ- rack) on the luggage compartment lid, the
ment. Do not dispose of them in household luggage compartment lid may not open
trash. completely under certain circumstances or it
could close by itself if open due to the extra
@ Tips weight. Therefore, the open luggage com-
partment lid must be given additional sup-
Replacement batteries for the vehicle key
port or the cargo must first be removed
must meet the same specifications as the
from the luggage rack.
original battery.
— Applies to vehicles with power-operated or
sensor-controlled luggage compartment lid:
Luggage compartment Pay careful attention when closing the lug-
lid gage compartment lid. Otherwise, you could
cause serious injury to yourself or others de-
General information
spite the pinch protection.
ZA\ WARNING @) Note

— Applies to vehicles with anti-theft alarm sys-
The luggage compartment lid can bump into
tem: When the vehicle is locked from the
objects such as the garage ceiling when open-
outside, no one - especially children - should
ing and become damaged.
remain in the vehicle, because the windows
can no longer open from the inside G) Tips
= page 38. Locked doors make it more diffi-
cult for emergency workers to enter the ve- — When the vehicle is locked, the luggage
hicle, which puts lives at risk.
compartment lid can be unlocked separately
by pressing the “s button twice on the vehi-
— Always close and lock the luggage compart-
cle key. The luggage compartment lid locks
ment lid and the doors when the vehicle is
automatically when it is closed again.
not in use. Otherwise someone such as a
child could enter the vehicle through the — The ability to open the luggage compart-
luggage compartment and become locked ment lid using the handle can be deactivat-
inside it. To reduce the risk of injury, do not ed or activated in the MMI > page 36.
allow children to play in or around the vehi-
cle.
— To reduce the risk of injuries by pinching,
make sure that no one is in the operating
area of the luggage compartment lid, in-
cluding the hinge areas and the upper and
lower edge of the luggage compartment lid.
42
Opening and closing
Opening and closing the luggage Automatic luggage compartment lid

compartment lid Applies to: vehicles with automatic luggage compartment lid
RAZ-0083
Fig. 26 Driver's door: opening the luggage compartment Fig. 27 Luggage compartment lid: @ closing button*, @)
lid lock button* (vehicles with convenience key*)
Opening the luggage compartment lid The luggage compartment lid can be opened and
closed automatically > A\ in General informa-
> Applies to: vehicles without convenience key:
tion on page 42.
Unlock the vehicle or the luggage compartment
lid using the @/ As button on the vehicle key Opening the luggage compartment lid
and press the handle in the luggage compart-
> When the ignition is switched off, press the 4s
ment lid. Or
button on the vehicle key twice > page 39,
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press
fig. 23. Or
the handle in the luggage compartment lid.
> Engage the “P” selector lever position and pull
The vehicle key cannot be more than approxi-
the <3 button* in the driver's door. Or
mately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage
compartment. Or
the handle in the luggage compartment lid.
> When the ignition is switched off, press and
The vehicle key cannot be more than approxi-
hold the 4s button on the vehicle key twice. Or
mately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage
> Engage the “P” selector lever position and pull
compartment.
the << button in the driver's door.
Closing the luggage compartment lid
Closing the luggage compartment lid
> Press the < button in the luggage compart-
> See > page 43, Automatic luggage compart-
ment lid. Or
ment lid.
> Press the handle in the luggage compartment
ZX WARNING lid. Or
> Press the luggage compartment lid downward
Observe the safety precautions > page 42. slightly. Or
> When the ignition is switched on, pull the <>
switch in the driver's door > page 43, fig. 26
until the luggage compartment lid is closed. Or
and hold the 4s button on the vehicle key while
the ignition is switched off until the luggage
compartment lid closes. Make sure there is
enough distance (maximum of approximately 9
feet (3 m)) between you and the luggage com-
4M8012721BF
partment lid. Or
43
Opening and closing
> Press the <3 button in the luggage compart-

@ Tips
ment lid. Or
» Applies to vehicles with convenience key: When The luggage compartment lid can be operat-
the ignition is switched off, press the s/f} ed manually if the vehicle battery is low. It is
button in the luggage compartment lid. The ve- necessary to use more force when doing this.
hicle key must not be more than approximately Move the lid slowly to reduce the amount of
4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage compart- force needed.
ment and it must not be inside the vehicle. If
you press the (* button, then the vehicle will Opening and closing the luggage
lock. compartment lid with foot motion (kicking
movement)
Storing the luggage compartment lid Applies to: vehicles with sensor-controlled luggage compart-
opening position ment lid
The position must be at a certain height or higher rea

So
to store. S
<x
go
a
> Bring the luggage compartment lid into the de-
sired open position. If you want to move the
luggage compartment lid to a lower position,
move it slowly in small increments; otherwise,
the luggage compartment lid will close auto-
matically.
> Press and hold the <3 button in the luggage
compartment lid for at least four seconds to Fig. 28 Vehicle rear: foot motion (example)
store the new opening position. A visual and

The luggage compartment lid can be opened and
audio signal will follow.
closed automatically 1) > A\ in General informa-
> To set a higher open position, wait at least five
tion on page 42.
seconds and then carefully press the luggage
compartment lid upward. Requirements: you must be carrying your conven-
> Press and hold the <3 button again for at least ience key* with you. The ignition must be switch-
four seconds to store the desired opening posi- ed off. You must be standard behind the luggage
tion. compartment lid, toward the left side of the vehi-
cle. Depending on the equipment, it may also be
The automatic opening or closing will stop if:
possible to stand near the center of the vehicle or
— You press the < button or press the handle in toward the right side of it.
the luggage compartment lid again Or
> Move your foot back and forth under the bump-
— If something blocks the luggage compartment er one time > fig. 28. Do not touch the bumper.
lid or makes it difficult for the lid to move.
Make sure you have firm footing. The luggage
If you press the << button or press the handle in compartment lid will open or close » once the
the luggage compartment lid again, the luggage system detects the movement. The automatic
compartment lid will open again. opening or closing will be canceled if you re-
peat one of the movements described.
Z\ WARNING
Observe the safety precautions > page 42. Z\ WARNING
)) The closing function applies to vehicles that also have au-

tomatic luggage compartment lid operation.
44
Opening and closing
> Fold the backrest on the rear bench seat for-

@ Tips
ward > page 86.
The luggage compartment lid will only open > Remove the mechanical key > page 39.
or close )) if you perform the movement as > Using the mechanical key, pry the cover &> off
described. This prevents the luggage com- the luggage compartment lid trim panel.
partment lid from opening or closing due to > Press the lever with the mechanical key in the
similar movements )), such as when you walk direction of the arrow to release the luggage
between the rear of the vehicle and your ga- compartment lid.
rage door. In some situations, the function
may be limited or temporarily unavailable. |Z\. WARNING
This may happen if:
— You are standing too close to the bumper or
too far away from it
— The luggage compartment lid was closed or
ZX WARNING
opened immediately beforehand If you have folded the backrests into the up-
— You park close to a hedge and the branches right position, always check if the lock is cor-
move back and forth under the vehicle for a rectly engaged by pulling forward on the
long period of time backrest.
— You clean your vehicle, for example with a
pressure washer or in a car wash Child safety lock
— There is heavy rain
The child safety lock prevents the rear doors
— The bumper is very dirty, for example after
from being opened from the inside and the rear
driving on salt-covered roads
power windows from being operated.
— There is interference to the vehicle key's ra-
dio signal, such as from mobile devices or
RAZ-1026:
remote controls
Mechanically unlocking the luggage

compartment lid
The luggage compartment lid can be released

from the inside in an emergency.
Fig. 30 Driver's door: controls
> To activate or deactivate the child safety lock

for the rear doors (which controls the power
windows and interior door handle), press the
left and/or right 8 button in the driver's door
=> fig. 30. The indicator light in the button turns
on/blinks.
» Make sure the child safety lock is working by
Fig. 29 Inner luggage compartment lid: access to the
emergency release checking the function on the rear power win-
dow switch and door handle.
4M8012721BF
D_ The closing function applies to vehicles that also have au-

tomatic luggage compartment lid operation.
4s
Opening and closing
» Applies to: vehicles with controls for the cli- ©@ Left front door
mate control system in the rear and MMI: To al- @® Right front door
so restrict the operation of the climate control @® Left rear door
system in the rear, select on the home screen:
@® Right rear door
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Operation
in rear Opening and closing the windows
When the child safety lock is switched on, the The driver can control all power windows. All
following functions are disabled: power window switches are equipped with a two-
stage function:
—The rear inner door handles
— The rear power windows > To open or close the window completely, press
— The control panel* for the climate control sys- the switch down or pull the switch up briefly to
tem in the rear
the second level. The operation will stop if the
switch is pressed or pulled again.
— The buttons in the rear for the sunshades*
> To select a position in between opened and
Message in the instrument cluster display closed, press or pull the switch to the first level
until the desired window position is reached.
@/ Child safety lock: malfunction! Please
contact Service Opening or closing sunshades on the rear
There is a malfunction in the child safety lock. side windows
Applies to: vehicles with power sunshades on the rear side
Press the @ button again. windows
If the message stays on, drive immediately to an Requirement: the window whose sunshade you
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service will operate must be closed.
> To close or open the sunshade from the driver's
Z\ WARNING seat, pull or press the respective & power win-
dow switch in the driver's door.
— Observe the safety precautions > page 35.
> To close or open the sunshade from the rear,
—A malfunction in the child safety lock could
pull or press the respective @ power window
allow the rear doors to be opened from the
switch in the rear door.
inside, which increases the risk of an acci-
dent. Correcting a malfunction in the one-touch
up/down function
Power windows If necessary, you can reactivate the one-touch
up/down function if it malfunctions.
o) Teme ma CCTM UUs Clue Lie]
STE > Pull the power window switch up until the win-
dow is completely raised.
> Release the switch and pull it up again for at
RAZ-0723
least one second.
ZA\ WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions > page 35.
— Never close the windows or sunshades*
carelessly or in an uncontrolled manner, be-
cause this increases the risk of injury. >
Fig. 31 Driver's door: power window switch
Power window switches:
46
Opening and closing
@) Tips ZX WARNING
— The windows will automatically open slight- — Never close the windows or panoramic glass
ly when you open the doors. roof* carelessly or in an uncontrolled man-
— If the window in the driver's or front pas- ner, because this increases the risk of injury.
senger's door is completely open, it will — For security reasons, the windows and the
raise slightly when the door is opened. The panoramic glass roof* can only be opened
window will lower again when you close the and closed with the vehicle key at a maxi-
door. mum distance of approximately 6.5 feet
— You can still open and close the windows for (2 m) from the vehicle. Always pay attention
several minutes after turning the ignition when using the f®) button to close the win-
off. The power windows do not switch off dows and the panoramic glass roof* so that
until the driver's door or front passenger's no one is pinched. The closing process will
door has been opened. stop immediately when the fj button is re-
— The power windows are equipped with pinch leased.
protection. The automatic window may stop
closing and will open all the way again even Panoramic glass roof
if no obstacle is detected. Pull the power
window switch up until the window is com- Operating the noramic glass roof
pletely raised. roof sunshade
Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass roof and roof sun-
shade
Convenience opening and closing
Convenience opening or closing the windows

or panoramic glass roof*
You can set in the MMI if all windows or the roof*
should open or close all at once > page 36, Set-
ting the central locking system.
> Press and hold the & or ( button on the vehicle

key until all windows and the roof* have
Fig. 32 Headliner: panoramic glass roof and sunshade*
reached the desired position > /A\.
buttons
> Touch the sensor* on the door handle until all
of the windows and the roof* are closed. Do not The control buttons are equipped with a two-
place your hand in the door handle when doing stage function.
this.
When tilting or opening the roof, the roof sun-
When all of the windows and the roof* are shade will open partially or completely if the sun-
closed, the turn signals will flash once. shade is closed.
Convenience opening and closing the Operating the roof sunshade
sunshade*
Applies to: vehicles with power sunshade > Opening and closing the sunshade: push the -&&
switch in the headliner @) forward or toward
You can open or close all of the sunshades at
the rear to the second level.
once.
> Partially opening the sunshade: press the
>» Press and hold the [=] button in the rear door. switch to the first level until the sunshade
4M8012721BF
reaches the desired position.
47
Opening and closing
Operating the roof minutes as long as neither of the front

> Tilting the roof: press the > switch in the doors have been opened.
headliner briefly up to the second level @). — It is not possible to open the roof when
> Closing the tilted roof: pull the A> switch down temperatures are too low.
briefly to the second level.

> Opening the roof: slide the 2S switch back Garage door opener
briefly twice in a row to the second level @).
> Closing the opened roof: push the 23 switch
Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener
forward briefly to the second level.
> Opening or closing partially: slide the A> With the garage door opener, you can activate
switch to the first level and hold it there until systems such as the garage doors, security sys-
the roof reaches the desired position. tems or house lights from inside your vehicle.
These functions are operated in the MMI. Multi-
Quick opening
ple receivers can be programmed, which can con-
You can also open the roof and roof sunshade in trol the functions of up to eight!) hand-held
one movement. transmitters.
> Push the 2S switch back briefly to the second

level
@) twice in a row.
ZA\ WARNING
— When operating or programming the garage
Roof emergency closing door opener, make sure that no people or
If an object is detected when closing, the roof objects are in the area immediately sur-
will open again automatically. In this case, you rounding the equipment. People can be in-
can then close it with the power emergency clos- jured or property can be damaged if struck
ing function. when closing.
— Do not allow yourself to be distracted from
> Within five seconds after the sunroof opens au- traffic by the viewing and operating the dis-
tomatically, pull the applicable button until the plays.
roof is closed.
G) Tips
ZA\ WARNING — If you sell your vehicle, reset all settings to
To reduce the risk of injury, always pay atten- the factory default settings > page 234.
tion when closing the roof. Always switch the —The system complies with United States FCC
ignition off and take the key with you when regulations and ISED regulations
leaving the vehicle. => page 311.
@) Note @) Tips
Always close the roof when you leave the vehi- Before you program your system to the ga-
cle and when there is precipitation to reduce rage door opener, first check the compatibili-
the risk of damage to the interior equipment, ty:
particularly the electronic equipment. — Ask an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility or check at www.
@ Tips
homelink.com. You can also find more infor-
— After switching off the ignition, the roof and mation about HomeLink there.
sunshades can still be operated for several
)) The possible number of hand-held transmitters depends

on the equipment.
48
Opening and closing
— You can display information about Home- Programming the system

Link (compatibility level/status/country Applies to: MMI
code/HomeLink generation) in the MMI: Requirement: the hand transmitter must be

— Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Set- present and the vehicle must be within range of
tings & Service > Garage door opener > (i). the system (such as the garage door) that you
would like to program.
> If you are programming the garage door opener

Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener
for the first time, press the rd button on the
Requirements: the remote control transmitter lower display. Follow the instructions in the up-
must be programmed > page 49, Program- per display. Or
ming, the vehicle must be within range of the > If you would like to program other systems, se-
system, and the ignition must be switched on. lect on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings &
Service > Garage door opener. Select the de-
There are multiple options to open or close the
sired button: @). Follow the instructions in the
system (such as the garage door).
MMI.
> If you have only programmed one remote con- > If you would like to reprogram systems that are
trol transmitter, press the rd button on the already programmed, select on the home
lower display. Or screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage
> If you have programmed multiple remote con- door opener. Press the 4 button and select 7
trol transmitters, press the 2 button on the for the system to be reprogrammed. Select:
lower display and then press the respective sys- Program. Follow the instructions in the MMI.
tem button. Or
With some systems, the garage door opener will
» Applies to: vehicles with programmable steer-
be immediately available after programming.
ing wheel button: If you have configured the
With other systems, the garage door opener
programmable steering wheel button, press
must also be synchronized.
the * button > page 31. Or
> Applies to: vehicles with location pairing: If you Synchronizing”
have programmed Location pairing, press the
Requirement: the hand transmitter must already
button for this in the upper display (notification
be programmed and the vehicle must be within
center > page 23). As you approach the system,
range of the system (such as the garage door).
the button is displayed on the MMI.
If the system synchronization is performed di-
If transmission was successful, the message:
rectly after the programming procedure, follow
Send to: XXX will appear.
the instructions on the MMI.
If you would like to sync at a later time:

Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door
You can program both fixed code and rolling code
opener.
systems in the MMI using the procedure that is
described. > Press the button for the system that you would
like to synchronize.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. > Follow the instructions in the MMI.
4M8012721BF
2) Only applies to rolling code systems
49
Opening and closing
Location pairing > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Applies to: vehicles with location pairing VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door
For easier operation, you can program your sys- opener.
tem's location. > Press the Z button.
> To delete an individual system, press the L]
Requirements: the respective hand transmitter button for the desired system. If the checkmark
must be programmed > page 49 and the vehicle Y is set, select: Delete.
must be located in front of the system. > To delete all systems, select: All > Delete.
> If you have programmed your system, follow
the instructions in the MMI. Or G) Tips
If you would like to set up location pairing at an- — Make sure the batteries in the hand trans-
other time: mitter are charged before starting the pro-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: gramming process.
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door — The programming process may take up to
opener. 30 seconds. It may be necessary for the
> Press the Z button. hand transmitter to be pressed again in the
> Press the 7 button for the system your vehicle meantime.
is facing. — The garage door opener may need to be
> Select: Location pairing. synchronized with the system after pro-
> Follow the instructions in the MMI. gramming. Follow the manufacturer's in-
structions for doing this.
Only a maximum of three systems can be dis-
played in the notification center > page 23. If G) Tips
you would like to have all systems displayed,
press aa. In some cases, the system may need to be
programmed in a different mode (“D mode”).
Renaming programmed systems — Switch the ignition on.
You can rename the programmed systems indi- — Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
vidually (names may have a maximum of 10 char- VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage
acters). door opener.
— Press and hold the desired button @).
> If you have programmed your system, follow
— Select Yes, in D mode and follow the in-
the instructions in the MMI. Or
structions on the MMI.
If you would like to change the name at another
time:
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door
opener.
> Press the Z button.
> Press the 7 button for the system that you
would like to rename.
> Select: Rename. If necessary, delete the preset
name, such as Garage door opener 1.
> Follow the instructions in the MMI.
Deleting programmed systems

The programmed systems can be deleted individ-
ually or all at once.
sO
Lights and Vision
Lights and Vision Automatic headlight range control

Your vehicle is equipped with automatic head-
Exterior lighting light range control. It reduces glare for oncoming
Switching the lights on and off traffic if the vehicle load changes. The headlight
range adjusts automatically.
Audi adaptive light

Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive light
Audi adaptive light provides better visibility when

driving in the dark. The lights are adapted to the
road conditions based on speed, such as when
driving on expressways, rural roads, at intersec-
tions, and around curves. The adaptive light only
functions when the automatic headlights are ac-
Fig. 33 Instrument panel: light button module tivated.
@ Light switch Z\ WARNING

Press and hold @ until the desired light function — Observe the safety precautions and note the
is selected. The selected function is displayed limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
briefly in the instrument cluster. When switching cameras > page 121.
on the ignition, the AUTO light function is auto- — Automatic headlights are only intended to
matically selected. assist the driver. The driver is still responsi-
— AUTO - The automatic headlights adapt to the ble for controlling the headlights and may
surrounding brightness automatically. The day- need to switch them on and off manually
time running lights* will automatically turn on. depending on light and visibility conditions.
In vehicles for certain markets, you can switch For example, fog cannot be detected by the
the automatic daytime running lights* on and light sensors. So always switch on the low
off in the MMI. beams ZO under these weather conditions
— 20 - You can switch the low beam headlights on and when driving in the dark.
manually once the ignition is switched on.
— 2 - You can switch the parking lights on at @ Tips
speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h). — If the vehicle battery has been discharging
— USA models: OFF - You can switch off all light for a while, the parking light may switch off
functions at speeds under 6 mph (10 km/h). automatically. Avoid using the parking
— Canada models: OFF - You can switch off all lights for several hours.
light functions when the ignition is switched off — When using lighting equipment, the driver
while the vehicle is stationary. is responsible for adhering to any local ap-
plicable regulations while driving and when
When the low beam headlights or parking lights
parking the vehicle.
are switched on, the respective Ba or EB indica-
— Only the front headlights turn on when the
tor light appears in the instrument cluster.
daytime running lights are switched on*. In
@ All-weather lights 2 vehicles in certain markets, the tail lights
will also turn on.
The headlights automatically adjust so that there
—Incool or damp weather, the inside of the
will be less glare, for example when the road sur-
face is wet. headlights, turn signals, and tail lights can
4M8012721BF
fog over due to the temperature difference

between the inside and outside. They will
clear shortly after switching them on. This >
51
Lights and Vision
does not affect the service life of the light-

AN WARNING
ing.
— When the parking lights are switched on High beams can cause glare for other drivers,
and the ignition is switched off, the 200-} sym- which increases the risk of an accident. For
bol appears in the light switch module. this reason, only use the high beams or the
headlight flasher when they will not create
glare for other drivers.
Turn signal and high beam lever
item
BFV-0012
Applies to: vehicles with high beam assistant
The high beam assistant automatically turns the

high beams on or off depending on the surround-
ing conditions.
A camera on the rearview mirror mount can de-

tect light sources from other road users. The high
beams switch on or off automatically depending
Fig. 34 Lever: switching on the turn signal and high beams on the position of vehicles driving ahead and on-
coming vehicles, the vehicle speed as well as oth-
The lever operates the turn signals, the high er environmental factors and traffic conditions.
beams and the headlight flasher.
Activating high beam assistant
Turn signals (>>
Requirement: the AUTO light function must be
The turn signal will activate when you move the selected and the high beam assistant must be
lever into a turn signal position while the ignition switched on in the MMI > page 53.
is switched on. The respective a or B indicator
> To activate the high beam assistant, tap the
light flashes.
lever forward @) > page 52, fig. 34. The Fag i
@ Right turn signal dicator light will appear in the instrument clus-
@ Left turn signal ter display and the high beams will be switched
on or off automatically. The Ed indicator light
The turn signal blinks three times if you tap the will turn on if the high beams are switched on.
lever (convenience turn signal).
Activating and deactivating the high beam
If an indicator light blinks twice as fast as usual, head lights manually
a turn signal bulb has failed. Carefully drive to an
If the high beams did not switch on or off as ex-
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
pected, you may switch them on or off manually
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor-
instead:
rected.
> To activate the high beams manually, tap the
High beams 20 and headlight flasher
lever forward @) > page 52, fig. 34. The & in-
> Move the lever to the corresponding position: dicator light will turn on.
@) High beams on (vehicles with high beam assis- > To deactivate the high beams manually, pull
the lever back @) > page 52, fig. 34. The high
tant*) > page 52
beam assistant is deactivated.
@ High beams off or headlight flasher
Operating the headlight flasher
The EJ indicator light in the instrument cluster
will turn on. > To operate the headlight flashers, pull the lever
back @) > page 52, fig. 34. If the high beam >
52
Lights and Vision
headlights are not switched on, the high beam nition is off. The entry/exit lighting works when it
assistant will remain activated. is dark and when the AUTO light function is
switched on. The front and rear daytime running
ZA WARNING lights* switch on automatically each time the ve-
hicle is unlocked regardless of how bright it is
— Observe the safety precautions and note the
outside the vehicle.
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 121. Daytime running lights
— High beam assistant is only intended to as-
USA models: The daytime running lights can be
sist the driver. The driver is responsible for
switched on and off.
controlling the high beam headlights and
adjusting them to match the lighting and Canada models: The daytime running lights can-
visibility conditions. not be switched off. The lights activate automati-
— High beams can cause glare for other driv- cally each time the ignition is switched on.
ers, which increases the risk of an accident.
For this reason, only use the high beams or Emergency flashers
the headlight flasher when they will not cre-
SIS|
ate glare for other drivers. IF)
|
|cc|
G@) Tips
Adhere to any local applicable regulations
when using the lighting equipment, for exam-
ple in regard to reducing glare for other driv-
ers. The driver is always responsible for adher-
ing to the regulations applicable in the coun-
try where the vehicle is being operated.
Fig. 35 Center console: emergency flashers
Adjusting the exterior lighting The emergency flashers help to make other driv-
ers aware of your vehicle in dangerous situations.
You can adjust the exterior lighting separately.
The settings depend on the vehicle equipment. > Press the A @ button to switch the emergency
flashers on or off.
VEHICLE > Light & Visibility > Exterior light- When the emergency flashers are turned on, the
ing. a and By indicator lights will flash at the same
time.
Automatic headlights
You can adjust the following settings in the Auto- You can indicate a lane change or a turn when the
matic headlights menu: emergency flashers are switched on by using the
turn signal lever. The emergency flashers stop
Activation time - You can adjust if the headlights temporarily.
switch on Early, Medium, or Late based on the
sensitivity of the light sensor. The emergency flashers also work when the igni-
tion is turned off.
High beam assistant - You can switch the high
beam assistant on and off. G) Tips
Entry/exit lighting You should switch the emergency flashers on
4M8012721BF
ite
The Entry/exit lighting illuminates the area
around the vehicle when the vehicle is unlocked
or when the driver’s door is opened while the ig-
53
Lights and Vision
— you are the last car in a traffic jam so that Interior lighting
all other vehicles approaching from behind
can see your vehicle Front interior lighting
— your vehicle has broken down or you are
having an emergency
— your vehicle is being towed or if you are tow-
ing another vehicle
Messages
If the 6; indicator light turns on, a bulb has

failed. The displayed message indicates the cause
and possible solutions. If one of the messages re-
Fig. 36 Headliner: interior lighting
mains on, drive immediately to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to
Interior lighting buttons
have the malfunction repaired.
axs* — Interior lighting on/off
By Audi adaptive light: malfunction! See own-
er's manual 4 - Door contact switch on/off. The interior light-
ing is controlled automatically.
Adaptive light* is not working. The headlights
still function. Drive immediately to an authorized Touch-sensitive reading lights
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to > To turn a reading light on or off, touch the sur-
have the malfunction repaired. face@ briefly.
High beam assistant: malfunction! See own- > To activate the manual dimming function,
er's manual touch the surface @ when the light is switched
off and keep touching it until the desired
You can still switch the high beams on or off
brightness is reached.
manually. Drive immediately to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to
have the malfunction repaired. Rear interior lighting
3
High beam assistant: currently unavailable. 2
NI
Camera view limited due to surroundings. See |<q
owner's manual
This message appears if the camera's visual field

is blocked. The system will switch itself off. Try
switching the systems on later.
Automatic headlights: malfunction! See

owner's manual
Fig. 37 Headliner: reading lights
The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning. When
the AUTO light function is on, the low beams will
Reading lights
remain switched on at all times for safety rea-
sons. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi > To switch the reading lamp on or off, press the
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have ~¥ button @.
the malfunction repaired. > To activate the manual dimming function*,
touch the surface while the light is switched off
“~¥@ and keep touching it until the desired
brightness is reached.
54
Lights and Vision
Interior lighting Vision

Applies to: vehicles with interior lighting
Adjusting exterior mirrors
The ambient lighting turns on when the ignition
is switched on. The ambient lighting is deactivat-
RAZ-0150
ed when the lights are set to OFF.
You can adjust the interior lighting individually.

The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
>» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-

HICLE > Light & Visibility > Interior lighting.
You can choose from various color profiles, such © ©

as Maritime.
Fig. 38 Driver's door: knob for the exterior mirrors
Additional settings and profiles:
> Turn the knob in the driver's door to the desired
— Brightness: you can adjust the brightness for position:
all of the interior lighting.
— Individual: you can adjust the brightness and 0 - Deactivates all adjustment functions.
color of the interior lighting separately, divided Q/ © - Selects the left or right exterior mirror.
into contour and surface lighting. To adjust the mirror glass in a mirror, press the
— Audi drive select: the contour and surface knob in the desired direction.
lighting color changes depending on the select-
GA - Heats* the mirror glass depending on the
ed drive select* mode.
outside temperature.
G) Tips S) - Folds the exterior mirrors*. To fold the mir-
Depending on vehicle equipment, when the rors out, turn the knob to one of the other posi-
drive select function is activated, the color of tions. In the MMI, you can select if the mirrors
the contour and surface lighting may briefly fold in automatically when you lock the vehicle
change to red or blue when the interior tem- => page 36.
perature is manually increased or decreased.
Front passenger's exterior mirror tilt
function*
Display brightness
Requirement: the knob must be in the position
You can adjust the instrument and display illumi- for the front passenger’s exterior mirror.
nation separately. The settings depend on the ve- The mirror surfaces tilt slightly when reverse
hicle equipment. gear is selected to provide a better view, for ex-
> Applies to MMI: select on the home screen: ample of the edge of the curb.
SETTINGS > Display & brightness. You can adjust the mirror surface by turning the
Possible settings in the MMI: knob in the desired direction.
— Cockpit dimming The mirror moves from the reversing position

back to the original position:
— Head-up display
—MMI — When you switch the ignition off
— Audi virtual cockpit — When you drive forward at speeds faster than 9
mph (15 km/h).
4M8012721BF
— When the knob is no longer in the position for

the front passenger exterior mirror >
55
Lights and Vision
ZA\ WARNING ZA WARNING

Curved mirror surfaces (for example convex) Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors
enlarge the field of vision. However, they —If the glass on an automatic dimming mirror
make objects in the mirror appear smaller and breaks, electrolyte can leak out. This liquid
farther away. When using these mirrors to es- can irritate the skin, eyes and respiratory
timate your distance to vehicles behind you system. If there is contact with the fluid,
when changing lanes, you could estimate in- flush immediately with plenty of water. Con-
correctly, which increases the risk of an acci- sult a physician if necessary.
dent. — Repeated or long-term exposure to electro-
lyte fluid can lead to irritation of the air-
@) Note ways, especially in people with asthma or
— Applies to: vehicles with power folding exte- other respiratory conditions. Take deep
rior mirrors: If the mirror housing was breaths immediately after leaving the vehi-
moved by outside forces (such as an impact cle or, if this is not possible, open all of the
when maneuvering), you must use the pow- doors and windows as wide as possible.
er folding function to fold the mirror all the — If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with
way out. The mirrors will make a loud noise the eyes, flush them thoroughly with plenty
when they latch into place. The mirror hous- of clean water for at least 15 minutes and
ing must not be moved back into place by then seek medical attention.
hand because this could impair the function — If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with
of the mirror mechanism. the skin, flush the affected area with clean
— Applies to: vehicles without power folding water for at least 15 minutes, and then
exterior mirrors: If the mirror housing was clean with soap and water and seek medical
moved by outside forces (such as an impact attention. Clean affected clothing and shoes
when maneuvering), you must move it back thoroughly before wearing again.
in place by hand. — If the fluid was swallowed and the person is
— If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car conscious, flush the mouth with water for at
wash, you must fold the exterior mirrors in least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomiting
to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors. unless this is recommended by medical pro-
Never fold power folding exterior mirrors* fessionals. Seek medical attention immedi-
by hand. Only fold them in and out using ately.
the power controls.
@) Note
G) Tips Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors
If the power adjusting function malfunctions, If the glass on an automatic dimming mirror
the glass in both mirrors can be adjusted by breaks, electrolyte can leak out. This liquid
pressing on the edge of it by hand. damages plastic surfaces and paint. Clean
this liquid as quickly as possible, for example
Dimming the mirrors with a wet sponge.
Automatic dimming rearview mirror G) Tips

Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors Applies to: vehicles with automatic dimming mirrors
> The interior and exterior mirrors dim automati- — If the light reaching the rearview mirror is
cally when light shines on them, for example obstructed, the automatic dimming mirror
from headlights on a vehicle behind you. will not function correctly,
56
Lights and Vision
— The automatic dimming mirrors do not dim Windshield wipers

when the interior lighting is turned on or
the reverse gear is selected. Switching the windshield wipers on
Sun visors
RAZ-0253
Fig. 39 Roof headliner: sun visor
Sun visor
The sun visors can be moved out of their brackets
and turned toward the doors (a).
They can also be moved back and forth length-
wise in this position.
Vanity mirror Fig. 42 Lever: rear window wiper
The mirror light switches on when the cover over > Move the windshield wiper lever © to the cor-
the vanity mirror @) opens. responding position:
Applies to: vehicles with manual sunshade

@ :
Windshield wipers off
@ Rain sensor/intermittent mode. The wind-

shield wipers switch on once the vehicle speed
exceeds approximately 2 mph (4 km/h) and it is
raining. The higher the sensitivity of the rain sen-
sor that is set (switch ©) to the right), the earlier
the windshield wipers react to moisture on the
windshield. You can deactivate the rain sensor
mode, which switches the interval mode on. In
intermittent mode, you can adjust the interval
time using the switch ©.
big ns OsResnwindowssunsieds VEHICLE > Light & Visibility > Rain sensor.
Rear window sunshade @®Slow wiping
> Pull the sunshade out and attach it to the re- @ Fast wiping
tainer on the luggage compartment lid.
ggeg P @ Single wipe. If you hold the lever in this posi-
tion longer, the wipers switch from slow wiping
4M8012721BF
to fast wiping. >
57
Lights and Vision
© Clean the windshield &. The number of wipes — Properly functioning windshield wiper
and afterwipes depends on how long the lever is blades are required for a clear view and safe
held in position ©). driving > page 58, Cleaning/changing wip-
The wipers wipe one time after several seconds of er blades.
driving to remove water droplets. You can switch
this function off by moving the lever to position @) Note
© within ten seconds of the afterwipe. The after- — If there is frost, make sure the windshield
wipe function is reactivated the next time you wiper blades are not frozen to the wind-
switch the ignition on. shield. Switching on the windshield wipers
when the blades are frozen to the wind-
If you hold the lever in position ©) for longer
shield can damage the wiper blades.
than half a second, the edge wiping feature will
— Prior to using a car wash, the windshield
be activated. This moves the windshield wipers
wiper system must be switched off (lever in
closer to the edge of the windshield and per-
position @). This prevents the wipers from
forms an afterwipe to clean the residue that re-
switching on unintentionally and causing
sults from the wiping process from the edge of
damage to the windshield wiper system.
the windshield. The function is available when
driving at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
@ Tips
The headlight washer system* operates only
— The windshield wipers switch off when the
when the low beam headlights are on. If you ignition is switched off. You can activate the
move the lever to position ©), the headlights and
windshield wipers after the ignition is
the night vision assist camera* are cleaned at in- switched on again by moving the windshield
tervals.
wiper lever to any position. The single wipe
@ Wipe the rear window SJ. The number of function (lever in position @) also functions
wipes depends on the windshield wiper move- when the ignition is switched off.
ment. — Worn or dirty windshield wiper blades result
in streaking. This can affect the rain sensor
The rear wiper automatically switches on when function. Check your windshield wiper
the reverse gear is selected and the front wind- blades regularly.
shield wipers are on and running. — The washer fluid nozzles for the windshield
Clean the rear window &. The number of washer system are heated when the ignition
wipes depends on how long the lever is held in is on if the outside temperature is low.
position (8). This may also clean the rearview — When stopping temporarily, such as at a
camera, depending on the vehicle equipment. traffic light, the speed of the windshield
wipers automatically reduces by one level.
Z\ WARNING
— The rain sensor is only intended to assist the Cleaning/changing wiper blades
driver. The driver may still be responsible for oO
a
manually switching the wipers on based on S°
=
visibility conditions.
J 3
— The windshield must not be treated with
water-repelling windshield coating agents.
Under unfavorable conditions, such as wet-
ness, darkness, and when the sun is low,
@—*s
these coatings can cause increased glare,
which increases the risk of an accident. They
can also cause wiper blade chatter.
Fig. 43 Windshield wipers: changing the wiper blades >
58
Lights and Vision
Wiper blade replacement position

CG) Note
> Switch off the ignition and hold the windshield
— The windshield wipers must only be lifted
wiper lever in position @) > page 57, fig. 41 un-
up when in the wiper blade replacement po-
til the windshield wiper moves into the wiper
sition. Otherwise, you risk damaging the
blade replacement position.
paint on the hood or the windshield wiper
> To bring the windshield wipers into the normal
motor.
position, switch the ignition on and hold the
— You should not move your vehicle or press
windshield wiper lever in position @ until the
the windshield wiper lever when the wiper
windshield wipers go back to the original posi-
arms are folded up from the windshield. The
tion, or drive faster than 8 mph (12 km/h).
windshield wipers would move back into
You can also turn the wiper blade replacement their original position and could damage the
position on or off in the MMI: hood and windshield.
> Switch the windshield wipers off (position @
=> page 57, fig. 41). @) Tips
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- — You can also use the wiper blade replace-
HICLE > Settings & Service > Wiper change po- ment position for other reasons, for exam-
sition. ple if you want to protect the windshield
from icing by using a cover.
Cleaning the wiper blades
— You cannot activate the wiper blade replace-
Requirement: the windshield wipers must be in ment position when the hood is open.
the wiper blade replacement position.
> Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the Cleaning/changing the rear wiper blade
windshield.
[RAZ-0637
> For information on cleaning, see > table on
page 281.
Replacing the wiper blades

Requirement: the windshield wipers must be in
the wiper blade replacement position.
> Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the

windshield.
> Press the locking knob (@) on the wiper blade. Fig. 44 Rear window wiper: installing the wiper blade
Hold the wiper blade firmly.
> Remove the wiper blade from the windshield Cleaning the wiper blades
wiper arm mount Q).
> Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window.
> Insert the new wiper blade into the mount on
> For information on cleaning, see > table on
the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
page 281.
> Place the wiper arm back on the windshield.
> Exit the wiper blade replacement position. Removing the wiper blade
> Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window.
Z\ WARNING > Remove the wiper blade from its holder.
— For safety reasons, the windshield wiper
blades should be replaced once or twice Installing the wiper blade
each year. > Press the wiper blade mount into the retainer.
4M8012721BF
— Dirty windshield wiper blades can impair vi- > Fold the window wiper arm back onto the rear
sion, which increases the risk of an accident. window. >
59
Lights and Vision
ZA\ WARNING > To turn the compass on or off, press the button
@ until the compass display in the mirror turns
For safety reasons, the windshield wiper on or off.
blades should be replaced once or twice each
year. The digital compass only works when the ignition
is turned on. The directions are indicated with ab-
breviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east),
Messages
SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W
If the & indicator light turns on, then there is a (west), NW (northwest).
windshield wiper malfunction. The message that
is also displayed indicates the cause and possible G) Tips
solutions. If one of the messages does not turn To prevent inaccurate compass readings, do
off, drive immediately to an authorized Audi deal- not bring any remote controls, electrical devi-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the ces or metallic objects near the mirror.
malfunction repaired.
aS Automatic wipers: malfunction! See owner's

manual
The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning. You can
still control all functions that are not controlled
by the rain sensor using the windshield wiper lev-
er. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi deal-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
Digital compass
Scare ma mel Rei mela
Applies to: vehicles with digital compass
BFV-0288
Fig. 45 Rearview mirror: digital compass is switched on
60
Lights and Vision
B42-0405
Fig. 46 Magnetic zone map
The magnetic zone must be adjusted correctly for

the compass to read accurately.
To reduce the risk to yourself and other driv-
> Press and hold the button @ > page 60, fig. 45 ers, calibrate the compass in an area where
until the number of the magnetic zone appears there is no traffic.
in the interior rearview mirror.
> Press the button () repeatedly to select the
correct magnetic zone. The selection mode
turns off after a few seconds.
Calibrating the co
Applies to: vehicles with digital compass
You must recalibrate the compass if it does not

display the correct direction.
> Press and hold the button @ untila C

=> page 60, fig. 45 appears in the rearview mir-
ror.
> Drive in a circle at about 6 mph (10 km/h) until
a direction is displayed in the rearview mirror.
4M8012721BF
61
Sitting correctly and safely
Sitting correctly and — Never kneel on the seats.

— Never tilt your backrest too far back.
safely
— Never lean against the instrument panel.
Correct passenger — Never lie down on the rear bench seat.
seating position — Never sit only on the front section of the seat.
— Never sit sideways on the seat.
(eT reeeleur isola)
— Never lean against the window.
As the driver, you are responsible for making sure — Never place your feet out of the window.
every passenger is sitting correctly in their seat — Never place your feet on the instrument panel.
and maintaining this seating position while driv- — Never place your feet on the seat cushion.
ing. Make sure that: — Never ride in the footwell.
— Never sit on the armrests.
— Every passenger in the vehicle has adjusted his
— Never drive or ride in a seat without fastening
or her seat correctly > page 62
your safety belt.
— The steering wheel is adjusted correctly
— Never ride in the luggage compartment.
=> page 66
— The mirrors are adjusted so that there is a suffi-
cient view of the area around the vehicle
ZA\ WARNING
=>page 55 Incorrect seating positions, failure to wear a
— Every passenger in the vehicle has his or her safety belt, or being too close to an airbag in-
head restraint adjusted correctly > page 67 crease the risk of serious or fatal injury to ve-
hicle occupants, especially if the airbags de-
— Every passenger in the vehicle has his or her
ploy and come into contact with occupants
safety belt fastened correctly > page 68
who are not seated correctly. Note the impor-
— The activation status of the front passenger's
tant information and warnings in the chapters
airbag is suitable for the passenger in the front
for the topics given above.
passenger's seat > page 74
— Children are secured in suitable child safety
seats that are secured to appropriate vehicle
G) Tips
seats > page 76. Read and observe the impor- — Save your seat profile* > page 71. This al-
tant safety information pertaining to the use of lows you to access your personal seat profile
child safety seats on the front passenger's seat quickly and easily at any time.
= A\ in General information on page 76. — If you or other vehicle passengers have
physical limitations that prevent sitting in a
Examples of incorrect seating positions correct position, modifications to the vehi-
Safety belts can only provide its optimal protec- cle may be necessary. For more information,
tion when they are routed correctly. Incorrect contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
seating positions significantly reduce the protec- ized Audi Service Facility, or call Audi cus-
tive functions of the safety belts and increase the tomer support at 1-800-822-2834.
risk of injury due to incorrect belt routing.
The following list includes examples of seating Front seats

positions that could be dangerous for all vehicle General information
occupants. This is not a complete list. Audi would
simply like to increase your awareness of the top- Make sure that:
ic. The following points apply when the vehicle is — You can press the pedals down completely
in motion:
while your legs are slightly bent
— Never stand inside the vehicle.
— Never stand on the seats.
62
— The distance between your upper body and the to use the pedals if sudden driving or brak-
steering wheel or instrument panel is at least ing maneuvers were needed, which increas-
10 inches (25 cm) es the risk of an accident.
— The distance between your knees and the in- — Make sure that the floor mats are always se-
strument panel is at least 4 inches (10 cm) curely attached.
— Your thighs are lightly supported by the front —To reduce the risk of an accident, never place
surface of the seat additional floor mats or other floor covers
— The backrest is in an upright position and your over the installed floor mats, because this
back is resting against it reduces the pedal's range of motion and can
— You have a sufficient view of the area around impair pedal operation.
the vehicle —To reduce the risk of injury, never place your
— You have a clear view of the instrument cluster, feet on the instrument panel, out of the
indicator lights, and the head-up display* window, or on the seat surfaces. This also
applies to passengers in the rear seats.
Seat settings menu: quick access
Applies to: vehicles with seat settings in the MMI
@) Note
If you press on the image of the driver's or front
To reduce the risk of damage, be very careful
passenger's seat in the climate control system
when adjusting the seat to make sure the
menu & page 90, fig. 82 @, you will go directly
head restraints do not come into contact with
to the seat settings for that seat.
the headliner or the sunroof*.
ZA WARNING G@) Tips
— If you are too close to the steering wheel or
At the same time, only move the respective
instrument panel, the airbag system cannot
seat using the controls.
provide the optimal protection, which in-
creases the risk of injury and death.
—To reduce the risk of injury in the event of Adjusting the front power seats
sudden braking maneuvers or accidents,
[RAz-0172
never drive with the backrest reclined very
far. The airbag system and seat belts can on-
ly provide optimal protection when the back-
rest is in an upright position and the driver
is wearing the seat belt correctly. If the
backrest is angled back too far, the safety
belt can shift to soft areas of the body, such
as the stomach, which increases the risk of
injury.
Fig. 47 Front seat: seat adjustment buttons
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust
the seats when the vehicle is stationary. You can adjust the basic settings using the but-
— Be careful when adjusting the seat. Lack of tons.
control or attention when adjusting can re-
sult in injuries due to pinching to vehicle oc- The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
cupants both in the front seats and rear Adjusting the seat position
seats.
> To move the seat forward or backward, push
— Never place objects in the driver's footwell.
the button @ forward or backward.
4M8012721BF
Objects could shift and enter the area

around the pedals, which could prevent you
from using them. You would then be unable
63
> To adjust the seat upward or downward, push Seat setting

the rear section of the button @) upward or Applies to: MMI
downward. > To select a seat setting, press (@ if necessary.

> To adjust the seat surface, press the front part > Press the respective arrow (@) until the desired
of the button @ upward or downward. position is reached.
Adjusting the backrests Massage
> To move the backrest forward or backward, See > page 64
press the button @) forward or backward.
Seat temperature balance
Adjusting the lumbar support
Using the seat temperature balance, you can heat
> To adjust the lumbar support, press the button or cool the backrest and seat surface to different
@ in the desired direction. temperatures > /\ in Settings on page 92.
Massage function > To adjust the seat heating or cooling balance,
Switching the massage function on or off @). Set- slide the control upward or downward.
ting the massage type and intensity > page 64. Additional seat settings
ZA\ WARNING See > page 65
The power front seats can also be adjusted

Front seat massage function
when the ignition is switched off. To reduce
Applies to: vehicles with massage function
the risk of injury, children should never be left
unattended in the vehicle. Selecting the massage function
Applies to: MMI
ONC ma Rice SMa D| > To open the Massage menu, press the J button
Applies to: vehicles with seat settings in the MMI @ © page 63, fig. 47.
Switching the massage function on or off

Sa
RAZ-0589
Applies to: MMI
—@ (4. > To switch the massage function on or off, press

the J button @ © page 63, fig. 47. Or:
> Press Start/Stop on the MMI.
©=-c3 Setting the massage type and intensity
Fig. 48 Upper display: seat setting Applies to: MMI
> To adjust the massage type, press the desired

You can adjust additional settings in the MMI. button on the MMI, for example Wave.
The settings and the number of menus and but- > To adjust the intensity of the massage, press
tons depend on the vehicle equipment. Intensity on the MMI repeatedly until the de-
sired level is reached.
Operating
Applies to: MMI
G) Tips
> Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Seats.
The massage function switches off automati-
> To access the various menus ®, swipe to the
cally after approximately 10 minutes.
left or right.
> To display the various seats, press ) or (@.
The red coloring in the symbol G) indicates which

seat is selected.
64
Xe) nal settings in the MMI Front center armrest

Applies to: vehicles with a front center armrest
You can adjust additional settings and switch
functions on or off in the MMI.

HICLE > Seats > Additional seat settings.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-

ing options may be available.
Reset seat position

You can adjust the position of the front passeng-
er’s seat to match the driver's seat. Fig. 49 Cockpit: center armrest
Driver seat entry assistance/Front passenger Adjusting the center armrest

seat entry assistance
> To slide the armrest forward or back, press the
Entry assistance makes it easier to enter or exit button @).
the vehicle.
ZA WARNING
Adjusting the front passenger's seat from In certain positions, the front center armrest
tial att
can interfere with the driver’s arm movement,
Applies to: vehicles with front passenger seat adjustment
which increases the risk of injury.
You can adjust the front passenger's side with the
driver's seat buttons. Rear seats
Applies to: MMI:
General information
> Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Seats.
> To display the various seats, press ) or ¢. ZX WARNING
> To switch on the function, press the 2/ button.
— Be careful when adjusting the seat. Unsu-
The lower edge of the button will turn red.
pervised or careless seat adjustment could
After you have switched on the function, you can cause parts of the body to get pinched,
adjust the front passenger's seat using the driv- which increases the risk of injury.
er's seat buttons > page 63, fig. 47. — Always pull forward on the backrest to make
sure it is check if it is correctly locked in
@) Tips place.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust
The function switches off automatically when
the seat when the vehicle is stationary.
you exit the menu.
4M8012721BF
65
Adjusting ory — You have a sufficient view of the area around

the vehicle and you have a clear view of the in-
strument cluster and head-up display”.
— You are always holding the steering wheel with
both hands on the outer edge at the sides (9:00
and 3:00 position) when driving
ZA\ WARNING
— To reduce the risk of an accident, make sure
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly and
cannot be moved out of position before you
start to drive.
— If you are too close to the steering wheel,
B8R-0388
the driver's airbag cannot provide optimal
Sl protection, which increases the risk of injury
or fatality.
— Never hold the steering wheel in the 12:00
position or in any other way, such as holding
the center of the steering wheel. Otherwise,
your arms, hands, and head could be injured
in the event that the driver's airbag deploys.
Fig. 51 Adjusting the seat position
Power steering wheel position adjustment
:
Adjusting the backrests
BFY.0110
> Secure the backrest with one hand and pull the
lever upward > fig. 50.
> Move the backrest forward or back to the de-
sired position.
> Release the lever and continue moving the
backrest until it locks into place.
Adjusting the seat position

Fig. 52 Steering column: switch for adjusting the steering
> To adjust the seat forward or back, pull the wheel position
handle > fig. 51 and slide the seat.
> Release the handle and continue sliding the The steering wheel position can be adjusted elec-
seat until it locks into place. trically up/down and forward/back.
> To move the steering wheel upward or down-

Steering wheel ward, press the switch upward or downward.
> To move the steering wheel forward or back-
erally)
ward, press the switch forward or backward.
Make sure that:
The steering wheel can also be adjusted when the
— The distance between your upper body and the ignition is switched off.
steering wheel is at least 10 inches (25 cm)
— Your arms are bent slightly at the elbows
66
Head restraints Front head restraints

Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints
General information
[RAZ-0683]
B4G-0454
Fig. 54 Front seat: adjusting the head restraint
Fig. 53 Correctly-adjusted head restraint Adjusting the head restraints
Make sure that:

> To adjust the head restraint upward, slide it un-
til it locks into place.
— The upper edge of the head restraint is as even > To adjust the head restraint downward or back-
as possible with the top of your head ward, press the button on the side and slide the
— The head restraint is as close as possible to the head restraint. Release the button and slide the
back of the head head restraint farther until it locks into place.
— The head restraints on rear seats that are occu-
pied are raised up at least one level. Rear head restraints
Z\ WARNING
— There is one head restraint for each seat. All
vehicle occupants must adjust the head re-
straint correctly before every trip. Having
head restraints that are not adjusted cor-
rectly or not installed in the vehicle increas-
es the risk of a neck injury during sudden or
unexpected driving or braking maneuvers or
in a collision.
— Only remove the rear seat head restraints if
it is necessary to install a child safety seat Fig. 55 Rear seat: adjusting or removing the head restraint
= page 76. Stow the removed head re-

Adjusting the head restraints
straints securely, for example in the luggage
compartment. Reinstall the head restraints > To adjust the head restraint upward, slide it un-
immediately once the child safety seat has til it locks into place.
been removed. Driving without head re- > To adjust the head restraint downward, press
straints increases the risk of serious neck in- the button @) and slide the head restraint. Re-
juries. lease the button and slide the head restraint
farther until it locks into place.
Removing the headrests

Applies to: vehicles with removable head restraints
4M8012721BF
> Applies to: vehicles with folding backrests: Fold

the backrest forward slightly. See > page 86.
> Move the head restraint upward all the way. >
67
> Insert a suitable object, such as the extended airbag or not. This also applies to children
vehicle key or mechanical key, into the release that are seated in a child safety seat that is
point @ on the inside or outside of the base. appropriate for their weight and age and
> Press the button @) and pull the head restraint that is secured with a safety belt.
out of the backrest > /\ in General informa- In the event of a collision, vehicle occupants
tion on page 67. that are not wearing safety belts could be
propelled through the vehicle interior and
Installing the headrests
Applies to: vehicles with removable head restraints collide with vehicle components, such as the
steering wheel, instrument panel, wind-
> Fold the backrest forward slightly > page 86.
shield, or doors. In some situations, vehicle
>» Slide the posts on the head restraint down into
occupants could also be ejected from the ve-
the guides until the posts click into place.
hicle. Vehicle occupants in the rear seats
> Press the button (2) and slide the head restraint who do not wear safety belts not only en-
all the way down. It should not be possible to
danger themselves, but also other people in
remove the head restraint from the backrest
the vehicle.
without pressing the button.
Only one person may be fastened with a
safety belt at a time. Never secure more
Safety belts than one person, including children, with a
single safety belt.
Never allow children or infants to ride on an-
Each seat is equipped with a three-point safety other person's lap and be belted into the
belt. Safety belts that are worn correctly are the safety belt with them.
most effective way to reduce the risk of serious or Insert the belt buckle only in the belt latch
fatal injuries in a collision. Therefore, wear your belonging to the corresponding seat, so that
safety belt correctly and make sure that all vehi- the protective function is not impaired.
cle passengers are also wearing their safety belts To ensure the maximum protective function
correctly when the vehicle is moving. of the safety belts, all vehicle passengers
Even though your vehicle is equipped with an air- must sit in the correct seating position
> page 62.
bag system, every vehicle passenger must still al-
ways wear the appropriate safety belt. In addi- Check the condition of your vehicle’s safety
tion to their normal protective function, safety belts regularly > page 281. If you find dam-
belts also hold vehicle occupants in the correct age to the belt webbing, the belt connec-
seating position in the event of a collision so that tions, the retractor, or the buckle, have the
the airbags can deploy correctly and provide addi- damaged safety belt replaced by an author-
tional protection. Safety belts provide protection ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
during collisions when the airbags do not deploy Facility.
or if they have already deployed. The safety belts must not be removed or
modified in any way. Do not attempt to re-
Z\ WARNING pair the safety belts yourself.
Safety belts that are strained during an acci-
The risk of serious or fatal injury increases if
dent must be replaced by an authorized
the safety belt is not fastened, if it is worn in-
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
correctly, or if it is damaged.
ty.
—All vehicle occupants, including the driver,
must fasten their safety belts correctly be-
fore every trip and must always keep their
safety belts fastened during the trip, regard-
less of whether the seat is equipped with an
68
Correct safety belt positioning ZA\ WARNING

Incorrect safety belt positioning can cause se-
B4H-0751
rious injury in the event of an accident or dur-
ing sudden braking or driving maneuvers.
— Never drive with the backrest reclined ex-
tremely far. The more the backrest is tilted
back, the greater the risk of injury due to the
safety belt being routed incorrectly.
— The safety belt itself or a loose safety belt
can cause serious injuries if it shifts onto
soft areas of the body, such as the stomach.
— The shoulder portion of the safety belt must
RAZ-0696
lie over the center of the shoulder and
chest, and never under the arm, behind the
back, or across the neck or face.
— The lap portion of the safety belt must lie
across the lap and never over the stomach.
—The safety belt must lie flat and securely on
the upper part of the body and the lap.
— The belt webbing must not be pinched or
twisted, or rub against sharp edges.
— If the safety belt height is set incorrectly
Fastened safety belts only offer optimal protec- and/or the safety belt is routed incorrectly,
tion during an accident and reduce the risk of se- then the safety belt's protective function
rious injury or death when they are positioned will be impaired in the event of an accident.
correctly. Furthermore, the correct safety belt Make sure the safety belt is at the right
position holds the vehicle occupant in place so height and is routed correctly for the pas-
that a deployed airbag can provide maximum senger using it.
protection. Therefore, always fasten the safety —A safety belt that is too loose may lead to in-
belt and make sure it is positioned correctly juries during an accident, because your body
> fig. 56. will move farther forward due to kinetic en-
ergy and will be stopped abruptly by the
To ensure the safety belt is positioned correctly,
belt.
make sure of the following points:
— Heavily bulky, loose clothing (for example, a
— The lap portion of the safety belt must be locat- coat over a sports jacket) may prevent the
ed across the lap. seat and safety belts from functioning cor-
—The shoulder portion of the safety belt must rectly.
rest over the center of the shoulder. — Do not position the safety belt over hard or
— The safety belt must always rest flat and se- breakable objects (such as glasses, pens,
curely on the body. etc.).
—The lap belt portion of the safety belt must
For pregnant women, the safety belt must rest
sit as low as possible on the lap of pregnant
evenly across the chest and as low and flat as
women and lie flat under the belly.
possible on the lap, so that no pressure is applied
to the lower abdomen. This should be done
@) Note
4M8012721BF
throughout the entire pregnancy > fig. 57.

Make sure that there are no hook-and-loop
fasteners or sharp objects such as zippers or >
69
rivets on clothing in the area where the safety led while driving. Above certain speeds, addition-
belt is worn. Otherwise, the safety belt could al warning tones will sound.
be damaged.
Depending on the equipment, the safety belts in
the rear may also be monitored using the follow-
Cm cele tL mre ing indicator lights:
aI - If this indicator light turns on, the safety
B4H-0462
belt for the corresponding rear seat is not fas-
tened.
Ba - If this indicator light turns on, the safety

belt for the rear seat has been fastened.
- If this indicator light turns on with a white

light, the safety belt for the rear seat has been
fastened. If the indicator light flashes or turns
gray, a safety belt in the rear is not fastened or
°Rg has been unfastened while the vehicle is in mo-
a tion.
2
z|
x
oO
Adjusting the height of the safety belt
B4G-0004|
\Rp .
Fig. 59 Releasing the belt buckle from the belt latch
Fastening the safety belt

Fig. 60 Belt height adjustment for the front seats - safety
> Pull the safety belt by the belt buckle evenly belt relay
across your chest and lap.
> Insert the belt buckle in the belt latch belong- > To move the belt higher, slide the safety belt re-
ing to the seat until it audibly engages lay @ upward.
fig. 58. > To move the belt lower, press the release but-
> Pull on the belt to make sure that the belt is se- ton @ and slide the safety belt relay 2) down-
curely locked in the latch. ward.
> To check if the safety belt relay is securely
Unfastening the safety belt
locked in place, pull firmly on the belt.
> Press the red button on the belt latch > fig. 59.
The belt buckle will pop out. @) Tips
lav
> Guide the belt back by hand so that the safety
You can also adjust the height of the front
belt can roll up more easily.
seats to change the position of the safety
belts.
Safety belt monitoring system
eB - If the indicator light turns on or flashes, a

safety belt is not fastened or it has been unbuck-
70
PXe fetta eae im adel tem must be replaced by an authorized Audi

dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Belt retractor lock
The safety belts on the rear seats and on the (i) Tips
front passenger seat are equipped with a belt re-
Smoke may be released when pyrotechnic belt
tractor lock.
tensioners deploy. This is not a sign of a vehi-
> If you secure a child safety seat with a safety cle fire.
belt, the belt retractor lock on the safety belt
may need to be activated. Follow the instruc- Memory function
tions from the child safety seat manufacturer.
> When a vehicle passenger has fastened a safety General information
Applies to: vehicles with memory function
belt, the belt retractor lock should not be acti-
vated. If the belt retractor lock has been acti- With the memory function, you can save and call
vated unexpectedly, deactivate it. up seat profiles using the memory buttons in the
Deactivating or activating the belt retractor lock door trim panel.
=> page 79. Depending on vehicle equipment, some settings
such as the driver’s seat and exterior mirror posi-
Safety belt retractor
tion can be stored.
The safety belts are equipped with an automatic
belt retractor. This automatic retractor allows the
Storing and recalling a seat profile
safety belt to be pulled all the way out when the
Applies to: vehicles with memory function
belt is pulled slowly. However, the automatic re-
tractor locks during sudden braking maneuvers. The memory function buttons are located in the
It also locks the belts when accelerating, driving door trim panel.
uphill, and driving around curves.
Storing a seat profile
Belt force limiter
>» Press the [SET] button. If the LED in the button
Safety belts with belt force limiters reduce the turns on, a seat profile can be stored.
force placed on the body by the safety belts dur- > Push one of the numbered memory buttons. A
ing a collision. tone confirms that the settings were stored.
Safety belt pretensioners Accessing a seat profile

Safety belts may be tightened with reversible » While the driver’s or front passenger's door is
belt tensioners when you start driving and in cer- open and the ignition is switched off, press the
tain driving situations. If the safety belt is too memory button once briefly. The seat will be
loose, it will be tightened so that the belt will fully adjusted to the settings in the seat profile.
rest closer to the body. > If the driver's/front passenger's door is closed
or the ignition is switched on, press and hold
In some collisions, pyrotechnic belt tensioners
the memory button until the seat profile is
may secure the safety belts so that they cannot
completely set.
loosen. This reduces forward movement by the
vehicle passengers.
ZX WARNING
ZA WARNING — To reduce the risk of an accident, the seat
setting can only be recalled when the vehicle
The pyrotechnic system can only provide pro-
is stationary. >
4M8012721BF
tection during one collision. If the pyrotechnic

belt tensioners deploy, the pretensioning sys-
71
— In an emergency, the recall process can be — You must not use seat or protective covers
canceled by pressing the seat adjustment that are not specifically approved for use on
button on that seat. Audi seats with side airbags. Since the side
airbags deploy from the seat backrest, such
Airbag system covers could impair the protective function
of the side airbags.
— Damage to the original seat covers in the
side airbag deployment area must always be
Z\ WARNING repaired by an authorized Audi dealer or au-
— If you have not fastened your safety belt, thorized Audi Service Facility.
you are in an incorrect seating position, or — Airbag system components are installed at
you are too close to the airbag system, the various locations in your vehicle. Incorrect
airbag system will not be able to protect work or repairs on the vehicle could damage
you. This increases the risk of serious or fa- the airbag system components or impair
tal injuries. Make sure that every vehicle their functionality. This may prevent the air-
passenger has their safety belt correctly fas- bags from deploying or cause them to de-
tened and is sitting in a correct seating posi- ploy incorrectly in the event of an accident,
tion = page 62. This is necessary regardless which increases the risk of serious or fatal
of whether the seat is equipped with an air- injuries. Only have an authorized Audi dealer
bag or not. or authorized Audi Service Facility make re-
— Never place your feet on the instrument pairs or modifications to a vehicle.
panel, out of the window, or on the seat sur- — The airbag system can only provide protec-
faces. To help ensure that the airbag system tion during one collision. If there is another
can deploy correctly, never bend forward or collision, the airbag system will not deploy
lean on the door or the side window. Other- again. If the airbag system has deployed,
wise, serious and possibly fatal injuries can have it replaced immediately by an author-
occur if the airbags deploy. ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
— People, animals, or objects between the Facility.
passengers and the airbag system can inter- — Fine dust may appear if the airbags deploy.
fere with the correct deployment of the air- This is completely normal and does not indi-
bag or can be thrown through the vehicle in- cate a fire in the vehicle. The fine dust can ir-
terior, increasing the risk of serious or fatal ritate the skin and mucous membranes in
injuries. Make sure that nothing is located the eyes and can cause difficulty breathing,
between the vehicle occupants and the air- particularly for individuals who have or have
bag system. Do not secure or transport any had asthma or other health issues that af-
objects within the deployment zone of the fect breathing. Exit the vehicle or open the
airbag systems, especially on the steering windows or doors to get access to fresh air.
wheel, on the instrument panel, on the
doors, on the windows, or in the footwell. @ Tips
— Never put stickers on the airbag system cov- If you are transporting children in the vehicle,
ers or cover them with any objects. read the information and follow the safety
— Only lightweight clothing should be hung precautions > page 76.
from the garment hooks in the vehicle. Do
not use clothes hangers to hang clothing. Safety systems monitoring
The pockets of the clothing must not con-
tain any heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged The Ea indicator light in the instrument cluster
objects. This could impair the effectiveness monitors the safety systems such as the airbags
of the side curtain airbags. (including the control modules, sensor, and >
72
wiring) and the belt tensioners. It turns on when

you switch the ignition on and turns off after sev-
Z\ WARNING
eral seconds. Have the malfunction in the safety systems in-
spected immediately. Otherwise, there is a
If the indicator light does not turn on when the risk that the systems may not activate during
ignition is switched on, does not turn off after an accident, which increases the risk of seri-
several seconds, or turns on or flashes while driv- ous or fatal injury.
ing, there may be a malfunction in one of the
safety systems. Drive to an authorized Audi deal-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately
to have the malfunction corrected.
Descript
RAZ.0185
Fig. 61 Airbag overview image (enlarged section: deployed airbags)
The locations of the airbags are labeled with rectly, and when passengers are sitting in the cor-
“AIRBAG”. The following airbags are installed in rect seating position. Airbags are a supplementa-
your vehicle: ry restraint system and do not replace safety
belts.
©@ Driver's airbag
@ Front passenger's airbag Airbags may deploy during front-impact, side-im-
@® Front and rear side airbags, if applicable pact, or rollover accidents.
@ Head curtain airbag with ejection mitigation The deployment area for the airbag system can-
not be defined for every situation, since the cir-
Airbags offer the best possible protection in your
4M8012721BF
cumstances surrounding accidents can vary wide-

vehicle during an accident when they are used to-
ly. Factors that play an important role include the
gether with safety belts that are fastened cor-
condition of the object that the vehicle hits (hard >
73
or soft), the angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc. Advanced airbag system
The deciding factor for the deployment of the air-
bag system is the deceleration that occurs during
an accident. Sensors in the vehicle are designed
to detect the severity of an accident in conjunc-
tion with the control module, and to provide a
targeted and timely deployment of the restraint
system. If the vehicle deceleration that is meas-
ured during an accident is below the specified
reference values in the control module, then the
airbags will not deploy, even though the vehicle
may be severely damaged from the accident. In Fig. 62 Headliner: indicator light to display the status of
the front passenger's airbag
these cases, the vehicle occupants will be pro-
tected by the safety belts if they are fastened and
The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has
worn correctly.
been certified to comply with the requirements
The deployment of the front passenger's airbag of the United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
will depend on the occupancy of the seat Standard (FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor
=> page 74. Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applica-
ble at the time your vehicle was manufactured.
Each deployed airbag is filled with gas. When this
According to these requirements, the front Ad-
occurs, the airbag covers open and the airbags
vanced Airbag System on the passenger’s side
unfold with great force into the deployment zone
has been certified for “suppression” for infants
within milliseconds. Inflated airbags reduce the
approximately 12 months old and younger, and
movement of passengers wearing safety belts in
for “low risk deployment” for children aged 3 to
the direction of the impact and thus help to re-
6 years old (as defined in the standard).
duce the risk of injury. They can help to protect
the head, upper body, and lap, for example. How- The advanced airbag system will activate or deac-
ever, there is the possibility that airbag deploy- tivate the front passenger's airbag based on the
ment can cause injuries. occupancy of the seat. If a front airbag deploys
during an accident, the deployment force will
The airbag system only works when the ignition
adapt to the passenger.
is turned on.
If you or other vehicle passengers have physical Components

limitations that prevent sitting in a correct posi- The advanced airbag system consists of the fol-
tion, modifications to the vehicle may be neces- lowing components:
sary. For more information, contact an author-
— Front airbags in the steering wheel and in the
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
instrument panel on the front passenger's side:
ty, or call Audi customer support at
these can protect the front passengers during
1-800-822-2834.
an accident
@ Tips — Passenger occupant detection sensor in the
front passenger's seat: this detects if the front
The side curtain airbags in your vehicle have
passenger's seat is occupied (for example, by a
ejection mitigation functions. This reduces
person or a small child in a child safety seat)
the risk of being ejected from the vehicle inte-
— Seat position sensors on the front seats: these
rior during an accident, especially in the event
determine the distance between the seat and
of a vehicle rollover.
the steering wheel or instrument panel
— Sensors in the front seat belt latch: these de-
tect if the safety belts are fastened
74
— PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; ON ® indi- Meaning of PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3%, ON
cator light in the headliner:this indicates if the ® indicator light
front passenger's airbag is activated or deacti- When the ignition is switched on, the system de-
vated tects whether the front passenger's seat is occu-
- indicator light in the instrument cluster: pied. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #;, ON @
this monitors the function of the Advanced Air- will turn on for several seconds during this proc-
bag System components to ensure they are ess. Then it will indicate whether the front pas-
functioning correctly senger's airbag is activated or deactivated.
How the components function together — PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #%;: the front
The passenger occupant detection sensor in the
passenger's airbag is deactivated and will not
front passenger's seat detects if the front pas- deploy in the event of an accident.
senger's seat is occupied. The passenger occu- — PASSENGER AIR BAG ON ®: the front pas-
pant detection sensor measures the electrical ca- senger's airbag is activated and could deploy in
pacity on the front passenger’s seat. The pas- the event of an accident.
senger's airbag is activated or deactivated de- If a change to the occupancy status of the front
pending on the electrical capacity that is meas- passenger's seat is detected
ured. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; ON @ will
The passenger's airbag is activated if: flash for several seconds and will then display the
status of the front passenger's airbag.
— The electrical capacity is higher than the
threshold stored in the control module Always make sure the indicator light corresponds
— The electrical capacity is the same as or greater to the occupancy of the front passenger's seat.
than the electrical capacity of a typical adult — An adult or individual of similar size in the
The passenger's airbag is deactivated if: front passenger's seat: the front passenger's
airbag must be activated, therefore
— The electrical capacity is lower than the thresh- PASSENGER AIR BAG ON ® must remain
old stored in the control module turned on.
— The electrical capacity is the same as or less — An individual of smaller size (for example, an
than the electrical capacity of a typical one- adolescent or small adult) in the front pas-
year-old child in a child safety seat that has senger's seat: the front passenger's airbag
been used for certification in accordance with must be activated, so
FMVSS 208 PASSENGER AIR BAG ON ® must stay on.
If the front passenger's airbag is activated, the — Child in a child safety seat on the front pas-
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ indicator light senger's seat: the front passenger's airbag
will turn on. If the front passenger's airbag is de- must be deactivated, so
activated, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; must stay on.
indicator light will turn on. — Front passenger's seat not occupied: the front
passenger's airbag must be deactivated, so
The deployment force of the front airbags adapts
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; must stay on.
based on whether or not the safety belt is used
and the distance between the seat and the steer- ZA\ WARNING
ing wheel/instrument panel. For example, if a
— An adult or a person with a small stature
person is too close to the front airbag, the front
(such as a young person or small adult) seat-
airbag will deploy with less force to help reduce
ed on the front passenger's seat will not be
the risk of injury.
4M8012721BF
protected by the passenger's airbag in the

event of a collision if the passenger's airbag
75
is deactivated. This increases the risk of in- as a laptop or a retrofitted seat heater) are
jury and death. Always make sure that on the front passenger's seat. Do not trans-
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ remains on port any objects on or under the front pas-
while driving. If senger's seat.
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ does not — Seat covers or protective covers may prevent
turn on, make sure the front passenger is the advanced airbag system from correctly
sitting correctly in the seat > page 62 and detecting child safety seats or passengers in
that there is nothing covering the front pas- the front passenger's seat. You must not use
senger's seat (such as blankets or pillows). seat covers or protective covers on the front
If PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @still does passenger's seat that are not specifically ap-
not turn on, the front passenger's seat must proved for use on Audi seats with an ad-
not be used. Drive to an authorized Audi vanced airbag system.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
and have the airbag system inspected.
Child safety seats
A child in a child safety seat on the front
passenger's seat - especially in a rear-facing General information
child safety seat - can receive a severe im-
When installing and using child safety seats, fol-
pact if the front passenger's airbag deploys,
low the information in this Owner's Manual, the
which increases the risk of serious or fatal
applicable state and federal regulations, and the
injury. Always secure child safety seats on
manufacturer instructions for the child safety
the rear seats. If special circumstances re-
seat.
quire the use of a child safety seat on the
front passenger's seat, always make sure You can also obtain useful and current informa-
that PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; stays tion from the following sources:
on while driving. If
U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #¥; does not
tration
turn on, remove the child safety seat and in-
http://www.nhtsa.gov
stall it again according to the child safety
http://www.safercar.gov
seat manufacturer instructions. If
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF &%; still does National SAFE KIDS Campaign
not turn on, the front passenger's seat must http://www.safekids.org
not be used. Drive to an authorized Audi
SafetyBeltSafe U.S.A.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
http://www.carseat.org
and have the airbag system inspected.
Fluids, electronic devices, or mechanical Transport Canada Information Centre
damage on the front passenger's seat may http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
cause the front passenger seat occupant de- Audi Customer Experience Center
tection to malfunction. The system may https://www.audiusa.com/help/contact-us
then incorrectly detect if the front passeng- https://www.audi.ca/ca/web/en/models/layer/
er's seat is occupied. As a result, it could de- contact.html
ploy the front passenger’s airbag incorrectly
or fail to deploy it, which increases the risk ZA\ WARNING
of serious or fatal injury. Make sure that no
To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries,
wet objects (such as a wet hand towel) and
children must always be secured in the vehicle
no fluids come into contact with the front
with a child safety seat that is appropriate for
passenger's seat cushion. If the front pas-
their body size, weight, and age.
senger's seat becomes wet, dry it immedi-
— Children ages 12 and under must be trans-
ately. Make sure no electronic devices (such
ported using the appropriate child safety >
76
seat. Note differences in regulations be- ward in the event of an accident or other
tween states and countries. emergency situation.
— Child safety seats secured incorrectly in the — NEVER use a rear-facing child safety seat on
vehicle may cause serious or fatal injuries in a seat with an ACTIVATED FRONT AIRBAG;
the event of an accident. Always secure the this could cause DEATH or SERIOUS INJU-
child safety seat according to the manufac- RIES to a CHILD.
turer instructions. — Always secure child safety seats on the
— Children or babies must not under any cir- rear seats. If exceptional circumstances re-
cumstances be held on the lap of the driver quire the child safety seat to be placed on
or other passengers while driving. the front passenger's seat, then the front
— Do not secure more than one child in a child passenger's airbag must be deactivated.
safety seat. Always make sure that
— Never allow a child to sit in a child safety PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; stays on
seat unsupervised. while driving. If
— Never allow children to ride unsecured in the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; does not
vehicle or to stand or kneel on the seats turn on, remove the child safety seat and
while driving. In the event of an accident, a install it again according to the child safe-
child could be propelled through the vehicle. ty seat manufacturer instructions. If
This can cause serious or fatal injuries for PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4; still
the child and passengers. does not turn on, the front passenger's
— If children use an incorrect seating position seat must not be used. Drive to an author-
while driving, they have a higher risk of in- ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
jury during a sudden braking maneuver or Facility and have the airbag system in-
accident. This especially applies to children spected.
in the front passenger's seat or children who — If you must use a forward-facing child safety
have their head near the side airbag deploy- seat on the front passenger's seat, move the
ment area, if the airbag system is deployed seat as far back as possible so that it is as
during an accident. This incorrect seating far as possible from the front passenger's
position can cause severe or even fatal inju- airbag. While doing this, make sure the seat
ries. can be adjusted all the way. A child in a child
— Make sure there is enough space in front of safety seat on the front passenger's seat can
the child in the child safety seat. If necessa- receive a severe impact if the front passeng-
ry, adjust the angle and position of the seat er's airbag deploys, which increases the risk
in front of the child safety seat. of serious or fatal injury.
— The rear side of a forward-facing child safety — Replace the child safety seat after an acci-
seat should be positioned as close as possi- dent because there could be damage that is
ble to the backrest on the vehicle seat. If the not visible.
head restraints make it difficult to install a — Even if a child is not sitting in the child safe-
child safety seat, adjust or remove them if ty seat, the child safety seat must be se-
necessary > page 67. Reinstall the head re- cured. An unsecured child safety seat may
straints immediately once the child safety be thrown through the vehicle interior dur-
seat has been removed. ing sudden braking maneuvers or an acci-
— Always make sure that the backrest on the dent.
seat where the child safety seat is installed
is securely locked in place and cannot move
4M8012721BF
forward. Otherwise, the backrest where the

child safety seat is secured could move for-
77
Correct positioning for children — The lap portion of the safety belt lies flat and
securely over the hip area and never over the
Always secure children in a child safety seat de- stomach
signed for the body size, weight, and age of the — The shoulder portion of the safety belt lies flat
child. and securely over the center of the shoulder
You can secure child safety seats in your vehicle and the chest, and never under the arm, behind
using the lower LATCH anchors or the safety the back, or over the neck or face.
belts. You can also secure child safety seats to —The child is able to maintain this seating posi-
the top tether anchor. Depending on the child tion throughout the entire trip
safety seat, it may also be necessary to secure it Read and follow the important information and
to the top tether anchor. In Canada, securing for- warnings regarding the correct use of safety belts
ward-facing child safety seats to the top tether => page 68.
anchors is required by law.
Always transport children in the rear seats G) Tips

— Child safety seats can also be secured to
Accident statistics show that children that are se-
seats with side airbags. In the event of an
cured correctly in the rear seats are safer than in
accident, children can also be protected by
front seats. Always transport children in suitable
the side airbags if the child is correctly se-
child safety seats secured on the rear seats.
cured in a suitable child safety seat that is
In exceptional circumstances: transporting attached correctly.
children in the front passenger's seat — The lower LATCH anchors as well as the
If exceptional circumstances require the child safety belt may be required to correctly in-
safety seat to be placed on the front passenger's stall some child safety seats. Using both at
seat, then the front passenger's airbag must be the same time is permitted, provided that
deactivated. Please note the important informa- the fastening systems or safety belts do not
tion for this > page 74, Advanced airbag system. impair those in an adjacent seating position.
If you must secure a forward-facing child safety —All child safety seats are constructed so that
seat, move the front passenger's seat as far back they can be secured using the lap safety belt
as possible so that it is as far as possible from the in the vehicle.
front passenger's airbag. While doing this, make — Child safety seats with a load leg can only
sure the seat can be adjusted all the way. be secured to the outer rear seats and to the
front passenger's seat.
Only switch to a larger child safety seat when
absolutely necessary
Switch to a larger child safety seat only when ab-
solutely necessary. Secure your child using a safe-
ty belt without a child safety seat only if all of the
RAZ-0272
following statements are true:
—The child is large enough to sit upright in the

seat
— The child is able to sit with his or her back rest-
ing completely on the seat backrest
—The child is able to sit with his or her knees
bent over the edge of the seat surface
—The child is able to sit with both of his or her Fig. 63 Rear bench seat: lower LATCH anchors
feet completely touching the floor in the foot-
well Observe the safety precautions > page 76. >
78
In the United States and Canada, child safety Securing child safety seats with a safety
seats can be secured without safety belts using Pylhg
the LATCH system. LATCH stands for Lower An-
chors and Tethers for Children. In Canada, similar
Observe the safety precautions > page 76. The
front passenger’s seat is a dangerous location for
systems are called UCRA, LUAS, or UAS.
a child, even with an advanced airbag system. If
The lower LATCH anchors in your vehicle are lo- exceptional circumstances require the child safe-
cated on the outer seats of the rear bench seat ty seat to be placed on the front passenger's
between the seat surface and the backrest. These seat, then the front passenger's airbag must be
seating locations each have two lower LATCH an- deactivated. Please note the important informa-
chors that can be used to secure a LATCH child tion for this > page 78, Correct positioning for
safety seat. Marking points with a > fig. 63 sym- children and > page 74, Advanced airbag sys-
bol are located on the covers for the lower LATCH tem.
anchors. You can locate the LATCH anchors using
the marking points. Securing child safety seats
> Applies to: vehicles with forward/back adjusta- > Applies to: vehicles with forward/back adjusta-
ble rear bench seat: Move the rear seat all the ble rear bench seat: Move the rear seat all the
way back. way back.
> Activate the child safety lock > page 45. > Activate the child safety lock > page 45.
> Remove the cover from both lower LATCH an- > If you secure a child safety seat to the rear seat,
chors. secure any unused safety belts that are within
> If you secure a child safety seat to the rear seat, reach of the child > A\, > page 81.
secure any unused safety belts that are within > If you secure a child safety seat to the front
reach of the child > A\ in Securing child safety passenger's seat, adjust the front passenger's
seats with a safety belt on page 80. seat to the highest position.
> Secure the child safety seat according to the > Secure the child safety seat according to the
child safety seat manufacturer instructions. child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
> Pull on the child safety seat to check if both > If necessary, activate the belt retractor lock
sides are engaged correctly in the LATCH an- = page 79, Activating the belt retractor lock.
chors. > If the child safety seat is secured on the front
> If possible, also secure the child safety seat to passenger's seat, adjust the front passenger's
the respective top tether anchor on the seat seat backrest until it rests flat against the child
=> page 80. safety seat. Also make sure that the upper safe-
ty belt fixture is behind the child safety seat.
ZA\ WARNING > If you secure a child safety seat on the rear
seat, also secure it to the correct top tether an-
The LATCH anchors in the vehicle are only de- chor if possible > page 80.
signed for child safety seats with the LATCH
system. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal Activating the belt retractor lock
injury, never secure other child restraint sys- If you secure a child safety seat using the vehicle
tems, belts, or objects to the anchors. safety belt, you must activate the belt retractor
lock. Follow the child safety seat manufacturer
G@) Tips instructions.
The LATCH anchors are designed for a total
The belt retractor lock prevents the safety belt
weight (child and child safety seat combined)
from becoming loose while driving, which could
up to 65 lbs (29 kg). If the total weight is
result in the child safety seat no longer being ad-
4M8012721BF
greater than this, the child safety seat must

equately secured. >
be secured with the vehicle safety belt.
79
> Secure the child safety seat according to the

child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
While doing so, pull out the safety belt. Insert
the safety belt into the belt latch that belongs
to that seat until it audibly locks.
> Pull the upper belt out completely and then al-
low it to retract. You will hear a clicking sound
while the belt is retracting. It will not be possi-
ble to pull the safety belt out any farther.
> Push the child safety seat into the seat and al-
low the belt to retract more.
> Make sure that the child safety seat cannot
move more than 1 inch (2.5 cm). Fig. 64 Rear backrest: top tether anchors to secure a child
safety seat with an upper belt
Deactivating the belt retractor lock
RAZ-0186|
> Unbuckle the safety belt from the belt latch.
> Remove the child safety seat according to the
manufacturer instructions.
> Allow the safety belt to retract completely. The
belt retractor lock is deactivated.
ZA WARNING
—A safety belt that is not locked by the belt
retractor lock or a locking device cannot se- Fig. 65 Rear backrest: securing the upper belt to the top
tether anchor
cure a child safety seat while driving or in
the event of an accident, which increases the
risk of fatal injury. Always make sure the
belt retractor lock on the safety belt is acti- There is a top tether anchor behind every seat in
vated if the child safety seat manufacturer the rear bench seat to additionally secure a child
instructions require it. safety seat with an upper belt.
— Due to the risk of fatal injury, never place a
> Move the head restraint behind the child safety
rear-facing child safety seat on the front
seat upward.
passenger's seat when the front passenger's
> Secure the child safety seat according to the
airbag is switched on.
child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
— For the child safety seat to offer the maxi- > Guide the upper belt on the child safety seat
mum protection, it is especially important under the head restraint or along both sides of
to route the vehicle safety belt correctly. Al- it and toward the rear (depending on the child
ways follow the instructions from the child safety seat model).
safety seat manufacturer for routing the » Fasten the belt to the top tether anchor
safety belt correctly. Incorrectly fastened => fig. 65. While doing this, make sure the belt
safety belts can cause injuries, even during is not twisted and is not running over any sharp
minor accidents. edges.
> Pull the belt tightly so that the child safety seat
rests at the top of the seat backrest.
> If necessary, move the head restraint behind
the child safety seat downward.
80
ZA WARNING fatal injury. Always secure unused safety belts

so that they are not within reach of children in
The top tether anchors in the vehicle are only
child safety seats.
designed for child safety seats equipped with
an upper strap. To reduce the risk of serious or
fatal injury, never secure other child restraint
systems, belts, or objects to the anchors.
SY eM etal re
Prat
Fig. 66 Rear bench seat: securing unused safety belts
If a child safety seat is used on the rear bench

seat, the child must not be able to reach any
safety belts that are not being used. Secure safe-
ty belts that are within reach of the child.
> If you secure a child safety seat to the LATCH

anchors, fasten the safety belt on the seat
where the child safety seat is installed using
the seat's safety belt latch.
> If you secure a child safety seat to one of the
outer seats, fasten the safety belt for the cen-
ter seat in its latch.
> Activate the belt retractor lock on the fastened
safety belts. To do this, pull the upper belt out
completely and then allow it to retract. You will
hear a clicking sound while the belt is retract-
ing. It will not be possible to pull the safety
belt out any farther.
> Make sure the fastened safety belt does not
block access to the LATCH anchors. Otherwise,
it may not be possible to secure the child safety
seat to the LATCH anchors correctly.
ZA WARNING
A child in a child safety seat could play with
4M8012721BF
the unused safety belts and then become en-

tangled in them, which increases the risk of
81
Storage and convenience
Storage and convenience — Disconnect the connectors from the power

sources carefully to reduce the risk of dam-
Power sources aging them.
When the ignition is switched on, you may be

@ Tips
able to use multiple power sources for external
devices, depending on the vehicle equipment. Do not connect any other devices to the sock-
ets when using the compressor* provided by
12 volt sockets the factory > page 286. The power consump-
You can connect electrical accessories to the 12 tion in the sockets may be temporarily ex-
volt sockets. The power usage from the sockets ceeded when using the compressor*.
must not exceed a total of 120 watts. Do not
connect multiple devices to the sockets in the ve- Cup holders
hicle at the same time. Applies to: vehicles with cup holders
The 12 volt sockets are labeled with the 12V

symbol. They are located in the front center con-
sole, in the rear* and on the side trim panel in the
luggage compartment”*.
USB ports
Applies to: vehicles with USB port
You can charge mobile devices using the USB

ports. The USB ports are labeled with the «> or
[4 symbol or CHARGE ONLY.
Z\ WARNING
— To reduce the risk of fatal injury, store all
connected devices securely when driving so
that they do not move around inside the ve-
hicle when braking or in the event of an acci-
dent.
— Incorrect usage can lead to serious injuries
or burns. To reduce the risk of injuries, never
leave children unattended in the vehicle
Fig. 68 Rear center armrest*: cup holders
with the vehicle key.
Cup holders in the front center console
® Note
> The cup holder (2) may be under a cover. To
— Read the operating manuals for the con-
open the cup holder, tap on the strip on the
nected devices.
cover.
— To reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle
electrical system, never attempt to charge Cup holders in the rear center armrest*
the vehicle battery by connecting accesso- > Fold the center armrest* downward.
ries that provide power to the power sour- > To open the cup holder, tap on the button @).
ces. > To close the cup holder, fold the cover back un-
— Do not connect any device whose network til it clicks into place.
class (voltage) does not match the network
class designed for the socket.
82
ZA WARNING — Make sure your view toward the rear is not

blocked, for example by hanging clothing or
— Do not put any hot beverages in the cup
objects in the vehicle.
holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot bev-
erages could spill, which increases the risk
of injury. Luggage compartment
— Do not use any breakable beverage contain- General information
ers (for example, made out of glass or por-
celain). You could be injured by them in the All pieces of luggage or objects must be securely
event of an accident. fastened in the luggage compartment. Note the
following to maintain good vehicle handling:
@) Note
> Distribute the load evenly in the luggage com-
Beverage containers in the cup holders should partment.
always have a lid. Otherwise, the liquid inside > Stow heavy luggage as far forward in the lug-
could spill and cause damage to vehicle gage compartment as possible.
equipment. > Use non-elastic cords attached to the tie-downs
to secure objects.
Storage and
compartments ZA WARNING
— Applies to: vehicles with luggage compart-
Additional storage
ment cover: The luggage compartment cov-
Depending on vehicle equipment, there are a va- er is not a surface for storing objects. Ob-
riety of storage areas, compartments, and retain- jects placed on the cover increase the risk of
ers, such as the glove compartment, for safely injury to all vehicle occupants during sudden
storing and securing objects. driving or braking maneuvers or in the event
of an accident.
Z\ WARNING — Applies to: vehicles with luggage compart-
—To reduce the risk of injury, make sure all
ment cover: The luggage compartment cov-
storage compartments are always closed er must always be securely fastened when in
while driving. use to reduce the risk of an accident.
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve- — Loose objects can be thrown around the ve-
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- hicle interior during sudden driving or brak-
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of
an accident. Store objects securely while an accident. Always stow objects securely in
driving. the luggage compartment and secure them
at the tie-downs. Use straps suitable for
— Only use the storage compartments in the
heavy objects.
door trim panels to store small objects that
will not stick out of the compartment and —If pieces of luggage or objects are secured
impair the function of the side airbags. to the tie-downs with unsuitable or dam-
aged straps, this can increase the risk of in-
— Only lightweight clothing should be hung
jury during braking maneuvers or accidents.
from the garment hooks in the vehicle. Do
not use clothes hangers to hang clothing. — When transporting heavy objects, the vehi-
The pockets of the clothing must not con- cle characteristics will change due to the
tain any heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged shift in the center of gravity, which increases
objects. This could impair the effectiveness the risk of an accident. You may need to
4M8012721BF
of the side curtain airbags. adapt your driving style and speed to the
current conditions.
83
— The cargo net* is only strong enough to se- bench seat to protect the backrest from
cure light objects. Heavy objects are not ade- damage.
quately secured. Attempting to secure heavy — If you move the front seat back when the
objects increases the risk of injury. rear seat backrest is folded forward, you
— Never exceed the permitted axle and load could damage the head restraints on the
and vehicle weight > page 314. rear seat.
— Never secure a child safety seat to the tie- — Make sure that the heating grid strips for
downs. the rear window defogger are not damaged
— Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe- by abrasive objects.
cially if the luggage compartment lid is — Applies to: vehicles with manual luggage
open. Children could enter the luggage com- compartment cover: Let the luggage com-
partment and close the luggage compart- partment cover roll up slowly to reduce the
ment lid from the inside. This creates the risk of damage.
risk of fatal injury, since the children would
be locked in and may not be able to escape @ Tips
by themselves. — The tire pressure must be adapted to the
— Do not allow children to play in or on the ve- load > page 266.
hicle. Close and lock the luggage compart- — You can purchase straps at specialty stores.
ment lid as well as all other doors when you
leave the vehicle. Manual luggage compartment cover
— Never transport passengers in the luggage Applies to: vehicles with manual luggage compartment cover
compartment. Every passenger must be cor-
rectly secured with the safety belts in the
vehicle > page 68.
— Be careful when releasing the backrest and
folding it forward. To reduce the risk of be-
ing pinched, pay attention and check when
folding backrests forward.
— The backrest must be securely latched so
objects cannot slide forward out of the lug-
gage compartment during sudden braking.
— The backrest must be latched securely to en-
sure that the safety belt is protecting the
center seating position.
— Always pull forward on the backrest to make
sure it is check if it is correctly locked in
place.
@) Note
—To reduce the risk of damage, move the rear
head restraints down > page 67 before fold-
ing the rear backrests forward. Fig. 70 Luggage compartment: removing the luggage
compartment cover
— When folding the backrest forward, make
sure the outer safety belts are in the belt
Observe the safety precautions > page 83. >
guide recess so that they do not get pinched
in the backrest lock and damaged. Other ob-
jects should be removed from the rear
84
> To pull the luggage compartment cover out, > Push the cover downward until it clicks into
hold the handle @ on the cover and pull it to- place.
ward the rear of the vehicle until it locks into
place audibly at the ends of the guide rails 2).
> To retract the luggage compartment cover, lift Applies to: vehicles with air suspension
it lightly and guide it slowly by hand toward the
front of the vehicle without letting it retract
quickly.
> To remove the luggage compartment cover,
pull both levers (3) firmly in the direction of the
arrow and remove the cover upward.
> To install the luggage compartment cover,
place the cover in the mounts on the side trim
panels on the left and right side.
> Push the cover downward until it clicks into
place. Fig. 72 Left side of the luggage compartment: rear lower-
ing button
lg gage compartment [coy ees The rear of the vehicle can be lowered to make
Applies to: vehicles with power luggage compartment cover
loading and unloading easier.
Requirement: all vehicle doors must be closed.

The trailer mode for air suspension is switched
off.
Qs > Open the luggage compartment lid.
Z
> To lower the rear of the vehicle, press on the
lower section of the button @).
> To raise the rear of the vehicle, press on the up-
per section of the button @).
Fig. 71 Luggage compartment: retracted cover (power) The LED in the button will turn on while the vehi-
cle is lowering. When the loading level has been
Observe the safety precautions > page 83. reached, the LED will stay on as long as the rear
If you open the luggage compartment lid, the of the vehicle is in the lowered position. The LED
power luggage compartment cover will move in- turns off when the vehicle returns to the original
to position @ or Q). level.
> You can also operate the power luggage com- The rear of the vehicle will be automatically
partment cover manually. To do this, slowly raised when you select another mode or start to
guide the cover by hand into position @ or 2) drive.
without letting it move quickly.
> To remove the luggage compartment cover, ©) Note
bring it into position @, pull the lever @) — Do not park the vehicle in a lowered loading
=> page 84, fig. 70 firmly in the direction of the level.
arrow, and remove the cover upward. — Also refer to the information about ground
> To install the luggage compartment cover, clearance > page 113.
place the cover in the mounts on the side trim
4M8012721BF
panels on the Left and right side.
8s
Applies to: vehicles with pass-through

— The vehicle will not lower when the ignition
is switched off if the compressed air reser-
voir is empty. The button LED blinks three
times.
— If the compressed air reservoir is empty, it is
refilled while driving at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h).
Increasing the size of the luggage

Clonal Tadaatg LA
Fig. 74 Center backrest: release button
Applies to: vehicles with folding backrests
> To fold the center backrest forward, press the

release button @).
> After the transport, fold the center backrest up
until it locks into place.
Partition net)
Applies to: vehicles with partition net
Fig. 73 Rear bench seat: release lever
The rear seat backrests can be folded forward ei-

ther separately or together.
> If necessary, slide the rear bench seat forward

=> page 66.
> Pull the release lever (@) in the direction of the
arrow to fold the backrest forward.
> Fold the backrest forward until it locks into
place.
> To fold the backrest back, pull the release lever
@ again in the direction of the arrow.
> After the transport, fold the backrest up until it
locks into place.
Fig. 76 Luggage compartment: partition net
The partition net prevents objects from sliding

into the passenger compartment. You can attach >
D_Incertain countries.
86
the partition net behind the front or rear seats. Tie-downs

Use the mounting eyelets @ or @ for this. There are tie-downs (@) in the luggage compart-
Observe the safety precautions > page 83. ment to secure pieces of luggage and objects.
> Fold the backrest forward, if necessary » Use the tie-downs to secure the cargo.
=> page 86.
Cargo net
> To attach the partition net, secure it in the up-
Applies to: vehicles with cargo net
per mounting eyelets first, and then in the low-
er mounting eyelets. Use the cargo net (2)
to secure lighter objects in
> Tighten and secure the straps @). the luggage compartment
> Slide the lower section of the partition net @) > Fold the clip for the tie-downs upward.
to the desired level. > Attach the hooks for the cargo net to the tie-
> To release the partition net, loosen the strap downs.
®.
Cargo floor
@ Tips
— The straps must face toward the rear when
attaching the partition net.
— You must disengage the partition net before
folding the backrest back into the upright
position.
Tie-downs and cargo net
Removing and installing the cargo floor

> To remove the cargo floor, pull the entire cargo
floor toward the back of the vehicle.
> To install the cargo floor, insert the tabs at
both sides into the openings and slide the car-
go floor all the way in toward the backrest
> fig. 79.
FOR RO OTT ce MY
Fig. 78 Luggage compartment: luggage compartment net*
stretched out
4M8012721BF
87
Roof rack — Distribute the cargo evenly on the roof rack

and do not exceed the maximum width or
General information
the maximum total roof load weight.
Applies to: vehicles with roof rack mount
— Before every trip, all bolts and connections
x on the roof rack must be checked. Tighten
Ss
$> them if necessary and recheck them regular-
a
a
ly. If you do not do this, there is a higher risk
of the roof rack or the attachments loosen-
ing or falling off.
@) Note
— If you use other roof luggage rack systems
or do not install the roof racks as specified,
Fig. 80 Roof rail: mounting points then any damage to the vehicle is not cov-
ered by the warranty. Carefully follow the
If luggage or cargo is to be carried on the roof, assembly and installation instructions in-
you must observe the following: cluded with the roof rack carrier system.
— These roof racks are the basis for a complete —To reduce the risk of damage, you must re-
roof rack system. Only roof racks that are suita- move the roof rack and attachment before
ble for your vehicle may be used. Audi recom- taking your vehicle through an automatic
mends roof racks and attachments from the car wash.
Audi Genuine Accessories program. — Make sure that the luggage compartment
— Make sure the roof rack is mounted on the vehi- lid and the panoramic glass roof* do not
cle only at the specified locations > fig. 80. come into contact with objects on the roof
— Note the permitted axle load, permitted total when they are open.
weight, and permitted roof load of your vehicle
=> page 314. The roof load is the total of the (4) For the sake of the environment
weight of the roof rack, the attachments and Energy usage will increase because of the in-
the cargo you are carrying. However, you must creased wind resistance. Remove the roof rack
also note the permitted load of the carrier sys- when you are no longer using it.
tem being used.
Z\ WARNING
— Follow the installation instructions provided
with the roof rack system. If you do not se-
cure the roof rack system and objects on the
roof correctly, they could come loose from
the vehicle and cause an accident.
— The risk of an accident increases when using
a roof rack system, because it changes the
driving characteristics by shifting the center
of gravity and/or the increasing the surface
area exposed to wind. You may need to
adapt your driving style and speed to the
current conditions. Audi recommends that
you do not drive faster than 80 mph (130
km/h).
88
Installing the roof rack > Tighten the screw in the direction of @) using
Applies to: vehicles with roof racks supplied by the factory the torque wrench @). Make sure the arrow on
the socket wrench and the arrow on the screw
=3
line up exactly. The required tightening specifi-
£=
ira cation is 4.5 ft lbs (6 Nm).
a
> Repeat these steps for the other mounting
points for the roof rack.
ZA\ WARNING
When installing a factory-supplied roof rack
system on the roof rail, the ESC will use sen-
sors to adapt itself to the different center of
gravity if it changes because of carrying a
load. This does not occur when using other
roof rack systems, so the risk of an accident
will increase.
Installing the attachments

Applies to: vehicles with roof racks supplied by the factory
> Remove the cap ©) to mount attachments on

the roof rack > page 89, fig. 81.
Fig. 81 Roof rail: installing a roof rack
» Slide the attachment into the T-groove ().
The roof rack set consists of a front and rear roof > Tighten the attachment according to the roof
rack, the cover profile and a socket wrench. On rack installation instructions.
the inner side of the roof rail, there are two holes > Close the cap ©).
for the rear roof rack. To prevent the front and
rear roof racks from being switched during instal- Installing the cover profile
lation, there are three holes on the left inner side Applies to: vehicles with roof racks supplied by the factory
and two holes on the right inner side > page 88,
» After you have mounted the attachments, seal
fig. 80.
the openings in the T-groove @) > page 89,
> Before mounting the roof rack, open the cap @ fig. 81 with the cover profile (8). The cover pro-
upward. file must not be installed under the caps ©.
> Use the socket wrench (2) to loosen the left and > If you do not want to use the attachment, seal
right screw in the direction of@ until resist- the whole T-groove (7) with the cover profile @).
ance is felt. Make sure the arrow on the socket » If necessary, shorten the cover profile @) so
wrench and the arrow on the screw line up ex- that it matches the length of the open sections
actly. of the T-groove. The caps ©) must be closed.
> Clean the rubber washers (4) and the roof rail
around the mounting points.
> Carefully place the roof rack over the holes in
the roof rail. Make sure the sticker is on the left
side of the vehicle and the imprinted arrow
points in the direction of travel.
> Place the pins @) into the holes. The claw fas-
4M8012721BF
tener G) must engage into the edge of the roof

rail. Make sure the rubber washers () lie flat on
the roof rail.
89
Warm and cold
Warm and cold — The energy management system may tem-

porarily switch off certain functions, such as
Climate control system the seat heating” or rear window defogger.
These systems are available again as soon as
the energy supply has been restored.
One of the following options may be available,
depending on vehicle equipment:
— A deluxe automatic climate control system with
[RAZ-0638
3 zones where the temperature, air distribu-
tion, and air supply can be set separately on the
left front side, the right front side, and in the
rear
— A deluxe automatic climate control system with
4 zones to individually adjust the temperature,
air distribution, and amount of ventilation at all
of the seats
Fig. 82 Center console: lower display and switch panel
The climate control system warms, cools, dehu-
midifies, and filters the air in the vehicle interior. Settings are adjusted using both displays, the
It is the most effective when the windows and switch panel in the center console, and the con-
panoramic glass roof* are closed. If there is a trol panel in the rear. For information on how to
build-up of heat inside the vehicle, ventilation operate the touch displays, see > page 18, Touch
can help to speed up the cooling process. displays.
The deluxe climate control system automatically You can adjust all climate control system settings
maintains a temperature once it has been set. In in the front; only certain functions are available
all heating mode functions except defrost, the in the rear.
blower only switches to a higher speed once the
Lower display
coolant has reached a certain temperature.
The lower display has two sections with controls:
Pollutant filter
You can regulate the blower and the air distribu-
The pollutant filter removes pollutants such as
tion automatically using AUTO in area @). You can
dust and pollen from the air.
also apply individual settings here.
@ For the sake of the environment In area Q), you can switch individual climate con-
Energy can be saved by switching off the A/C trol system functions on and off.
mode. Switch panel in the center console
@ Tips Both the & and & buttons to defog windows as

quickly as possible are located in area @).
— To prevent interference with the heating or
cooling output and to prevent the windows Upper display
from fogging over, the air intake in front of
In the upper display, you can switch additional
the windshield must be free of ice, snow,
functions on and off, display them, and adjust
and leaves.
settings.
— Condensation from the cooling system can
drip and form a puddle of water under the > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
vehicle. This is normal and does not mean VEHICLE > Air conditioning, or
there is a leak. > Press +++ on the lower display.
90
Warm and cold
Control panel in rear OFF Switching off

You can operate certain climate control functions The climate control system is switched off. Air
in the rear using the control panel. supply from the outside is blocked. If you press
OFF in the front, the front and rear climate con-
Customizing
trol system will switch off. If you press OFF in the
A climate control function from the upper display rear, the rear climate control system will switch
can be assigned to each button to the left and off. To switch the climate control system back on,
right of +++ in area @). press on any button in the respective display.
> Press and hold the symbol for the desired func- A/C / ME Cooling mode
tion on the upper display for at least three sec-
The cooling mode only functions with the blower
onds. A menu that consists of two sections ap-
turned on. The air is not cooled and humidity is
pears.
not reduced when cooling mode is switched off.
> If you pull the symbol toward the left section,
This can cause fog on the windows. The cooling
the button to the left of «++ will be assigned.
mode switches off automatically at low outside
> If you pull the symbol toward the right section,
temperatures.
the button to the right of «++ will be assigned.
If you activate the A/C, the cooling mode will be
automatically regulated.
Press the buttons to turn the functions on or off.

If you activate 4, the cooling mode will run with
maximum cooling output and maximum blower
One bar in the button or the LED in the button
speed. To reduce unnecessary energy usage, only
will light up when the function is switched on.
use this function briefly.
Some buttons can have several functions as-
signed to them. The various functions can be ac- + /- Temperature
tivated by pressing the button multiple times.
Temperatures between 60 °F (+16 °C) and 84 °F
AUTO Automatic mode (+28 °C) can be set. If outside of this range,
LOW / LO or HIGH / HI will appear in the display.
The automatic mode regulates the amount of air
In both settings, the climate control runs con-
and air distribution automatically, so that the set
stantly at the maximum cooling or heating level.
temperature is reached is quickly as possible.
The temperature is not regulated.
REAR Rear climate control system
&§ Blower
To enable operation of the climate control sys-
With \“ / A, you can manually adjust the vol-
tem from the rear of the vehicle, press REAR.
ume of air generated by the blower to your pref-
To exit this mode again, press REAR or erences. The blower should always run at a low
REAR MODE EXIT. setting to prevent the windows from fogging and
to ensure a continuous exchange of air inside the
SYNC Synchronization
vehicle. To have the blower regulated automati-
When synchronization is switched on, the tem- cally, press AUTO.
perature, air distribution, and blower strength on
the driver's side is applied to all seat positions. 2 Air distribution
You can also control the synchronization directly With °@/<>/%, you can select the vents from
using a gesture. Pull two fingers together on the which the air will flow. To have the air distribu-
lower display > page 18. tion controlled automatically, press the AUTO
button or deactivate all three arrows. With “2,
4M8012721BF
the air will be directed toward the windshield. >
91
Warm and cold
Applies to: vehicles with 4-zone automatic cli- £) Seat ventilation

mate control: You can press JJ in the rear control Applies to: vehicles with seat ventilation
panel multiple times to adjust the air distribution The seat ventilation intensity can be set to multi-
based on the direction of the arrow. ple levels. Press 2) once to switch on the highest
level. Press 2) again to decrease the heat level
® Defrosting
one level at a time. The seat ventilation is switch-
The windshield and side windows are defrosted ed off if the button is not illuminated.
or cleared of condensation as quickly as possible.
Align the outer air vents with the side windows. @ Child safety lock*
The maximum amount of air flows mainly from If8 turns on in the control panel in the rear, the
the vents below the windshield. Recirculation child safety lock is active and operation is blocked
mode switches off. The temperature should be => page 45.
set at 72 °F (+22 °C) or higher. Depending on the
outside temperature, the A/C cooling mode may Ionizer
Applies to: vehicles with ionizer
automatically switch on.
Hazardous particles and germs in the air may be
& Rear window defogger
reduced through ionization. This helps to im-
The rear window defogger only operates when prove the air quality for individuals in the passen-
the engine is running. It switches off automati- ger compartment.
cally after 10 to 20 minutes, depending on the
outside temperature.
&" Fragrance
Applies to: vehicles with fragrance function
To prevent the rear window defogger from
The fragrance function will dispense a scent in
switching off automatically, press and hold the
the vehicle interior. It is dispensed through the
button for more than three seconds. It will re-
front outer vents. This will produce a pleasant
main on until the ignition is switched off.
scent. The fragrance is time-delayed, especially
Auto at low or high temperatures. You can adjust the
/& Recirculation mode
fragrance function > page 93.
In recirculation mode, the air inside the vehicle is
circulated and filtered. This prevents the unfil- Residual heat
tered air outside the vehicle from entering the
The residual heat from the coolant is used to
vehicle interior > A\.
heat the vehicle interior. To use this function,
Pressing <> switches recirculation mode on or press and hold the ®% button for more than two
off manually. seconds while the ignition is switched off. The
AUTO function switches off automatically after about
When switched on, automatic recirculation <3
15 minutes.
controls the recirculation mode automatically.
You must press the & button if fog forms on the
windows.
Z\ WARNING
— You should not use the recirculation mode
« Seat heating for an extended period of time, because no
Applies to: vehicles with heated seats fresh air is drawn in and the windows can
The seat heating temperature can be set at mul- fog when cooling mode is switched off. This
tiple levels. Press 4 once to switch on the highest increases the risk of an accident.
level. Press «/ again to decrease the temperature — Individuals with reduced sensitivity to pain
one level at a time. The seat heating is switched or temperature could develop burns when
off if the button is not illuminated. using the seat heating* function. To reduce
the risk of injury, these individuals should
not use seat heating*.
92
Warm and cold
@) Note Steering wheel heating

To reduce the risk of damage to the seat heat- Sica ie Rola
ing* elements, do not kneel on the seats or Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating
place heavy pressure on one area of the seat.
> Press @ to switch steering wheel heating on or
@) Tips off.
— If the front passenger's seat heating” is You can also operate the steering wheel heating
turned on, it will not turn on again automat- using the multifunction steering wheel
ically if more than 10 minutes have passed > page 31.
between switching the ignition off and on
again.
— Only use the fragrance function* in modera- Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating
tion and take any other passengers and ani-

@& Steering wheel heating: on / Steering wheel
mals into consideration when using the
heating: off
function. An overlap of different scents or
odors could cause discomfort. If there is This message appears if you have switched the
discomfort, reduce the intensity or switch steering wheel heating on or off.
the fragrance function* off. Only use fra-
Steering wheel heating: malfunction! See own-
grances that are approved by Audi.
er's manual
If this message appears, there is a malfunction.

Adjusting the vents
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
You can open and close the vents using the or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
thumbwheels. The levers adjust the direction of malfunction repaired.
the airflow from the vents.
Fluids in the A/C system
Additional settings
Refrigerant in the A/C system
You can adjust additional settings. The sticker in the engine compartment provides
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: information about the type and amount of refrig-
VEHICLE > Air conditioning > ©}. erant used in the vehicle’s A/C system. The stick-
er is located in the front section of the engine
Fragrance compartment or at the front or back of the hood.
Applies to: vehicles with fragrance function
Using Fragrance selection, you can select the fra- Symbol |Meaning
A
grance and see the fill level of the fragrance. Warning: the A/C system must only
be serviced by qualified technicians.
You can select the strength of the scent with Fra-
grance level.
Footwell temperature*
te Refrigerant type
You can adjust the footwell temperature for the ot Lubricant type
driver and front passenger. Refer to the service information

(only available for authorized Audi
dealers or authorized Audi Service
4M8012721BF
Facilities)
2 The A/C system must only be serv-
a3] iced by qualified technicians. >
93
Warm and cold
& Flammable refrigerant
Make sure all components are dis-

posed of correctly and never install
q components in the vehicle that have
been removed from old vehicles or
taken from recycling.
Lubricant in the A/C system

The sticker in the engine compartment provides
information about the type and amount of refrig-
erant oil used in the vehicle’s A/C system. For the
refrigerant oil quantity, refer to the Technical Da-
ta > page 314.
To ensure secure and safe operation, the A/C

system must only be serviced by qualified
technicians and certified technicians (SAE
standard J2845).
— Never repair the A/C system evaporator with

components from old vehicles or from recy-
cling.
— New replacement evaporators for portable
A/C systems must be certified and labeled
as such, so that they comply with the SAE
standard J2842 HFO-1234yf and R744.
94
Driving
Driving Switching on and off

If you would like to switch the ignition on or off
Starting the vehicle without starting the engine, follow these steps:
pyr
Told T ola (ela) > Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button without
pressing the brake pedal.
Switching the ignition off automatically

To prevent the vehicle battery from draining, the
ignition and possibly the exterior lighting may
switch off automatically.
Requirements:
— The Start/Stop system must have stopped the
engine.
Fig. 83 Center console: starting the engine — You must have left the vehicle for longer than
30 seconds.
Requirement: the key must be in the vehicle.
— The ignition must be switched on.
Starting the engine Among other indicators, the system detects that
> Press and hold the brake pedal. you have left the vehicle based on the following
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button. The factors:
engine will start. — The driver's door has been opened.
Equipment that uses a lot of electricity is switch- — The driver's safety belt has been unbuckled.
ed off temporarily when you start the engine. If — The brake pedal is not being pressed.
the engine does not start immediately, the start-
The ignition will also be switched off after 30 mi-
ing procedure stops automatically after a short
nutes or if you lock the vehicle from the outside.
time. If this is the case, repeat the starting pro-
cedure after approximately 30 seconds. Z\ WARNING
Stopping the engine —To reduce the risk of asphyxiation, never al-
low the engine to run in confined spaces.
> Bring the vehicle to a full stop.
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button. The — Never turn off the engine before the vehicle
engine will switch off. has come to a complete stop. Switching it
off before the vehicle has stopped may im-
Applies to: vehicles with steering lock: The steer- pair the function of the brake booster and
ing is locked when you turn off the engine with power steering. You would then need to use
the selector lever in the “P” position and open more force to steer and brake the vehicle.
the driver's door. The steering lock helps prevent The fact that you cannot steer and brake as
vehicle theft. usual may increase the risk of accidents and
serious injuries.
Stopping the engine in an emergency
— Secure the vehicle against rolling before ex-
If necessary in an emergency, the engine can also iting the vehicle > page 96.
be stopped while driving using the emergency off
function*. CG) Note
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button twice in — Avoid high engine speed, full throttle, and
a row or press and hold it one time.
4M8012721BF
heavy engine load if the engine has not

reached operating temperature yet. You
could damage the engine.
95
Driving
— If the engine has been under heavy load for The battery in the vehicle key may be drained or
an extended period of time, heat builds up there may be a malfunction. To start the vehicle,
in the engine compartment after the engine you must also hold the vehicle key against the lo-
is switched off and there is a risk of damag- cation shown ?) > page 95, fig. 83.
ing the engine. For this reason, let the en-
If the malfunction remains, drive immediately to
gine run at idle for approximately two mi-
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
nutes before shutting it off.
Service Facility to have the malfunction correct-
G) Tips ed.
— Brief noises are normal when starting and

When driving
stopping the vehicle and are no cause for
concern. Starting to drive, stopping, and parking
— For up to 10 minutes after stopping the en-
Starting from a stop
gine, the radiator fan may turn on again au-
tomatically or it may continue to run, even if > Press and hold the brake pedal.
the ignition is switched off. > Start the engine.
— It may not be possible to start the vehicle in > Select a gear.
extremely low temperatures. > Release the parking brake.
— Power will be fully available once the engine > Release the brake pedal. The vehicle may roll.
is at operating temperature. » Press the accelerator pedal to accelerate.
Securing the vehicle against rolling

Messages
Secure your vehicle to prevent it from rolling be-
= Engine start system: malfunction! Please fore exiting the vehicle.
contact Service
> Set the parking brake.
Do not switch the ignition off because you may > Select the “P” selector lever position.
not be able to switch it on again. Drive to an au- > If parking on a steep road, turn the steering
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service wheel so that your vehicle will roll against the
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor- curb in case it should start to move.
rected.
If one of these measures is not possible, for ex-
FJ Engine start system: malfunction! Please ample because there is no vehicle power, you
contact Service must secure your vehicle against rolling using ad-
ditional measures.
There is a malfunction in the engine start system.
> Only park the vehicle on a level surface.
> Use suitable objects to block the front and rear
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
wheels.
Set the parking brake before selecting the “P” se-
| Remote control key: key not detected. Is the
lector lever position. This prevents too much
key still in the vehicle?
stress from being placed on the locking mecha-
The vehicle key was removed from the vehicle nism when parking on a steep surface.
while the engine is running. If the vehicle key is
no longer in the vehicle, you cannot switch the ig- ZA WARNING
nition on or start the engine once you stop it. You
— Always set the parking brake when leaving
also cannot lock the vehicle from the outside.
your vehicle, even if for a short period of >
Remote control key: hold back of key
against the designated area. See owner's man-
ual
96
Driving
time. If the parking brake is not set, the ve- > To activate hill hold assist, press and hold the
hicle could roll away, increasing the risk of brake pedal for several seconds while the vehi-
an accident. cle is stationary.
— Do not leave your vehicle unattended while
the engine is running, because this increases ZA\ WARNING
the risk of an accident. — If you do not begin driving immediately af-
— If the parking brake is set, it can release au- ter releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle
tomatically when the accelerator pedal is may begin to roll backward. Press the brake
pressed. To reduce the risk of an accident, pedal or set the parking brake immediately.
do not inadvertently press the accelerator — The hill hold assist cannot hold the vehicle
pedal and always shift into “P” when the ve- on inclines in every scenario (for example,
hicle is stopped. on slippery or icy ground).
— If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition
off and take the key with you. This is espe-
Gears and driving programs
cially important when leaving persons or an-
imals in the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle
[RAZ-0410)
could start unintentionally, the parking R @
brake could release, or electronic equipment
could activate, which increases the risk of an
accident.
tN
(2
tT.
— No persons or animals should be left in a
locked vehicle. Locked doors make it more
difficult for emergency workers to enter the
vehicle, which puts lives at risk.
— If you do not begin driving immediately af- Fig. 84 Center console: selector lever
ter releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle
may begin to roll backward. Press the brake The automatic transmission shifts automatically
pedal or set the parking brake immediately. depending on the selected gear and the current
driving style. When driving with a moderate driv-
@) Note ing style, upshifting early and downshifting late
will help to improve fuel economy. When driving
If you have to stop on an incline, always press
the brake pedal to hold the vehicle in place to with a sporty driving style, the transmission per-
mits higher RPMs.
reduce the risk of the vehicle rolling back-
ward. Do not try to hold the vehicle in place The gears are displayed next to the selector lever.
by pressing and holding the accelerator pedal.
—P (Park)
The transmission can overheat, which increas-
—R (Reverse): driving in reverse
es the risk of damage.
—N (Neutral): idle
—D (Drive)
Hill hold assist
Selecting a gear
If you take your foot off of the brake pedal when
driving on hills, the braking force will be held for Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
several seconds. At that time, you can start driv- — Bring the vehicle to a full stop and press the
ing without the vehicle rolling backward. brake pedal.
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed, — Press the release button @ on the selector lev-
4M8012721BF
the engine must be on, and the vehicle must be er. >
traveling uphill.
97
Driving
—To select the nearest gear, move the selector —D (Drive): normal driving mode
lever forward or back until you feel the first —S (Sport): sporty driving mode
pressure point.
If you select the dynamic mode in Audi drive se-
—To skip a gear (for example, move from “D” to
lect*, the “S” driving program will be activated.
“R”), move the selector lever past the pressure
When the ignition is switched off, the driving pro-
point in the desired direction.
gram may be reset to “D”.
— The label next to the selector lever for the se-
lected gear will light up. To switch between the current driving program
and “S”, push the selector lever toward the rear.
“N” (Neutral) gear
In the “N” gear, power is not transmitted to the ZA\ WARNING
driving wheels. Use the “N” gear in a car wash — Before you start driving, check if the label
(with conveyor belts), for example. for the desired selector lever position next
to the selector lever is lit up.
If you unintentionally select “N” while driving
(faster than 1 mph (2 km/h)), you can also shift — Secure the vehicle against rolling before ex-
back to “D” without pressing the brake pedal. iting the vehicle > page 96.
— Power is still transmitted to the wheels
For safety reasons, the vehicle cannot be locked when the engine is running at idle. To pre-
when the transmission is in the "N” gear. vent the vehicle from “creeping”, you must
“Pp” (Park) gear keep your foot on the brake in all selector
lever positions (except "P" and "N") when
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. the engine is running.
The vehicle is secured from rolling away by the — To reduce the risk of an accident, do not
parking lock when in the “P” gear. press the accelerator pedal when changing
gears if the vehicle is stationary and the en-
— Bring the vehicle to a full stop and press the
gine is running.
brake pedal.
— Never select the “R" or "P” gears while driv-
— Press the “P” button (2) on the selector lever.
ing. Doing so could cause an accident.
— The “P” next to the selector lever will light up.
— The vehicle can roll even if the ignition is
“P” engages automatically if you switch the en- switched off.
gine off while the “D” or “R” gear is selected. If
you switch the engine off in “N”, “P” will engage (i) Tips
automatically after approximately 30 minutes. If you shift between “D” and “R” within one
If you want to switch to another gear from “P”, second, you do not need to press the brake
the engine must be running. pedal. This makes it possible to “rock” if it is
stuck, for example.
If you cannot shift out of “P”, for example be-
cause the vehicle has no power, you may need to
use the emergency release for the parking lock
=> page 100.
Selecting the driving program

Various driving programs can be selected when in
the “D” gear. The programs influence when the
transmission shifts and how the accelerator ped-
al responds.
The selected driving program is displayed in the

instrument cluster.
98
Driving
Manual shi > To switch back to automatic mode, press and

hold the @) shift paddle or push the selector
lever toward the rear.
RAZ-0411
If you stop using the shift paddles temporarily,
the transmission will switch back to automatic
mode. To keep shifting manually, tilt the selector
lever toward the front passenger's side.
@ Tips
— The transmission only allows manual shift-
Fig. 85 Center console: shifting manually with the selector ing when the engine speed is within the per-
lever mitted range.
— The transmission automatically shifts up or
RAZ-0003
down before critical engine speed is
reached.
— Applies to: RS models: When accelerating,
the transmission will not automatically shift
to the next gear shortly before the maxi-
mum permitted engine RPM is reached.
Shift to the next highest gear at the right
time.
——
Fig. 86 Steering wheel: shift paddles*
Accelerator pedal
You can shift the gears manually when in “D”
mode. The transmission must be in tiptronic You can accelerate the vehicle using the accelera-
mode. tor pedal.
Depending on the equipment, you may be able to

Shifting with the selector lever
adjust the haptic feedback for the accelerator
You can shift into manual shifting mode while the pedal in the MMI.
vehicle is stationary or while driving.
— Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > (Charg-
> To switch to manual shifting mode, tilt the se- ing & Efficiency) > Efficiency assist > (Interac-
lector lever toward the front passenger's side tive accelerator).
> fig. 85. “M” will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. Accelerator pedal feedback / predictive
> Upshifting: push the selector lever forward (@). messages
> Downshifting: push the selector lever toward Haptic feedback in the accelerator pedal indi-
the rear ©). cates when you should take your foot off the ac-
> To switch back to automatic mode, tilt the se- celerator pedal to drive more efficiently.
lector lever toward the driver's side.
Maximum acceleration
Shifting with the shift paddles
If you press the accelerator pedal all the way
Applies to: vehicles with shift paddles
down, the motor’s full power will be used and
> Upshifting: press the @) shift paddle > fig. 86. you will reach maximum acceleration, also called
> Downshifting: press the ©) shift paddle. “kick-down”. >
> To engage the lowest possible gear for maxi-
4M8012721BF
mum acceleration, press and hold the ©) shift

paddle.
99
Driving
ZA\ WARNING G) Tips

The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle After accelerating using the Launch Control,
could swerve on slick or slippery road surfaces the temperature of some vehicle components
when using kick-down, which increases the may increase greatly. If that happens, the
risk of an accident. function will not be available for a few mi-
nutes to reduce the risk of damage. After a
Launch Control cool-down period, Launch Control will be
Applies to: RS models available again.
Launch Control provides the best possible accel-

Parking lock emergency release
eration when starting from a stop.
B4M-0189
Requirements
— The engine must be at operating temperature.
—The steering wheel must not be turned. @
— Start/Stop system* must be deactivated
=> page 103. @
— ESC must be limited > page 116.
— Driving program “S” > page 98 or the dynamic
Audi drive select* mode must be selected
> page 111. Fig. 87 Footwell: releasing the parking lock using the
emergency release
Using Launch Control
— Press the brake pedal with your left foot and The emergency release is located under the floor
hold it all the way down for at least one second. mat on the driver's side. Read and follow the im-
portant instructions about towing > page 295.
— With the brake pedal pressed, press the accel-
erator pedal all the way down with your right Releasing the parking lock using the
foot at the same time. emergency release
— Once the engine reaches a constant speed, re-
» Secure the vehicle against rolling > page 96.
move your foot from the brake pedal.
> Pry the cover off at one of the openings using
Once the vehicle has started moving, reactivate the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit
the ESC so that it is fully functional. => page 286.
> Insert the socket wrench from the vehicle tool
Z\ WARNING kit into the opening.
Only use Launch Control when road and traffic » Turn the socket wrench clockwise (4) until it
conditions allow it and other road users will stops and press it downward @) until it locks in-
not be endangered or impacted by your driv- to place.
ing and the vehicle's acceleration. The driving >» Leave the socket wrench inserted.
wheels could spin and the vehicle could
Resetting the parking lock
swerve, especially on slick or slippery road
surfaces, which increases the risk of an acci- > Grasp the socket wrench with both hands and
dent. carefully pull it upward to remove.
> Install the cover.
C) Note
When accelerating using Launch Control, all
vehicle components are subject to heavy
loads. This can result in increased wear.
100
Driving
ZA WARNING mode. This mode only shifts into certain gears or

may no longer shift at all. The engine may stall.
— The parking lock must be released using the Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
emergency release before towing the Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
vehicle. malfunction corrected.
— Only use the parking lock emergency release
if the vehicle is secured against rolling [8] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
= page 96. An unsecured vehicle may roll, ue driving with limited function. No reverse
which increases the risk of an accident. gear
— Only activate the emergency release while There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
ona level surface or a slight slope. sion. The transmission is switching to emergency
—To reduce the risk of an accident, you must mode. This mode only shifts into certain gears or
not drive when the emergency release is ac- may no longer shift at all. The engine may stall.
tivated. You cannot engage the reverse gear. Drive to an
rected.
[Bi Transmission: malfunction! Safely stop vehi-
[@] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
cle
ue driving in D until engine is off
Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle as soon
There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
as possible in a safe location and secure it so it
sion. The transmission is switching to emergency
does not roll > page 96. See an authorized Audi
mode. If you turn the engine off, you will not be
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as-
able to select any other gears after restarting the
sistance.
engine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
[i Transmission: too hot. Please stop vehicle thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
the malfunction corrected.
Do not continue driving. Select "P" and contact an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service fs] Selector lever: malfunction! You can contin-
Facility for assistance. ue driving. Please contact Service
[8] Transmission: too hot. Please adapt driving There is a system malfunction in the selector lev-
style er. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi deal-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
The transmission temperature has increased sig-
nificantly. Drive very cautiously or take a break
from driving until the temperature returns to the & Selector lever: malfunction! Gear change on-
normal range and the indicator light turns off. ly possible if using both shift paddles.
[@] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin- There is a system malfunction in the selector lev-
ue driving. See owner's manual er. You can continue driving with restricted func-
tion. The selector lever is not working. Gears can
There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
only be selected by tapping both shift paddles at
sion. You may continue driving. Drive to an au-
the same time when the vehicle is stationary. The
“P” gear is automatically engaged when you turn
Facility soon to have the malfunction corrected.
off the engine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer
[@] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin- or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to
ue driving with limited function. Please contact have the malfunction corrected.
4M8012721BF
Service
5] P button: malfunction! Auto P when engine
There is a system malfunction in the transmis- off. Please contact Service >
sion. The transmission is switching to emergency
101
Driving
There is a malfunction in the "P" button on the aire (alee Madey

neat iN ede (Tue A
selector lever. The “P” gear is automatically en- driving
gaged when you turn off the engine. Drive to an
Your driving style greatly influences the amount
of fuel and energy consumed, the environmental
rected. impact, and the wear on the engine, brakes, and
tires. Note the following information for efficient
fs} Danger of rolling away! P not possible. and environmentally-conscious driving:
Please apply parking brake
— Turn off electrical equipment that is not need-
— The parking lock was released using the emer- ed, for example seat heating*.
gency release > page 100. Or: — Anticipate upcoming traffic situations while
— The parking lock can no longer be engaged. driving to avoid unnecessary acceleration and
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author- braking.
ized Audi Service Facility immediately to have — Avoid driving at high speeds.
the malfunction corrected. Secure the vehicle — Avoid adding extra weight to the vehicle if pos-
against rolling before exiting the vehicle sible, for example by not leaving roof racks or
> page 96. bike racks installed when they are not needed.
Move selector lever to automatic position — Make sure the tire pressure is correct.
— Have maintenance performed regularly on the
The transmission has switched out of tiptronic
vehicle.
mode. Switch back to automatic mode with the
— Do not let the engine run while the vehicle
selector lever > page 99.
parked.
— Do not drive with winter tires during the summ-
Drive system er.
— Use the Start/Stop system.
— Utilize the engine braking effect.
A new vehicle must be broken in within the first — Avoid driving short distances when possible.
1,000 miles (1,500 km) so that all moving parts
work smoothly together, which helps to increase (i) Tips
the service life of the engine and other drive com-
The amount of noise produced by the vehicle
ponents.
can increase significantly when driving with a
Do not drive higher than two-thirds of the maxi- sporty style. Show respect to others around
mum permitted engine RPM during the first 600 you and the environment with the way you op-
miles (1,000 km) and do not use full accelera- erate your vehicle, especially at night.
tion. The engine can be increased RPM gradually
during the next 300 miles (500 km). Sees
Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent ener-

Conventional and mild hybrid drive system
Applies to: vehicles with a conventional drive system or a mild
gy management system for distributing electrici-
hybrid drive system ty. This significantly improves the starting ability
and increases the vehicle battery life.
Vehicles with a conventional or mild hybrid drive
system are powered by a combustion engine. It @ Tips
uses fuel to recover energy.
—If you drive short distances frequently, the
Vehicles with a mild hybrid drive system have ad- vehicle battery may not charge enough
ditional battery technology. while driving. As a result, convenience func-
tions for electrical equipment may be tem-
porarily unavailable.
102
Driving
— The vehicle battery will gradually drain if Switching the Start/Stop system off and on
the vehicle is not driven for long periods of The & button is located above the selector lever
time, or if electrical equipment is used in the center console. The LED in the button turns
when the engine is not running. To ensure on when the function is switched off.
that the vehicle can still be started, the
electrical equipment will be limited or > Press & to switch the system on or off.
switched off. If you switch the system off during a Stop phase,
the engine will start again automatically.
ICTe lt
Basic requirements
B Drive system: malfunction! Safely stop vehi-
— The driver's door and hood must be closed.
cle
—"P","N", or "D" must be engaged.
There is a malfunction in the drive system. The — The steering wheel must not be turned far in ei-
brake booster and the power steering may stop ther direction.
working. Stop the vehicle immediately or as soon — The vehicle must have driven faster than 2 mph
as possible and do not continue driving. Secure (3 km/h) since the last time it stopped.
the vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehi- — The vehicle is not in trailer mode.
cle > page 96. Have the problem corrected by an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service @) Note
Facility. Always switch the Start/Stop system off when
B Drive system: malfunction! Please contact driving through water > page 103.
Service
G) Tips
There is a malfunction in the drive system. Drive
— Depending on the driving situation, the en-
slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
gine may already stop when coasting before
Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction cor-
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
rected.
— Ifyou select the "D" position after shifting
into reverse, the vehicle must be driven fast-
Start/Stop system er than 6 mph (10 km/h) in order for the
Start/Stop system to become active again.
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system This makes it possible to maneuver without
stopping the engine.
The Start/Stop system can help increase fuel
economy and reduce CO2 emissions.
Stopping and starting the engine
In Start/Stop mode, the engine shuts off auto- Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
matically when stopped, for example at a traffic
> Press and hold the brake pedal until the vehicle
light. If certain conditions are met, the engine
has stopped. The @) indicator light appears in
may stop before the vehicle has come to a com-
the instrument cluster once the engine stops
plete stop. If you press the accelerator pedal
automatically.
when this happens, the engine will start and driv-
> The engine starts again when you remove your
ing power will be transmitted.
foot from the brake pedal. The indicator light
The ignition and important assist systems such turns off.
as the brake booster will remain available during
If the parking brake is set, the engine will only
the Stop phase. The engine will restart automati-
start again when the accelerator pedal is pressed. >
4M8012721BF
cally when needed.
The Start/Stop system is automatically activated

once the ignition is switched on.
103
Driving
engine must be started with the

@ Tips
START ENGINE STOP] button.
— Press the brake pedal during a Stop phase
to keep the vehicle from rolling. Vehicle starting system: malfunction! Please
— The ignition will turn off if you press the contact Service
START ENGINE STOP} button during a Stop There is a malfunction in the Start/Stop system.
phase. Drive the vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or
— If you leave the vehicle briefly during a Stop authorized Service Facility as soon as possible to
phase and then enter again, the driver's have the malfunction corrected.
door must be closed and the safety belt
must be fastened in order for the engine to Brakes
be able to restart.
— You can control if the engine will stop or not General information
by reducing or increasing the amount of
You can apply the vehicle's brakes using the brake
force you use to press the brake pedal. For
pedal.
example, if you only lightly press on the
brake pedal in stop-and-go traffic or when Operating noise
turning, the engine will not switch off when
Noises may occur when braking depending on the
the vehicle is stationary. If you press the
speed, braking force, and outside conditions such
brake pedal harder, the engine will switch
as temperature and humidity.
off.
Braking effect
Starting and stopping the engine automat- The response time from the brakes depends on
ically the weather and environmental conditions. To
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
ensure the optimal braking effect, the brake sys-
The system checks if certain conditions are met tem is cleaned at regular intervals. This is done
before and during the Stop phase, and deter- by applying the brake pads to the brake rotors for
mines if the engine stops and how long it re- a short period of time when driving at high
mains stopped. For example, if power usage is speeds when the windshield wipers are switched
high, the engine will not be stopped. Along with on.
other conditions, the following factors influence If the brake system becomes damp, for example
the automatic engine start or stop: after driving in heavy rain, the braking effect may
— Environmental conditions (slopes, inclines, ele- be delayed. Other factors that could temporarily
vation, temperature) increase the response time of the brakes include:
— Battery (charge status, temperature, power us- — Wet conditions
age) — Low temperatures, ice, and snow
— Engine temperature — Roads covered in salt
— Assist systems — Dirty brake pads
— Driving behavior
Corrosion
Messages Corrosion may form on the brake rotors if there is
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system no heavy braking, if the vehicle is not driven for
long periods of time, or if the vehicle is not driv-
Drive system: please start the vehicle manually
en frequently or for long distances. In this case,
This message appears when specific conditions braking heavily several times while driving at
are not met during a Stop phase. The Start/Stop high speeds can clean the brake rotors > A\.
system will not be able to restart the engine. The
104
Driving
Brake pads danger other road users and increase the

New brake pads do not achieve their full braking risk of an accident.
effect during the first 250 miles (400 km). They — Due to the risk of injury, only have an au-
must be “broken in” first. However, you can com- thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
pensate for the slightly reduced braking force by Service Facility work on the brake system.
pressing firmly on the brake pedal. Avoid heavy Incorrect repairs could impair the function.
braking during the break-in period. — Never let the vehicle roll while the engine is
stopped because this increases the risk of an
Brake pad wear depends largely on the way the
accident.
vehicle is driven and on operating conditions.
— During automatic braking maneuvers, the
Brake pad wear increases when driving frequently
brake pedal may move downward automati-
in the city or short distances or when using a very
cally. To reduce the risk of injury, do not
sporty driving style.
place your foot under the brake pedal.
Ceramic brakes
Applies to: vehicles with ceramic brakes () Note
Ceramic brakes provide excellent deceleration — Never let the brakes “rub” by pressing the
rates. pedal lightly when braking is not actually
necessary. This can cause the brakes to over-
The break-in period for new ceramic brakes may
heat and increases braking distance and
be significantly longer than for standard brake
causes wear.
rotors. Due to the properties of the material,
— Observe the important information for driv-
they may cause noises at lower speeds. Ceramic
ing downhill > page 108. This especially ap-
brakes also absorb more moisture in wet condi-
plies when towing a trailer.
tions. Therefore, there will temporarily be less
braking force than when the brakes are dry. You
can compensate for this by pressing the brake
(i) Tips
pedal harder. — If you retrofit your vehicle with a front spoil-
er, wheel covers or similar items, make sure
Automatic post-collision braking system that the air flow to the brakes is not ob-
The automatic post-collision braking system can structed. Otherwise the brake system can
help to reduce the risk of sliding and of addition- overheat.
al collisions after an accident. If the airbag con- — Also refer to the information about brake
trol module detects a collision, the vehicle is fluid > page 250.
braked by the ESC.
Messages
The vehicle does not brake automatically if one of
the following occurs: EG if © Brakes: malfunction! Stop vehicle
— The driver presses the accelerator pedal, or safely
— The braking force generated by the pressed There is a malfunction in the brake system. If
brake pedal is greater than the braking force ES/ Gana B also turn on, there is a malfunc-
that would be initiated by the system tion in the ABS, ESC, and braking distribution. If
— The ESC, the brake system, or the vehicle elec- the brake booster is not working, you have to use
trical system is not functioning much more force when braking the vehicle.
ZX WARNING Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi

— Only apply the brakes for the purpose of
4M8012721BF
sistance. Read and follow the other safety pre-

cleaning the brake system when road and
cautions > A\.
traffic conditions permit. You must not en-
105
Driving
Ga / @ Brake pads: wear limit reached. You Electromechanical

can continue driving. Please contact Service
parking brake
The brake pads are worn. Drive to an authorized
Operating the parking brake
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as
soon as possible to have the malfunction correct- The electromechanical parking brake is used to
ed. secure the vehicle from rolling away unintention-
Brake booster: limited functionality. You can ally.
continue driving. Please contact Service The @) switch is located under the selector lever
There is a brake booster malfunction. The brake in the center console. It turns on when the park-
booster is available, but its effectiveness is re- ing brake is set. You can release the parking brake
duced. The braking performance may be different manually or automatically when you start to
compared to the usual performance. Drive to an drive.
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Setting and releasing the parking brake
rected. > Setting: pull the ©) switch.
> 1f i ii ® appears, the parking brake is hold-
Brake booster: deactivated. See owner's manual ing the vehicle. You can remove your foot from
The brake booster remains active for a brief peri- the brake pedal.
od of time after switching off the ignition. Secure > Releasing: when the ignition is switched on,
the vehicle against rolling > page 96. press and hold the brake pedal and press the
button.
Other indicator lights
If the red indicator light flashes, the braking
When you switch the ignition on, the EG / @ force has not built up enough or it has decreased.
indicator light turns on briefly to check the func- You can also secure the vehicle by selecting the
tion. If the indicator light does not turn on, there “P” gear or pressing the brake pedal. Make sure
is a system malfunction. the indicator light is off before you start driving.
1f EG / @ stays on, there is a malfunction in
Automatically releasing the parking brake
the brake system. when starting to drive
©) - A high load was placed on the brakes from Requirement: the driver's door must be closed
driving downhill for a long period of time. Follow and the driver’s safety belt must be fastened.
the instructions in the message to utilize the en-
gine braking effect and to relieve the brakes. > Press the accelerator pedal to start to drive.
ZX WARNING ZA WARNING
Ifa malfunction occurs in the ABS, ESC, and —To reduce the risk of an accident, always
braking distribution, interventions that stabi- make sure the vehicle is situated safely
lize the vehicle will no longer be available. while stationary.
This could cause the vehicle to swerve, which — If the parking brake is set, it can release au-
increases the risk that the vehicle will slide. tomatically when the accelerator pedal is
Do not continue driving. See an authorized pressed. To reduce the risk of an accident,
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility do not inadvertently press the accelerator
for assistance. pedal and always shift into “P” when the ve-
hicle is stopped.
— If the power supply fails, you cannot set the
parking brake once it is released, or release
it if it is set. Secure the vehicle against >
106
Driving
rolling before exiting the vehicle > page 96. Messages

See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
ii) B) Parking brake: malfunction! Safely
Audi Service Facility for assistance.
stop vehicle. See owner's manual
G) Tips GG / © Parking brake: malfunction! Please

— On steep inclines, especially when in trailer release parking brake
mode, the vehicle may roll backwards unin- If one of the two messages appears, there is a
tentionally when starting to drive. To reduce malfunction in the parking brake. If the message
the risk of this happening, pull and hold the appears while stationary, check if the parking
switch while pressing the accelerator brake is released and can be reset. If this is the
pedal. If enough drive power has built up at case, switch the ignition off and back on.
the wheels and the vehicle does not roll
backwards, then release the switch to start
If the message stays on, if the parking brake can-
to drive. not be released, or if the message appears while
driving, do not continue driving. Secure the vehi-
— If you leave the vehicle when “D” or “R” are
cle against rolling before exiting the vehicle
engaged, the parking brake will be set auto-
= page 96. See an authorized Audi dealer or au-
matically.
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
— Noises when the parking brake is set and re-
leased are normal and are not a cause for ww Parking brake: malfunction! Please contact
concern. Service
— The parking brake goes through a self-test
There is a malfunction in the parking brake. Drive
cycle at regular intervals when the vehicle is
to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
stopped. Any noises associated with this are
Service Facility immediately to have the malfunc-
normal.
tion corrected. Do not park the vehicle on inclines
and shift to “P”.
Emergency braking function
x |/ Parking brake: warning! Vehicle parked
Emergency braking should only be used in an too steep
emergency, if the standard brake pedal is mal-
The braking force may not be enough to secure
functioning or obstructed. When the emergency
the vehicle from rolling away. Park the vehicle in
braking function is activated, the braking effect is
a place with less of an incline.
similar to a heavy braking maneuver.
& / {Q) Parking brake: applied
> Pull and hold the ©) switch while driving.
> An audio warning signal will sound and emer- The parking brake is set. Press and hold the brake
gency braking will begin. pedal to release the parking brake.
> If you press the accelerator pedal, emergency
braking will be canceled. Special driving situations
ZA WARNING Sporty driving
Heavy braking while driving through curves or
in poor road or weather conditions can cause When driving in a sporty style, the wear on all ve-
the vehicle to slide or the rear of the vehicle to hicle components is greatly increased, especially
swerve, which increases the risk of an acci- on the engine, transmission, tires, brakes, and
dent. suspension. This can result in increased wear. Al-
so note the following points: >
4M8012721BF
107
Driving
— Make sure the vehicle is in good condition. Inclinometer

Make sure to check the brake pads, tire tread, Applies to: vehicles with a tilt angle display
and tire pressure (when tires are warm). You can display the vehicle's sideways angle and
— Beforehand, warm up the engine by driving no lengthwise angle in relation to the horizon.
higher than two-thirds of the maximum permit-
— Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
ted engine RPM. The engine oil must be
VEHICLE > Vehicle data.
brought to a minimum temperature of 158 °F
— You may need to scroll down to the Inclinome-
(70°C).
ter display.
— Before stopping the vehicle, allow the engine
and brakes to cool back down to a regular oper- The sideways angle of your vehicle should not ex-
ating temperature by driving normally. ceed the yellow range in the gauge. If it reaches
the red range, there is a risk that the vehicle
If necessary, use the following functions:
might tip.
— dynamic Audi drive select mode* > page 111
The steering wheel angle, the elevation, the com-
— Limit ESC > page 116
pass direction, and the geo-coordinates of the
@) Tips current vehicle position are displayed in addition
to the current vehicle angle. You will also receive
Wear caused by load does not constitute a ve- information about the maximum sideways and
hicle fault as defined by the terms of the war- lengthwise angle that was reached in the current
ranty. driving cycle. These values are reset when the ig-
nition is switched off.
Driving uphill and downhill
Note that the accuracy of the display depends on
When driving uphill, downhill, or at high alti- the driving situation.
tudes, note the following information:
— Drive slowly and carefully.

ZA\ WARNING
— Do not try to turn around if you cannot safely — Only drive on inclines that your vehicle is de-
drive on an incline or hill. Instead, drive in re-
signed to handle. Do not exceed the hill
verse. climbing ability of your vehicle. Your vehicle
could tip or slide.
— When driving down hills, you can activate the
hill descent control if you press the brake pedal
— Do not drive at an angle on steep inclines
while driving in “D” gear. The automatic trans- and hills. If your vehicle is about to tip, you
mission will select a gear suitable for driving must immediately start steering in the di-
down the hill and will attempt to maintain the rection of the downward slope to reduce the
speed at which the vehicle was traveling at the risk of an accident.
time the brake pedal was pressed. Press the — Always be ready to brake when using the hill
brake pedal if necessary. The hill descent con- descent control function.
trol will switch off once the hill levels out or — Applies to: vehicles with an inclinometer: Do
you press the accelerator pedal. not rely only on the inclinometer when as-
— Utilize the engine braking effect when driving sessing the driving situation.
downhill by selecting the “S” driving program
=> page 98. This especially applies when towing ier A dials)
a trailer. This reduces the load on the brakes.
Your vehicle is not an offroad vehicle. Note the
— Apply the brakes in intervals and do not press
following points when driving offroad:
the brake pedal continuously.
— Use the hill descent assist if necessary — Drive slowly and carefully.
=> page 109 —To reduce the risk of underbody damage, pay
attention to the vehicle's ground clearance and >
108
Driving
drive across raised areas of the ground with the

wheels on one side of the vehicle, instead of al-
ZA\ WARNING
lowing the center of the vehicle to pass over the After driving through water, press the brake
raised areas. pedal carefully to dry the brakes so that the
—To reduce the risk of becoming stuck, drive full braking effect will be restored.
through sandy or swampy areas at a steady
speed and without stopping, if possible. @) Note
Vehicle components such as the engine, drive
If necessary, use the following functions:
system, suspension, or electrical system can
— Audi drive select* Offroad mode > page 111 be severely damaged by driving through wa-
— Hill hold assist* > page 109 ers
—Inclinometer* > page 108
— Raising the vehicle > page 112 @ Tips
— Limit ESC > page 116 If possible, avoid driving through salt water
because it increases the risk of corrosion. Use
ZA WARNING fresh water to clean any vehicle components
Only drive in terrain that is suitable for the ve- that come into contact with salt water.
hicle and your driving ability.
Hill descent assist
@) For the sake of the environment Applies to: vehicles with hill hold assist
Avoid actions that are damaging to the envi- The “@ button is located in the function bar on
ronment. Show respect for the natural envi- the lower display. It lights up when the system is
ronment and remain on marked routes. turned on.
G) Tips Hill descent assist can assist you when driving

down hills by maintaining a constant vehicle
Clean your vehicle after driving offroad. Dirt
speed by automatically braking all four wheels.
and stones falling off your vehicle can affect
You can adjust the speed using the accelerator
other road users.
and brake pedals. The regulation depends on the
hill and the vehicle speed.
Driving through water
> Switching on: press “2.
If you must drive through water, follow these in- > Switching off: press “Z again.
structions:
Active regulation
— Check the stability of the ground, the current,
and the water depth. If the ground is unstable, Regulation begins shortly after you start driving
there is a strong current, or there are waves, and is possible at speeds up to approximately 19
the water must only reach up to the lower edge mph (30 km/h) and on hills that have an approxi-
of the body at the most. mately 6-60% grade. If these conditions are met,
— Deactivate the Start/Stop system. regulation will be activated and the 2a indicator
light will turn on.
— Drive carefully and no faster than at walking
speeds to prevent the front of the vehicle from Ready mode
creating waves, because they could splash
If one of the requirements for active regulation is
above the lower edge of the body. Oncoming
not met, the system will be in ready mode. The
vehicles could also create waves.
44 indicator light will turn on. Once the require-
— Do not stop the vehicle while in the water.
4M8012721BF
ments are met again, the system will be able to

— Drive in reverse.
provide active regulation again. >
— Do not turn the engine off.
109
Driving
— Be ready to apply the brakes at all times

when using the hill hold assist.
— Always adjust the speed to the visibility,
weather, road, and traffic conditions. The
system cannot replace the driver's atten-
tion.
— The system cannot maintain a constant vehi-
cle speed in all situations, for example when
on smooth or slippery ground. This can in-
crease the risk of an accident.
If you select the Audi drive select* Offroad

mode, hill descent assist will switch on.
110
Driving dynamic
Driving dynamic dynamic - Gives the driver a sporty driving feel

and is suited to a sporty driving style. The “S”
Audi drive select driving program is selected.
Introduction Individual - Provides the option for personalized

Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select vehicle settings. Press ¥ to configure the mode
=> page 111, Individual settings.
Drive select makes it possible to experience dif-
ferent types of vehicle characteristics in one vehi-
G) Tips
cle. With different driving modes, the driver can
switch the setting, for example from sporty to When the ignition is being switched on, indi-
comfortable. This allows you to adjust the set- vidual systems, such as the drive system, will
tings to your personal preferences. This makes it be reset to a balanced setting. Select the cur-
possible to combine settings such as a sporty rent mode again to attain its full configura-
drivetrain setting with comfortable steering. tion.
Selecting an Audi drive select mode Selecting RS mode

Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
The size button is located above the selector lever In RS models, there are two individual adjustable
in the center console. RS modes instead of the individual mode.
> Press the left or right arrow key until the de- Selecting the mode
sired mode appears in the MMI. Or: > Press the fase button on the multi-function
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- steering wheel to switch between the RS modes
HICLE > Audi drive select. and the last selected Audi drive select mode.
Or:
You can change the driving mode when the vehi-
cle is stationary or while driving. If traffic per-
HICLE > Audi drive select.
mits, briefly remove your foot from the accelera-
tor pedal after changing modes so that the mode Adjusting the mode
you have selected will be activated for the drive
system.
The following modes may be available depending > Press to configure the respective RS mode
on the equipment: = page 111, Individual settings.
offroad - Provides assistance when driving off-
road. The vehicle will be raised to the second- Individual settings
highest level using the air suspension*. The ESC Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
will be restricted and the hill descent assist* will

The equipment in your vehicle will determine
be activated. The vehicle will exit this mode after
which settings you can adjust.
the ignition is switched off.
Drive
allroad - Provides balanced vehicle handling. The
vehicle will be raised to the second-highest level The drive system will react to accelerator pedal
using the air suspension*. moves more quickly or in a more balanced man-
ner. The shift points are placed in higher or lower
comfort - Provides a comfort-oriented vehicle
speed ranges. >
setup and is suited for long drives on highways.
4M8012721BF
auto - Provides an overall comfortable yet dy-

namic driving feel and is suited for everyday use.
111
Driving dynamic
Depending on the setting, the drive power at the Air suspension

rear axle will be distributed with the sport differ- Applies to: vehicles with air suspension
ential* to be more sporty or moderate
=>page 115.
The air suspension is an electronically-controlled
suspension and leveling system. The firmness of
In RS models, the sport differential is adjusted the suspension will adapt to the driving condi-
using a separate menu item. tions and the driving situation. The system balan-
ces out changes in load. The vehicle level will also
Steering
adapt gradually to the vehicle speed in order to
The power steering will adapt. Light steering is reduce the wind resistance at high speeds and in-
suitable for long trips on highways or smooth crease the ground clearance at low speeds. The
driving around curves, for example. settings depend on the selected Audi drive se-
lect* mode.
Suspension
The suspension adjusts to be tighter or more Displaying the vehicle level
comfort-oriented when it comes to compensat- > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
ing for uneven spots on the road. HICLE > Audi drive select.
Based on the selected setting, the air suspen- The filled-in boxes represent the current vehicle
sion* will adjust the ground clearance and the ac- level. The more boxes that are filled in, the high-
tive roll stabilization* will provide various deer the ground clearance. The box that corre-
grees of compensation for vehicle movements. sponds with the current vehicle level will flash
while the vehicle is lifting or lowering. The target
Engine sound
level is highlighted in color.
The engine sound adapts and can be subtle to
sporty. In the automatic setting, the engine Raising the vehicle
sound depends on the selected driving program. > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
quattro with sport differential
> Press Raise to reach the highest vehicle level
and thus the maximum ground clearance.
Depending on the setting, the drive power at the > Press Lower to lower the vehicle down again.
rear axle will be distributed with the sport differ-
ential* to be more sporty or moderate The Audi drive select* mode will be changed if
=>page 115. necessary when the vehicle is raised.
The vehicle will lower at speeds of approximately

ESC
Applies to: RS models 20 mph (30 km/h) and below. This function may
only be used temporarily when increased ground
The ESC sport mode can be activated. Also refer
clearance is necessary. It is not intended for long
to the important information regarding driving
drives.
with ESC limited > page 116.
@) Note
Suspension
— Also refer to the information about ground
CET aN mer)
t cd clearance > page 113.
Applies to: vehicles with suspension control — When transporting the vehicle on a road
carrier, rail carrier, ship carrier, or other car-
The adaptive dampers are an electronically-con-
rier, it may only be secured at the running
trolled damping system. The firmness of the sus-
surfaces of the tires (circumference). Secur-
pension will adapt to the driving conditions and
ing the vehicle at the axle components, sus-
the driving situation. The settings depend on the
pension struts, or towing eyes is not
selected Audi drive select* mode.
112
Driving dynamic
permitted because the pressure in the air thorized Audi Service Facility immediately. Do not
suspension struts can change during trans- drive faster than the speed given in the message.
port. The vehicle might not be secured suffi-
B Air suspension: malfunction! You can contin-
ciently if this happens.
ue driving. Speed limited to max. XXX
Active roll stabilization There is a malfunction. Driving stability may be

Applies to: vehicles with active roll stabilization limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility immediately. The
The active roll stabilization enhances the air sus- maximum speed has been limited.
pension with an electromechanically-controlled
suspension system. It influences targeted rolling B Air suspension: malfunction! Safely stop ve-
movements when driving on curves and during hicle. Steering and ground clearance limited
fast swerving maneuvers. The settings depend on There is a malfunction. Do not continue driving.
the selected Audi drive select* mode. Secure the vehicle against rolling before exiting
the vehicle > page 96. Avoid turning the steering
Ground clearance wheel, because the vehicle ground clearance may
be so low that turning the steering wheel could
The vehicle height and clearance can be influ- result in damage to the wheels and wheel hous-
enced by the following factors: ings.
— Change in temperature BA Active roll stabilization: malfunction! Limit-
— Change in load ed stability. See owner's manual
— Change to the Audi drive select* mode
There is a heavy load on the vehicle electrical sys-
— Lifting and lowering via the air suspension*
tem or the roll stabilization. The roll stabilization
— Lower the rear* of the vehicle
functions have already been switched off tempo-
ZA WARNING rarily. Driving stability is reduced. Continue driv-
ing with caution.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure no one
gets pinched when the vehicle level is chang- If the indicator light does not turn off after a
ing, for example when cleaning the under- long period time and after switching the ignition
body or the wheel housings. off and on, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to
@) Note have the malfunction corrected. Otherwise, con-
ditions such as an uneven road surface can lead
Always make sure there is enough clearance
to vehicle damage.
above and below the vehicle. This is especially
important for entrances with height restric- 6 | Suspension: malfunction! You can continue
tions, for example, before driving into under- driving
ground garages. You could also scrape the
There is a malfunction. See an authorized Audi
ground when driving over the edges of curbs
or on steep ramps, which could damage your
sistance.
vehicle.
EB Air suspension: vehicle too low. Limited
ground clearance
Messages
The vehicle ground clearance is very low. Wait un-
Bair suspension: malfunction! You may con-
til the air suspension system has restored normal
tinue driving slowly at max. XX mph (km/h)
ground clearance. Have an authorized Audi dealer >
4M8012721BF
There is a malfunction. Driving stability may be

limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
113
Driving dynamic
or authorized Audi Service Facility repair the mal- improves the vehicle response and driving stabili-
function immediately if the indicator light does ty.
not turn off after a significant period of time.
|<] Air suspension: malfunction! Please contact

Service
a Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
There is a malfunction. The driving stability may
The power steering may have failed. Adapt your
be limited and the ground clearance may be low.
driving style immediately to compensate for the
See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
fact that it may be more difficult to turn the
Service Facility for assistance.
steering wheel, and stop your vehicle in a safe lo-
Audi drive select: automatic suspension low- cation as soon as possible. Do not continue driv-
ering. See owner's manual ing. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility for assistance.
The vehicle level is adjusted to the setting stored
for the active personal profile > page 32. a Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle.
Pay attention to distance at side
Audi drive select: automatic suspension lift.
See owner's manual The rear axle steering may have failed. More
space on the road may be needed at the side of
The vehicle level is adjusted to the setting stored
the vehicle, and the turning radius may be much
for the active personal profile > page 32.
larger. Slow down immediately, and stop your ve-
hicle as soon as possible in a safe location with
Steering enough space at the sides of the vehicle. Do not
continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Electromechanical steering supports the driver's
BS Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
steering movements by electronically adapting
the power steering depending on the vehicle There is a malfunction in the electronic steering
speed. The settings depend on the selected Audi lock. You cannot turn the ignition on. Secure the
drive select* mode. vehicle against rolling before exiting the vehicle
= page 96. Do not tow your vehicle because it
Progressive steering
cannot be steered. See an authorized Audi dealer
Applies to: vehicles with progressive steering
The driving dynamic and driving stability are in-
a Steering: malfunction! You can continue
creased by the steering ratio based on the steer-
driving
ing wheel angle. The steering is very direct when
the steering wheel angle is sharp, and indirect There is a malfunction in the steering system.
when the angle is low. This enables comfortable Steering may be more difficult or more sensitive.
maneuvering and a precise steering response at Adapt your driving style. Have the steering sys-
higher driving speeds. tem checked immediately by an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Please
All-wheel steering
note that the red indicator light may turn on af-
Applies to: vehicles with all-wheel steering
ter restarting the engine. Do not continue driving
Additional steering ability at the rear axle im- if it does.
proves the driving dynamic and stability. At low
a Steering: malfunction! Adapt driving style.
speeds, the rear wheels are steered in the oppo-
Larger turning radius
site direction from the front wheels to reduce the
turning radius. At high speeds, steering the rear The rear axle steering may have failed. The vehi-
wheels in the same direction as the front wheels cle will have a larger turning radius, and the sta-
bility when driving around curves will be
114
Driving dynamic
comparable to a vehicle without rear axle steer- is not different from a two wheel drive vehi-
ing. Drive carefully to an authorized Audi dealer cle. Do not drive too fast because this in-
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the creases the risk of an accident.
malfunction corrected. — Note that on wet streets, the front wheels
BS Steering lock: malfunction! Please contact can “hydroplane’” if driving at speeds that
Service are too high. Unlike front wheel drive
vehicles, the engine RPM does not increase
There is a malfunction in the electronic steering suddenly when the vehicle begins hydro-
lock. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi planing. Adapt your speed to the road condi-
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have tions to reduce the risk of an accident.
the malfunction repaired.
IX WARNING By Tamer!
Applies to: vehicles with sport differential
Do not tow your vehicle if there is a malfunc-
tion in the electronic steering lock because The sport differential distributes the drive power
this increases the risk of an accident. to the rear axle based on the situation. The goal
is a high level of agility and ability to accelerate
@ Tips on curves. The vehicle is very responsive to steer-
ing. The settings depend on the selected Audi
—If there is a malfunction, the steering wheel
drive select* mode.
may be crooked when driving straight.
—Ifthe A or indicator light only stays on
for a short time, you may continue driving. Messages
it} Sport differential: malfunction! Please con-

All wheel drive (quattro) tact Service

Applies to: vehicles with all wheel drive or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
The all-wheel drive system distributes the driving
power variably to the front and rear axle to im- it} Sport differential: temperature too high.
prove the driving characteristics. It works togeth- Please adapt driving style
er with selective wheel torque control, which can
The transmission temperature has increased sig-
activate when driving through curves
nificantly due to the sporty driving manner. Drive
=> page 116.
in a less sporty manner until the temperature re-
The all-wheel drive system is designed for high turns to the normal range and the indicator light
engine power. Your vehicle is exceptionally pow- switches of.
erful and has excellent driving characteristics
both under normal driving conditions and on ZA\ WARNING
snow and ice. Always read and follow safety pre- Contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
cautions > A\. ized Audi Service Facility if the sport differen-
tial is faulty or malfunctioning. The repair
Z\ WARNING must be performed by trained personnel us-
— Even in vehicles with all wheel drive, you ing the correct oil in order to ensure safety.
should adapt your driving style to the cur-
rent road and traffic conditions to reduce
4M8012721BF
the risk of an accident.

— The braking ability of your vehicle is limited
to the traction of the wheels. In this way, it
115
Driving dynamic
Electronic Stabilization Power steering
Control The ESC can also support vehicle stability

through steering.
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) supports

ZA WARNING
driver safety. It reduces the risk of slipping and — The ESC and its integrated systems cannot
improves driving stability. ESC detects critical sit- overcome the limits imposed by natural
uations, such oversteering and understeering of physical laws. This is especially important on
the vehicle, the drive wheels spinning, or the risk slippery or wet roads. If the systems begin
of the vehicle tipping. acting to stabilize your vehicle, you should
immediately alter your speed to match the
The brakes are applied or the engine torque is re-
road and traffic conditions. Do not let the in-
duced in order to stabilize the vehicle.
creased safety provided tempt you into tak-
The following stabilization functions are integrat- ing risks. This could increase your risk of a
ed into the ESC, among others: collision.
— Please note the risk of a collision increases
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
when driving fast, especially through curves
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when brak- and on slippery or wet roads, and when driv-
ing. The vehicle can still be steered even during ing too close to objects ahead. There is still
hard braking. Apply steady pressure to the brake a risk of accidents because the ESC and its
pedal. Do not pump the pedal. integrated systems cannot always prevent
collisions.
A pulsing in the brake pedal indicates that the
— Accelerate carefully when driving on
system is acting to stabilize the vehicle.
smooth, slippery surfaces such as ice and
Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR) snow. The drive wheels can spin even when
these control systems are installed and this
ASR reduces drive power when the wheels begin
can affect driving stability and increase the
spinning and adapts the power to the road condi-
risk of a collision.
tions. This will increase the driving stability.
— As the vehicle load increases, especially the
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) roof load, the vehicle's center of gravity also
The EDL applies the brakes to wheels that are increases along with the risk of the vehicle
slipping and transfers the drive power to the oth- tipping. To reduce the risk of an accident, al-
er wheels. This function is not available at higher ways adapt your driving style to the current
speeds. conditions and avoid sudden driving maneu-
vers.
In extreme cases, EDL automatically switches off
to keep the brake on the braked wheel from over- G) Tips
heating. The vehicle is still functioning correctly.
— The ABS and ASR only function correctly
EDL will switch on again automatically when con-
when all four wheels have a similar wear
ditions have returned to normal.
condition. Different tire sizes can lead toa
Selective wheel torque control reduction in engine power.
— You may hear noises when the systems de-
Selective wheel torque control is used when driv-
scribed are working.
ing on curves. Braking is targeted toward the
wheels on the inside of the curve as needed. This
allows more precise driving in curves.
The So button (or #, depending on the model)

for controlling the ESC is located in the center >
116
Driving dynamic
console, in front of the selector lever. The ESC is a heavy vehicle load and sudden driving ma-
automatically switched on when the ignition is neuvers, it may not be possible to prevent
switched on. the vehicle from tipping under certain cir-
cumstances, which increases the risk of an
Limiting ESC
accident.
In some situations, it may make sense to limit — Because of the increased risk of an accident,
the stabilizing function of the ESC so that the only drive with the ESC switched off or Limit-
wheels can spin, for example to rock a vehicle to ed when it is necessary. Reactivate the ESC
free it when it is stuck or to drive with snow as soon as possible.
chains. The ESC can also be limited to provide
more sporty driving characteristics with fewer @ Tips
stabilizing corrective actions.
— If you select the Audi drive select* offroad
—To limit the ESC, press the 0 button briefly. mode, hill descent assist will switch on.
The B indicator light will turn on. — If the ESC is limited, switched off, or mal-
— To completely reactivate the ESC stabilization functioning, systems with an automatic
function, press the button again. The indicator braking intervention function may not be
light turns off. fully available.
Depending on the Audi drive select mode that is — If malfunctions occur in other systems or
certain driver assist systems are active, the
selected, one of the following ESC modes will be
selected automatically: ESC must be switched on by the system. The
ESC may switch on automatically and can-
— sport - this mode is designed for driving ona not be operated with the button.
level surface. It is used in all Audi drive select
modes except offroad.
— offroad - this mode is suited for driving offroad
and is designed for uneven terrain or loose B is / B © Stabilization control (ESC/
ground. If you select the offroad Audi drive se- ABS): malfunction! See owner's manual
lect mode, the offroad ESC mode will be auto-
There is a malfunction in the ABS or EDL. This al-
matically used.
so causes the ESC to malfunction. The brakes still
Switching off ESC function with their normal power, but ABS is not
active.
For a more active control of the vehicle where the
stabilizing functions of the ESC cannot intervene, Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
the ESC can be switched off. Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
malfunction corrected.
— To switch off the ESC, press and hold the Sor
button for more than three seconds. The B Other indicator lights
and Ea indicator lights turn on.
iff blinks while driving, the ESC is actively reg-
— To completely reactivate the ESC stabilization
ulating. Operating noises may occur. If the indi-
function, press the button again. The indicator
cator light stays on, the ESC has been switched
lights turn off.
off due to system needs. The indicator light turns
off when the system is fully functional.
ZA WARNING
— When the ESC is switched off or limited,
there will be no vehicle stabilization or it will
be limited. The driving wheels could spin
4M8012721BF
and the vehicle could swerve, especially on

slick or slippery road surfaces. When there is
117
Trailer towing
Trailer towing ZA\ WARNING

Driving with a trailer — Never mount a "weight-distributing" or
"load-balancing" trailer coupler as the trailer
er else) hitch. The vehicle was not designed for
these types of trailer hitches. The trailer
Your vehicle is primarily intended for transport-
ing people and luggage. However, if you drive hitch can malfunction and the trailer can
break off from the vehicle.
with a trailer, follow the technical requirements,
the operation and driving tips, and the legal reg- — If the trailer is equipped with electronic
ulations. brakes, these brakes cannot be activated by
a factory-installed control system, which in-
Driving with a trailer affects the vehicle's energy creases the risk of an accident.
usage, performance, and wear. It also requires —To reduce the risk of injury, always remove
higher concentration from the driver. the ball hitch mount if no trailer is mount-
ed
ZA\ WARNING
Do not transport any people in a trailer due to @) Note
the risk of fatal injury.
Longer inclines cannot be driven without a
suitable cooling system, especially if the out-
Technical requirements side temperatures are high. Otherwise, this
increases the risk of engine damage.
Trailer hitch
Only use a trailer hitch with a removable ball ey emia aCe
hitch mount and ball hitch. The trailer hitch must
be permitted for the vehicle, the trailer and the Towing capacity
permitted total weight of the trailer being The permitted towing capacity must not be ex-
pulled. Above all, it must be securely and safely ceeded under any circumstances > page 314.
attached to the vehicle trailer.
You can drive up larger inclines if you are not us-
Never mount a trailer hitch on the bumper. The ing the maximum towing capacity.
trailer hitch must be mounted in a way that does
not impair the function of the bumper. Do not The specified towing weights only apply at eleva-
make any changes to the exhaust system and the tions up to 3,200 feet (1,000 m) above sea level.
brake system. As the elevation increases, the engine power de-
creases due to the decreasing air pressure. This
Check regularly if the trailer hitch is securely reduces the hill climbing ability and towing ca-
mounted. Always follow the instructions given by pacity. For every additional 3,200 feet (1,000 m),
the trailer hitch manufacturer. the maximum permitted towing weight must be
Trailer brakes reduced by approximately 10%. The permitted
towing weight is the combined weight of the
If the trailer has its own brake system, then fol- (loaded) vehicle and the (loaded) trailer.
low the manufacturer specifications. However,
the brake system on the trailer must never be Tongue weight
connected to the vehicle brake system. The maximum permitted tongue weight of the
Engine cooling system trailer drawbar on the trailer hitch ball head must
not be exceeded.
Driving with a trailer means a higher load on the
engine and the cooling system. The cooling sys- For driving safety, Audi recommends always us-
tem must be designed for additional load and ing the maximum permitted tongue weight, but
contain enough coolant > @. do not exceed this weight. Distributing the cargo >
118
Trailer towing
in the trailer correctly will help to achieve this ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
weight. Having the tongue weight too low affects ty for more information.
the vehicle's handling.
Before you start driving, check all lighting equip-
You can determine the tongue weight using a ment on the trailer while it is hitched to the vehi-
tongue weight scale, a bathroom scale, or a pub- cle.
lic weigh station, for example.
The headlight range control automatically ad-
The permitted tongue weight of your vehicle can justs the light range of the headlights.
be found in the vehicle documentation or in
Safety chains
=> page 314.
Make sure the safety chains are correctly applied
Load distribution
when pulling a trailer. The chains should hang
Poor cargo load and distribution can negatively enough so that the trailer can drive around
impact vehicle handling. Load the trailer based curves. However, they must not touch the
on the following criteria as much as possible: ground.
— Store objects in the vehicle luggage compart- Air suspension

ment, if possible. The vehicle should always Applies to: vehicles with air suspension
carry the heaviest possible load and the trailer
The Audi drive select* comfort mode > page 111
should have the lightest possible load.
must be selected before you adjust the tongue
— Distribute the load in the trailer so that the weight on the trailer and hitch the trailer >,
heavy objects are as close to the axle as possi- > page 113.
ble.
— Secure objects so that they do not slide. The air suspension trailer mode must be switched
— Utilize the maximum permitted tongue weight on.
if possible. Applies to MMI: select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Settings & Service > Air suspension:
Tires
trailer.
Set the tire pressure on your vehicle for a “full
Switch trailer mode off again when you are no
load”; see the tire pressure sticker > page 266. If
longer towing a trailer.
necessary, also adjust the tire pressure on the
trailer according to the manufacturer's specifica- For vehicles with a factory-installed trailer hitch,
tions. the air suspension trailer mode will automatically
The trailer and the vehicle should be equipped switch on if you connect the trailer connector to
the socket.
with winter tires when driving in winter tempera-
tures. When using rear carrier systems that are mount-
ed directly on the trailer hitch ball head, you can
Outside mirrors
also switch trailer mode off manually.
If you cannot see the traffic behind the trailer
If you must drive on roads that are in poor condi-
with the standard exterior mirrors, then you
tion, you can raise the vehicle again after hitching
must attach additional exterior mirrors. Adjust
the trailer or after adjusting the tongue weight
them so you have a sufficient visibility behind
> page 113.
you.
You can also increase ground clearance by select-
Exterior lighting
ing the Audi drive select* offroad or allroad
Follow the legal regulations for lighting on your modes > page 111.
4M8012721BF
trailer that are applicable in the country where

you are operating the vehicle. Contact an author-
119
Trailer towing
Vehicle levels below the values set in the comfort exceed the maximum legal speed limit when
level will no longer be available, even if you are there are unfavorable road, weather, and/or wind
lowering the vehicle manually. conditions. This especially applies when driving
downhill.
ZA\ WARNING
Hill
Applies to: vehicles with air suspension
— Never turn off trailer mode while driving When you start driving uphill or downhill, trailers
when a trailer is hitched, because then the may tilt or sway sooner than when driving ona
restrictions for controlling the vehicle level level surface. If small swaying movements have
will be turned off. already occurred, you can stabilize the trailer by
— Driving with a trailer on unpaved roads when firmly braking immediately. Never attempt to
the vehicle is raised may change the vehicle “straighten out” the trailer by accelerating.
handling. Adapt your speed. Downshift before driving on hills to utilize the en-
— Note that the vehicle will lower automatical- gine braking effect > A\.
ly at certain speeds if you have lifted the ve-
hicle manually. Brakes
When using a trailer with overrun brakes, first
©) Note brake gently then quickly. This reduces the risk of
— Applies to: vehicles with air suspension: Se- jerking while braking if the trailer wheels lock up.
lect the Audi drive select* comfort mode.
Engine coolant temperature
Otherwise, the tongue load specified for
your vehicle will no longer be applicable. Pay attention specifically to the coolant tempera-
— Attachments retrofitted on the vehicle may ture display when there are high outside temper-
cause damage, especially on the trailer atures, and when driving on long inclines
hitch ball head. In cases of damage, have => page 14. Shift to a higher gear in a timely man-
the function checked by an authorized Audi ner.
Z\ WARNING
G) Tips Constant braking causes the brakes to over-
— Block the wheels with chocks when parking heat and can substantially reduce braking per-
on inclines if the trailer is loaded. formance, increase braking distance, or cause
— Audi recommends having the vehicle incomplete failure of the brake system.
spected between the inspection intervals if
you tow a trailer frequently.
— Avoid driving with a trailer during the vehi-
cle break-in period.
Driving with a trailer
Driving with a trailer requires extra caution.
Speed
Adhere to the legal speed limits. Follow the legal
regulations that are applicable in the country
where you are operating the vehicle.
As the speed increases, the driving stability of

the trailer decreases. Therefore you should not
120
Assist systems
Assist systems System limitations
General information ZA\ WARNING

Sra eel delay —The use of an assist system cannot over-
come the natural laws of physics. A collision
ZA\ WARNING cannot be prevented in certain circumstan-
— As the driver, you are always completely re- ces.
sponsible for all driving tasks. The assist — Warnings, messages, or indicator lights may
systems cannot replace the driver's atten- not be displayed or initiated on time or cor-
tion. Give your full attention to driving the rectly, for example, if vehicles are approach-
vehicle, and be ready to intervene in the ing very fast.
traffic situation at all times. — Corrective interventions by the assist sys-
— Activate the assist systems only if the sur- tems, such as steering or braking interven-
rounding conditions permit it. Always adapt tions, may not be sufficient or they may not
your driving style to the current visual, occur. Always be ready to intervene.
weather, road, and traffic conditions.
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve- @) Tips
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- — Due to the system limitations when detect-
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of ing the surrounding area, the systems may
an accident. Store objects securely while warn or intervene unexpectedly or too late
driving. in certain situations. The assist systems may
— For the assist systems to be able to react also interpret a driving maneuver incorrectly
correctly, the function of the sensors and and then warn the driver unexpectedly.
cameras must not be restricted. Note the in- — The systems may not function as expected
formation on sensors and cameras in unusual driving situations, such as driving
=> page 122. offroad, on unpaved roads, on loose ground,
on inclines, or on grooves in the road.
@ Tips — The systems may not function correctly in
— Pay attention to applicable local regulations unclear traffic situations, such as turning
relating to driving tasks, leaving space for lanes, exit ramps, construction zones, rises
emergency vehicles, vehicle distance, speed, or dips that obstruct visibility, intersections,
parking location, wheel placement, etc. The toll stations, or city traffic.
driver is always responsible for following — The detection of the surrounding area can
the laws that are applicable in the location be limited, for example by vehicles driving
where the vehicle is being operated. ahead or by rain, snow, heavy spray, or light
— You can cancel a steering or braking inter- shining into the camera.
vention by the system, by braking or accel- —In trailer mode, some assist systems may be
erating noticeably, steering, or deactivating limited, may not react as usual, or may be
the respective assist system. unavailable. Please refer to the instructions
— Always check the assist systems settings be- for towing a trailer located in > page 118.
fore driving. The settings could have been — The steering wheel touch recognition may
changed, for example by other drivers or by be limited when you wear gloves. Steering
using another user. intervention requests from the steering as-
sist systems may occur more frequently.
— If accessories have been mounted on the
4M8012721BF
steering wheel, the steering assist systems

may be limited. The frequency of steering >
121
Assist systems
intervention requests from the steering as- Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
sist systems may vary as well. check their function.
Radar sensors
Surrounding area
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
detection
surrounding the entire vehicle may be detected
Sensor and camera coverage areas > fig. 88 ©.
The wheel sensors on the rear corners of the vehi-
RAZ-O6T1
cle are positioned so that the adjacent lanes to
the left and right are detected on roads with a
normal lane width.
Ultrasonic sensors
Depending on vehicle equipment, various areas

may be displayed in the MMI using the ultrasonic
sensors > fig. 88.
The range of the displays depends on the location

of the ultrasonic sensors:
@ Approximately 4 feet (1.20 m)
@® Approximately 3 feet (0.90 m)
@® Approximately 5.2 feet (1.60 m)
© Approximately 3 feet (0.90 m)
© Approximately 3 feet (0.90 m)
The side area ©) is detected and evaluated when
passing. There may have been changes to the sur-
rounding area after switching the ignition off and
on again, after opening the doors, or if the vehi-
cle is left stationary for a period of time. In this
case, the area will appear black until the area has
been detected and evaluated.
Cameras
Use the camera image on the display to assist you
only if it shows a good, clear picture. Keep in
mind that the image in the display is enlarged
Fig. 89 Rearview camera coverage area and distorted. Under certain circumstances, ob-
jects may appear different and unclear on the dis-
The assist systems analyze the data from various play.
sensors and cameras installed in the vehicle. Do
The rearview camera can only detect the area
not use any assist systems if there is damage to
marked in red > fig. 89. Only this area is dis-
the vehicle in an area where sensors and cameras
played on the upper display > A\.
are located or on the vehicle underbody, or if the
vehicle was involved in a collision. The functional-
LN WARNING
ity of the sensors and cameras could be impaired,
or they could malfunction. Have an authorized Sensors and cameras have spots in which the
surrounding area cannot be detected. Objects,
animals, and people may only be detected >
122
Assist systems
with limitations may not be detected at all. into a tunnel, when there is glare, or when
Always monitor the traffic and the vehicle's there are reflective objects.
surroundings directly and do not become dis- — External ultrasonic sensors, such as those in
tracted. other vehicles, can interfere with the sen-
sors.
@) Note — The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 88
and cameras > fig. 89 are diagrams and do
— Obstacles may disappear from the measure-
not represent a true-to-scale image of the
ment range when approaching them, even if
sensor ranges.
they were already detected.
— The system complies with United States FCC
—Insome situations, the ability of the sen-
regulations and ISED regulations
sors and cameras to detect and display cer-
=> page 311.
tain objects may be limited.
— Objects located above the coverage area,
such as bumpers on parked cars, garage Locations of the sensors and cameras
doors that are partially open, or objects
that are hanging
— Low obstacles
— Narrow objects, such as barrier chains, fo-
liage, poles, or fences
— Projecting objects, such as trailer draw
bars
— Objects with certain surfaces and struc-
tures, such as fabric
@ Tips
RAZ-0935,
— The sensors and cameras and the areas
around them must not be obstructed be-
cause this can impair the function of the
systems that depend on them. Make sure
that the sensors and cameras are free of
snow, ice, and other deposits. Do not use
any accessories, stickers, or other objects
that extend into the range of the sensors
and cameras.
Fig. 91 Rear area: sensors and cameras
— On vehicles that have factory-installed li-
cense plate brackets on the front of the ve- Front area
hicle, the brackets may only be replaced
with ones that are the same size and made Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-
of the same material. Do not install any li- ing sensors and cameras may be installed:
cense plate brackets on the front of vehicles — Laser scanner in the front of the radiator grille
that do not have factory-installed brackets. oA
Otherwise, the function of the system could — Camera behind the windshield
be impaired. — Peripheral cameras on the exterior mirrors
— The function of the sensors and cameras — Front peripheral camera in the radiator grille
may be limited when light and visibility con- — Night vision camera in the radiator grille
4M8012721BF
ditions are poor, for example when driving — Front and side ultrasonic sensors
123
Assist systems
— Radar sensors at the front corners of the vehi- — The system complies with United States FCC
cle regulations and ISED regulations
— Radar sensor in the front in the radiator grille > page 311.
Rear area
Switching the systems
on and off
ing sensors and cameras may be installed:
— Rearview camera in the luggage compartment
[RAzZ-1041
lid
— Radar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle
— Rear and side ultrasonic sensors
A WARNING
Applies to: vehicles with laser scanner
— The surface of the laser scanner can become

hot during operation, which increases the
risk of burns. Fig. 92 Center console: driver assistance systems button
— The laser scanner contains a class 1 laser in

Description
accordance with IEC 60825-1:2014. When
used according to regulations, the laser is You can switch some assist systems on and off in
not dangerous. Opening the laser module the MMI. Depending on the equipment, it may be
and removing covers is not permitted. Doing in the standard display or the profile selection.
so could cause permanent injuries to the
> Press the button (, or
eyes.
>» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
— Any repair work on the laser module must HICLE > Driver assistance.
be performed by an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility; other- Standard display
wise the vehicle's operating license may be Applies to: vehicles with standard display
voided. Incorrect repairs may cause limited > To switch a system on or off, press CD for the
functionality and eye damage. desired system.
> To show the brief description of a system, press
@ Tips © for the desired system.
Profile selection
— The possible emissions are below the
Applies to: vehicles with profile selection
threshold for class 1 lasers.
— Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and > To select a profile, press the profile name on
1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to the upper display or press the & button @ re-
Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007. peatedly until the profile is active.
> To list systems included in a profile, select EJ
@) Tips on the upper display.
> To show the brief description of a system, se-
— The locations of the sensors may differ
lect @ for the desired system.
slightly depending on vehicle equipment.
> To switch individual systems on and off in the
— Some sensors are installed under vehicle
Individual profile, select ¥ and CD for the de-
components and cannot be seen from the
sired systems.
outside.
The following profiles can be selected:
124
Assist systems
— Maximum - All available systems are switched

on in this profile.
— Individual - You can switch the systems on and
off individually in this profile.
— Basic or All off- Only the basic systems are
switched on in this profile. If no basic system is
available, the profile is named All off.
Observe the safety precautions and note the

cameras > page 121.
4M8012721BF
125
Driving information
Driving information Camera-based traffic

Speed warning system sign recognition
Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition

Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system
The speed warning system helps the driver to

ia) meee et
stay below a specified maximum speed. A warn-
ing threshold can be set in the MMI for this pur-
pose.
Once the speed slightly exceeds the stored

threshold, the speed warning system will alert
the driver with an indicator in the instrument
cluster and a warning tone. Once the speed drops
below the stored maximum speed, the indicator Fig. 93 Instrument cluster: traffic sign recognition
will turn off.
The traffic sign recognition shows the traffic
Setting a threshold is recommended if you would
signs detected by the front camera in the instru-
like to be reminded when you reach a certain
ment cluster display and in the head-up display”.
maximum speed. Situations where you may want
Data from the navigation system is also included
to do so include driving in a country with a gener-
in the display. Up to three traffic signs can be dis-
al speed limit or if there is a specified maximum
played in the instrument cluster at once. The
speed for winter tires.
speed limit that is currently applicable is dis-
@ Tips played in the status line. If necessary, it will be
hidden if the system detects that turning right is
Regardless of the speed warning system, you
prohibited at a red light. The display in the head-
should always monitor your speed using the
up display* can be switched off > page 27.
speedometer and make sure you are following
the legal speed limit. Within the limits of the system and depending
on the market, speed limit restrictions @ in
school zones, highways, construction zones, or at
Setting the warning threshold
night may be displayed.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- Limitations

HICLE > Driver assistance > (<3) > Speed warn- The traffic sign recognition is subject to certain
ing. system limitations and may be unavailable or on-
ly partially available in the following situations:
Messages — When visibility is poor, such as in snow, rain,
fog, or heavy spray
ol Manually set speed limit XX mph — When there is glare, for example from oncom-
(km/h) exceeded ing traffic or the sun
— At high speeds
The stored speed was exceeded.
— If the camera's visual field > page 122 is cov-
ered, for example by dirt or stickers. For infor-
mation on cleaning, see > page 280.
— If the traffic signs are completely or partially
covered, for example by trees, snow, dirt, or
other vehicles
126
Driving information
— If traffic signs do not conform to the standard Messages

format Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition
— If traffic signs are damaged or bent
Traffic sign recognition: currently unavaila-
— If traffic signs are displayed on sign holders
ble. Camera view limited due to surroundings
with electronic signs
— If the traffic signs or the roadways have The camera’s visual field is covered. Clean the
changed, and the navigation data is no longer windshield.
up-to-date
Traffic sign recognition: currently limited.
See owner's manual
ZA WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions and note the This message appears if navigation system data
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and is not available, for example on newly-construct-
cameras > page 121. ed roads. The speed limit display will be tempo-
rarily limited, which increases the risk of an incor-
— Under some circumstances, traffic sign rec-
rect display. If this message continues to appear,
ognition may not detect traffic signs correct-
drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or
ly or detect them at all. As a result, the sys-
authorized Audi Service Facility to have the mal-
tem may not display the correct speed limit
function repaired.
or any speed limit.
No traffic sign information available
@ Tips
Depending on the area, there is no valid naviga-
— Traffic sign recognition does not adapt your tion data and no speed limits were detected. This
vehicle's speed to match the speed Limit. may also appear if there is a recommended
— The display in the instrument cluster is speed, but no speed limit (for example when
based on the units of measurement used for driving on and off the expressway).
speed in the country where the vehicle is be-
Malfunction! See owner's manual
ing operated. As a result, a display of 50 in
the instrument cluster can mean either mph The system may not function correctly so it has
or km/h, depending on the country. been switched off. See an authorized Audi dealer
Function currently unavailable. See owner's

Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition
manual
Accessing traffic sign recognition If this message appears on vehicles without cam-
> Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func- era-based traffic sign recognition, then the traffic
tions tab > Traffic signs. light information function is currently unavaila-
ble. See > page 129.
Setting a traffic sign based speed warning
HICLE > Driver assistance > (<3) > Speed warn-
ing.
You can select a warning threshold. If you exceed

this, then the current detected speed limit will be
shown in the display with an exclamation point
for the duration that it is exceeded and it will
blink for a short time.
4M8012721BF
127
Driving information
Traffic light information — If data transmission is deactivated in the priva-

cy settings
— If the subscription has expired
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information
If this is the case, the menu item will be grayed-
out or it will not be possible to select it.
ZA\ WARNING
— When traffic light information is shown, al-
so always pay attention to the traffic situa-
tion, the distance to other vehicles, and the
area around the vehicle. The driver is always
responsible for assessing the traffic situa-
tion.
Fig. 94 Instrument cluster: traffic light information dis-
— Always adapt your speed to the current
play
weather, road and traffic conditions. The dis
The traffic light information gives you a speed played information must never cause you to
recommendation in order to reach the next traffic ignore legal traffic regulations and pose a
light when it is green @, or it informs you of the safety risk.
wait time at the next red light (2). Once traffic — Regardless of the traffic light information,
light data is received, the traffic light information you should always monitor your speed using
will be displayed in the instrument cluster and in the speedometer and make sure you are ad-
the head-up display*. If the vehicle is in an area hering to the legal speed limit.
with traffic light information but cannot receive a — The traffic light information does not adjust
traffic light signal, then a gray traffic light sym- your vehicle's speed to the speed recom-
bol will be displayed @). mendation shown in the display.
General information limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
The traffic light information is subject to system cameras > page 121.
limitations and may be unavailable or only parti-
ally available in the following situations: (i) Tips
— Ifthe permitted speed limit is exceeded — Traffic light information was only available
— If driving below a certain speed limit in select cities at the time this manual was
printed.
— If the next traffic light is less than approxi-
— Traffic light information is not available na-
mately 100 feet (30 m) away
tionwide.
— Ifthe estimated wait time at a red light is less
than four seconds
— The functions depend on the navigation da-
ta* being up-to-date and correct identifica-
—If there is no traffic light data available
tion by the traffic sign recognition*.
— If emergency response vehicles or public transit
— Incorrect values from the camera-based
systems are active
traffic sign recognition* or outdated naviga-
— If traffic lights are in construction zones or be-
tion system* map data can result in missing
ing serviced
or incorrect display images.
— If there are warnings from the camera-based
— Certain traffic lights can automatically ad-
traffic sign recognition*
just to the current traffic situation. If this
— If the camera-based traffic sign recognition* is
occurs, the display of traffic light informa-
malfunctioning or not available
tion can change suddenly.
— If the data connection has been interrupted
128
Driving information
— The traffic signs on the road always take pri- — There is no valid license
ority over the display. The driver is always — Traffic light information is not available in that
responsible for adhering to the regulations area
applicable in the country where the vehicle
is being operated. Lap timer
— Units of measurement and language set-
tings are displayed based on how they were Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
set in the MMI system settings > page 233.
You can record and evaluate lap times with the
lap timer. You can operate the lap timer using the
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information multifunction steering wheel > page 13.
Switching traffic light information on and Opening the lap timer
off
The system can be switched on and off in the tions tab > [=] button > Lap times.
MMI page 124.
An additional indicator will appear in the head-up
Accessing traffic light information display”.
> Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func-
tions tab > Traffic signs. Z\ WARNING
Your focus should always be on driving your
G@) Tips vehicle safely. As the driver, you have com-
If another tab or another function is selected plete responsibility for safety in traffic. To re-
in the instrument cluster, the traffic light induce the risk of an accident, only use the lap
formation will appear in the status bar on the timer functions in such a way that you always
instrument cluster. maintain complete control over your vehicle in
all traffic situations.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information
@ Tips
You can retrieve information from the trip
Malfunction! See owner's manual
computer while the lap timer stopwatch is
The system could not be configured, for example running.
due to a network malfunction. Switch the igni-
tion off and shut down the vehicle to restart the Fy R teem ale)
system. Wait several minutes until the vehicle Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
has shut down completely and then switch the
Requirement: the lap timer must be open
ignition back on.
=> page 129.
Function currently unavailable. See owner's
manual Timing laps
There is a temporary system malfunction. Check > To start timing manually, select Start lap 1 in
if one or more of the following situations applies the menu.
and correct the issue if necessary: > To start timing automatically as soon as you be-
gin to drive, select Start lap 1 by driving off or
— Traffic light information is switched off Start by driving off in the menu.
— Data transmission is deactivated > To start timing a new lap after driving a lap, se-
4M8012721BF
— The vehicle is not equipped with traffic sign rec- lect New lap in the menu. This starts timing
ognition. the next lap at the same time.
129
Driving information
After completing a lap, the difference between Resetting lap statistics

the last lap and the previous best lap time will be Requirement: the lap statistics menu must be
indicated with a “—” or “+”.
displayed.
Pausing timing and displaying a split time > To reset the lap statistics, press and hold the
> To insert a pause @ select Pause in the menu. left thumbwheel until the message No lap
> To resume timing, select Resume in the menu. times have been recorded yet. appears.
> To display a split time, select Split time in the
menu. The split time appears for approxi- G) Tips
mately ten seconds in the instrument cluster. The lap statistics list the lap times for the last
The current lap timing will continue running. 30 laps. The fastest and slowest lap times out
of up to 99 measured laps are also displayed.
Canceling lap timing
The timing of the current lap will stop. The lap
Acceleration
time will be erased and will not be included in the
statistics.
measurement”)
> Select Cancel lap in the menu. Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with acceleration measurement
Resetting the time
With the acceleration measurement, you can
> Select Reset lap times in the menu. measure the time that you need to reach a specif-
ic speed/distance. Keep in mind that the environ-
@ Tips mental conditions and tire properties can affect
—A maximum of 99 lap times can be meas- the results of the measurement.
ured.
Opening the acceleration measurement
- If timing is paused, you can continue it later
even if you switch the ignition off. > Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func-
— Saved lap times cannot be individually de- tions tab > EE] button > Acceleration measure.
leted from the total results.
— The saved lap timer values will remain after Z\ WARNING
switching the ignition off. Your focus should always be on driving your
vehicle safely. As the driver, you have com-
p statistics plete responsibility for safety in traffic. Only
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer use the acceleration measurement function
on closed courses to reduce the risk of acci-
Displaying lap statistics
dents.
You can display the number of laps driven ij
the fastest lap “+”, the slowest lap “~”, and the
Using the acceleration measurement
average time “®” in the instrument cluster. Applies to: vehicles with acceleration measurement

Requirement: the acceleration measurement
tions tab > I button > Lap statistics.
must be opened.
> Turn the thumbwheel down or up to display the
individual lap times. > Bring the vehicle to a full stop.
> To return to the lap timing that was started, se- > Select and confirm the desired speed or dis-
lect the =] button > Lap times. tance.
D_ Not available in all countries
130
Driving information
> Wait briefly until the EQ) symbol appears in the — They are not in an upright position, for ex-
instrument cluster next to the time measure- ample if they are sitting or lying down
ment. and/or
> To start the acceleration measurement, acceler- — The silhouette in the display appears in-
ate the vehicle. The measurement ends auto- complete or interrupted, for example be-
matically once you have reached the selected cause the pedestrian is partially behind a
speed or distance. vehicle or an animal is partially covered by
tall grass.
Night vision assist — Never attempt to swerve around animals if
doing so would endanger you or other road
users.
Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist
Night vision assist helps you when it is dark by (i) Tips

using an infrared camera to monitor the area in — Even though the system evaluates the
front of your vehicle, within the limits of the sys- shape and heat given off by all detected ob-
tem. It can display objects up to a distance of ap- jects, there are limits to the system. There
proximately 1000 feet (300 m). may be false warnings.
Pedestrian and wild animals are detected by — For technical reasons, the image pauses in
measuring the temperature difference between split second intervals.
the object and the background. Pedestrians and
wild animals will not be detected if the tempera- Sic Re Rela
ture difference is too small. The pedestrian and Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist
wild animal marking feature is deactivated at
The system can be switched on and off in the
temperatures above approximately 77 °F (25 °C)
MMI &page 124.
and when it is light outside.
> The AUTO light function must be selected for
The thermal image detected by the camera is dis-
the night vision assist to automatically activate
played in the instrument cluster. Warm areas
when it is dark.
generally appear lighter and cold areas appear
> Switch on the low beams manually to activate
darker.
night vision assist immediately. To do so,
The camera for the night vision assist is located press @ on the light switch module and select
in the vehicle's radiator grille > page 123. Make D.
WwW
sure the night vision camera is not covered by

When activated, the %1 tab appears in the instru-
stickers, deposits, or any other obstructions be-
ment cluster.
cause this can impair the night vision assist func-
> Select in the instrument cluster: $1 tab
tion. Follow the information about cleaning
=> page 280.
@) Tips
Z\ WARNING When the night vision assist tab is selected in
— Observe the safety precautions and note the the instrument cluster and the low beams are
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and switched off, the thermal image display dis-
cameras > page 121. appears only after you have exited the tab.
— Night vision assist can only detect pedes-
trians and wild animals located within the
range of the infrared camera.
4M8012721BF
— Night vision assist cannot detect pedes-

trians or wild animals and mark them if:
131
Driving information
Marking and warning The Sl symbol will appear when pedestrian and
Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist wild animal detection is not available.
Marking light*
To direct the driver's attention to a pedestrian,
the headlights can flash on the pedestrian when
there is a pedestrian warning.
This occurs at speeds above approximately

35 mph (60 km/h) if you are outside of illuminat-
ed areas and no detected vehicles are shown. The
marking light is not used for wild animals. The
Fig. 95 Instrument cluster: pedestrian marking and warn-
high beam assistant* controls the marking
ing light*> page 52.
Highlighting detected pedestrians and wild Adjusting the contrast

animals
Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist
Within the limits of the system, the night vision
Requirement: the night vision assist must be
assist can detect pedestrians and wild animals
switched on and the 1 tab must be displayed.
that are between approximately 32 feet (10 m)
and 295 feet (90 m) in front of the vehicle and » Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
within the detection zone. Animal recognition is HICLE > Driver assistance > (<3) > Night vision
not active within highly developed areas. The sys- assist.
tem only detects large wild animals such as deer. > To set the desired contrast, move the slider.
When it is dark outside and the low beams are
switched on, detected objects are marked in yel- Messages
low @), within the limits of the system. Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist
Pedestrian and wild animal warning Night vision assist: currently unavailable.
This system limits are based on the vehicle speed See owner's manual
and steering angle. Pedestrian and wild animal The system is not functioning correctly at the
warning encourages you to pay more attention. time, so it has been switched off. If the malfunc-
If there are pedestrians or wild animals in front tion persists, drive immediately to an authorized
of your vehicle that could pose a danger, the sys- Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to
tem will direct your attention to this. have the malfunction repaired.
— Pedestrians or wild animals are highlighted in

Integrated Toll Module
red in the instrument cluster @) and the AA] or
BAN symbol turns on @.
— When the head-up display* is switched on, the Applies to: vehicles with Integrated Toll Module
additional indicator JM or appears.
Depending on the region, you can pay toll fees in
—Achime will sound if something is detected.
certain countries using the Integrated Toll Mod-
—If the night vision assist thermal image is re-
ule (ITM). It replaces a separate transponder for
placed by another display (such as the on-board
detecting toll fees. The system electronics are in-
computer), the red A or wa indicator light will
tegrated in the rearview mirror housing.
appear if there is a pedestrian or wild animal
warning. To use the ITM in toll zones, you must register
and activate it.
132
Driving information
Registration to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi

> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- Service Facility.
HICLE > Settings & Service > Vehicle informa-
tion Toll module.
> Note the Integrated Toll Module ID.
> To register the ITM, go to the displayed web ad-
dress and follow the instructions.
Activation
> To activate the ITM, press CD in the MMI.
Entering the number of passengers

Depending on the number of passengers and the
region, a lower toll fee may be charged. You must
either enter the number of passengers or deacti-
vate the ITM based on the laws applicable in the
area where you are driving.
> To enter the number of passengers, select the

appropriate button in the MMI.
> To deactivate the ITM, press © in the MMI.
@) Tips
— The driver is responsible for specifying the
correct number of passengers and activat-
ing or deactivating the ITM.
— Malfunctions can occur when detecting tolls
if both the ITM and transponder are activat-
ed. Deactivate the system not being used or
remove it as necessary.
—Ifa rearview mirror is replaced, you must
register the new ITM and remove the old
ITM from the account.
=> page 311.
Display
Applies to: vehicles with Integrated Toll Module
The selected number of passengers is displayed

in the MMI status bar > page 23.
The ii symbol in the status bar and a notifica-

tion in the MMI will indicate if there is a faulty
connection between the ITM and the MMI or if
4M8012721BF
the ITM is faulty. If the connection interference

continues or the ITM is faulty, drive immediately
133
Driver assistance
Driver assistance Switching the system on

Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
Cruise control system
BFV-0220
The cruise control system assists the driver in

maintaining a constant speed above approxi-
mately 15 mph (20 km/h). The system maintains
the desired speed by braking and accelerating.
ZA\ WARNING
Fig. 96 Operating lever: switching the system on
— Always pay attention to the traffic around
your vehicle when the cruise control system
is in operation. As the driver, you are always
responsible for controlling your vehicle > To switch the system on, pull the lever toward
speed and the distance between your vehicle you to position @).
and other vehicles.
The Ga or i$) indicator light and the corre-
— For safety reasons, cruise control should not sponding message will appear in the instrument
be used in the city, in stop-and-go traffic, on cluster.
winding roads, and when road conditions are
poor (such as ice, fog, gravel, heavy rain,
A WARNING
and conditions that could lead to hydroplan-
ing), because this increases the risk of an ac- If the brakes are malfunctioning (for example,
cident. overheating) while the cruise control system
— Switch the cruise control off temporarily is switched on, the regulating functions may
shut off automatically.
when driving in turning lanes, highway exits,
or in construction zones.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, you should etal Rom lad lalate Ragas)
only resume the stored speed if it is suitable speed
for the current traffic conditions. Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
When the vehicle is stationary, you can preselect

C) Note the cruise control speed or activate the speed
Before driving downhill a long distance ona while driving.
steep hill, decrease your speed and select a
Requirement: the system must be switched on.
lower gear. This makes use of the engine brak-
ing effect and reduces the load placed on the > To preselect a cruise control speed when the ve-
brakes. hicle is stationary, tap the lever toward @)/G)
=> page 134, fig. 96.
@) Tips > To activate the cruise control speed, pull the
The brake lights turn on when the brakes are lever toward position (@ while driving.
applied automatically. > To set the current driving speed as the cruise
control speed, press the button @) on the lever.
The active cruise control speed is indicated with

the ICRUISE| or indicator light in the instrument
cluster.
134
Driver assistance
An additional indicator will appear in the head-up

display*.
ZX WARNING
Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal
could override the cruise control. This will pre-
Changing the cruise control speed
vent braking interventions by the system.
Requirement: the system must be switched on.

Seem NLU ai
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
in small increments, tap the lever up to the

When you switch the system off, the cruise con-
first level toward @)/G) & page 134, fig. 96.
trol speed will be erased.
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed
in larger increments, tap the lever up to the Requirement: the system must be switched on.
second level toward (4)/). > To switch the system off, press the lever toward
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed @ (locked into place) > page 134, fig. 96, or
continuously, tap and hold the lever at the first >» Switch the ignition off.
or second level toward @)/G).
Overriding or deactivating the cruise Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
control speed
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system Gs / 3) Speed control system: currently un-
available. See owner's manual
You can override or deactivate the cruise control
system. When you deactivate the system, your If the indicator light turns on and this message
cruise control speed will be stored and you can appears, the cruise control system has been deac-
resume that speed. tivated. There is a temporary malfunction, for ex-
ample the brakes are overheating. Switch the
Requirement: the system must be switched on
cruise control system on again later.
and the regulated speed must be activated.
Overriding Efficiency assist

> To temporarily override the cruise control
speed, press the accelerator pedal. Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist
> To resume the stored regulated speed, remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal. Efficiency assist can assist the driver with predic-
tive information in order to reduce fuel consump-
If you override the cruise control system for a tion. Depending on vehicle equipment, the sys-
long period of time, the cruise control system tem may access data from the navigation system,
will be deactivated. The (Usd or [RM indicator the camera behind the windshield, and the radar
light will be displayed and the cruise control sensors.
speed will be saved.
Adjusting the efficiency assist
Deactivating
You can adjust efficiency assist functions individ-
> To deactivate the cruise control speed, press ually. The settings depend on the vehicle equip-
the lever toward (2) (not locked into place) ment.
=> page 134, fig. 96, or
> Press the brake pedal. — Accelerator pedal feedback > page 99.
— Predictive messages > page 136.
4M8012721BF
— Predictive control > page 145, Adjusting the

adaptive cruise assist.
135
Driver assistance
Situation symbols the instrument cluster can mean either mph

Depending on vehicle equipment, the following or km/h, depending on the country.
symbols may be shown. The symbols indicate the — Except for the road network, which is re-
situation to which the efficiency assist is respond- corded in the navigation system’s map infor-
ing. mation, certain functions may not be availa-
ble.
Some symbols only appear if Predictive messag-
es are switched on, and some symbols only ap-
Predictive messages
pear if Predictive control is switched on and
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist
adaptive cruise assist* is active.
The symbol BS appears in the instrument cluster
Description
display if efficiency assist recommends removing
Slow down your foot from the accelerator pedal.
(predictive messages only)
Additional symbols that indicate the situation to
Speed limit which the efficiency assist is reacting are shown
(example) in the Driver assistance display > page 136.
Speed limit removed Requirements

— The cruise control system* or the adaptive
Exit ahead cruise assist* controls must not be active.
— The vehicle speed must be at least 20 mph
Intersection ahead (30 km/h).
— The remaining distance until the situation is
reached must be large enough to allow the sys-
Traffic circle ahead
tem to react to the situation.
(predictive control only) If the indica-
Switching Predictive messages on or off
tor light turns on in green and red, it
is indicating that there is a difference Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
between the speed limit and the set HICLE > Efficiency assist > Predictive messages.
speed.
ZA WARNING
ZA WARNING — Observe the safety precautions and note the
Observe the safety precautions and note the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cameras > page 121.
cameras > page 121. — Pay attention to traffic and the area around
your vehicle when efficiency assist is switch-
G) Tips ed on. The driver is always responsible for
assessing the traffic situation.
— The functions depend on the navigation da-
ta* being up-to-date and correct identifica-
tion by the traffic sign recognition*.
(i) Tips
— The system only detects traffic signs that — The traffic signs on the road always take pri-
specify a speed limit. ority over the display. The driver is always
— The display in the instrument cluster is responsible for adhering to the regulations
based on the units of measurement used for applicable in the country where the vehicle
speed in the country where the vehicle is be- is being operated.
ing operated. As a result, a display of 50 in — When a route is planned using the naviga-
tion system*, then system displays messag-
es based on an assumed route. Without >
136
Driver assistance
route guidance, the system displays mes-

sages based on an assumed route.
ZX WARNING
— The wording of the message may vary de- Observe the safety precautions and note the
pending on the selected Audi drive select*
mode and the selected gear. No messages cameras > page 121.
are displayed when in the "S" driving pro-
gram. @ Tips
The system complies with United States FCC
Adaptive cruise assist regulations and ISED regulations > page 311.
General information
Pie ace)
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the adap-
B4m-0093
tive cruise assist may consist of the following
functions:
Within the limits of the system, the adaptive

speed assist assists the driver in controlling the
speed and the set distance to the vehicle driving
ahead. If the system detects a vehicle driving
ahead, the adaptive speed assist can brake and
accelerate your vehicle within the limits of the
system. On open roads with no traffic, it func- Fig. 97 Example: driving into a curve
tions like a cruise control system. The stored
speed is maintained. When approaching a vehicle In some situations, the adaptive cruise assist
driving ahead, the adaptive speed assist auto- function is limited and you must assume control
matically brakes to match that vehicle's speed of the vehicle when necessary, for example by ap-
and then maintains the set distance as much as plying the brakes.
possible. Once the system does not detect a vehi-
— When driving into a curve > fig. 97 and out of a
cle driving ahead, adaptive speed assist will ac-
curve, the system may react to a vehicle in the
celerate up to the set speed.
neighboring lane and apply the brakes. You can
The additional lane guidance assists the driver override the system by pressing the accelerator
with corrective steering in order to stay in the pedal briefly.
lane. You can adjust if the adaptive cruise assist — The system works with the various sensors and
will provide support with lane guidance cameras in the vehicle. Vehicles can only be de-
=> page 140, Switching lane guidance on and off. tected once they are within the area and range
covered by the sensors > page 122, fig. 88.
In stop-and-go traffic and in traffic jams, the ve-
— When driving around tight curves, a vehicle
hicle may brake to a full stop and then may also
driving ahead that was previously detected may
start driving again automatically under certain
no longer be detected, and the adaptive cruise
conditions.
assist may accelerate unexpectedly.
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist: Predic- — The system does not react to a stationary vehi-
tive control can adjust the speed based on traffic cle in the same lane if it expects that you can
and road conditions > page 141, Predictive con- easily drive around the stationary vehicle by
trol. turning the steering wheel.
— The system cannot react to stationary objects,
4M8012721BF
such as vehicles at the end of a traffic jam, es-

pecially when traveling at high speeds. >
137
Driver assistance
— The system has a limited ability to detect @ Marking for the set speed
vehicles that are a short distance ahead, off to @ Current vehicle speed
the side of your vehicle, or moving into your @® Available speed range for adaptive cruise as-
lane. sist (example)
— Objects that are difficult to detect, such as mo-
torcycles, vehicles with high ground clearance, Image in the Driver assistance display
or vehicles with an overhanging load, may be The display only appears when the Driver assis-
detected late or not detected at all. tance display is open in the on-board computer
— The system does not respond to people, ani- => page 16.
mals, or objects that are crossing or approach- Messages and settings
ing from the opposite direction.
©©0OO®
Your vehicle
Z\ WARNING Detected vehicle driving ahead

Messages and settings
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and Set target distance
cameras > page 121. If you fall below the set distance, the dis-
tance bars turn red from the bottom upward.
Lane departure warning availability
Display overview
O©©
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist Availability of lane guidance for adaptive
cruise assist
3||
IN|| Indicator lights
|G3
BA - The speed/distance control is active. No

vehicles were detected ahead. The stored speed
is maintained.
A - The speed/distance control is active. A vehi-

cle was detected ahead. The system controls the
speed and distance from the vehicle driving
ahead, and accelerates and brakes automatically.
A - The speed/distance control is active but the

vehicle is not ready to drive. A vehicle was de-
tected ahead. Your vehicle is stationary and will
not start driving automatically.
SB - The speed/distance control is active but the

vehicle is not ready to drive. No vehicles were de-
Fig. 99 Instrument cluster: driver assistance display tected ahead. Your vehicle is stationary and will
not start driving automatically.
Indicator lights and messages in the speedome-
ter @ - @ inform you about the driving situation B.- The automatic braking is not enough to
maintain a sufficient distance from a vehicle driv-
and the settings. In the Driver assistance display
ing ahead. You must intervene > page 145, Driv-
@- @, you can find more detailed information
er intervention request.
about the system. The displays depend on the
country and equipment. - Lane guidance is active.
Display in the speedometer - Lane guidance is switched on but not active.

The display in the speedometer is not available in > 4 - The limits of the system have been reached.
all layouts*. Take over steering.
138
Driver assistance
B / BE — The indicator light turns on if the > To save the speed while the vehicle is station-
steering intervention request is providing a warn- ary, also hold the brake pedal down.
ing. Always keep your hands on the steering
You can set any speed between 15 mph
wheel so you can be ready to steer at any time
(20 km/h) and the maximum possible speed
=> page 141.
range @) > page 138, fig. 98.
AX WARNING Pausing cruise control
Observe the safety precautions and note the The control can be stopped at any time:
cameras > page 121. > While driving or when the vehicle is stationary:
Press the lever away from you in the direction
of the arrow. Or
erry mate tg » While driving: Press the brake pedal.
The A indicator light turns off.
RAZ-0096 Resuming regulation

The previously set speed can be resumed at any
time after a pause.
> To resume cruise control while driving, pull the

lever toward you in the direction of the arrow.
> To resume cruise control when stationary, pull
the lever toward you in the direction of the ar-
row while pressing the brake pedal.
Changing the speed

B4M-0232
> To increase or decrease the set speed in smaller

increments, briefly tap the lever toward G) or
© to the first level.
> To increase or decrease the set speed in larger
increments, briefly tap the lever toward @) or
© to the second level.
> To increase or decrease the set speed quickly,
hold the lever toward () or ©) until the mark-
Fig. 101 Operating lever: changing the speed ing in the speedometer @) > page 138, fig. 98
has reached the desired speed.
Switching on
Preselecting a speed
> To switch on the adaptive cruise assist, pull the
lever up to position @ until it engages. You can also preselect the speed when adaptive
cruise assist is not active by moving the lever in
Storing the speed and activating regulation the desired direction @)/@). Activate the previ-
If you have switched the system on, you can set ously selected speed by pulling the lever toward
the current speed as the “regulated speed” and you in the direction of the arrow.
activate regulation:
Switching off
> Press the [SET] button (2). The set speed is indi-
If you do not want to use the adaptive cruise as-
cated with a marking in the speedometer @)
4M8012721BF
sist for a longer period of time, you can switch it

=> page 138, fig. 98 and shown in the instru-
off. >
ment cluster > /\.
139
Driver assistance
> Push the lever away from you into position ©) — The system cannot be switched off or it may
until it clicks into place. be interrupted if the road exceeds the maxi-
mum possible grade for safe operation.
The indicator light and the set speed will turn off.
Z\ WARNING Switching lane guidance on and off

Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist and lane guid-
— Observe the safety precautions and note the ance
cameras > page 121.
B8V-0692
— The adaptive cruise assist is only an assist
system, and the driver is still responsible for
controlling the vehicle. The driver is espe-
cially responsible for braking, steering,
starting to drive, and controlling the speed
and the distance from other vehicles.
— Turn on the adaptive cruise assist only if the
surrounding conditions permit it. Always
Fig. 102 Turn signal lever: button for lane guidance and
adapt your driving style to the current visu-
lane departure warning
al, weather, road, and traffic conditions.
— Switch the adaptive cruise assist off tempo- Within the limits of the system, lane guidance
rarily when driving in turning lanes or high- provides corrective steering to assist the driver
way exits. This prevents the vehicle from ac- with keeping the vehicle in the center of the lane
celerating to the stored speed when in these as much as possible. This feature can be deacti-
situations. vated.
— If you press the [SET] button @) when driv-
ing at speeds below 15 mph (20 km/h), the Ina traffic jam, lane guidance also helps with
minimum possible speed that the system leaving a space for emergency vehicles ») by
can maintain will be set. If no vehicle is de-
steering your vehicle as close to the edge of your
tected ahead of you, the vehicle will acceler- lane as possible.
ate up to that speed. Switching lane guidance on and off
Requirement: lane guidance must be preselected
@ Tips
in the MMI > page 145.
— Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel so you can be ready to steer at any > To activate or deactivate the availability of the
time. The driver is always responsible for lane guidance, press the button on the turn sig-
adhering to the regulations applicable in nal lever > fig. 102.
the country where the vehicle is being oper- The system will assist the driver by providing cor-
ated. rective steering only when adaptive cruise assist
— If you switch the ignition or the adaptive is actively regulating and availability is switched
cruise assist off, the stored speed is erased on.
for safety reasons.
— When the adaptive cruise assist is switched Overview of displays and lane guidance
limitations
on, the ESC and the ASR are switched on au-
tomatically. The availability of lane guidance is shown with in-
dicator lights and with arrows @i) > page 138,
fig. 99 in the Driver assistance display.
140
Driver assistance
@ - Lane guidance is active. — Audi recommends only switching on lane

guidance on well-constructed roads.
> 4 - This indicator light turns on if the limits of
—The & fig. 102 button switches lane guid-
the system have been reached (for example, the
ance availability and the lane departure
system’s steering force is not sufficient to handle
warning on or off simultaneously, if lane
tight curves). Take over steering.
guidance is preset in the adaptive cruise as-
ri turns white, lane guidance is switched on sist settings.
but is not active. This may occur due to the fol-
lowing system limits or situations: Predictive control
— The necessary lane marker lines have not been Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist and efficiency
detected (for example, in a construction zone assist
or because the lines are obstructed by snow,

dirt, water, or lighting)
— The lane is too narrow or too wide
—The curve is too narrow
— Visibility is obstructed by a rise or dip.
— The driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel
— The turn signal was activated.
Fig. 103 Instrument cluster: speedometer: predictive con-
Steering intervention request trol display
If no steering activity is detected or the limits of

With predictive control, efficiency assist adapts
the system are reached, the driver steering inter-
the set speed in adaptive cruise control @ based
vention request will alert the driver using audio
on detected speed limits and the upcoming
and visual signals, such as a} or &. Take over
route. Once the system no longer detects any in-
the steering and keep your hands on the steering
cidents, adaptive cruise control will accelerate
wheel so that you will be ready to steer at any
back up to the last speed that the driver set. Af-
time. The system will become inactive after a
ter switching on the ignition, the availability of
short time and will only be active again later.
predictive control is indicated by a message when
If the driver does not take over steering, adaptive the adaptive cruise assist is first activated.
cruise assist will be canceled. If the vehicle is
Incident symbols indicate the situation to which
equipped with emergency assist and it is ready to
predictive control is reacting > page 136, Situa-
function, it will be activated if possible
tion symbols.
=> page 157.
Requirements
ZA\ WARNING — Predictive control is switched on in the MMI
Observe the safety precautions and note the => page 145.
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and — The adaptive cruise assist must be actively reg-
cameras > page 121. ulating > page 139.
— The system can only react to speed limits that
@ Tips are 15 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
— Always keep your hands on the steering
Display in the speedometer
wheel so you can be ready to steer at any
time. The driver is always responsible for The display depends on vehicle equipment and is
adhering to the regulations applicable in not available in all layouts*. >
4M8012721BF
the country where the vehicle is being oper-

ated.
141
Driver assistance
@ The marking shows the set speed (regulated — The speed when driving through curves may
speed that was set by the driver or by predic- be different from what you as a driver would
tive control). do or may not be suitable for the weather
@ The red band shows the difference between and road conditions. If necessary, apply the
the speed limit and the set speed that is set. brakes and reduce the selected speed to be
@ The gray band shows if the vehicle speed is maintained in the Adjustment to curves
planned to drop below the set speed due to along route setting to reduce the risk of an
the road layout. accident.
Overriding control @) Tips

The driver can override the predictive control at — Predictive control can exceed or drop below
any time by pressing the accelerator or brake the maximum permitted speed. The driver
pedal. If the system changes the vehicle speed to is responsible for adhering to the permitted
adapt to speed limits, you can change the speed speed limit.
using the lever > page 139, fig. 101. — The traffic signs on the road always take pri-
Messages ority over the display. The driver is always
responsible for adhering to the regulations
If and a message with Adaptive cruise assist: applicable in the country where the vehicle
Predictive control is displayed when there is a is being operated.
malfunction, the efficiency assist functions are — Ifa speed limit is detected, the marking @
unavailable or limited. of the set speed limit will be adjusted even
A message that indicates the cause and possible if the adaptive cruise assist is not actively
solution may appear with some displays. The regulating.
weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor — Control by the system depends on which
may be covered. Clean the area in front of the adaptive cruise assist driving program is set
sensors > page 123 and try to turn the system on or on the selected Audi drive select* mode.
again later. — After switching on the ignition and first
driving onto a freeway or similar road with-
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
out a speed limit, the system will regulate
the speed to 80 mph (130 km/h). Then
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
the system adjusts to the last speed set by
ed.
the driver.
ZA\ WARNING — There is no adaptation to speed limits when

driving through highway interchanges and
— Observe the safety precautions and note the when driving on or off the expressway.
— The system can fail to provide control or the
cameras > page 121.
control may be faulty if the values from the
— Pay attention to traffic and the area around camera-based traffic sign recognition* are
your vehicle when predictive control is
incorrect or the navigation system map data
switched on. The driver is always responsible
is outdated.
for assessing the traffic situation.
— When route guidance is switched on, the
— The system does not consider “right of way”
system adapts to the route provided by the
rules and does not respond to traffic lights, navigation system. Driving without route
so lack of driver attention in these situations
guidance or leaving a route can result in
can increase the risk of an accident.
faulty control.
142
Driver assistance
Setting the distance Meaning

The time between is approximately 1
B4M-0234
second. This setting corresponds to a
distance of approximately 92 feet (28
m) when traveling at 62 mph (100
km/h).
The time between is approximately 1.3
seconds. This setting corresponds toa
distance of approximately 118 feet
(100 m) when traveling at 62 mph
Fig. 104 Operating lever: setting the distance (36 m/h).
The time between is approximately 1.8
If you adjust the speed, you must also change the seconds. This setting meets the general
time gap to the vehicle driving ahead. The higher recommendation of “half the speed
the speed, the greater the distance that is need- shown on the speedometer”. This cor-
ed. responds to a distance of approximate-
> Tap the rocker switch to display the distance ly 164 feet (SO m) when traveling at
that is currently set. 62 mph (100 km/h).
> To increase or decrease the distance in incre- The time between is approximately 2.4
ments, tap the switch again toward @) or (). seconds. This setting corresponds toa
distance of approximately 219 feet
The newly-set distance will be shown briefly, for
i)

example with the indicator light. In the Driv-
(67 m/h).
er assistance display, a graphic display is shown
instead of the indicator lights > page 138, The time between is approximately 3.6
fig. 99. The display matches the functions of the seconds. This setting corresponds toa
indicator lights. distance of approximately 328 feet
1D

When approaching a vehicle driving ahead, the (100 m/h).
adaptive cruise assist brakes to the set speed and
then maintains the set distance. If the vehicle ZA\ WARNING
driving ahead accelerates, then the adaptive Observe the safety precautions and note the
cruise assist will also accelerate up to the speed limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
that you have set. cameras > page 121.
The following distances can be set:
G@) Tips
— When setting the distance, the driver is re-
sponsible for adhering to any applicable le-
gal regulations.
— Depending on the selected driving program
and distance, driving behavior when acceler-
ating may vary from moderate to sporty
=> page 145, Adjusting the adaptive cruise
assist.
4M8012721BF
— The distances provided are specified values.

Depending on the driving situation and how >
143
Driver assistance
the vehicle ahead is driving, the actual dis- the set speed. When you are in the Driver assis-
tance may be more or less than these target tance display, the message Overridden will ap-
distances. pear.
Overriding control ZA\ WARNING

Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist — Observe the safety precautions and note the
RAZ-0096
cameras > page 121.
— Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal
could override the cruise control. Braking in-
terventions and corrective actions by the
system may not occur.
Driving in stop-and-go traffic

Fig. 105 Lever: overriding the control SI8

3
I?
ny
Requirement: the adaptive cruise assist must be fax
switched on.
Overriding control
You can completely override the control, for ex-
ample when passing or if you would like to accel-
erate more quickly. Fig. 106 Instrument cluster: safe start monitor
> To accelerate manually, pull the lever toward

Stopping with adaptive cruise assist
you in the direction of the arrow and hold it
there, or press the accelerator pedal. The adaptive cruise assist also assists you in stop-
> To resume the usual cruise control, release the and-go traffic. Within the limits of the system,
lever or remove your foot from the accelerator your vehicle may brake and remain at a stop if a
pedal. vehicle driving ahead stops.
When you are in the Driver assistance display, Starting to drive with adaptive cruise assist!)
the message Overridden will appear.
As long as the message ready to drive and | is
Decreasing the distance displayed, your vehicle will begin driving when
the vehicle ahead starts to move > /\.
The function decreases the set distance and pro-
vides assistance, for example when merging If you are stopped for several seconds, your vehi-
when a lane is ending. cle will no longer drive autonomously for safety
reasons, and the message will turn off.
> To further reduce the distance to the vehicle
ahead temporarily, pull the lever toward your- > To extend ready to drive for several seconds or
self in the direction of the arrow and hold it in reactivate, pull the lever briefly towards you in
that position. the direction of the arrow > page 144, fig. 105.
> To resume the system control, release the lever. > To resume manual control of the vehicle, tap
the accelerator pedal.
The adaptive cruise assist reduces the distance
and, if necessary, accelerates the vehicle above
D_ This is not available in some countries.
144
Driver assistance
Safe start monitor Tama n request

The vehicle can still start to drive even if certain
obstacles are detected when starting to drive
> /\. If the surrounding area detection detects
an obstacle, you will be alerted to the danger by
the A indicator light.
If you are in the Driver assistance display, the

display @) © fig. 106 and the message Warning!
will also appear. An audio signal will also sound.
Your vehicle will drive more slowly when starting.
Fig. 107 Instrument cluster: request for driver interven-
This may also occur in some situations when tion
there is no apparent obstacle.
The request for driver intervention instructs you
> Press the brake pedal to slow your vehicle
to resume manual control of the vehicle if the
down.
adaptive cruise assist braking function is not able
ZA\ WARNING to maintain a sufficient distance to the vehicle

ahead. The system will warn you of the hazard
— Observe the safety precautions and note the with the A indicator light and the message Dis-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and tance!. An audio signal will also sound.
cameras > page 121.
The display @ only appears when the Driver as-
— If the message ready to drive!) appears,
sistance display is open in the on-board comput-
your vehicle will start driving even if there is
er > page 16.
an obstacle between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle ahead. To reduce the risk of an acci-
dent, always make sure there are no obsta-
ZA\ WARNING
cles between your vehicle and the vehicle Observe the safety precautions and note the
driving ahead. limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 121.
@) Tips
For safety reasons, adaptive cruise assist is Adjusting the adaptive cruise assist
only active if: Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
— The driver's safety belt is fastened You can adjust the adaptive cruise assist to your
— All doors and the hood are closed own preferences. The settings depend on the ve-
— Your vehicle is not stopped for a long period hicle equipment.
of time
HICLE > Driver assistance > (3) > Adaptive
cruise assist.
Possible settings:
Lane guidance - If lane guidance is also active

when adaptive cruise assist control is active, you
can switch it on or off.
Driving program - Depending on the driving pro-

gram and the distance that are set, the vehicle >
4M8012721BF
145
Driver assistance
handling will be adjusted from Sport to Moder- Adaptive cruise assist: Please take over!
ate and the lane guidance haptic feedback will be
Adaptive cruise assist was ended, for example be-
adjusted.
cause the vehicle rolled backwards when starting
Store last distance - The last distance that was on a slight incline even though the system was
set will be stored after the ignition is switched active. You must take over further control of the
off. If the distance is not stored, distance [fz vehicle.
(time distance of approximately 1.8 seconds) is
automatically preset every time the ignition is
Adaptive cruise assist: limited availability.
switched on.
See owner's manual
Predictive control > Set speed limit - adaptation
This message appears when the sensor view is
to speed limits can be switched On or Off. Regu-
limited, for example, when weather conditions
lation With tolerance can also be selected, if de-
are too poor or a sensor is covered. You can
sired. In this scenario, you may fall below or ex-
switch on the adaptive cruise assist, but certain
ceed the set speed in favor of increased efficien-
functions such as assistance in narrow areas will
cy.
not be available. Under certain circumstances,
Predictive control > Adjustment to curves along some objects may be detected late or may not be
route - regulation based on the road ahead can detected at all. Be especially careful. Cleaning
be switched Off or set individually from Slow to the area in front of the sensors > page 123 may
Fast. The setting influences vehicle handling with correct the malfunction.
predictive control, for example the speed for
driving through curves. Distance warning
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with distance warning
PRAz-0401]
If or Bal is displayed when there is a malfunc-
tion, the adaptive cruise assist functions may be
unavailable or limited.
A message that indicates the cause and possible

solution may appear with some displays. The
weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor
may be covered. Clean the area in front of the
sensors > page 123 and try to turn on the sys-
Fig. 108 Instrument cluster: display of the current dis-
tems again later. tance

RAZ-0400

ed.
Applies to: vehicles with narrowed road assist

Narrow area
Depending on vehicle equipment, this message

appears in the Driver assistance display if the Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist:
Fig. 109 Instrument cluster: distance warning
adaptive cruise assist is adjusting the speed ina
narrow area, for example a construction zone.
146
Driver assistance
General information ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-

At speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 ed.
km/h), this function measures the distance to the
vehicle ahead as time. If the distance falls below
Z\ WARNING
the warning threshold, the system warns you of Observe the safety precautions and note the
the hazard with the BB indicator light. limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 121.
Image in the Driver assistance display
@) Tips
The display only appears if the Driver assistance — The driver is always responsible for adhering
display is selected on the on-board computer to the regulations applicable in the country
= page 16 and the adaptive cruise assist is not where the vehicle is being operated.
actively controlling the vehicle.
— You may fall below the warning threshold
@ Detected vehicle driving ahead briefly when passing or when quickly ap-
@ Use the markings to help you estimate the proaching a vehicle driving ahead. There is
distance to an obstacle. Each marking repre- no warning in this scenario. A warning is giv-
sents approximately one second. en only if you fall below the warning thresh-
@® Set warning threshold. Depending on the set- old for an extended period of time.
tings, the display will be colored in from the
bottom to the top. Lane departure warning
@ The actual distance is smaller than the set
General information
distance and you will be informed about the
Applies to: vehicles with lane departure warning
danger.
The lane departure warning can detect lane
Adjusting the distance warning
marker lines within the limits of the system. If
The system can be switched on and off in the you are approaching a detected lane marker and
MMI = page 124. it appears likely that you will leave the lane, the
system can warn you with corrective steering and
You can adjust the distance warning threshold to
your preferences. The settings depend on the ve-
a steering wheel vibration, if necessary.
hicle equipment. The system functions in the speed range of ap-
— Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- proximately 40 mph - 155 mph (65 km/h -
HICLE > Driver assistance > (23) > Distance 250 km/h).
warning
ZX WARNING
Messages
ir or Bg is displayed when there is a malfunc- limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
tion, the distance warning functions may be un- cameras > page 121.
available or may be limited.

sensors > page 123 and try to turn the system on
again later.
4M8012721BF

147
Driver assistance
warn you if lane boundaries are detected dur-

Applies to: vehicles with lane departure warning ing a passing maneuver.
The lane departure warning is ready to provide
B8V-0692
warnings if an object is detected on at least one
side of the individual lane.
If the Hi indicator light turns on, the lane depar-

ture warning is not ready to provide warnings.
This may occur due to the following system limits
or situations:
— The necessary lane marker lines have not been
detected (for example, in a construction zone
Fig. 110 Turn signal lever: lane departure warning button
or because the lines are obstructed by snow,
dirt, water, or lighting)
RAZ-0107 — The speed is below the activation speed
— The lane is too narrow or too wide
— The curve is too narrow
— The driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel
— Visibility is obstructed by a rise or dip.
Fig. 111 Instrument cluster: driver assistance display Steering intervention request
Switching the lane departure warning on and If the lane departure warning intervenes multiple
off times when no steering activity is detected, the
steering intervention request will provide a warn-
> To switch the system on or off, press the button
ing using audio and visual signals, such as El.
=> fig. 110. The respective indicator light in the
Take over the steering and keep your hands on
instrument cluster will turn off or on.
the steering wheel so that you will be ready to
Display and warning steer at any time. The system may no longer be
ready to provide warnings after a short time, and
The availability and readiness to provide warn-
it will only become active again later.
ings will be indicated with the nan indica-
tor lights. You can also open the Driver assis- If the driver does not take over steering, the lane
tance display in the on-board computer departure warning will no longer be ready to pro-
= page 16. The display matches the functions of vide warnings. If the vehicle is equipped with
the indicator lights. emergency assist and it is ready to function, it
will be activated > page 157.
@ White lines: the lane departure warning is
switched on but not ready to provide warn- Behavior when a turn signal is active
ings.
Applies to: vehicles with side assist: The system
@ Green line: the lane departure warning is will not warn you if you activate a turn signal be-
ready to provide warnings on the respective fore crossing the lane marker line. In this case, it
side. assumes that you are changing lanes intentional-
Corrective steering will be indicated with Jf. ly.
If the lane departure warning must intervene
Applies to: vehicles with side assist: If the turn
for a long period of time, a message will re-
quest the driver to drive in the center of the signal is activated, the lane departure warning is
lane. The steering wheel can also vibrate to ready, and a lane change has been classified as
critical by the lane departure warning due to >
148
Driver assistance
vehicles traveling beside you or due to approach- A message that indicates the cause and possible
ing vehicles, then a noticeable corrective steering solution may appear with some displays. The
movement will occur shortly before exiting the weather conditions may be too poor or the cam-
lane. This will attempt to keep your vehicle in the era may be covered. Clean the area in front of the
lane. camera > page 123 and try to turn on the sys-
tems again later.
AX WARNING
— Observe the safety precautions and note the ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
cameras > page 121. ed.
— The system warns the driver that the vehicle
is leaving the lane using corrective steering.
Audi pre sense
The driver is always responsible for keeping
the vehicle within the lane. Introduction
— Corrective steering may not occur at all in Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
certain situations, such as during heavy

Within the limits of the system, the Audi pre
braking. Always be ready to intervene.
sense functions can initiate measures in certain
driving situations to protect the vehicle occu-
@ Tips
pants and other road users. Depending on the ve-
— Always keep your hands on the steering hicle equipment, various Audi pre sense systems
wheel so you can be ready to steer at any may be installed:
time. The driver is always responsible for
— Audi pre sense basic can react during emergen-
adhering to the regulations applicable in
cy and dangerous braking maneuvers and un-
the country where the vehicle is being oper-
stable driving situations (such as oversteering
ated.
or understeering).
— The system does not provide any corrective
— Audi pre sense front) can detect an impending
steering or steering wheel vibrations if it de-
frontal impact and react with warnings, braking
tects that you are passing another vehicle.
interventions, and preemptive safety measures
for the vehicle occupants.
Adjusting the lane departure warning
— Audi pre sense rear monitors the rear traffic
behind your vehicle and can react to an impend-
The additional warning using vibration in the ing rear impact.
steering wheel can be switched off or on. The set- — Audi pre sense side can detect an impending
tings depend on the vehicle equipment. side impact from cross-traffic and vehicles com-
ing from the side, and can initiate preemptive
— Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
safety measures.
HICLE > Driver assistance > (<}) > Lane depar-
— The swerve assist can help you to steer the ve-
ture warning > Vibration warning.
hicle around an obstacle during an evasive ma-
neuver that is detected as critical.
Messages
— The turn assist can detect vehicles in the oppo-
site lane as critical during a turning maneuver
ir or is displayed when there is a malfunc- and react with braking maneuvers.
tion, the lane departure warning and lane guid-
ance functions of the adaptive cruise functions
4M8012721BF
may be unavailable or limited.
149
Driver assistance
Audi pre sense preemptive safety measures or understeering > page 150, Audi pre sense pre-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense emptive safety measures.
Depending on the vehicle speed and the vehicle The message Audi pre sense © will warn you
equipment, the following functions may be initi- about the danger.
ated in certain situations:
A WARNING
— Visual and audio warnings
— Reversible tensioning of safety belts
— Closing the windows and panoramic glass roof
cameras > page 121.
— Adjusting the seats
— Other preemptive safety measures by individual
systems Audi pre sense front
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense front
ZA WARNING Within the limits of the system, Audi pre sense

Observe the safety precautions and note the front can warn about an impending front end col-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and lision and brake the vehicle strongly, if necessary.
cameras > page 121. The system uses the camera behind the wind-
shield and is available at speeds above approxi-
@ Tips mately 6 mph (10 km/h).
— Depending on the risk situation that is de- Driving situations
tected and the selected Audi drive select*
mode, not all preemptive safety measures The situations to which the system reacts de-
may be initiated under certain circumstan- pends on the vehicle speed.
ces. Certain functions can be adjusted or Up to speeds of approximately 50 mph
skipped if necessary. (85 km/h), the system may react to the following
— Audi pre sense may be restricted or unavail- situations:
able under certain circumstances, for exam- — Pedestrians and cyclists in your lane
ple if:
Up to speeds of approximately 155 mph
— There are passengers with unfastened
(250 km/h), the system may react to the follow-
safety belts
ing situations:
— After turning on the ignition, as long as
the 8 indicator light is on. —Avehicle driving ahead clearly applies the
brakes
— When driving in reverse.
— When approaching a vehicle ahead that is clear-
— There is an airbag control module mal-
ly traveling more slowly
function
— When approaching a stationary vehicle
— System functions may not be available if
the ESC is limited or switched off, or if Prewarning
there is a malfunction.
To warn about detected dangers, Audi pre
sense [@ will appear in the instrument cluster
Audi pre sense basic
and an audio signal will sound.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense basic
A brief application of the brakes
Audi pre sense basic is automatically active at
speeds of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and Ifa collision is imminent, there may be an acute
higher. Audi pre sense basic can trigger preemp- warning using a brief application of the brakes.
tive safety measures during emergency braking You will also be warned about the danger by an
and dangerous braking maneuvers as well as in indicator in the instrument cluster display. You >
unstable driving situations, such as oversteering
150
Driver assistance
may only be able to avoid a collision by swerving

@) Tips
or braking strongly.
Certain pre sense front functions are switched
Automatic braking force increase off when the hill descent assist is actively con-
If there is an impending collision and you are not trolling the vehicle.
applying the brakes enough, the braking force
may be increased, depending on the situation. Audi pre sense rear
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense rear
Automatic braking
Within the limits of the system, Audi pre sense
If you do not react to the acute warning, the sys-
rear uses data from radar sensors at the rear cor-
tem may apply the brakes with strong braking
ners of the vehicle and calculates the probability
force within the limits of the system in order to
of a rear-end collision with the vehicle behind
reduce the speed of impact in the event of a colli-
you.
sion.
Audi pre sense preemptive safety measures can
If the brakes were applied until the vehicle stop-
be initiated if the risk of a collision with the vehi-
ped, © Please take over! will appear in the in-
cle behind you is detected.
strument cluster and you must take over control
of the vehicle.
Z\ WARNING
ZA WARNING — Observe the safety precautions and note the
cameras > page 121.
— Audi pre sense rear does not react to pedes-
cameras > page 121.
trians, animals, crossing objects, and ob-
— Audi pre sense front cannot overcome natu-
jects not detected as vehicles.
ral physical laws. It is a system designed to
assist and it cannot prevent a collision in ev-
@) Tips
ery circumstance. The driver must always in-
tervene. The driver is always responsible for — Audi pre sense rear functions switch off
braking at the correct time. Do not let the when trailer mode is detected. There is no
increased safety provided tempt you into guarantee the functions will switch off
taking risks. This could increase your risk of when using a retrofitted trailer hitch.
a collision. — Audi pre sense rear functions may also
— Audi pre sense front does not react to cer- switch off if there is a malfunction in the
tain objects, such as animals, crossing or on- side assist system.
coming vehicles, bars, railings, or railcars.
— Audi pre sense front may be limited or un- Audi pre sense side
available when driving in curves. Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense side
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve-

Within the limits of the system, Audi pre sense
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak-
can warn about impending collisions with cross-
traffic and vehicles approaching from the side,
an accident. Store objects securely while
and trigger Audi pre sense preemptive safety
driving.
measures.
— In trailer mode, the braking behavior of the
trailer can be different than usual during au- The system uses additional sensors in the front
tomatic braking. and rear areas and is active at speeds up to ap-
4M8012721BF
proximately 35 mph (60 km/h).
151
Driver assistance
ZA\ WARNING ag
Applies to: vehicles with turn assist
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and When turning left, turn assist can help to reduce
cameras > page 121. the risk of a collision with an oncoming vehicle by
— Audi pre sense side does not react to pedes- using braking action to keep your vehicle in its
trians, animals, and objects not detected as lane. The function is only available when the turn
vehicles. signal is turned on and at speeds up to maximum
of 6 mph (10 km/h).
@) Tips
— The Audi pre sense side functions are limit-
ZA WARNING
ed when trailer mode is detected. — Observe the safety precautions and note the
— The Audi pre sense side functions may also
switch off if there is a malfunction in the in-
cameras > page 121.
tersection assistant*. — The turn assist does not react to pedes-
trians, animals, crossing objects, and ob-
jects not detected as vehicles.
Swerve assist
Applies to: vehicles with swerve assist
G) Tips
The swerve assist can help you to steer the vehi- — System functions may not be available if the
cle around an obstacle detected in a critical area. ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a
If you avoid an obstacle after the acute warning, malfunction.
then swerve assist assists you by specifically
—An indicator in the instrument cluster will
braking individual wheels and applying slight inform you when there is an intervention.
steering adjustment to correct the steering
wheel angle as long as you are actively steering.
Adjusting Audi pre sense
The swerve assist is available at speeds between
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
approximately 30 mph and 90 mph (50 km/h -
150 km/h). The system can be switched on and off in the
MMI > page 124. You can adjust Audi pre sense
ZA\ WARNING functions to your preferences. The adjustment
— Observe the safety precautions and note the options depend on the vehicle equipment.
cameras > page 121. HICLE > Driver assistance > (3) > Audi pre
— Swerve assist does not react to pedestrians, sense.
animals, crossing objects, and objects not
detected as vehicles. Setting the prewarning
You can adjust the warning time for the prewarn-
@) Tips ing» individually (Early/Medium/Late) or switch
— System functions may not be available if the the prewarning off.
ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a
Set the warning time for the early warning to
malfunction.
Early at first. If you feel that the prewarnings ap-
— An indicator in the instrument cluster will
pear too early, then set the warning time to Me-
inform you when there is an intervention.
dium. The Late warning time should only be set
in special circumstances. >
D_ In certain countries.
152
Driver assistance
@ Tips Side assist

— If the system is switched off, it switches on petted
aCoy a)
again automatically once the ignition is Applies to: vehicles with side assist
switched on again. al3
— Switch Audi pre sense off when you are not a
ze|
using public streets, when loading the vehi-
cle onto a vehicle carrier, train, ship, or oth-
er type of transportation, or when towing
the vehicle. This can help to prevent an un-
desired intervention from the Audi pre
sense system.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
If BJ is displayed when there is a malfunction,

the Audi pre sense functions may be unavailable
or may be limited.

may be covered. Bring the vehicle to a full stop,
switch the ignition off, and clean the area in front Fig. 112 Driving situations and exterior mirror display
of the sensors > page 123.
If the message still appears after switching the General information
ignition on again, have an authorized repair facili- Side assist monitors the blind spot and traffic in
ty correct the malfunction as soon as possible. the adjacent lanes behind the vehicle. Within sys-
tem limits, side assist can detect traffic that is
approaching from behind and provide a warning
when you are changing lanes and turning. The
system uses the data from the radar sensors at
the rear corners of the vehicle.
The side assist is active at walking speeds and

higher. If an object that is classified as critical is
approaching, the display in the exterior mirror @)
on the corresponding side of the vehicle will light
up.
Driving situations
The system can provide warnings about the fol-
lowing risks:
@ Approaching vehicles: a vehicle may be clas-
sified as critical in some cases, evenif it is
farther away. The faster a vehicle
4M8012721BF
153
Driver assistance
approaches, the sooner the display will turn cated in the area that is critical for a lane change.
on. For example:
@ Vehicles traveling in the same direction: the — If the lanes are narrow or if you are driving on
display will turn on if vehicles traveling in the
the edge of your lane. If this is the case, the
same direction as your vehicle are classified system may have detected a vehicle in another
as critical. The side assist warns you of all de- lane that is not adjacent to your current lane.
tected vehicles when they are in the “blind —If you are driving through a curve. Side assist
spot” or before they reach that point.
may react to a vehicle that is in the same lane
@ Vehicles you are passing: the display only or one lane over from the adjacent lane.
turns on if you slowly pass a detected vehicle — If side assist reacts to other objects (such as
(difference in speed between the two vehicles roadside structures like guard rails).
is less than 9 mph (15 km/h)). There is no
display if you pass a vehicle more quickly. ZA WARNING
Information stage — Observe the safety precautions and note the
At the information level, the side assist informs
cameras > page 121.
you of detected objects that are classified as criti-
— The display may not appear on time when
cal. This is even possible when your vehicle is sta-
vehicles are approaching or being passed
tionary and the turn signal is turned on, so that
very quickly.
the system can also assist you when turning.
From speeds of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
G) Tips
and higher, the system will warn you of detected
objects that are classified as critical, even if the — If the window glass in the driver's door or
turn signal is not turned on. front passenger's door has been tinted, the
display in the exterior mirror may be incor-
The display remains dim in the information stage
rect.
so that you are not distracted while looking for-
— These systems are not available in trailer
ward.
towing mode. There is no guarantee the sys-
Warning stage tems will switch off when using a retrofitted
trailer hitch. Do not use these functions
If you activate a turn signal and the display flash-
when towing a trailer.
es, side assist is warning about objects that have
— The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 112
been classified as critical.
are diagrams and do not represent a true-
Depending on the vehicle equipment and other to-scale image of the sensor ranges.
driver assistance systems, the display may also — The system complies with United States FCC
flash if you have not activated a turn signal. If regulations and ISED regulations
you are approaching a detected lane marker line => page 311.
and it appears you will be leaving the lane, the
display will warn you about detected vehicles Peet
that are classified as critical. You can also be Applies to: vehicles with side assist
warned with corrective steering > page 147,
Lane departure warning. The system can be switched on and off in the
MMI & page 124. If the system is activated, the
Detection range displays will turn on briefly when the ignition is
The radar sensors are designed to detect the left switched on.
and right adjacent lanes when the road lanes are
the normal width. In some situations, the display
may turn on even though there is no vehicle lo-
154
Driver assistance
Adjusting the brightness Exit warning

You can adjust the brightness of the display in
the exterior mirror. The settings depend on the
Applies to: vehicles with exit warning system
vehicle equipment.

VEHICLE > Driver assistance > (<23) > Side as-
sist > Brightness.
The display brightness is automatically adapted

to the ambient light. If the automatic adaptation
has already reached the upper or lower limit, no
change will be apparent when the setting is
changed, or it will only become visible when the
ambient light changes. Adjust the brightness to a
level where the display in the information stage
will not disrupt your view ahead. If you change
the brightness, the display will briefly show the
brightness level in the information stage.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with side assist
iff or ig is displayed when there is a malfunc-

tion, the side assist and exit warning system
functions may be unavailable or may be limited. Fig. 114 Front door: warning strip
A message that indicates the cause and possible General information

weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor Within system limits, the exit warning system
may be covered. Clean the sensor area at the rear can detect traffic approaching from behind such
corners of the vehicle > page 123, fig. 91 and try as vehicles, and provide assistance based on this
to turn the systems on again later. information when you are exiting the vehicle
=> fig. 113. The system uses the data from the ra-
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author- dar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle.
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct- Displays and warnings
ed. If you pull a door handle while the vehicle is sta-
tionary and an object classified as critical is ap-
proaching, the warning strip @ and the display
on the exterior mirror (2) will light up on the cor-
responding side of the vehicle. The opening of
the door will also be slowed briefly.
If the door is opened, the displays on that side

will flash. If another road user that is classified
as critical is approaching while a door is already
open, the displays on that door will turn on.
4M8012721BF
The same messages apply for the exit warning

system and side assist > page 155.
155
Driver assistance
Switching the exit warning on and off Intersection assistant

— The system can be switched on and off in the
MMI & page 124.
Applies to: vehicles with intersection assistant
ZA\ WARNING
cameras > page 121.
— Always pay attention to traffic and to the
area around your vehicle. The exit warning
system does not replace the attention of the
vehicle occupants. The vehicle occupants are
always responsible for opening the doors
and exiting the vehicle.
— The exit warning system does not respond
RAH-9247
to people and cannot warn you about every
type of approaching objects, such as cyclists.
Always monitor the traffic as well as the ve-
hicle's surroundings with direct eye contact.
— The display may not appear in time when
vehicles are approaching very quickly.
— The exit warning system does not react to
stationary objects or pedestrians.
— The exit warning system will not provide Fig. 116 Instrument cluster: directional display from the
alerts if your vehicle is pulled too far into intersection assistant
the parking space so that it is hidden by ad-
jacent vehicles. General information
The intersection assistant can warn the driver of
G) Tips approaching cross traffic in complex intersections
— The exit warning system can be available for > fig. 115.
up to approximately three minutes after un- The system monitors intersections and exit
locking the vehicle and opening the door as ramps using the sensors installed in the vehicle
well as after switching off the ignition. Then that detect the front and side areas around the
the displays flash briefly and the system vehicle. Moving objects that are approaching
switches off. from behind, such as cars, are detected within
— The system is not available when towing a the limits of the system > A\. The system can al-
trailer. There is no guarantee the system so warn the driver of a potential collision with de-
will switch off when using a retrofitted trail- tected approaching cross traffic in intersections
er hitch. Do not use these functions when and exit ramps with poor visibility.
towing a trailer.
— The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 113 Requirements for using the intersection
are diagrams and do not represent a true- assistant:
to-scale image of the sensor ranges. — The speed must not be higher than approxi-
— The system complies with United States FCC mately 18 mph (30 km/h).
regulations and ISED regulations —The “D” gear is selected.
=> page 311.
156
Driver assistance
Displays, warnings, and braking as well as the vehicle's surroundings with di-
— Display: the red arrow
@ can indicate the direc- rect eye contact.
tion from which the cross traffic is approaching. —The system may not react if vehicles are ap-
The indicator in the upper display only appears proaching very fast.
when the parking aid is activated. For vehicles
with peripheral cameras only in the Front and G@) Tips
Front corner camera views. The display only ap- — The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 115
pears in the instrument cluster > fig. 116 when are diagrams and do not represent a true-
the Driver assistance display is open in the on- to-scale image of the sensor ranges.
board computer > page 16. — The system complies with United States FCC
— Warnings: the message Cross traffic! © can regulations and ISED regulations
warn about critical cross-traffic when driving > page 311.
forward. There may also be an audible signal.
— Automatic brake activation: if you do not react Emergency assist
to a warning, a brief braking by the system can
warn you of a potential collision with an ap-
proaching object when driving forward at Applies to: vehicles with emergency assist
speeds up to approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
General information
Switching the intersection assistant on and Within the limits of the system, emergency assist
off can detect inactivity from the driver. In these in-
— The system can be switched on and off in the stances, the system will warn the driver, assume
MMI & page 124. control of the vehicle if necessary, and bring the
vehicle automatically to a stop in the lane.
Messages
Regardless of the speed, the emergency assist is
If Eo, or > is displayed when there is a mal-
automatically available when the adaptive cruise
function, the intersection assistant functions
assist* is activated. When the adaptive cruise as-
may be unavailable or may be limited.
sist* is deactivated, the system is only available
A message that indicates the cause and possible at speeds above approximately 40 mph
solution may appear with some displays. The (65 km/h).
Emergency assist functions
sensors > page 123 and try to turn the system on Measures may be initiated in stages. The vehicle
again later. can be controlled with the limits of the system.
The measures depend on the dangerous situation
and the vehicle equipment:
— Visual and audio warnings
ed.
— Vehicle control
— Reduction of vehicle speed in stages
ZA\ WARNING — Lowers the volume of the Infotainment system
— Tugs on the safety belt
— Activates the brakes
cameras © page 121. — The emergency flashers are activated
— The intersection assistant will not provide — Audi pre sense preemptive safety measures are
triggered > page 150
4M8012721BF
alerts about people and cannot warn you

about every type of approaching objects, — The brakes are applied until the vehicle is sta-
such as cyclists. Always monitor the traffic tionary
157
Driver assistance
As soon as the vehicle comes to a full stop, the

AN WARNING
vehicle prepares for the vehicle passengers to be
rescued. The parking brake is set, “P” gear is en- — Observe the safety precautions and note the
gaged, the doors are unlocked, and the interior limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
lighting is activated. The emergency call» will be cameras > page 121.
started if necessary once the vehicle has been — The emergency assist is an assist system
stationary for several seconds. that should only be used in cases of emer-
gency to take over control of the vehicle and
Display bring it to a stop.
If /S\ is displayed for example, the emergency
assist is active. (i) Tips
— Depending on the severity of the detected
Overriding the emergency assist
situation, not all safety measures will be ini-
You can override emergency assist as follows tiated. Certain functions can be adjusted or
>A: skipped if necessary.
— Move the steering wheel. Or — If the emergency assist was triggered, it will
— Press the brake pedal. Or only be available again after a brief period.
— Press the accelerator pedal distinctly.
When stationary, you can end the emergency as-

sist by leaving the "P" position or releasing the
parking brake > page 106.
Switching the emergency assist on and off

The system can be switched on and off in the
MMI &page 124.
Messages
a | or & is displayed when there is a malfunc-
tion, the emergency assist functions may be un-

again later.

ed.
) This function is not available in every market and on all ve-

hicle equipment levels.
158
Parking and maneuvering
Parking and Remote park assist plus with garage func-

maneuvering tion)2) enhances the remote controlled parking
by remote park assist to include parking in pri-
Introduction vate one-car and two-car garages > page 173.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, various Settings options

parking aids will help you when parking and ma- You can adjust parking aid functions individually.
neuvering. The adjustment options depend on the vehicle
equipment.
Parking aid
— Automatic activation > page 160
The parking aid plus assists you while parking
— Front and rear volume > page 161
using audio and visual signals to warn you about
— Entertainment fader > page 161.
objects detected in front of, behind, and at the
— Clean rearview camera > page 162
sides* of the vehicle > page 159.
— Trailer view > page 163
The rearview camera shows the area behind the — View > page 165
vehicle in the MMI display. The lines in the rear- — Rear cross-traffic assist > page 166
view camera image help you to park and maneu- — Maneuver assist > page 179
ver > page 162.
The peripheral cameras are an addition to the Z\ WARNING

rearview camera and help you to see various Observe the safety precautions and note the
areas around the vehicle while parking and ma- limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
neuvering > page 162. cameras > page 121.
The rear cross-traffic assist can warn you of ap-

proaching cross traffic when driving in reverse or
G) Tips
exiting a parking space > page 166. Audi recommends practicing parking in a traf-
fic-free location or parking lot to become fa-
The maneuver assist!)”) helps the driver to ma- miliar with the systems. Practice parking in
neuver > page 178.
good light and weather conditions.
Assisted parking
The following systems help you to locate suitable
Parking aid plus
parking spaces > page 167 and to park in them Activating and deactivating
and exit them. The driver must always monitor Applies to: vehicles with parking aid plus
the area around the vehicle and supervise the
parking process.
[RAZ-1042)
Park assist plus!)2) helps you when parking in

available parking spaces and exiting them. This
occurs either in the vehicle by pressing a drive
button > page 170 or, if equipped with Remote
park assist plus!)2), from outside the vehicle by
remote control using a mobile device
=> page 173. The systems control steering, gear
selection, acceleration, and braking.
Fig. 117 Center console: parking aid button
4M8012721BF
)_ System availability may be limited depending on the mar-

ket.
2) In preparation at the time of printing.
159
General information — The vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph

The parking aid assists when parking and maneu- (10 km/h)
vering by providing warnings about obstacles. If — The ignition is switched off and back on
the ultrasonic sensors on the vehicle > page 122, again
fig. 88 detect an obstacle, the system will pro- — The parking brake is set and then released
vide audio and visual warnings. — The “P” gear is engaged and released
again
Activating and deactivating
Requirement: the vehicle speed must be under
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Applies to: vehicles with parking aid plus
> Press the Put or & button @ in the center con-

sole. When activating, a brief tone will sound
and the LED in the button will turn on.
Automatic activation
> The system activates automatically when re-
verse gear is engaged while the engine is run-
ning. A brief tone will sound.
Fig. 118 Upper display: distance indicator
> If Automatic activation is switched on in the
MMI and if the vehicle approaches an obstacle
If the sensors detect an obstacle, audible and vis-
at speeds below approximately 6 mph (10
ual signals will warn you.
km/h), the parking aid will switch on automati-
cally. Audible signals will sound once the obsta- Visual warnings
cle is within the sensor detection area.
The visual warnings in the upper display help you
» Applies to: MMI: To switch Automatic activa-
to detect the critical vehicle area and to estimate
tion on or off, select on the home screen: VEHI-
the distance to an obstacle.
CLE > Parking aid > Automatic activation.
Red segments (2) show detected obstacles that
Automatic deactivation are in your vehicle's path. The red lines @) mark
The distance indicator for the parking aid plus the expected direction of travel based on the
will deactivate automatically when driving for- steering angle. A white segment (8) indicates a
ward faster than 6 mph (10 km/h). detected obstacle that is outside of the vehicle's
path. The closer your vehicle comes to the obsta-
ZA\ WARNING cle, the closer the segments will move to the ve-
hicle. The collision area has been reached when
the next to last segment is displayed. Obstacles
in the collision area, including those outside of
cameras > page 121.
the vehicle's path, are shown in red. Do not con-
tinue driving farther.
@) Note
Keep enough distance from the curb to avoid Audio signals
damage to the rims. The closer your vehicle gets to a detected obsta-
cle, the shorter the time between the audible sig-
G) Tips nals. A continuous tone sounds when an obstacle
— If the parking aid is deactivated, it can only is less than approximately 1 foot (0.30 m) away
be reactivated automatically when one of from the front or rear of the vehicle. A continu-
the following conditions is met: ous tone sounds when an obstacle is less than
approximately 0.7 feet (0.20 m) away from the >
160
sides* of the vehicle. Do not continue driving for- ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
ward or in reverse >@. ed.
> To deactivate audio signals while parking, press

(in the upper display. The audio signals will be
ZA WARNING
automatically activated again the next time the — Observe the safety precautions and note the
parking aid is activated. limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 121.
Adjusting the volume — Sensors and cameras have spots in which
You can adjust the volume to your preferences. the surrounding area cannot be detected.
The settings depend on the vehicle equipment. Objects, animals, and people may only be
detected with limitations may not be detect-
» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the
HICLE > Parking aid. Or vehicle's surroundings directly and do not
> Press |- -| in the upper display when the parking become distracted.
system is active.
Possible settings: @) Note
Front volume - Volume for the front and side* — Keep enough distance from the curb to
area. avoid damage to the rims.
— Applies to: vehicles with assisted parking
Rear volume - Volume for the rear area. systems: If you park in short parking spaces
Entertainment fader —- The volume of the audio/ using assisted parking systems, a continu-
video source is lowered when the parking aid is ous tone will sound from the parking aid
activated. when the distance to an object is less than
approximately 0.7 feet (0.20 m). Do not
The new level is demonstrated briefly* when the
continue driving farther.
volume is adjusted.
Error messages @) Tips

—The side area* > page 122, fig. 88 is detect-
If P4 appears, the sensor in the respective area
ed and evaluated when passing. There may
or the speaker is faulty. Drive immediately to an
have been changes to the surrounding area
after switching the ignition off and on
again, after opening the doors, or if the ve-
If Avis displayed in the MMI, the ultrasonic sen- hicle is left stationary for a period of time.
sor indicated is icy or dirty. Clean the area in front In this case, the area will appear black until
of the sensors > page 123. the area has been detected and evaluated.
if or is displayed when there is a malfunc- — If the distance to an obstacle remains con-
tion, the parking aid functions may be unavaila- stant, the volume of the distance warning
ble or may be limited. gradually lowers after a few seconds until it
is muted (this does not apply to the continu-
A message that indicates the cause and possible ous tone). If the obstacle comes closer than
solution may appear with some displays. The it was before the sound was muted, the
weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor tone will sound again. If the obstacle be-
may be covered. Clean the area in front of the comes farther away than it was before the
sensors > page 123 and try to turn the system on sound was muted, no tone will sound. Pay
again later. attention to the vehicle's surroundings
4M8012721BF
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author- when you start to drive.

ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- — There is no distance warning for the rear
and the sides* when trailer towing mode is >
161
detected. The front sensors remain activat- Activating and deactivating

ed. There is no guarantee the functions will Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras
be deactivated when using a retrofitted
RAZ-1042:
trailer hitch.
Rearview camera and

peripheral cameras
Intro ion
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras
QNn
°°3
>i Fig. 120 Center console: parking aid button
oO
Activating and deactivating

> Press the { button @ in the center console.
When activating, a brief tone will sound and
the LED in the button will turn on. Or
> Press b_J in the upper display if the visual dis-
tance indicator is shown > page 160, fig. 118.
Fig. 119 Orientation line display when parking
The system can be activated at low speeds, such
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a rearview when maneuvering.
camera or multiple peripheral cameras may be
available.
The system activates automatically when reverse
The rearview camera helps you to park or maneu-
gear is engaged while the engine is running. A
ver using the orientation lines.
brief tone will sound.
The peripheral cameras expand the vehicle over-
Automatic deactivation
view to include various views around the vehicle
that can be selected. The system will deactivate automatically once
the vehicle exceeds a certain speed while driving
Z\ WARNING forward.
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and Z\ WARNING
cameras > page 121. Observe the safety precautions and note the
cameras > page 121.
(ela Wa)
You can manually start the cleaning of the rear-

view camera. The settings depend on the vehicle
equipment.
> Select |- -| > Clean rearview camera in the upper

display when the parking aid is active. Or
162
> Move the window wiper lever S7 into the posi- @ You should stop driving in reverse when the
tion for cleaning the rear window & & page 57. red orientation line touches the edge of an
object, at the latest.
ZA WARNING Trailer view
Observe the safety precautions and note the Applies to: vehicles with trailer view
The trailer view > fig. 122 assists you in position-
cameras > page 121.
ing the vehicle in front of a trailer.
— Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras:

Warnings
Switch to the Rear view > page 164, fig. 123.
— Select |- -| > Trailer view in the upper display
when the parking aid is active.
Now you can position your vehicle in front of the

trailer. The orange orientation line ©) > fig. 122
indicates the expected path toward the trailer
hitch. Use the blue markings © to help you esti-
mate the distance to the trailer hitch. Each mark-
ing represents approximately 1 foot (0.30 me-
ters). The width of the blue surface represents
the maximum steering wheel angle.
Symbols
If $2/&9/< is displayed and the display area
represented by that symbol is not available, then
the camera on the that side is not available. The
power exterior mirrors may have been folded in
or a door or the luggage compartment lid may
Applies to: vehicles with trailer view have been opened.
Fig. 122 Upper display: trailer view
If# is displayed, there is a system malfunction
When parking with the rearview camera or pe- and the display area represented by that symbol
ripheral camera, the parking system plus audio is not available. The camera is not working in this
and visual warnings* will also assist you area.
=> page 160.
If Avis displayed, the respective ultrasonic sensor
Visual orientation lines is icy or dirty. Clean the area in front of the sen-
sors > page 123.
@ The orange orientation lines show the vehi-
cle's direction of travel >@. Turn the steer- If one of the symbols continues to be displayed,
ing wheel until the orange orientation lines drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or
align with the parking space. authorized Audi Service Facility to have the mal-
@ Use the blue markings to help you estimate function repaired.
the distance to an obstacle. Each marking
A WARNING
represents approximately 3 feet (1 meter).
The blue area represents an extension of the — Observe the safety precautions and note the
vehicle's outline by approximately 16 feet (5 limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 121.
4M8012721BF
meters) to the rear.

@® You can recognize the rear bumper in the — Sensors and cameras have spots in which
lower display. the surrounding area cannot be detected. >
163
Objects, animals, and people may only be compartment lid is completely closed. Make
detected with limitations may not be detect- sure any objects you may have mounted on
ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the the luggage compartment lid do not block
vehicle's surroundings directly and do not the rearview camera.
become distracted.
G) Tips
@) Note — Applies to vehicles with air suspension: The
— The orange orientation lines @) show the di- accuracy of the orientation lines and blue
rection the rear of the vehicle will be travel- surfaces on the camera display decreases
ing, based on the steering wheel angle. The when the vehicle is raised or lowered with
front of the vehicle swings out more than the air suspension.
the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty of — There is no distance warning for the rear
distance so that an exterior mirror or a cor- and the sides* when trailer towing mode is
ner of the vehicle does not collide with any detected. The front sensors remain activat-
obstacles. ed. The visual display switches to trailer
— Keep enough distance from the curb to mode. There is no guarantee the functions
avoid damage to the rims. will be deactivated when using a retrofitted
— Only use the images provided by the camera trailer hitch.
on the rear of the vehicle when the luggage
Operating the peripheral cameras

Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
E
3
Fig. 123 Upper display: left side: surrounding area. Right side: 3D surroundings.
On vehicles with peripheral cameras, you can se- Selecting the views
lect among different views. > To display the entire selection bar, tap the cur-
The camera views can be controlled with the rent view (2) or swipe at the edge of the selec-
touch display. In certain views, you can zoom in tion bar from left to right.
or out on the displayed area, and move, tilt, or > To select a view, press (2)- @) or tap in an area
rotate the 3D surroundings. to show the vehicle in the side view )). >
2 Requirement: The vehicle surroundings (Camera) must be

selected in the View in the side area.
164
> To select a 3D surroundings view, press the »@) > To re-center the 3D surroundings, tap the cam-
symbol @). Then select the desired 3D sur- era image twice.
roundings view () - @.
Tilting or rotating the views
Switching the views quickly Applies to: 3D surroundings view
To switch the views quickly (for example, from > To tilt or rotate the 3D surroundings, use your
Front corner to Front): finger to drag it in any direction > fig. 123, on
the right side.
> Tap the camera image twice. Or
> To re-center the 3D surroundings behind the
> Pull two fingers apart or together in a sideways
vehicle, tap the camera image twice.
motion on the camera image.
Selecting a view in the side area
Zooming in and out on the views
Applies to: surroundings and 3D surroundings views The vehicle surroundings are shown in the side
area of the display. You can switch between a vis-
> To zoom in or out on an area, place two fingers
ual display (Graphic) and the vehicle surround-
on that area and push them apart or pull them
ings (Camera).
together > fig. 123, left side.
> Select |- ] > View in the upper display when the
Moving the view
parking system is active.
Applies to: surroundings and 3D surroundings views
> To move the view, press and pull it in any direc-

tion using one finger.
Symbol/Descrip-
Description
tion
ED) Switch between 3D surroundings and Surroundings

© |o|/ © |e] © |e
Front corner This view makes it easier to drive out of tight parking spaces or areas and
©e$|e@|e|
or Display selection intersections with poor visibility. It shows an almost 180° panorama view
bar in front of the vehicle.
This view assists you in using the full area for maneuvering in front of the
Front
vehicle.
This view helps you to maneuver and position the vehicle more precisely.
Surroundings The area around the vehicle is shown using the camera images. The vehi-
cle image is shown by the system > A\.
This view assists you in using the full area for maneuvering behind the ve-
Rear
hicle. This is the rearview camera image.
This view can assist you when driving out of tight parking spaces or areas
Rear corner with poor visibility. It shows an almost 180° panorama view behind the
vehicle.
This view helps you to see the distance between the front tires and the
Front tires
curb and the steering wheel angle when parking.
This view helps you to detect the distance between the rear wheels and
Rear tires
the curb when parking.
In these views, you can see the areas surrounding the vehicle in 3D when
4M8012721BF
3D surroundings parking. The vehicle surrounding views are created from the camera im-
ages and sensor data. The vehicle image is shown by the system > A\.
165
A WARNING
cameras > page 121.
— The Surroundings and 3D surroundings are
created from the individual camera images.
The vehicle image is shown by the system.
Objects and obstacles above the camera are Fig. 125 Upper display: rear cross-traffic assist display
not displayed.
General information
@) Note The rear cross-traffic assist monitors the area be-
Only use the images provided by the camera hind and next to the vehicle using radar sensors
on the rear of the vehicle when the luggage at the rear corners of the vehicle. The system can
compartment lid is completely closed. Make detect moving objects that are approaching, such
sure any objects you may have mounted on as vehicles > fig. 124. A display in the MMI and
the luggage compartment lid do not block the various warnings provide assistance when exiting
rearview camera. a parking space.
Requirements for using the rear cross-traffic

iG) Tips assist:
— Depending on the selected gear, it will auto-
— The parking system is switched on > page 159.
matically switch between the Front and
— Reverse gear must be engaged and the speed
Rear views. If you switch the view manually,
while driving in reverse must not be higher than
the automatic front/rear camera change will
6 mph (10 km/h).
be temporarily deactivated.
— When first activated while a forward gear is Displays, warnings, and braking
engaged, the Front corner is displayed. — Display: the display @ appears only when the
parking aid is active. In vehicles with peripheral
Rear cross-traffic assist cameras, the display only appears in the Rear
and Rear corner camera views. Arrows show the
direction from which the cross traffic is ap-
Applies to: vehicles with rear cross-traffic assist
proaching.
7]
s — Audible warnings: an audio signal may sound
g
== as an additional warning when driving in re-
a
verse.
— Automatic brake activation: if you do not react
to a warning, a brief braking by the system can
warn you of a potential collision with an ap-
proaching object.
The audible warning signal and the automatic

brake activation occur only when driving in re-
Fig. 124 Sensor detection range for rear cross-traffic assist
verse.
Switch rear cross-traffic assist on and off

— Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Parking aid > Rear cross-traffic assist.
Or
166
— Select | > Rear cross-traffic assist in the upper — The system is not available when the vehicle
display when the parking aid is active. detects that you are towing a trailer. There
is no guarantee the functions will be deacti-
Messages
vated when using a retrofitted trailer hitch.
ire or > is displayed when there is a mal- Do not use these functions when towing a
function, the rear cross traffic assist functions trailer.
may be unavailable or may be limited. — The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 124
are diagrams and do not represent a true-
to-scale image of the sensor ranges.
may be covered. Clean the sensor area in the ve- regulations and ISED regulations
=> page 311.
hicle rear and try to turn the system on again lat-
er.
Assisted parking
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct- Applies to: vehicles with assisted parking
ed.
If your vehicle is equipped with park assist plus
Z\ WARNING or remote park assist plus, these systems will

help you to find suitable parking spaces. Parking
— Observe the safety precautions and note the spaces are measured using ultrasonic sensors on
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and the sides of the vehicle. Depending on vehicle
cameras > page 121. equipment, the laser scanner may also improve
— The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide the measurement.
alerts about people and cannot warn you
about every type of approaching objects, If a parking space is found, the systems will help
such as cyclists. Always monitor the traffic you to park while the driver monitors the vehi-
as well as the vehicle's surroundings with di- cle's surroundings with the parking aids, cam-
rect eye contact. eras*, and direct eye contact.
— The system may not react if objects are ap-

proaching very quickly.
ZA WARNING
— The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide Observe the safety precautions and note the
alerts if your vehicle is parallel parked or if limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
your vehicle is pulled too far into the park- cameras > page 121.
ing space so that it is hidden by adjacent
vehicles.
@) Tips
— Once an automatic brake activation occurs,
the system cannot initiate another activa-
tion for several seconds.
— System functions may not be available if the
ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a
malfunction.
— If there is an acoustic warning signal from
4M8012721BF
the rear cross-traffic assist, then the park-

ing aid may not warn you of detected obsta-
cles under certain circumstances.
167
cE © Two-car garages)
Applies to: vehicles with assisted parking
— If there is enough space in a two-car garage,

the system automatically selects the park-
ing position in front of the vehicle that the
driver has selected.
— You can also drive into a perpendicular park-
ing space yourself and then activate the sys-
tem. If this is the case, the front of the vehi-
cle should already be in the space () so that
the sensors can measure the space.
go
is P
as
Applies to: vehicles with assisted parking
Fig. 127 Overview of parking options in garages

ing parking options may be available: Fig. 128 Overview of options for exiting a parking space
@ Backing into parallel parking spaces

@ Backing into perpendicular parking spaces
ing options for exiting parking spaces may be
@®) Driving forward into perpendicular parking
available:
spaces that you have already driven past
@ Leaving perpendicular parking spaces»)
@) Driving forward into perpendicular parking
@ Leaving parallel parking spaces
spaces if you have already driven to the space
yourself and the front of the vehicle is al- ® Exiting parking spaces in garages)
ready in the space
One-car garages)
@
D_ Only remote controlled parking.
168
Parking space sea > Make sure that the parking space is suitable for
Applies to: vehicles with assisted parking your vehicle >().
Depending on vehicle equipment and the applica-

ble legal regulations, you may start the assisted
parking process after selecting the parking space
@:
— In the vehicle: parking with the park assist plus

and the |>>P] button > page 171.
— Outside of the vehicle: remote controlled park-
Fig. 129 Upper display: activated parking space search ing with a mobile device > page 173
Activating the parking space search Maneuvering area
> Press P@ in the lower display. Or: The vehicle can go off course during the parking
> To activate the parking space search when the process > A\. If there are obstacles within the
parking aid is activated, press Pe in the upper maneuvering area that block or endanger the
display. parking process, for example on the opposite
side of the street, a message may appear. You
Searching for parking spaces may need to drive farther forward and stay closer
> Drive forward to the row of parking spaces at a to the row of parking spaces.
low speed. For the best parking results, the ve-
hicle should be approximately 3 feet (1 m) from ZA\ WARNING
the row of parking spaces. — Observe the safety precautions and note the
> The parking space search is first done on the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
side of your lane. To switch the side for the cameras > page 121.
parking space search, activate the turn signal — The driver is always responsible when enter-
for that side. Depending on vehicle equipment, ing or exiting a parking space and during
you may also be able to press on the side next similar maneuvers.
to your vehicle in the upper display. — Sensors and cameras have spots in which
the surrounding area cannot be detected.
Selecting the parking space
Objects, animals, and people may only be
If the system finds a parking space that could be detected with limitations may not be detect-
suitable for the vehicle length and width, it will ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the
be displayed. The system automatically suggests vehicle's surroundings directly and do not
a parking option @. become distracted.
If the parking space allows different parking op-
tions, they can be selected manually. Press one of @) Note
the suggested parking options @. — Parking spaces classified as suitable by the
system may have been detected incorrectly.
Starting the parking process
The driver must decide if the parking space
Once the vehicle has reached the correct position, displayed is suitable for the vehicle.
a P will appear above the selected parking space — Certain conditions near the parking space
©. The roof in the parking aid display @) may may cause the parking process to fail, such
show the required braking or driving direction. as if the parking space is near trees or posts,
or if the ground is covered, for example,
> Keep the vehicle as parallel as possible to the
4M8012721BF
parked vehicles or to the side of the road. with gravel, snow, or ice.
169
@) Tips ZA WARNING
— If you did not drive past a suitable parking — Observe the safety precautions and note the
space too quickly, the system can also be ac- limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
tivated afterward by pressing Pe. cameras > page 121.
— The Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) — The driver is always responsible when enter-
must not be switched off during the parking ing or exiting a parking space and during
process. If the ESC intervenes, the parking similar maneuvers.
process will be canceled. — Do not use this function if the vehicle cannot
— You can also drive into a perpendicular park- move freely, for example when on a vehicle
ing space yourself and then activate the sys- jack.
tem. If this is the case, the front of the vehi- — Sensors and cameras have spots in which
cle should already be in the space (4) the surrounding area cannot be detected.
=> page 168, fig. 126 so that the sensors Objects, animals, and people may only be
can measure the space. detected with limitations may not be detect-
— You cannot park with the parking assist sys- ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the
tems when you are towing a trailer or have vehicle's surroundings directly and do not
the connector inserted in the trailer socket. become distracted.
— The system is not available when certain as-
sist systems are switched on. @) Note
— If there are suitable parking spaces on both — Do not use park assist plus when transport-
sides of the street, for example, on a one- ing cargo that extends outside of the vehicle
way street, you can change the side where or when snow chains are mounted.
the system is searching for parking spaces — Park assist plus and remote controlled park-
by activating the turn signal for the other ing guides the vehicle either away from
side or by pressing on that side in the upper curbs or onto them if other vehicles are
display. parked on the curb. Make sure that your ve-
— The park systems do not provide support for hicle's tires and rims are not damaged. Re-
assisted parking on tight curves. sume control of the vehicle in time or stop
the parking process if needed to prevent
Park assist plus!)2) damage.
— In parking spaces without curbs, maintain a
General information
distance of at least 19 inches (50 cm) from
Applies to: vehicles with park assist plus
walls and buildings in order to reduce the
Park assist plus parks the vehicle after the park- risk of vehicle damage.
ing space search and also exits the parking space.
While the driver presses and holds the [>>P] but- G) Tips
ton and monitors the vehicle's surroundings, park Follow the legal regulations in the country
assist plus controls the steering, gear selection, where you are operating the vehicle when us-
acceleration, and braking. ing park assist plus. Park assist plus may be
prohibited in some countries. The system may
be unavailable in countries where it has been
deactivated in order to comply with legal reg-
ulations. Data will not be transmitted to Audi. >
)_ system availability may be limited depending on the mar-

ket.
170
The driver is always responsible for adhering process will be recalculated based on the vehi-
to the regulations applicable in the country cle position.
where the vehicle is being operated.
LED in the button @)
Parking with park assist plus!)2) The LED informs about the availability of park as-
Applies to: vehicles with park assist plus sist plus:
— Blinking white - park assist plus is ready to

control the parking process automatically or to
resume after an interruption.
— Green - park assist plus is active.
— Red - park assist plus was paused or stopped. A
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display > page 173.
Indicator in the upper display

The current driving maneuver and the status of
the park assist plus are shown in the upper dis-
play:
@ Path that the vehicle will travel during the
current parking maneuver
@® End point of the current parking maneuver/
direction change
@ 8 Park assist plus active
© Driving direction display
Fig. 131 Upper display: park assist plus display
End of the parking process
Requirement: a suitable parking space must be The parking process will end automatically once
found and selected > page 167. The vehicle must the vehicle has reached the end point in the park-
initially be stationary and the brakes must be ing space. After park assist plus finishes parking
pressed.
successfully, the parking lock will be engaged
> Remove your hands from the steering wheel. and the parking brake will be set.
> Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. If the
Pause park assist plus > page 173.
traffic situation permits it, press and hold the
>>P] button @ and release the brakes > /A\. /\ WARNING
> Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. In sit-
uations where conditions are unclear, pause the
parking process by releasing the |>>P] button.
cameras > page 121.
For example, this may be necessary if an obsta-
— Press and hold the [>>P] button only if you
cle appears or the vehicle comes very close to
are sure that there are no obstacles in the
an obstacle.
vehicle's path or under the vehicle, and that
> To resume the parking process, press and hold
no obstacles will move into the vehicle's
the 2>P] button again. The rest of the parking
path. >
4M8012721BF

ket.
171
— Park assist plus is an assist system. The driv- Exiting a parking space with park assist
Pye oa)
er is still responsible for monitoring the ve-
hicle's surroundings and preventing colli- Applies to: vehicles with park assist plus
sions when using the system. If you parked the vehicle in a parallel parking
— When using park assist plus to drive into or space, park assist plus can help you drive out of
out of a parking space, the steering wheel it.
turns quickly on its own. Reaching into the
steering wheel spokes while this is happen- > Start the engine.
ing can result in injury. > Press P@ in the lower display.
— Sensors and cameras have spots in which > Wait until a message appears on the upper dis-
the surrounding area cannot be detected. play that requests you to select the direction to
Objects, animals, and people may only be travel in when exiting the parking space.
detected with limitations may not be detect- > Activate the turn signal on the desired side or
ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the press that side next to the vehicle in the upper
vehicle's surroundings directly and do not display.
become distracted. > Remove your hands from the steering wheel.
> Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. If the
@) Tips traffic situation permits it, press and hold the
>>P] button @ > page 171, fig. 130 and re-
— You can reduce the speed specified by the
lease the brakes > A\.
system at any time by pressing the brake > Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. If an
pedal.
obstacle appears, interrupt the parking process
— The system can incorrectly interpret parking by releasing the [>>P] button. The vehicle re-
space barriers (such as parking curbs). Take mains stopped.
over the parking process = page 173 if the > To resume the parking process, press and hold
vehicle is not completely inside the parking the [>>P| button again.
space or if the vehicle tries to drive over the > The process of exiting the parking space has
parking space barrier.
ended if additional corrective movements are
— The image in the display is an enlarged and no longer necessary and the specified steering
distorted image. Under certain circumstan- wheel angle is sufficient to drive out of the
ces, objects may appear different and un- parking space. Resume control of the steering
clear on the display. This is especially true if wheel >@).
there are objects that do not touch the
ground, such as the bumper of a parked ve- Pause park assist plus > page 173.
hicle or the rear of a truck. Drive with spe-
cial care and do not use the image if neces- Z\ WARNING
sary. — Observe the safety precautions and note the
— Applies to vehicles with air suspension: The limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
accuracy of the orientation lines and green cameras > page 121.
surfaces in the display decreases when the — Press and hold the [>>P] button only if you
vehicle is raised or lowered with the air sus- are sure that there are no obstacles in the
pension. vehicle's path or under the vehicle, and that
no obstacles will move into the vehicle's
path. >

ket.
172
— Park assist plus is an assist system. The driv- ZA\ WARNING

er is still responsible for monitoring the ve-
hicle's surroundings and preventing colli-
sions when using the system.
cameras > page 121.
— When using park assist plus to drive into or
out of a parking space, the steering wheel
turns quickly on its own. Reaching into the Messages
steering wheel spokes while this is happen- Applies to: vehicles with park assist plus
ing can result in injury.

If the roll or il indicator light turns on, the
park assist is not available or was interrupted.
@) Note
Resume steering immediately after the last
corrective movement and the takeover
prompt, so that the specified steering wheel
angle is not recentered.
G) Tips again later.
You can reduce the speed selected by the ve- If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
hicle or stop the vehicle at any time by press- ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ing the brake pedal. ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
ed.
Pausing park assist plus))2)

Applies to: vehicles with park assist plus Remote controlled
You can pause park assist plus at any time by re-
parking!)2)
leasing the [>>P] button @ > page 171, fig. 130. General information
To resume the parking process, press and hold Applies to: vehicles with remote park assist plus
the [>>P] button again.
Remote controlled parking is part of park assist
Canceling automatically plus/park assist plus with garage function. The
process for parking or exiting a parking space can
Park assist plus is canceled automatically among
be controlled with a mobile device from outside
other things, if:
the vehicle. To do so, the driver must have both
— If you switch off the system
the vehicle key and the mobile device with him or
— You take over steering or press the brake pedal,
her. While the driver controls the vehicle remote-
— If the time limit is exceeded ly and monitors the vehicle's surroundings, the
— If an obstacle is detected system controls the steering, gear selection, ac-
— The ESC intervenes celeration, braking, and locking the vehicle.
Resume control of the vehicle, end the parking
process manually, or: ZA\ WARNING
You can resume the parking process in some sit- — Observe the safety precautions and note the
uations. Press and hold the brake pedal and press limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
Pe. cameras > page 121. >
4M8012721BF

ket.
173
— Remote controlled parking is only an assist — Blocking notifications, tones, and vibrations
system. The driver is always responsible for increase the risk of an accident. The myAudi
maneuvering, driving, and stopping the ve- app can only warn you if dangers are detect-
hicle and performing other driving maneu- ed if you make sure that your mobile device
vers. allows all notifications, tones, and vibra-
— Do not use this function if the vehicle cannot tions for the myAudi app.
move freely, for example when on a vehicle
jack. @) Note
— Failing to pay careful attention to the vehi- — Do not use remote controlled parking when
cle's surroundings increases the risk of an transporting cargo that projects outside of
accident. Sensors and cameras have spots in the vehicle or when snow chains are mount-
which the surrounding area cannot be de- ed.
tected. Objects, animals, and people may — Remote controlled parking may guide the
only be detected with limitations may not vehicle either away from curbs or onto them
be detected at all. Always monitor the traf- if other vehicles are parked on the curb.
fic as well as the vehicle's surroundings with Make sure that your vehicle's tires and rims
direct eye contact. Stay near the vehicle are not damaged. Resume control of the ve-
while controlling it. Make sure you have a hicle in time or stop the parking process if
clear view of the vehicle and the area sur- needed to prevent damage.
rounding it. Do not become distracted. — In parking spaces without curbs, maintain a
— Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft alarm distance of at least 19 inches (50 cm) from
system: There is a risk of fatal injury for peo- walls and buildings in order to reduce the
ple locked in the vehicle, especially children. risk of vehicle damage.
The vehicle is locked during remote control-
led parking. Make sure there are no persons G) Tips
inside the vehicle both before and after us-
— Follow the legal regulations in the country
ing remote controlled parking.
where you are operating the vehicle when
— There is a risk of asphyxiation. Never allow
using remote controlled parking. Remote
the engine to run in confined spaces. After
controlled parking may be prohibited in
remote controlled parking, make sure the
some countries. The system may be unavail-
engine is off.
able in countries where it has been deacti-
— Malfunctions when using the myAudi app in-
vated in order to comply with legal regula-
crease the risk of an accident. Do not exit
tions. Data will not be transmitted to Audi.
the app during the parking process, and
The driver is always responsible for adhering
make sure that it does not go into the device
to the regulations applicable in the country
background, for example by accepting an in-
coming call. Observe the operating instruc-
— Any individual that uses the mobile device
tions from the manufacturer of your mobile
for remote controlled parking is considered
device.
the driver and is participating in traffic. The
— There is a risk of accident if the connection is
driver is always responsible for adhering to
interrupted. In certain situations, the con-
the regulations for using remote controlled
nection between the mobile device and the
parking that are applicable in the country
vehicle can be interrupted, for example from
other radio devices or when the distance to
— Do not endanger any other road users when
the vehicle is too far. Make sure the connec-
using remote controlled parking. Testing re-
tion is sufficient, and when in doubt, resume
mote controlled parking in a parking lot
parking the vehicle yourself.
with minimal traffic is recommended. >
174
— Your mobile device should have a sufficient — Version of the mobile device operating system
battery charge level. If necessary, charge — Software version of the app used
the mobile device before starting to drive. — Individual settings on the mobile device
— Do not use the remote controlled parking
function with devices that are faulty or dam- Z\ WARNING
aged or whose function is impaired. Only — Observe the safety precautions and note the
use the operating systems approved by the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
mobile device manufacturer. cameras > page 121.
— When using remote controlled parking, al- — There is a risk of an accident if an incompati-
ways pay attention to the areas where your ble mobile device is used. If there is a dis-
vehicle can be accessed. Check that no one play indicating that functionality is restrict-
can enter your vehicle and if the vehicle has ed, the vehicle’s reaction speed may be im-
been locked after parking is completed. paired due to reduced transmission speed.
Take the vehicle key with you when leaving
the vehicle.
Parking options!)2)
Applies to: vehicles with remote park assist plus
Applies to: vehicles with remote park assist plus Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may
have the following options when using remote
The following steps must be completed before controlled parking:
using for the first time:
Driving into parking spaces
> Create a myAudi account by registering in the
myAudi app or at my.audi.com, depending on — Parallel parking on the left or right side of the
your country. street @ > page 168, fig. 126
> Add your vehicle to your myAudi account. — Driving forward or backing into perpendicular
> Set the key user > page 32. parking spaces (2)/@) > page 168, fig. 126.
> Install the myAudi app on your mobile device — Parking in one-car or two-car garages») ©)/@)
and log in with your access information. => page 168, fig. 127
Device compatibility Exiting parking spaces

The mobile device will be checked at the start of — Leaving perpendicular parking spaces @)
a parking procedure. If an incompatibility is de- > page 168, fig. 128.
tected, it will be displayed in the myAudi app. — Exiting parallel parking spaces (2).
Audi does not recommend using the function if — Exiting one-car or two-car garages?) ®.
an incompatibility is detected > A\.
A selection of supported Bluetooth devices can

Z\ WARNING
be found in the database for tested mobile devi- Observe the safety precautions and note the
ces at www.audi.com/bluetooth. Compatibility limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cannot be guaranteed for all types of mobile de- cameras > page 121. >
vices. The availability depends on the following
factors, among others:
— Brand and build version of the mobile device
D_ System availability may be limited depending on the mar-

4M8012721BF
ket.
3) Applies to: vehicles with remote park assist plus with ga-
rage function
175
ing process. To enable remote controlled park-

@) Tips
ing, press J in the upper display.
— When parking in garages, you can be > Exit the vehicle while the engine is running and
straight in front of the garage or at a slight take the vehicle key with you. Always keep both
angle in front of the garage. You will have the vehicle key and the mobile device with you
the best results when you align and stop during the entire remote controlled parking
your vehicle as straight as possible in front process.
of the garage. > Make sure that all doors and the luggage com-
— If there is enough space in a two-car garage, partment lid are closed.
the system automatically selects the park-
ing position in front of the vehicle that the Starting the parking process
driver has selected. > Start the myAudi app soon, or the function will
be canceled.
Parking with the myAud re > Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. If the
Applies to: vehicles with remote park assist plus traffic situation permits, park your vehicle in
the parking space using the mobile device
> J\. The vehicle key and the mobile device
cannot be more than approximately 20 feet
(6 m) away from the vehicle.
> Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. In un-
clear situations, pause the parking process us-
ing the mobile device. For example, this may be
necessary if an obstacle appears or the vehicle
Fig. 132 Upper display: remote controlled parking - pre- comes very close to an obstacle.
paring the vehicle > To resume the parking process, start it again on
the mobile device. The rest of the parking proc-
Requirements ess will be recalculated based on the vehicle po-
> The setup has been completed. sition.
> You are logged into the vehicle with your myAu-
End of the parking process
di user.
> Bluetooth is switched on in the mobile device If an obstacle appears, stop the parking process
and in the MMI > page 234. > page 178.
> A suitable parking space has been found anda The parking process will end automatically once
parking option selected, for example in a ga- the vehicle has reached the end point in the park-
rage (@). ing space. Once parking is successfully complet-
> The vehicle must initially be stationary. ed, the parking lock will be engaged, the parking
Preparing the vehicle brake will be set, and the engine will switch off.
The vehicle will also be locked.
> To enable the selected parking space (2) for re-
mote controlled parking, press ] @) on the up- ZA WARNING
per display.
> If you have already approached a parking space
in the vehicle, remote controlled parking can be
cameras > page 121. >
activated to continue with the rest of the park-

ket.
176
— Failing to pay careful attention to the vehi- > Start the parking process with the mobile de-
cle's surroundings increases the risk of an vice soon. Otherwise, the function will be can-
accident. Park your vehicle with the mobile celed.
device only if you are sure that no obstacle is > Pay attention to the path of the vehicle. If the
in the vehicle's path or under the vehicle, traffic situation permits, drive the vehicle out of
and that no obstacles will move into the ve- the parking space using the mobile device
hicle's path. > /\. The vehicle key and the mobile device
cannot be more than approximately 20 feet
G) Tips (6 m) away from the vehicle during remote con-
trolled parking.
— If the parking space is located in a garage, it
> The process for exiting a parking space ends
must be detected correctly by the vehicle.
when the maximum distance is reached or if ad-
When the parking space is detected com-
ditional corrective movements are no longer
pletely, the edges of the space will be high-
necessary. Unlock and resume manual control
lighted @).
of the vehicle.
— The parking process can only be started if
the vehicle key is located outside the vehicle If an obstacle appears, stop the parking process
after the vehicle is prepared. Always keep => page 178.
both the vehicle key and the mobile device
with you during the entire remote control- ZA\ WARNING
led parking process. — Observe the safety precautions and note the
— Remote controlled parking may be restrict- limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
ed or unavailable in situations such as the cameras > page 121.
following: — Failing to pay careful attention to the vehi-
— If the ESC is restricted or switched off, or cle's surroundings increases the risk of an
if there is a malfunction. accident. Park your vehicle with the mobile
— If there is another vehicle key inside the device only if you are sure that no obstacle is
vehicle or nearby. in the vehicle's path or under the vehicle,
— The system can incorrectly interpret parking and that no obstacles will move into the ve-
space barriers (such as parking curbs). Take hicle's path.
over the parking process > page 178 if the
vehicle is not completely inside the parking (i) Tips
space or if the vehicle tries to drive over the
You can interrupt the path set by the vehicle,
parking space barrier.
for example if it will drive very close to an ob-
stacle, by pausing the parking process using
Exiting parking spaces wit the myAudi the mobile device. Based on the position of
app)
the vehicle, the system then calculates the
additional steering and driving directions for
> Start the myAudi app. maneuvering.
> Start the engine in the myAudi app soon. When
starting, the vehicle key and mobile device
must not be more than approximately 10 feet
(3 m) away from the vehicle.
4M8012721BF

ket.
1L7Z
eae atm eatle Mel tecel (eM eee atte pace G) Tips
The parking process will be interrupted tem-
To stop the vehicle, you can temporarily pause re- porarily if an obstacle is detected.
mote controlled parking at any time using your
mobile device. Maneuver assist2)”)
You can also completely stop the parking process
and come to full stop immediately using the ve-
hicle key by pressing any button on the vehicle
key. Therefore, always keep the vehicle key with
you during the remote controlled parking proc-
ess.
Canceling automatically
The remote controlled parking will be canceled
automatically in the following situations, among
other things:
Fig. 133 Upper display: maneuver assist
— If the myAudi app is not started soon after exit-
ing the vehicle, General information
— If you switch off the system
The maneuver assist supports the driver when
— If the time limit is exceeded
maneuvering and parking by monitoring the area
— The ESC intervenes
in front of, behind, and beside the vehicle using
Taking over the parking process sensors. If there is an impending collision with an
object, the system will intervene within its limits
After canceling the parking process, the vehicle
and attempt to prevent the collision by applying
will come to a stop and the "P" position will be
the brakes. The system will detect objects that
engaged. Take over control of the vehicle, end the
are approximately 8 inches (20 cm) high or high-
parking process manually, and stop the vehicle.
er.
You can also restart the entire parking process
from inside the vehicle. Display overview
Z\ WARNING The displays @ - @ indicate the status and avail-

ability of the maneuver assist.
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and @ The white border indicates the availability in
cameras > page 121. this area.
— Failing to pay careful attention to the vehi- The red border indicates an object nearby.
©®&
cle's surroundings increases the risk of an If there is no border, this indicates an inactive
accident. Park your vehicle with the mobile area (partial availability).
device only if you are sure that no obstacle is Activate/deactivate maneuver assist and sta-
®
in the vehicle's path or under the vehicle, tus displays:

and that no obstacles will move into the ve- —*4 Maneuver assist activated. The vehicle is
hicle's path. bordered in white. If the sensors are parti-
ally available, the white border will only be
visible in the monitored areas.

ket.
178
— % Maneuver assist is temporarily deacti- > The speed must not be higher than approxi-
vated. mately 6 mph (10 km/h).
— A (symbol shown in gray) Maneuver assist
is not available.
— No symbol: maneuver assist was switched Maneuver assist activates automatically when re-
off completely in the settings. verse gear is engaged while the engine is run-
ning. A brief tone will sound.
Braking intervention
Deactivating temporarily
Braking intervention can be initiated if there is an
impending possible collision with a detected sta- If you do not want to use maneuver assist during
tionary object. If the brakes were applied until a parking cycle, you can deactivate it temporarily.
the vehicle stopped, Maneuver assist: vehicle If maneuver assist is deactivated temporarily, it
has been braked. Obstacle detected will appear will be activated again automatically the next
in the instrument cluster and you must take over time park assist is activated.
control of the vehicle. > To deactivate maneuver assist temporarily,
If you continue driving toward the obstacle after press & @) > page 178, fig. 133 in the upper
the vehicle is braked to a stop, maneuver assist display. The 7% symbol will appear.
will automatically be temporarily deactivated un- If you continue driving toward the obstacle after
til the next maneuvering situation.
the vehicle is braked to a stop, maneuver assist
will automatically be temporarily deactivated un-
Z\ WARNING til the next maneuvering situation.
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and Activating manually
cameras > page 121. You can activate maneuver assist in various ways
depending on the situation:
G@) Tips
> To activate maneuver assist manually (such as
— The system is only partially available when a when driving forward), press the 4 button in
trailer is detected. The white outline is hid- the center console.
den at the inoperative areas. There is no > To reactivate maneuver assist after it has been
guarantee the functions will be deactivated deactivated temporarily, press 74 @,
when using a retrofitted trailer hitch. => page 178, fig. 133 in the upper display. The
—Ifthe BB indicator light blinks while driving, = symbol will appear.
ESC will intervene to regulate and maneuver
assist will be canceled. Switching on or off permanently
— System functions may not be available if the > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a HICLE > Parking aid > Maneuver assist. Or
malfunction. > Select |-] > Maneuver assist in the upper dis-
— The system will not be available when cer- play when the parking aid is active.
tain assist systems are switched on or if
If maneuver assist is switched off permanently,
park assist plus is used.
there will be no symbol in the center of the vehi-
cle graphic @) > page 178, fig. 133.
Activating or deactivating maneuver assist
Applies to: vehicles with maneuver assist
ZA WARNING
Requirements Observe the safety precautions and note the
4M8012721BF
> Maneuver assist must be switched on in the limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
parking system settings in the MMI. cameras > page 121.
179
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with maneuver assist
if i or fd is displayed when there is a malfunc-

tion, the maneuver assist functions may be un-

sensors and cameras > page 123 and try to turn
the system on again later.

ed.
180
Telephone
Telephone CG) Note

Introduction Read the information about Audi connect, and
Applies to: vehicles with telephone be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=> page 192.
You can operate various telephone functions easi-
ly through the MMI in your vehicle. G@) Tips
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip- — The Bluetooth connection range is limited
ment, the following options may be available: to inside the vehicle.
— Connecting a cell phone with Bluetooth —Aselection of supported Bluetooth devices
— Using two telephones can be found in the database for tested mo-
— Using the Audi phone box bile devices at www.audi.com/bluetooth.
ZA WARNING Setup
— Medical experts warn that mobile devices
Connecting a mobile phone via Bluetooth
can interfere with the function of pacemak-
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
ers. Always maintain a minimum distance of
about 7.9 inches (20 cm) between the mo- Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
bile device antennas and the pacemaker. the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
— Do not carry the mobile device in a pocket settings must be open on your mobile device dur-
directly over the pacemaker when the ing the connection setup. The mobile device to be
phone is switched on. connected must not be actively connected to any
— Switch the mobile device off immediately other Bluetooth device. The MMI must only be
if you suspect it may be interfering with connected to one mobile device.
the pacemaker. > Enable the Bluetooth function and visibility on
— Do not use the voice recognition system* the MMI = page 234 and the mobile phone.
=> page 28 in emergencies because your > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
voice may change in stressful situations. The PHONE.
system may take longer to dial the number > Follow the system instructions. The available
or may not be able to dial it at all. Dial the Bluetooth devices will be displayed after sever-
emergency number manually. al seconds.
— Switch your mobile device off in areas where > Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
there is a risk of an explosion. These loca- displayed Bluetooth devices.
tions are not always clearly marked. This > To update the list, press OQ.
may include gas stations, fuel and chemical
A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be
storage facilities or transport vehicles, or lo-
cations where fuel vapors (such as propane
generated.
or gasoline vapor in vehicles or buildings), > Confirm the PIN on your mobile device.
chemicals or large quantities of dust parti- > Follow the system instructions.
> Pay attention to any other system prompts on
cles (such as flour, sawdust or metal) may
be present in the air. This also applies to all the MMI and on your cell phone.
other locations where you would normally After connecting successfully
turn your vehicle engine off.
The cell phone contacts are automatically loaded
— The demands of traffic require your full at-
in the MMI. This process can take several mi-
tention. Always read the chapter > page 20,
nutes, depending on the number of contacts.
4M8012721BF
Traffic safety information.

Depending on your cell phone and the connection
type, you can use the following functions: >
181
Telephone
Handsfree Applies to: mobile devices with Bluetooth Mes-

Requirement: your cell phone must be connected sage Access Profile (MAP): You can send and re-
to the MMI via a Bluetooth Hands Free Profile
ceive messages with both mobile devices
=> page 189.
(Bluetooth HFP).
You can use the hands-free system. You can make Connecting another mobile device
calls using the antenna on your mobile device. Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
to the MMI. The vehicle must be stationary and
Sending and receiving messages
the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
See > page 189. settings must be open on your mobile device dur-
ing the connection setup. The mobile device to be
@) Tips connected must not be actively connected to any
— Pay attention to any system prompts dis- other Bluetooth device.
played on your mobile device or the MMI,
> Enable the Bluetooth function and visibility on
for example if the system should connect
the MMI => page 234 and the mobile phone.
automatically in the future. Depending on
the mobile device, you may need to down-
PHONE > (°, or
load contacts and confirm access to your
messages separately.
SETTINGS > Connected devices > Telephone 1
— You can also search for the MMI on your mo-
or Telephone 2 > New connection.
bile device using the Bluetooth device
> Follow the system instructions. The available
search.
Bluetooth devices will be displayed after sever-
— You only have to pair your device one time. al seconds.
Bluetooth devices that are already paired
> Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
automatically connect to the MMI when the
displayed Bluetooth devices.
Bluetooth function is switched on, when > To update the list, press OQ.
they are within range, and when the ignition
is switched on. The last connected mobile A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be
device is given first priority. generated.
— You can manage additional settings for con- > Confirm the PIN on your mobile device.
nected mobile devices in the Connected de- > Follow the system instructions.
vices menu > page 235. > Pay attention to any other system prompts on
— When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth the MMI and on your cell phone.
connection to the mobile device will auto- After connecting successfully
matically disconnect. Depending on your
mobile device, phone calls in progress may See > page 181, After connecting successfully.
be automatically redirected from the MMI Switching between two mobile devices
to your mobile device so that you can con-
tinue the call on your phone. Requirement: phone 1 and phone 2 must be con-
nected to the MMI.
Using two telephones > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Applies to: vehicles with telephone, and Audi phone box PHONE > <1.
You can connect two mobile phones to the MMI
@) Note
at the same time using the Bluetooth HFP, for ex-
ample a business phone and a private phone. You Read the information about Audi connect, and
can be reached in your vehicle through both mo- be sure to note the connectivity costs section
bile phones. => page 192.
182
Telephone
Disconnecting a mobile device maneuvers, which increases the risk of an ac-

Applies to: vehicles with telephone cident. Store objects securely while driving.
> To disconnect a Bluetooth device from the MMI,

use the Connected devices menu > page 235.
() Note
Applicable to U.S.A.
Operation of the Audi phone box is subject to

Using the Audi phone
the following requirements of the Federal
box Communications Commission:
General information — This is a CONSUMER device.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box — BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE-
VICE with your wireless provider and have
oy
[RAZ-170|
your provider’s consent. Most wireless pro-
viders consent to the use of signal boosters.
ae
Some providers may not consent to the use
of this device on their network. If you are
unsure, contact your service provider.
— You MUST operate this device with approved
antennas and cables as specified by the
manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed
at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person.
Fig. 134 Storage compartment under the center armrest:
— You MUST cease operating this device im-
Audi phone box with connections
mediately if requested by the FCC or a li-
Depending on vehicle equipment, you may be censed wireless service provider.
able to use the following functions with the Audi — WARNING: E911 location information may
phone box: not be provided or may be inaccurate for
— Make phone calls using the vehicle’s exterior calls served by using this device.
antenna
® Note
— Charge a mobile device using the USB input
Applicable to Canada
— Charge a mobile device wirelessly
— Reminder signal In Canada, operation of a Zone Enhancer,
such as an Audi phone box, is subject to the
Limitations following requirements of the Innovation,
In some situations, the functions of the Audi Science and Economic Development Canada
phone box may be limited or temporarily unavail- (ISED):
able. For example, this may happen if — This is a CONSUMER device.
— There is one more than mobile device in the — BEFORE USE, you MUST meet all require-
Audi phone box ments set out in CPC-2-1-05. At the time of
— The mobile device is located in a bag or a pro- printing this user manual, the CPC-2-1-05
tective case client procedures circular of ISED Canada
— There are objects between the Audi phone box was available at the following web page:
and the mobile device http://www.ic.gc.ca/eic/site/smt-gst.
— The mobile device is not positioned in the cen- nsf/eng/sf08942.html.
ter of the Audi phone box — You MUST operate this device with approved
antennas and cables as specified by the
ZA\ WARNING manufacturer. Antennas MUST NOT be in-
4M8012721BF
stalled within 20 cm of any person.

Loose objects can be thrown around the vehi-
cle interior during sudden driving or braking
183
Telephone
— You MUST cease operating this device im- Charging a mobile device wirelessly
mediately if requested by ISED or a licensed Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box
wireless service provider.
You can charge your mobile device wirelessly us-
— WARNING: £911 location information may
ing the Audi phone box.
not be provided or may be inaccurate for
calls served by using this device. Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
Your mobile device must meet the Qi standard.
@) Tips > Make sure that the wireless charging function is
The system complies with United States FCC switched on:
regulations and ISED regulations > page 311. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > General > Reminder signal and
Making phone calls using the exterior mobile device charging.
ental ar-) > Switch the Mobile device wireless charging
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box function on.
With the Audi phone box, you can make calls us- > To charge your mobile device wirelessly, lay it
ing the exterior antenna on the vehicle. Using the on the @ symbol@ © page 183, fig. 134 in the
external antenna helps when there is a low signal center of the Audi phone box with the display
and also provides better reception quality. facing up.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. ZA WARNING

> To make phone calls through the vehicle's exte- — The mobile device may become hot during
rior antenna using your mobile device, lay your wireless charging. Pay attention to the tem-
device on the phone symbol @) > page 183, perature of your mobile device and be care-
fig. 134 in the center of the Audi phone box ful when removing it from the Audi phone
with the display facing up. box.
— An alternating magnetic field is used for
eee laa mem MOM) mil ltig wireless charging. Maintain a minimum dis-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box tance of approximately 2.4 inches (6 cm) to
the Audi phone box charging plate. The
You can charge your mobile device using a special
thresholds for prolonged exposure at this
USB adapter with the Audi phone box
distance comply with ICNIRP1998. There-
=> page 222.
fore, interactions such as irritation of senso-
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. ry organs, malfunctions of active implants
(such as pacemakers, infusion pumps, or
> To charge your mobile device via USB, connect it
neurostimulators) or effects on passive im-
to the USB input
@ > page 183, fig. 134.
plants (such as prosthetic limbs) is highly
unlikely. If you have an implant, consult a
G) Tips medical specialist if you have any questions.
— You can purchase a USB adapter from an au- You can also switch the function for wireless
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi charging in the Audi phone box on and off.
Service Facility, or at specialty stores. You can continue to charge your mobile de-
— Audi recommends using Audi Genuine Ac- vice using a cable connection.
cessories. Audi has verified their reliability,
safety, and suitability. G@) Tips
— The maximum charging output is 5 W.
—The charging time and temperature will vary
depending on the mobile device being used.
184
Telephone
Mobile device reminder signal > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box PHONE.
When the device reminder signal is switched on, The following phone functions will be available:
you will be notified that your mobile device is still @ Search
in the Audi phone box when you leave the vehicle. OS) CAUUTISE oc sesone 2 0 coins ov soars 185
Requirement: your mobile device must be located @) Favorites aca: ss ses y eeys vows 186
in the Audi phone box (if Qi-capable) or connect- @ Contacts .............0.0.000. 186
ed to the Audi music interface with a USB adapt- (BS) Voicemail svc: «2 ccc 2% wiccove 2 4 snson 187
er, and the Audi smartphone interface must be
© Dial phonenumber ............ 187
active or your iPhone must be connected to the
@ Switch telephones ............. 189
MMI via Bluetooth and charging using a USB
adapter connected to the Audi music interface.
call
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Applies to: icles with telephone
SETTINGS > General > Reminder signal and
mobile device charging.
[RAX-0145]
Pe DP | catttist
fo}
Te ny o—@
j
The following settings may be available, depend- Prec rer a
ing on vehicle equipment: Albert, Simon (3)
a) CremeZEY |
Albinson, Mary (2)
on
— Signal tone esCM Are 27)
(34 001718765432 (1)
— Off
U7
Spoken cue Fig. 136 Upper display: call list
this setting is switched on at the factory. Opening call lists using the MMI
Mobile device notes: reminder, charge level > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
PHONE > Call list.
When this function is switched on, the charge
status of your mobile device is displayed. You will Opening call lists using the multifunction
also be reminded not to forget your mobile de- steering wheel
vice when leaving the vehicle.
> Select in the instrument cluster: Telephone tab
> 2) button > Call list.
Using the telephone
Possible call list symbols:
Accessing the telephone functions
Missed calls
©OOOCOLO
Dialed numbers
Accepted calls
Editing a telephone number
Display business card ........... 187
Number of interactions with a con-
ee oo nn
ar @y tact
If more than one interaction with a contact or

Fig. 135 Upper display: selection menu number has taken place, the last one is displayed
in the form of an arrow @), @), or @).
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
4M8012721BF
to the MMI. Press and hold a contact or a phone number in

the list until the Options menu appears.
185
Telephone
Depending on your mobile device, the following Managing the directory

options may be available: Applies to: vehicles with telephone
— Save as a shortcut > page 24, Shortcuts.

You can manage up to four directories in the
— Store as favorite > page 186.
MMI.
— Send text message > page 189.
— Send e-mail > page 190. Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
to the MMI.
Edit number
Opening the directory
Edit a phone number before dialing it.
Show history PHONE > Contacts.
Requirement: you must have had more than one The contacts will be displayed. You can change
interaction with a contact. the sort order > page 189, Sort order.
All interactions with a contact or a number are
Deleting imported contacts
displayed.
Requirement: you must have imported at least
one contact > page 189.
Managing favorites
Applies to: vehicles with telephone > Select: Contacts > Z > one or more text mes-
sages > Delete > (Done). The imported contacts
You can store contacts for all connected mobile
are deleted.
devices as shortcuts in the favorites list.
Directory options
Selecting favorites using the MMI
> Press and hold a contact in the directory until
the Options menu appears.
PHONE > Favorites.
Depending on your mobile device, the following
Opening favorites using the multifunction
steering wheel options may be available:
> Select in the instrument cluster: Telephone tab — Store as favorite > page 186.
> [=] button > Favorites. — Send contact: you can select Text message or
E-mail > page 189.
Storing favorites
— Send text message > page 189.
> Press YY > page 187 in the business card, or — Send e-mail > page 190.
> Press Store as favorite in the options — Save as a shortcut > page 24, Shortcuts.
=> page 185.
Deleting favorites
Gi) Tips
— Pay attention to any synchronization
> Press W © page 187 in the business card, or
prompts on your mobile device when down-
> Select: Favorites > Z > one or multiple favor-
loading contacts.
ites or Select all > Delete > (Done).
—The contacts from the mobile device may
not be transferred in alphabetical order. If
G@) Tips there are too many entries, contacts with
The favorites can only be edited via the MMI. different first letters may be missing in the
MMI.
— Only the contacts from the active connected
mobile device are displayed.
186
Telephone
— The contacts in the local MMI memory are

@) Tips
always visible and can be accessed by other
users. This service must be set up and activated by
— After switching off the ignition and exiting the mobile phone service provider.
the vehicle, the mobile device directory will
be loaded when the MMI is started again if Dialing a telephone number
the mobile device is within range and the Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Bluetooth function is switched on in the mo-

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may
bile device and the MMI.
have the following options for dialing a phone
— Only the contacts in the local MMI memory
number:
can be deleted.
— Using text input in the MMI > page 25.
— Using voice operation > page 28.
Opening business cards
Call options
The business card shows you details about a con- Applies to: vehicles with telephone
tact.
> To accept or end a call, press the @ button on
> To open a business card, press on a contact in
the multifunction steering wheel. Operating
the directory, or
=> page 13 and > page 31.
> Press © in the call list ©) > page 185, fig. 136.
Depending on your mobile device, the following
Possible options in the business card:
options may be available in the MMI when there
> Call: press on a phone number.
is an incoming call:
> Storing a favorite: press W.
> Deleting a favorite: press W. — Answer
> Sending a text message: press {1. — Decline
>» Starting navigation: press on an address. — Message
> Sending an e-mail: press on an e-mail address.
If you exit the vehicle during a phone call, the
> Send contact: you can select Text message or
Bluetooth connection will be disconnected. De-
E-mail > page 189.
pending on your mobile device, phone calls in
» Save as a shortcut > page 24, Shortcuts.
progress may be automatically transferred from
the MMI to your mobile device.
Listening to voicemail
G) Tips
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: The radio or media playback is muted during a
PHONE > Voicemail. phone call.
Requirement: there must be no voicemail num-
ber stored. PTT Tae RW urea]
> Entering the voicemail number: enter the de- Applies to: vehicles with telephone
sired number. Press OK. Depending on your mobile device and the type of
Requirement: a voicemail number must be stor- connection, the following options may be availa-
ed. ble during a call:
> Dialing the voicemail number: press Voice- — End call
mail. The call begins immediately.
— Mute
4M8012721BF
187
Telephone
Sending a tone sequence Add call

Press Numbers. You can enter tone sequences You can start a new call. The current call will be
(DTMF) and send them to the other party on the put on hold.
call.
Remove conference member
Hold
You can remove conference call members individ-
Puts the current call on hold. To resume the call, ually when a conference call is active.
press Resume.
Microph. input
Answering an incoming call
You can adjust the input level of the microphone
One of these options will be available, depending using the slider.
on the mobile phone service provider:
— Answer: the current phone call will be put on @) Tips
hold. The incoming call will be answered. The call waiting function must be activated in
— Replace: the active call will be replaced with your mobile device to be alerted about an in-
the incoming call. coming call during an active call.
Declining an incoming call

Making an emergency call
If you select Decline, the incoming call will be de- Applies to: vehicles with telephone
clined.
Conference to the MMI.
Requirement: two phone calls must be in prog- > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
ress. PHONE > Dial number > the local emergency
Depending on your mobile phone service provid- call number (for example, 911) > Dial.
er, you can add a call on hold and up to five active
callers to a conference call. ZA\ WARNING
— Because your phone works with radio sig-
Swap call
nals, a connection cannot be guaranteed un-
Requirement: two phone calls must be in prog- der all circumstances. Do not rely on only
ress. your phone when it comes to essential com-
You can alternate between two phone calls. munication (such as during a medical emer-
gency).
Additional call options — Always follow the instructions given by the
Press More. emergency personnel during an emergency
call and only end the call when they instruct
Depending on the mobile device being used and you to do so.
the type of connection, the following options
may be available:
Settings
Transfer call to mobile device
Phone settings
Transfer the current call to your mobile device or Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Bluetooth headset*.
Switch to hands-free PHONE > ©.
Transfer the current call from your mobile device
The following options may be possible, depend-
to the MMI.
ing on your mobile device:
188
Telephone
— Decline with text message To update the contacts in the MMI, you can man-
— Edit voicemail number ually download your mobile device contacts. De-
pending on the mobile device, you may need to
Switching between two mobile devices disconnect and reconnect the Bluetooth connec-
Requirement: phone 1 and phone 2 must be con- tion to update the contacts.
nected to the MMI.
Importing contacts
Switch telephones: the device name of the avail-
Requirement: a USB storage device must be con-
able mobile device is displayed. You can switch
nected to the Audi music interface > page 222.
the phone by pressing the button.
The USB storage device contains contacts in the
Ringtone and volume settings vCard format (.vcf). They must not be located in
sub-folders.
— Ringtone and message volume: you can adjust
the volume using the slider. Applies to MMI: Select: Import contacts > Search
— Ringtone: select a ringtone from the list. for import data > USB device 1/USB device 2 >
— Microphone input level: you can adjust the in- desired contacts or Select all contacts > Start
put Level of the microphone using the slider. import.
Data module serial number (IMEI) (i) Tips

Applies to: vehicles with data module
—The imported contacts are stored in the lo-
The serial number (IMEI) will be displayed. cal MMI memory.
— There should be no other files or folders on
Directory settings the storage medium containing the contacts
Applies to: vehicles with telephone to be imported.
— Apple devices and MTP devices (such as
smartphones) are not recognized as USB
PHONE > Contacts > ©.
storage devices.
Switching between two mobile devices
Requirement: telephone 1 and telephone 2 must Messages
be connected.
Text messages
Switch telephones: the device name of the avail- Applies to: vehicles with telephone
able mobile device is displayed. You can switch
Requirement: your mobile device must be con-
the phone by pressing the button.
nected to the MMI via Bluetooth Message Access
The directory for the selected phone will be dis- Profile (Bluetooth MAP).
played.
Hide grayed-out contacts MESSAGES > (©) > e-mail (phone 1)/e-mail
(phone 2)*.
When this function is switched on, contacts that
have no phone numbers stored for them will be The following functions are available:
hidden.
— New text message*
Sort order — Inbox
You can sort the contacts by Last name or First — Sent
name. — Outbox*
— Drafts*
4M8012721BF
Download contacts
— Deleted
User defined*
to the MMI.
189
Telephone
If necessary, user-defined folders will be copied — Inbox

to your mobile device. — Sent
— Outbox
Message options
— Drafts*
Press on a text message. — Deleted*
Depending on the country, the following options User defined*
may be available:
If necessary, user-defined folders will be copied
— Read out
to your mobile device.
— Reply
— Forward Message options
— More
Press on an e-mail.
To switch between messages, press < or >. Depending on the country, the following options
Press More. Depending on your mobile device may be available:
and the selected mailbox, additional options may — Read out
be available: — Reply
— Call — Reply all
— Forward — Forward
— Navigate — More
— Extract numbers
To switch between messages, press < or >.
— Send again
Press More. Depending on your mobile device
Settings and the selected mailbox, additional options may
Press ©}, be available:
— Call
New text message notification
— Forward
When the function is switched on, an envelope — Extract e-mail
in the MMI status bar will indicate when there is — Navigate
a new text message. — Extract numbers
— Show all recipients
G) Tips — Send again
Only new received messages may be displayed
depending on your mobile device. Settings
Press ©}.
New e-mail notification

Applies to: vehicles with telephone and e-mail
When the function is switched on, an envelope M
Requirement: your mobile device must be con- in the MMI status bar will indicate when there is
nected to the MMI via Bluetooth Message Access a new e-mail.
Profile (Bluetooth MAP).
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: @) Note
MESSAGES > (©) > e-mail (phone 1)/e-mail Read the information about Audi connect, and
(phone 2)*. be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=> page 192.
The following functions are available:
— New e-mail
190
Telephone
Troubleshooting
The information that follows lists some trouble-

shooting options. They depend on the equip-
ment.
Problem Solution
Pairing the mobile device to the Make sure the requirements for connecting a mobile phone have
MMI failed. been met > page 181, or
make sure you did not accidentally decline the PIN for establishing
a connection on your mobile phone. If necessary, repeat the pair-
ing process > page 181.
After pairing, not all contacts or Avoid using special characters in names.
no contacts have been loaded in- Avoid using contact groups on your mobile device.
to the MMI. Check for prompts on your mobile device when connecting via
Bluetooth.
Certain telephone functions are The telephone functions depend on the mobile device service pro-
grayed out or not available. vider and the mobile device you are using.
Some telephone functions may Check if the Bluetooth settings on your cell phone are limited or
be switched off or not available, individual Bluetooth settings are deactivated. This may be the
even though the mobile device is case with business cell phones.
supported.
The MESSAGES menu is not avail- Make sure your mobile device has an option to show messages op-
able. tion and that it is enabled.
Wireless cell phone charging is Check if wireless charging with the Audi phone box is switched on.
not working or is interrupted. Check if your mobile device is Qi-capable.
Make sure your mobile device is positioned correctly in the Audi
phone box > page 183 and that there are no objects located be-
tween the phone box and the phone.
4M8012721BF
191
Audi connect
Audi connect rate data plan is strongly recommended. For

more information, contact your cell phone
General information service provider or refer to the owner's man-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect ual for your Wi-Fi device.
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip- — You are responsible for all precautions taken
for data protection, anti-virus protection,
ment, the following functions may be available:
and protection against loss of data on mo-
— Audi connect Infotainment bile devices that are used, for example, to
— Audi connect vehicle control access the Internet through the Wi-Fi hot-
spot.
ZA WARNING — In areas with poor GPS reception or outside
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only use the coverage range of the respective cell
Audi connect services and the Wi-Fi hotspot phone service provider, some functions
only if the traffic situation permits it. Read and/or services may not be available, it may
and follow the guidelines provided in not be possible to send or receive data, or
= page 20, Traffic safety information. functionality may be limited.
— It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile
devices and other similar devices when the @) Tips
vehicle is stationary because, like all loose — The availability of services depends on the
objects, they could be thrown around the in- subscription.
side of the vehicle in a crash and cause seri- — Audi merely provides access to third party
ous injuries. Store these types of devices se- services through the MMI and does not as-
curely while driving. Also read the warnings sume any responsibility for the content and
in the chapter > page 72. availability of these services.
— Use of the most up-to-date mobile network
@) Note standard is not available in every country.
—The connection costs of Audi connect Info- Contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
tainment services are included in the price thorized Audi Service Facility or your cell
of Audi connect Infotainment during the phone service provider for additional infor-
subscription period with some exceptions. mation.
Please note that there may be additional — Availability, scope, providers, screen display,
charges when using some services. For ex- and costs of services may vary depending on
ample, this applies to online radio/ the country, model, model year, end device
podcasts, additional online data, or for In- and rates.
ternet connections and services that use the — All services can be modified, activated/deac-
Wi-Fi hotspot. Depending on the country, tivated, renamed, and enhanced without
data plans may need to be purchased for further notification.
these Internet connections and services
= page 196. For additional information, see Audi connect
my.audi.com.
Infotainment
— In certain situations, the Wi-Fi hotspot data
connection may be established as a replace-
ment for the SIM card on your Wi-Fi device. Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
This feature depends on the configuration

With Audi connect Infotainment services, online
of your Wi-Fi device and operating system.
information is transmitted directly to the vehicle.
This could result in fees depending on your
cell phone service provider, especially if you An Internet connection is required to use Audi
are using this feature while abroad. A flat connect Infotainment. The Internet connection is >
192
Audi connect
established using the embedded SIM card Your device is successfully connected with the
(eSIM). MMI's Wi-Fi hotspot.
ZA WARNING Z\ WARNING
Always follow the information found in > AV Always follow the information found in > A\
in General information on page 192. in General information on page 192.
@) Note () Note
Always follow the information found in >@ in Always follow the information found in © in
General information on page 192. General information on page 192.
Embedded SIM card G@) Tips

Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and an The system complies with United States FCC
embedded SIM card
regulations and ISED regulations > page 311.
The data connection for Audi connect Infotain-
ment services is made through an embedded SIM Audi connect
card (eSIM card) that is installed in the vehicle.
Infotainment services
You can use the Audi connect Infotainment serv-
ices immediately. Configuration
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
@) Note
Some Audi connect Infotainment services must
Always follow the information found in >@ in be configured through your personal myAudi ac-
General information on page 192. count at my.audi.com before using them for the
first time.
Using a Wi-Fi hotspot
Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot @) Tips
You can connect up to eight Wi-Fi devices (such —A myAudi user must be logged in for some
as smartphones) with the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot. If Audi connect Infotainment services.
the MMI is connected to the Internet — Some Audi connect Infotainment services
=> page 192, the connected Wi-Fi devices can also must be activated at my.audi.com.
use the MMI’s Internet connection. — Depending on the country, you may be able
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. A
— For detailed information on configuration,
data plan must be available > page 196.
visit my.audi.com.
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi
Switch on the Wi-Fi hotspot. Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi > Wi- Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
ment, the following services may be available:
Fi hotspot settings. The access data for the Wi-
Fi hotspot is displayed. Switch on the visibility Weather information
of the Wi-Fi hotspot if necessary. Applies to: MMI
> Switch the Wi-Fi function on in your mobile de-
> Press WEATHER on the home screen.
vice and connect it to the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot
4M8012721BF
using the authentication data that is shown. Editing settings: Select: WEATHER > Au.
> Follow any additional system prompts on your > To display the weather for a location, press ona
Wi-Fi device if necessary. location in the list. >
193
Audi connect
> To display the weather for your current loca- through a myAudi account in the myAudi app at
tion, press on the location that is marked with any time.
the crosshairs.
The following options are available for displaying
Requirement: route guidance must be active. purchased functions in the vehicle.
> To display the weather at your destination,
press on the location that is marked with the
PURCHASES.
flag PB.
Adding a location: select: WEATHER > Gu > Ina (i) Tips
new city > a location.
— Equipment installed at the factory may be
Removing a location: select: WEATHER > 44 > .Z displayed as purchased functions.
> one or more locations or Select all > Delete. — The availability of functions in the myAudi
app varies depending on the country. For
Online news
additional information, visit my.audi.com.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: — At the time this manual was printed, func-
NEWS. tions on demand was a planned function.
Functions on demand is not available in your
Access to the calendar
vehicle.
Requirement: the myAudi app must be installed
and open on your mobile device. Access to your Messages
calendar must be enabled on your mobile device. Applies to: vehicles with functions on demand
You must be logged into the myAudi app with
your myAudi login data and you must have select- Ifa message about a function that requires a Li-
ed your vehicle. The Wi-Fi function on your mo- cense is displayed, the function is no longer avail-
bile device and the MMI must be enabled and able. Check the MMI Purchases menu to see if
your mobile device must be paired to the MMI you have a license for this function or if the li-
Wi-Fi hotspot > page 195, Wi-Fi. cense has expired. Purchase the function if neces-
sary using functions on demand.
You can display the your mobile device calendar
on the MMI.
Audi connect vehicle
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: control services
CALENDAR.
yaa)
ZA\ WARNING Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
Always follow the information found in > A\ Using Audi connect vehicle control services, you
in General information on page 192. can perform tasks such as viewing data about
your vehicle or control vehicle functions remote-
©) Note ly.
Always follow the information found in >@ in You can view and use services available for your
General information on page 192. vehicle at my.audi.com or through the myAudi
app.
Functions on demand Information about the services and the corre-

Displaying purchased functions sponding app was accurate at the time this man-
Applies to: vehicles with functions on demand ual was printed. The scope of services depends
on the country and equipment. There may be
Depending on the country and vehicle equip- changes over the service life of the vehicle. >
ment, you can purchase functions on demand
194
Audi connect
ZA WARNING Settings
— Always follow the information found in > AA
in General information on page 192. Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot
— Driver messages, text messages, and illumi-
nated warning and indicator lights in the ve-
hicle always take priority over information > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
from the Audi connect services. The infor- SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi
mation displayed by the Audi connect serv-
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
ices should not cause you to take safety
risks. This can result in the vehicle breaking
down in traffic and to serious injuries or ac- Wi-Fi
cidents.
When the function is switched on, the MMI's Wi-
Fi hotspot is active and Wi-Fi devices can be con-
@) Tips
nected to the hotspot.
— Accessing specific data or controlling func-
tions remotely depends on the charge level Wi-Fi hotspot settings
of the vehicle battery. Therefore, these The Wi-Fi connection between the MMI and your
functions only have limited availability after Wi-Fi device is encrypted. You can change the fol-
switching off the ignition. lowing information if needed.
— An eSIM card establishes the Internet con-
nection for Audi connect vehicle control — Access point (SSID): name of the Wi-Fi hot-
spot.
services. The costs for this are included in
the price of Audi connect vehicle control — Password: an initial password was set at the
services. The cell phone network, for exam- factory in the MMI. Audi recommends changing
ple, must be available to use these services. the initial password. Only use secure passwords
that conform to the general guidelines for se-
cure passwords. For more information, refer to
reputable and current sources on password se-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
curity.
Create a myAudi account by registering in the
Allow data connection through Wi-Fi
myAudi app or at my.audi.com, depending on
your country. When the function is switched on, mobile devices
can use the Internet connection through the Wi-
>» Set the key user > page 32.
Fi hotspot. A data plan is needed to do this.
> Install the myAudi app on your mobile device
and log in with your access information.
Z\ WARNING
@) Tips Always follow the information found in > AV
in General information on page 192.
Some services require you to enter a 4-digit
PIN that you set up during registration. @) Note
Always follow the information found in >@ in
General information on page 192.
4M8012721BF
195
Audi connect
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect

Data plans must be purchased in order to use cer- to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
tain services >@) in General information on — Depending on the country, there may be re-
page 192. strictions on the use of data plans (such as
You can purchase data plans at my.audi.com. mobile phone service providers) when driv-
ing in other countries.
— If selling your vehicle, you should delete the
vehicle from the customer portal for the cell
Always follow the information found in > AV
phone service provider to avoid being charg-
in General information on page 192.
ed for additional purchases.
Always follow the information found in >@ in

General information on page 192.
Troubleshooting

ment.
Audi connect Infotainment serv- | Some Audi connect Infotainment services must be activated or
ices: individual Audi connect Info- | configured through your personal myAudi account before using
tainment services are grayed out or | them for the first time. You can find detailed information online
not available. at my.audi.com.
Wi-Fi hotspot: it is not possible to | Check if Wi-Fi is activated in the MMI > page 195.
connect through Wi-Fi. Delete all existing Wi-Fi connections on your mobile device and
restart it.
D_ Not available in every market.
196
Emergency call
Emergency call work coverage area for the mobile phone service
provider selected by Audi.
Overview
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
An emergency call is a combination of data trans- —The emergency call function cannot be deac-
mission and a phone call. The data transmission tivated in the Infotainment system settings.
from your vehicle forwards important informa- — The availability of the TPS emergency call is
tion, such as the vehicle and position data, to the limited to certain times.
emergency call center. —The costs for call and data connections for
TPS emergency calls is included in the price
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
of the services.
With the emergency call, you can call for help in

dangerous situations as quickly as possible. Use Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
this function when emergency help is needed
=> page 197. A TPS emergency call can be made manually or
automatically > page 197.
— Audi connect emergency call (TPS emergency
call). This eCall system uses emergency call
centers operated by third party providers. Making an emergency call
With online roadside assistance, you can request
assistance if there is a breakdown or a minor acci-
dent > page 198.
ZA\ WARNING
In areas with poor GPS reception or outside
the coverage range of the respective cell
phone service provider, some functions and/or
services may not be available, it may not be
possible to send or receive data, or functional-
ity may be limited. Fig. 137 Front headliner: cover for the emergency call but-
ton
@) Tips Manual emergency call

To see which data can be transmitted, visit
your Audi country or sales region website at
www.audi.com. > Tap the cover (@) to open it.
> Press and hold the emergency call button until
Emergency call the LED () blinks. The emergency call will be
made.
> If the emergency call button is pressed by mis-
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function take, then press it again immediately and hold
it until the LED stays on. The emergency call
The services are provided through a SIM card in-
will be canceled.
stalled in the vehicle. Services are provided as-
suming that the cell phone network required for Automatic emergency call
the installed SIM card is functioning and availa-
The vehicle electrical system initiates an auto-
4M8012721BF
ble for use. The services made availably by Audi

matic emergency call under certain circumstan-
are only available within the mobile phone net-
ces, for example if an airbag deploys. The LEDin >
197
Emergency call
the emergency call button () will blink. The Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
emergency call will be made. The emergency call malfunction corrected.
cannot be canceled.
LED status
Online roadside
assistance
— Green - The emergency call function is availa-
ble.
— Red - There is a malfunction in the emergency Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance
call function. Contact an authorized Audi dealer

An online roadside assistance call )) is a combina-
or authorized Audi Service Facility. Note the
tion of data transmission and a phone call. The
messages about the availability of the emer-
data transmission from your vehicle forwards im-
gency function > page 198.
portant information to the Audi service center,
— Off - The emergency call function is not availa-
such as the vehicle and position data.
ble, perhaps because no network is available.
Warnings Calling online roadside assistance

Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance
If there is a critical system failure in the emer-
gency call systems, the vehicle occupants will re-
RAZ-0443
ceive the following warning: see > page 198, LED
status and > page 198, Messages.
@) Tips
If the emergency call is canceled due toa
poor connection, then the system automati-
cally tries to connect again.
Messages Fig. 138 Front headliner: online roadside assistance but-

ton
508 Emergency call function: malfunction! Lim- Calling online roadside assistance
ited availability. Please contact Service
> Press the button @). The LED in the button
If this indicator light turns on and this message turns red. The online roadside assistance call
appears, the emergency call function is restrict- will be made.
ed. For example, you cannot call the emergency > If you press the button @) by mistake, then
call center, but data may still be transmitted un- press it again.
der certain circumstances. Drive to an authorized
Audi incident assistance
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
mediately to have the malfunction corrected. A minor accident may be detected by the vehicle
electrical system. You are able to select between
BS Emergency call function: malfunction! Func-
online roadside assistance and an emergency call
tion unavailable. Please contact Service
in the MMI.
If this indicator light turns on and this message
appears, you cannot make an emergency call.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
) The availability of the services offered depends on the

country and may change in the future.
198
Emergency call
If the roadside assistance call is canceled due

to a poor connection, then the call must be
made again.
4M8012721BF
199
Navigation
Navigation the traffic regulations that are applicable in

the country where you are operating the ve-
Opening navigation hicle. In the event that the driving directions
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
contradict traffic regulations, always follow
the traffic regulations applicable in the
country where you are operating the vehicle
to reduce the risk of an accident.
() Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and
Fig. 139 Route guidance not started =@ in General information on page 192.
The navigation system directs you to your desti- (i) Tips

nation, around traffic incidents, and on alterna-
— Snow and obstructions on the GPS antenna
tive routes, if desired.
or trees and large buildings can impair sat-
Opening navigation ellite reception and affect the system's abil-
ity to determine the vehicle position. Sever-
>» Applies to: MMI: Press NAVIGATION on the
al deactivated or malfunctioning satellites
home screen.
can also interrupt GPS reception and affect
After accessing the navigation for the first time, the system's ability to determine the vehicle
the map is displayed. position.
— Because street names sometimes change,
Opening navigation using the multifunction
steering wheel the names stored in the MMI may in rare
cases differ from the actual street name.
> Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Select
— Applies to: multifunction steering wheel:
the Navigation tab in the instrument cluster. Depending on the selected function, opera-
> To display navigation when route guidance has tion using the upper display may be re-
started, select in the instrument cluster: the quired.
button > Map.
— Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Info-
The following functions are available in the MMI: tainment: Depending on the country and ve-
hicle equipment, additional services may be
@ Open the Select destination menu
available.
= page 202, fig. 140.
— An additional indicator will appear in the
@ Open the intelligent search > page 201.
head-up display.
@ Switch between the map and the menu:
press A repeatedly until the desired function
is displayed.
myAudi navigation
You can find additional information about the
MMI navigation works seamlessly with the myAu-
map update at > page 205, Map operation.
di app.
ZA\ WARNING Your destinations (favorites, last destinations)
— The demands of traffic require your full at- are synchronized through your myAudi account.
tention. Always read the chapter > page 20, All important destinations can be displayed in
Traffic safety information. the vehicle and in the myAudi app.
— The route calculated by the navigation sys-
tem is a driving recommendation. Follow
200
Navigation
To load destinations in the vehicle automatically, > To display all categories and search for a POI,
Audi recommends logging into the vehicle with a select: |---| > a category (such as restaurants) >
myAudi user > page 32. a POI.
myAudi navigation functions: Change search area
— You can send destinations and routes from the Requirement: route guidance must be active.
myAudi app to the vehicle > page 203. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
— Active route guidance in the myAudi app can be NAVIGATION > &.
continued in the MMI. > To change the search area, press (a) / 29 /Pre-
— Depending on the situation, it may be possible peatedly until the desired search area is select-
to continue active route guidance from the MMI ed.
in the myAudi app to continue navigating to the
destination after leaving the vehicle. Online search
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online search
Entering a destination You can use the results from a search engine pro-
vider to find a navigation destination.
Intelligent search for navigation
CS Ear Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Internet > page 192, Audi connect.
Using the intelligent search, you can enter the > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
data for a navigation destination in any order all NAVIGATION > © >G.
> Enter one or more search terms into the input
at once (for example, 5th Avenue New York).
Likewise, you can search for points of interest, field.
contacts, previous destinations, or favorites in or-
> The search engine provider shows suggestions
§ to narrow down the search.
der to navigate to the desired destination.
> Press on suggestions until the desired destina-
Opening a menu tion appears in the results list. If necessary, use
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: one finger to swipe upward or downward until
NAVIGATION > 2. the suggestions © or destinations 9 appear.
> Press on the desired destination 9. The Details
Intelligent search menu will be displayed.
> Enter one or more search terms into the input > Press Start.
field. See > page 25, Text input. Route guidance will be activated and the map will
>» Press on the desired destination in the results be displayed > page 204, fig. 142.
list. The Details menu will be displayed.
> Press Start. Route guidance will be activated
and the map will be displayed > page 204,
@ Tips
— The MMI input suggestions depend on the
fig. 142.
last navigated destinations.
Online Points of Interest — The navigation system always searches for
the fastest route. You can have alternative
> Searching for points of interest: enter the
routes displayed if necessary > page 206.
name of a POI.
>» Select: a symbol for a POI category (such as — If the destination cannot be found, it may
not be stored in the navigation database. >
i >a POI, or
4M8012721BF
)) Audi provides access to services from third party provid-

ers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because
that depends on the third party provider.
201
Navigation
Check the spelling of the term that was Accessing previous destinations
searched or check the search area > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
=> page 201.
NAVIGATION > (Ga) > Last destinations > select
— Distances to points of interest are displayed a destination > Start.
as a straight-line distance from your current > Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Select
location. The actual distance from your cur- in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab > [=]
rent location to the point of interest is up- button > Last destinations > a destination.
dated automatically. The list of points of in-
terest that were found is not resorted when Deleting previous destinations
this happens. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > (88) > Last destinations > Z >
Select destinati select one or more entries or Select all > Delete
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system > (Done).
eer er RAX-0146
Gi) Tips
cr) m
& wv The last route will be automatically deleted
A
CeeLast need from the list if you start a new route guidance
a) after canceling the route.
Setting a favorite as the destination

Fig. 140 Menu: select destination Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Opening a menu You can access frequent destinations in the favor-

Applies to: MMI ites. You can quickly and easily start route guid-
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen. ance using the home address or business address
> If the map is displayed, press aa (1) > page 200, function.
fig. 139. Requirement: a favorite must be stored
=> page 206.
The following functions are available > fig. 140:
© Last destinations 202 > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
@® Favorites ...............000008 202 NAVIGATION > (G8) > Favorites > select a desti-
nation > Start.
@® Contacts ..................0., 202
@ Received destns. & routes ....... 203
in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab >
button > Favorites > a destination.
Loading previous destinations
Yaad deme aee eRe dir tliry
Your last destinations and routes can be loaded Applies to: vehicles with MMI and navigation system
directly as a navigation destination.

You can navigate directly to contacts.
As soon as you start route guidance, the destina-
Requirement: a contact must have an address
tion is automatically saved in the last destina-
stored.
tions. Your previous destinations are marked with
the © symbol. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > (8) > Contacts > a contact.
If you use myAudi navigation, your previous des-
> Press on the address for a contact.
tinations will be synchronized with your myAudi
> Press on a suggested address. The Details
account > page 200.
menu will be displayed.
> Press Start.
202
Navigation
@) Tips @ Map preview: to zoom in on the map pre-

; ; view, press on the map.
— Ifa contact is grayed out, there is no ad- @ Route criteria: see © page 211.
dress stored for that contact.
® More: additional functions.
— Navigation to geographic coordinates for a
Weather: Requirement: the MMI must be
contact is not possible. @
connected to the Internet > page 192, Audi
connect. Also see > page 193.
Loading received destinations and routes
Applies to: MMI and teleph:
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi con- © PRES? STS EBON
nect Infotainment Call: Requirement: a mobile device must be
connected to the MMI > page 181. You will
You can search for destinations or routes in the
make a direct call to the phone number that
myAudi app and send to the vehicle.
is stored for the destination.
Requirement: the MMI and the mobile device © Start: starts navigation to the displayed des-
must be connected to the Internet > page 192, tination directly. The map will be displayed
Audi connect. You must have the myAudi app in- => page 205, Map operation.
stalled on your mobile device. @ Parking: press Parking to search for a park-
> Send a destination or route in the myAudi app ing space at the destination. You can use the
to the vehicle. parking space as the destination or stopover.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Details: Requirement: the MMI must be con-
NAVIGATION > (a5) > Received destns. & nected to the Internet > page 192, Audi con-
routes. nect.
» Make sure you are logged into the vehicle and © Display of distance/driving time to the des-
the myAudi app with the same myAudi account. tination
The received destination and routes will be Weather at the destination: Requirement:
loaded automatically. the MMI must be connected to the Internet
> Navigating to a destination: press on a desti- > page 192, Audi connect.
nation.
> Deleting destinations: select: Z > one or more 7 Eh
: RY a date Meld Le MLL]2)
entries or Select all > Delete > (Done).
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system tion.
0|6:. Opening the map

om Applies to: MMI
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen

aa 7 > If necessary, press A to display the map.
Adjusting the scale

eases
er a A
> Select: ©/ > select a scale.
Fig. 141 Details
Marking the destination
After you have selected a destination, the details > Press and hold a point on the map until a mark-
will be displayed. Route guidance is will not be ing appears or the address for the selected des-
active yet. tination is shown. >
4M8012721BF
The functions depend on the vehicle equipment

and the selected destination.
203
Navigation
Selecting map content (such as POIs) as the Map

destination
Map functions
Requirement: map content must be displayed
=> page 210.
> Press on map content on the map (for example,

ii).
Selecting the destination
> Select: F2 > Start.
Route guidance will be activated and the map will

be displayed > page 204, fig. 142.
yn >] 13:51 | E53 Dreshertown Rd

py pe Dee aay a ae LE
Stopovers and route plan
You can enter additional destinations during ac-

tive route guidance.
- oF
Entering a stopover ‘a € “epio
Fig. 143 Marked map object

Requirement: route guidance must be active.
> Enter a destination > page 201. Opening the map

Applies to: MMI
Displaying stopovers or the route plan
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen.
All destinations are listed in the route plan. > If necessary, press A to display the map.
> Press on fin the side menu on the map
The following list gives an overview of the infor-
=> page 204, fig. 142.
mation displayed on the map. Press on any func-
Editing stopovers tion (for example, alternative routes) to show ad-
ditional options.
> Press on Pin the side menu on the map
=> page 204, fig. 142. Select destination > page 202
OO
> Adding a stopover: Select: Add destination > Enter a destination using intelligent search
select a destination > Add to route. => page 201
> Moving a stopover: press Z. Touch the > sym- Cancel route guidance > page 204
bol and move the entry to the desired position. Current route
COOH
Press Done.
Request spoken prompt
> Deleting a stopover: Select: Z > one or more
Alternative routes > page 206
entries or Select all > Delete > (Done).
Display active destinations, stopovers, or
route plan > page 204. The distance to the
Stopping route guidance
destination including the calculated arrival
time is displayed.
Requirement: route guidance must be active and Online traffic information > page 209
©®
the map must be displayed. Altitude

> Applies to: MMI: Press B( > page 204, fig. 142.
button > Cancel route guidance.
204
Navigation
@ Displays the maximum permitted speed): Symbol Description

within city limits, on expressways, and on se Favorites > page 206
highways. S T :
. . Bi Previous destinations display
@) Current vehicle position
@ Route information > page 211 Traffic information
© Name of the street on which you are current- —__ Colored warning symbols: traffic incidents
ly driving ahead that are on your route.
@ Start route guidance for a marked destina- — Grayed out warning symbols: traffic incidents
tion > page 203, Selecting a destination that are not on your route.
from the map — All traffic incidents will display in color when
@®) Display details for the destination route guidance is inactive.
=> page 203 — Warning symbols with arrow: traffic incident
@ Intelligent search nearby that you have been routed around, for example
@ Adjust the map orientation. See also .
=> page 210
@ Navigation settings > page 210 Map operation
® Adjust the scale. Press the magnifying glass Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
to switch automatic zoom > page 210 on or You can operate the map > page 204, fig. 142
off directly on the map. The © symbol ap- with the movements described in the following
pears when this function is switched on. information.
Marked destination. See > page 203, Select-
®
ing a destination from the map Moving the map

Map contents (points of interest, favorites). > Drag your finger across the map in the desired
®
When there are multiple map contents in the direction.

immediate vicinity, the symbols are shown
Moving the map quickly
stacked on the map. To display a list of indi-
vidual symbols, press a’: > fig. 143. Press on > Swipe your finger across the map in the desired
a POT in the list. direction and lift your finger off the map.
@ — the map to the current vehicle posi- Zooming in on the map
ion
>» Place two fingers on the map and pull your fin-
@3) Traffic incidents and display of estimated
gers apart, or
losses of time on the route.
> Double-tap on the map with one finger.
— Green: traffic is flowing freely.
— Orange: stop-and-go traffic Zooming out on the map
Red: traffic jaitior traffic obstructions. » Place two fingers on the map and pull your fin-
Additional possible symbols on the map gers together, or
> Double-tap on the map with two fingers.
Symbol Description
@ Home address > page 206, Favor- Rotating the map
ites > Rotate the map using two fingers.
Business address > page 206, Fa-
Tilting the map
vorites
> Drag upward or downward with two fingers. >
4M8012721BF
D_ Only applies to vehicles without camera-based speed limit

display.
205
Navigation
@) Tips Alternative routes

Certain gestures may not be available on all
touch displays or in every menu. 3|
SI
ny
<ec
Naviga ALL) te guidance

started
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and Audi virtual
cockpit
Fig. 145 Display of alternative routes in the overview map
Opening alternative routes

Requirement: route guidance must be started
= page 201 and the map must be displayed
=> page 205.
> Press on / in the side menu on the map

=> page 204, fig. 142.
Fig. 144 Instrument cluster: default view: turning maneu-
ver when route guidance has started @ Current route
The distance to the destination and the calculat-
Requirement: route guidance must be on
ed arrival time will be displayed for the current
= page 201.
route.
The following information will be displayed in the
driver information system, if available:
@ Alternative route
The difference in travel time compared to the se-
@ Current vehicle position
lected route will be displayed.
@A bar graph appears when there is an upcom-
ing turn. The fewer the bars that are shown, the Displaying alternative routes in the
foreground
shorter the distance is until the turn. If there is
no upcoming turn immediately ahead, the dis- > Press @ in the corresponding information win-
tance to the destination or stopover, the calculat- dow, or
ed arrival time, and a direction arrow for the up- > Press and hold the information window for the
coming maneuver will be displayed in the right corresponding alternative route (for example,
speedometer. If there is no upcoming maneuver, @° fig. 145).
the distance to the next maneuver will be dis-
Select route
played.
> Press on the information window for the corre-
@® Lane recommendation
sponding route (for example @) 9 fig. 145).
Additional functions
You can access frequent destinations in the favor-

ites. You can quickly and easily start route guid-
ance using the home address or business address
function.
206
Navigation
Accessing favorites Requirement: the Parking notification must be

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: switched on > page 23, Notification center. The
MMI must be connected to the Internet
NAVIGATION > (8) > Favorites.
=> page 192, Audi connect. Route guidance must
If you use myAudi navigation, your favorites will be active, you must be close to your destination,
be synchronized with your myAudi account and a notification must be displayed or an item
=> page 200. on the map must be marked.
Storing favorites > Press on the notification. Or: press on §l on the

> Press yY¥ in the Details menu > page 203, map.
fig. 141. > To navigate to a parking: space, press ona col-
ored marking on the map.
Storing a home address or business address > Select: P2 > Start.
> Press Home address or Business address. Depending on availability, colored markings on
When accessed for the first time, you will be the map indicate the probability of open parking
prompted to set the address. spaces.
> Select: Create now > enter a destination > OK.
Color Description
Editing a favorite
Green High probability
Requirement: the favorites list must be dis-
Orange |Medium probability
played.
Red Low probability
> Setting a favorite as a destination: press ona
favorite.
Satellite map
> Deleting favorites: in the Details menu, press
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and satellite map
¥*& © page 203, fig. 141, or select: Z > one or
more entries or Select all > Delete > (Done). You can display the navigation map with satellite
> Moving a favorite: press Z. Touch the $ sym- images.
bol and move the entry to the desired position. Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Press Done.
G@) Tips > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > %} > Map settings > Satellite
— After deleting the home address or business
map).
address, only the address is deleted and the
entry will still be displayed in the favorites. The map view is based on data packets received
— Please note when moving favorites that from the Internet in the form of satellite images,
items 1 and 2 are reserved for the home ad- which are then combined with the roadways from
dress and business address. the > page 204, fig. 142 standard map view.
On-street parking G) Tips

Applies to: navigation system and on-street parking ~The satellite map!) is updated regularly
whenever the function is opened. The proc-
In supported areas, you can display parking along
ess may take several seconds.
the route.
4M8012721BF

207
Navigation
— Depending on the Internet connection, the

C@) Note
standard map may also be displayed when
the satellite map is switched on )). Read the information about Audi connect, and
=@ in General information on page 192.
Map update
Introduction @) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system Because of the high volume of data, Audi rec-
ommends performing the map update using
You can update the map data in the MMI witha
map update. The functions depend on the coun- the USB connection = page 208.
try and vehicle equipment.
Map update through the myAudi App
— Map update through online map update
Applies to: vehicles with map update through the myAudi app
=> page 208.
— Map update through the myAudi app. With the map update through the myAudi app,
— Import a map update from the USB connection you can update the map material in your naviga-
to your MMI > page 208. tion system.
— Map update at an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Downloading updates
thorized Audi Service Facility. This can result in
additional costs. Requirement: you must have a registered myAudi
account. Your vehicle must be registered in your
myAudi account.
Online map update
Applies to: vehicles with online map update > Install the myAudi app on your mobile device
and log in with your login information. Use the
Using map update online, you can update the
same myAudi account that you use in the vehi-
map material in your navigation system directly
cle for your myAudi user.
from your vehicle.
> Download the map material in the myAudi app.
The MMI determines regions based on the vehicle
Installing updates
position. Based on this, update data for these re-
gions are available for your MMI. > Log in as a myAudi user in the vehicle
> page 32.
Start map update
> Connect your smartphone to the vehicle’s Wi-Fi
Applies to: MMI
hotspot > page 193. The MMI detects the map
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the material on your smartphone. The map update
Internet > page 192, Audi connect. will start automatically.
> To always allow automatic map updates, select You can check the status of the installation in the
on the home screen: SETTINGS > System main- notification center > page 23.
tenance > Automatic online map update. The
MMI starts the map update automatically in
Map update using the USB connection
the background when new map material is
Applies to: vehicle map updates using the USB connection
available.
With the map update, you can update the map
You can check the status of the download process material in your navigation system.
and the installation in the notification center
=> page 23.

208
Navigation
Requirement: you must have created a myAudi Press on an item ina list@ and select the
account at my.audi.com. Your vehicle must be better route. More information can be found
registered in your myAudi account. under > page 206.
@ Atraffic message is displayed. The distance
Downloading a map update
to the hazardous area is calculated from the
> Download the map update at my.audi.com and current vehicle position.
store it on a USB flash drive. For additional in- @® The traffic messages are only shown when
formation, visit my.audi.com.
route guidance is active. Press ona line to
Installing a map update display details about it.
> Connect the USB flash drive to the Audi music (i) Tips
interface > page 222.
— Particularly critical traffic information, such
> Open the notification in the notification center
as warnings about wrong-way drivers, is au-
on > page 23 and press on the notification.
tomatically displayed as a notification.
> Press Next. The status of the installation is
— Traffic information is not available in some
shown in the display.
countries.
Traffic incidents
Traffic rerouting
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online traffic
information By receiving traffic information, your MMI calcu-
lates a better route if available and the possible
time saved compared to the current route.
RAX-0152
oi nemurcu)
tos
Beeeukucuoucae kal
erence eta Traffic rerouting
> Start route guidance.
The MMI uses a notification or a note in the traf-

fic information @ > page 209, fig. 146 to indi-
Fig. 146 traffic information overview cate a better route. You can decide which route
you would like to use.
Open traffic information
To select a better route, you have the following
Requirement: the map must be displayed options:
=> page 205. > Notification: press F2. The better route will be
used for route guidance, or press on the notifi-
> Press on the traffic jam symbol in the side
cation. Press on the information window for the
menu on the map > page 204, fig. 142.
better route (for example @) > page 206,
Display traffic report details fig. 145).
> Note in the traffic information: press on the
> Press on the traffic report @) > fig. 146.
list entry @ > page 209, fig. 146. Press on the
> To display the previous or next traffic report,
information window for the better route (for
press < or.
example (2) > page 206, fig. 145).
The following information can be displayed
> fig. 146:
@ Amessage will appear if the MMI calculates a

4M8012721BF
better route for the current route guidance.

The predicted delay takes into account future
changes to the traffic situation on the route.
209
Navigation
Online traffic information Please note that a setting applied to the multi-
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online traffic function steering wheel is only valid for the in-
information strument cluster map.
The MMI can receive real-time online traffic infor- Map settings
mation about congestion, accidents, road
construction, and other incidents. Satellite map: see > page 207.
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Traffic: you can display current traffic informa-
Internet > page 192, Audi connect. Traffic infor- tion on the map.
mation must be switched on in the MMI — Free flowing traffic
=> page 210. — Traffic obstructions
— Traffic incidents
Traffic information will be displayed on the
standard map > page 204, fig. 142. Map colors
— Automatic: the map display adapts to the light-
Online traffic information is also displayed on the
ing conditions (for example, by changing from
standard map > page 207.
day to night when driving through a tunnel).
— Day or Night
G) Tips
— Having the online traffic information func- Map orientation
tion switched on provides the most accurate — 2D heading-up map/2D north-up map: the
reports of traffic situations and traffic fore- current vehicle position is displayed. The map is
casting. Your vehicle transmits and process- oriented in the direction of travel or to the
es its anonymous, encrypted position infor- north.
mation at regular intervals to the traffic da- — 3D heading-up map: the current vehicle posi-
ta provider. You can switch off data transfer tion is shown on a three-dimensional map and
at any time > page 305. is aligned to the direction of travel.
— The online traffic information network is — Overview: the entire route from the vehicle po-
not available in all countries, and the cover- sition to the destination or the next stopover is
age is not nationwide. displayed on the map. The map is oriented to
the north.
Settings Automatic zoom
— On: the map scale is adapted automatically de-
You can adjust the navigation system settings in pending on the type of road being traveled (ex-
the instrument cluster and in the MMI display pressway, highway, other roads) so that you al-
separately. The settings depend on the country ways have an optimal overview of the road
and vehicle equipment. ahead. When route guidance is active, the scale
is adjusted automatically for a better detailed
Accessing settings view when there are upcoming maneuvers.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: — Intersection: when route guidance is active, the
NAVIGATION > ©}. scale is adjusted automatically for a better de-
tailed view when there are upcoming maneu-
Accessing settings using the multifunction vers.
steering wheel — Off
MMI map contents/Map content: you can switch
the display of additional information (such as
button.
POIs) on the map in the upper display on or off. >
210
Navigation
Voice guidance
Voice guidance: you can adjust the navigation
prompts. With the Traffic setting, the MMI will
only give prompts if there are traffic incidents on
your route.
Voice guidance during phone call
Entertainment fader during navigation: the au-

dio playback volume is temporarily lowered when
navigation prompts are active.
Route criteria
You can adjust which route criteria should be al-
lowed or avoided for the route calculation.
HOV/carpool lanes
Highways
Toll roads
Ferries
Route information
When this function is switched on and route
guidance is active, route information
=> page 204, fig. 142 is displayed. The next ma-
neuver will be displayed at the bottom. POIs and
traffic information will also be displayed. Press
route information to display a preview of the next
maneuver on the map. You can switch the follow-
ing information on or off in route information.
— Points of interest along the route
— Traffic incidents
Presentation mode
In presentation mode, the system simulates driv-
ing on the display along the planned route with-
out the vehicle actually moving. You can use
Specify starting point when you would like to
calculate a route starting from a location other
than the current vehicle position, for example.
Simulating route guidance: start route guidance
and press presentation mode.
@) Tips
You can change the volume of navigation an-
4M8012721BF
nouncements while one is playing > page 31.
211
Radio
Radio be muted since they can no longer be re-

ceived.
General information Radio ID
Selecting the radio Your radio ID and contact data for your satel-
lite radio provider are displayed.
ey Channel number
ie) |
e®
See) os 2 ) ® No reception
\S ™
3 Pa): 4 The station cannot be received.
(ones
ro In addition to the symbols for the usual frequen-
* 106.7 ana a cy bands, the following information may also be
available depending on vehicle equipment:
Symbol | Description
mao
The station provides information in
RADIO —@
the background for an online station
Saray alternative. Online station tracking
22 Lim) must be switched on for this
i
4 Qi:
> page 218.
aa
The station is received through the In-
Fig. 148 Upper display: SiriusXM channel list ternet.
The system attempts to receive the
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the radio
station/podcast through the Internet.
may support the FM, AM, and SiriusXM (satellite
radio) frequency bands. Using the HD Radio re-
G) Tips
ceiver* also allows you to receive radio stations
on the FM and AM bands in digital format. — Contact the SiriusXM* provider if you would
like to receive satellite programming.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the se- — Buildings, tunnels, bridges, open areas, oth-
lected station list, the following information will er vehicles or objects on the vehicle roof can
be displayed: affect reception.
@ Station list — Satellite radio* is not available in all re-
Shows the stations that are currently availa- gions.
ble. The station list updates automatically.
@ Stations Adjusting the radio using the MMI
For example, the station name may be dis-
> Applies to: MMI: To set a frequency band, select
played depending on availability.
on the home screen: RADIO > Source a catego-
HD Radio technology
ry.
FM/AM stations that can be received by digi- > Applies to: MMI: To set a station, select on the
tal radio are marked with the HD Radio tech- home screen: RADIO > Source > a category >a
nology symbol H). station/podcast*.
If reception quality declines, the radio auto- > To select a frequency, follow the instructions
matically switches to the analog FM/AM sta- under > page 214, Free text search.
tion depending on availability.
@ Additional audio programs Adjusting the radio using the multifunction
Digital HD Radio stations may contain multi- steering wheel
ple additional audio programs. If you lose re-
ception, the additional audio programs will Requirement: radio mode must be on. >
212
Radio
> Select the radio/media tab in the instrument > To select a station or a source, turn and press
cluster. the left thumbwheel.
> To switch between radio and media, select the
button > Switch to radio/Switch to media. @) Tips
> Turn the left thumbwheel to display the station Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: De-
list. : ‘ f
. . = pending on the selected function, operation
> fo switch to a different source, press the [=] through the MMI may be required.
utton.
Radio functions
Lea TN]
[RAX-0191
Fig. 149 Upper display: left side: playback view of radio functions, right side: sources
Operating The following functions may be available depend-

> Applies to: MMI: To open the playback view @, ing on the selected radio station/podcast* and
select on the home screen: RADIO > Source > a
the vehicle equipment:
category > a station/podcast*.
> Applies to: MMI: To open the sources (2), select
on the home screen: RADIO > Source.
Symbol/Description |Description
® ao Displaying categories in a frequency band.
@ Source Displays sources in the Radio menu.
© Frequency band Shows the current station frequency band.
Indicates that on demand content is playing. The MMI must be con-
© ON nected to the Internet and a data plan must be available for this
=> page 196.
@ wie See > page 215.
& Settings > page 218.
Depending on availability, you can switch between the image views:
press on the station logo. Use one finger to swipe to the right or left
4M8012721BF
Station logo
to switch between the Station logo and Cover art (album cover). Al-
©
so see > page 218, Online additional data.
213
Radio
Symbol/Description | Description
© a Go back one level.
@ Search See > page 214.
@ Last stations See > page 215.
® Presets See > page 215.
FM Displays stations from the FM frequency band.
® Online See > page 216.
Displays stations from the SiriusXM frequency band.
@ SiriusXM Combines SiriusXM Live channels and on demand content, depend-
ing on vehicle equipment.
@ AM Displays stations from the AM frequency band.
Start over Go to the beginning of the broadcast.
Related Channels, artists, and shows related to the content that is currently
playing.
® Subscribe Log in to be able to play the content.
Switch to WEB Switch manually to Internet reception.
Switch to SAT Switch manually to satellite reception.
@® More Access options for the current station > page 217.
Selecting the previous or next track: press /I< or >I.
@ aca Going to the beginning of the recording: press and hold Ni<.
Going to the live program: press and hold >I. The i symbol will
be displayed.
@ K/>I Select the previous/next station.
DAI Start or stop playback
® Msg Unmutes or mutes playback.
@ List The station list is displayed > page 212.
Depending on availability, the station name as well as program in-
@ Info section formation, for example, may be displayed. Also see > page 218,
Online additional data.
Opening free text search

RADIO > Source > Search.
=@ in General information on page 192. Entering search terms
@) Tips You can enter multiple search terms at once in

any order.
Not all functions are available in every source
and on every touch display. The following information may be available:
Symbol | Description
Free text search 2
Results from the list: Last stations
Using intelligent search, you can search for sta- vy Results from the list: Presets
tion names, frequencies, program types (such as
News), podcasts*, or online radio stations*.
214
Radio
Symbol | Description Editing a preset
(| Results from a Station list > Deleting presets: press Ww in the playback view,
For ex- or
ample, Station frequency band > In the presets list, select: Z > one or more sta-
tions or Select all > Delete > (Done).
Requirement: the presets list must be displayed.

LETSat tba (ey > Moving a preset: press A.
> Touch the $ symbol and move the entry to the
You can listen to the last stations that were desired position.
played in all frequency bands. > Press Done.
Accessing last stations
Live Sports
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM
RADIO > Source > Last stations.
Using the Live Sports category, you can find live
Listening to last stations
commentary about your favorite teams during a
> Press on a station. live sports broadcast. Depending on vehicle
equipment, you may be able to switch commen-
Deleting last stations
tary that favors a certain side on or off.
> Select: Z > select one or more stations or Se-
lect all > Delete > (Done). Accessing live games
RADIO > Source > SiriusXM > Sports > Live
Sports > a game.
You can store your favorite stations from every
The score, the status of the game, and, if availa-
frequency band in the presets List.
ble, the current possession of the ball are dis-
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM: Channels, played.
shows, and sports teams will be stored in the fa-
vorites as Smart Favorites. After switching the ig- Saving/deleting a favorite team
nition and the MMI on, the Smart Favorites store > Press W/W.
radio programs at a specific time.
Switching commentary on or off
Selecting presets using the MMI
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Internet. A data plan must be available
RADIO > Source > Presets > a preset. => page 196.
Storing presets > Press (<))/tc).

> Press on Y¥ (7) in the playback view > page 213,
fig. 149. eel (olay
Requirement: a list with radio stations must be Program information (for example, general text
displayed > page 212, fig. 147. messages, artist, composer, song) is displayed in
> Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op- the radio text.
tions menu appears.
Requirement: the selected radio station must
> Press Store as favorite.
support the radio text function.
4M8012721BF
215
Radio
Opening radio text Previous selection

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: The station/podcast list for the last station or
RADIO > select a frequency band (such as FM) podcast that was playing will be displayed.
> select a station > More > Radio text.
Top stations
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following
The favorite online radio stations are displayed.
functions may be available:
Filter list
Displaying previous radio text entries
> Select: 2 > (a category) > a station/podcast.
> Swipe downward with one finger. The last radio
text entries are displayed if they are available. The following categories are available:
Scrolling through radio text entries — Countries
> Swipe upward or downward with one finger. — Genres
— Languages
Showing Radio Text Plus information
— Editor's picks
If a radio text entry is displayed with a color, a — Themes
phone number or a navigation destination for the — Nearby
station is available as radio text plus information.
@) Note
You have the following options:
Selecting the destination be sure to note the connectivity costs section
> Select: a navigation destination marked in col- =@ in General information on page 192.
or > Set as destination.
G) Tips
Call
— Depending on the Internet connection and
> Select: a phone number marked in color > Call. network traffic, the connection may be lost
when online radio is playing.
G) Tips — Online radio reception may not be possible
A call to a phone number stored in the radio if Internet service is throttled.
text will start immediately. — Online media usage depends on the service
availability of the third party provider.
—The range and screen display of online me-
Online radio
dia services from third party providers in the
General information vehicle can vary.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and on- — Please note that it may not be possible to
line radio
play some online radio stations in certain
You can listen to various radio stations or pod- countries.
casts on the Internet using online radio. — Audi only provides access to online radio
and does not assume any responsibility for
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
the content of these services.
Internet. A data plan must be available
=> page 196.
Accessing online radio through the MMI

RADIO > Source > Online.
216
Radio
Listening to podcast favorites

Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and on- Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
line radio
displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
Opening podcasts using the MMI stored.
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: > Select: a podcast > a podcast episode.
RADIO > Source > Online > Podcasts.
Browsing through podcast favorites
Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
Listening to a podcast displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
stored.
> Select: a podcast > a podcast episode.
> Press or >.
Search
> Press 2. Displaying all podcast favorites
The following functions are available in the pod- Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
cast playback view: displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
stored.
Displaying podcast episodes
> Press All.
> Press List.
Editing podcast favorites
Starting/stopping podcast playback
> Deleting podcast favorites: press W in the
> Press D /II. playback view, or
> In the podcast favorites list, select: All > Z >
Previous/next podcast
one or more podcasts, or Select All > Delete >
> PressKI/ DI. (Done).
Changing the playback position Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
> You can adjust the playback position using the displayed.
knob.
> Moving podcast favorites: Select: All > Z.
> Touch the $ symbol and move the entry to the
Displaying the online radio menu desired position.
> Press Done.
> Press Ba.
Switching to radio Options and settings

> Press Source. The sources in the Radio menu
are displayed.
Requirement: the playback view @) > page 213,
Podcast favorites
fig. 149 must be displayed.
You can store podcasts in the podcast favorites.
> Press More (9, or
Requirement: the playback view for a podcast
Requirement: a list with radio stations or pod-
must be displayed.
casts* must be displayed > page 212, fig. 147.
> Press Y @ © page 213, fig. 149. > Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op-
Requirement: a list with podcasts must be dis- tions menu appears. >
played.
4M8012721BF
> Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op-
tions menu appears.
> Press Save podcast.
217
Radio
Depending on the selected source and vehicle When the function is switched on, additional in-
equipment, the following functions may be avail- formation (such as album cover, artist, track) will
able. be loaded depending on the availability from the
different providers.
— Store as favorite > page 215.
— Radio text > page 215. Online station tracking
— Save podcast > page 217, Podcast favorites. Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
— Save as a shortcut > page 24, Shortcuts. Internet. A data plan must be available
=> page 196. A station provides information in
Related content
the background for its online station alternative
Channels, artists, and shows related to the con- and is identified with the ™} symbol.
tent that is currently playing.
During reception loss in the FM frequency band,
the radio tuner can establish a data connection
Settings
and switch to an online station alternative, if it is
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: available. If available, you can receive your local
RADIO > ©}. radio stations in every region of your country on-
line. This may result in additional costs >@®. The
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- symbol indicates a station that is currently be-
ing settings may be available: ing received online.
HD Radio FM/HD Radio AM — Automatic/Off: activates or deactivates auto-
matic switching to online station alternatives.
You can switch HD Radio reception on or off.
— With request: switching to online station alter-
SiriusXM Tune Start natives must be confirmed manually.
If you play a Smart Favorite when this function is Preferred online radio data rate
switched on, the song currently playing on the
Depending on the selected radio station, you may
channel will play from the beginning.
be able to adjust the data rate for Internet radio
SiriusXM subscription status = page 216 and for the Online station tracking.
This option is available when your subscription is For optimal sound playback, press High. To re-
about to expire or has already expired. The expi- duce data usage, press Low.
ration date for your license is displayed.
@) Note
Call SiriusXM: the telephone number and radio
ID of your satellite radio provider are displayed.
To call your satellite radio provider using the
MMI, press Call SiriusXM.
Online additional data G) Tips
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Delays may occur when switching automati-
Internet. A data plan must be available cally between normal frequency bands and
=> page 196. online radio.
Troubleshooting
ment.
218
Radio
A station is no longer displayed in the sta- | Store the station as a preset in advance. Access the pre-
tion list. sets using the presets list > page 215.
Online radio: no playback from online ra-_ | Check if a data plan has been purchased for the applicable
dio. country and it is available > page 196.
4M8012721BF
219
Media
Media @) Note
General information Read the information about Audi connect, and
There may be different media sources and con- =@ in General information on page 192.
nections available depending on the vehicle
equipment. For example, you can play media files
DVD drive
using a connected USB drive or connect your mo-
bile devices to the Audi music interface and oper- General information
ate them through the MMI. Applies to: vehicles with a DVD drive
Media and format restrictions: the MMI (includ- The functionality of individual storage mediums
ing the USB storage device connection) was test- may be limited due to the variety of blank CDs/
ed with a variety of products and media on the DVDs available and the various capacities. Audio
market. However, there may be cases where indi- CDs or video DVDs with copy protection, CDs/
vidual devices or media and audio/video files may DVDs that do not conform to the standard, and
not be recognized, may play only with restric- multisession CDs may have limited playback or
tions, or may not play at all. may not play at all. Audi recommends finalizing
the recording process when creating multisession
Restricted functionality: reset the MMI to the
CDs. Multisession DVDs are not supported.
factory default settings if functionality is restrict-
ed > page 234.
(1) Note
Digital Rights Management: please note that To reduce the risk of damaging the drive and
the audio/video files are subject to copyright pro- data carriers:
tection.
— Always store data carriers in a protective
Files that are protected by DRM and are identi- sleeve and do not expose them to direct
fied with the symbol f@ will not play. sunlight
— Do not use damaged, dirty, or laminated da-
Data security: never store important data on
ta carriers
CDs/DVDs or mobile devices. Audi is not responsi-
— Do not use single CDs/-DVDs with a 3.1 inch
ble for damaged or lost files and media.
(8 cm) diameter, non-circular CDs/DVDs
Loading times: the more files/folders/playlists (shaped CDs), cleaning CDs, and protective
there are on a storage medium, the longer it will rings
take to load. To reduce the amount of time it — Never force CDs/DVDs into the drive. Discs
takes the audio/video files to load, use a storage are pulled in automatically.
medium that only contains audio/video files, and
create subfolders (for example, for each artist or G) Tips
album). The thermal protection switch stops playback
Additional information: when playing, audio temporarily when outside temperatures are
files are automatically displayed with any addi- too high.
tional information that is stored (such as the ar-
tist, track and album cover). If this information is
not available on the medium, the MMI will revert
to the local Gracenote metadata database or
search online if necessary. See > page 228, On-
line additional data. However, in some cases, the
additional information may not be displayed.
220
Media
DVD drive Connecting a mobile device

Applies to: vehicles with a DVD drive > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
—
MEDIA > Source > Connect external device >
[RAH-9153,
New connection. The available Bluetooth devi-
ces will be displayed after several seconds.
> Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
displayed Bluetooth devices.
> To update the list, press OQ.
A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be
generated.
> Confirm the PIN on your mobile device.
Fig. 150 Glove compartment: DVD drive
After connecting successfully, the mobile device
Loading a CD/DVD will be displayed in the Connected devices menu
as a Bluetooth audio player.
> Slide the CD/DVD straight into the DVD slot @
with the label facing up. The CD/DVD will be au- Playing media > page 223.
tomatically pulled in.
@ Tips
Ejecting a CD/DVD
— Check for any connection requests on your
> Press the button (2). Bluetooth device.
— Multiple Bluetooth audio players can be
The CD/DVD is pulled in again automatically if it
paired with the MMI, but only one at a time
is not removed from the DVD slot within approxi-
can be active as a Bluetooth audio player
mately ten seconds after ejecting it.
=> page 235.
The DVD drive is accessed and operated through — The supported media functions (such as
the MMI > page 223. shuffle, list view, categories, search, op-
tions) depend on the Bluetooth device being
@) Tips used.
— Playback cannot be guaranteed with media — Note the volume setting on your Bluetooth
files that have a high data rate. device. Audi recommends setting your mo-
— Always read the chapter > page 220, Gener- bile device to the maximum volume when
al information. using it as a Bluetooth audio player.
—Aselection of supported Bluetooth devices
Bluetooth audio player can be found in the database for tested mo-
Applies to: vehicles with Bluetooth audio player bile devices at www.audi.com/bluetooth.
With the Bluetooth audio player, you can play

Amazon Alexa
music wirelessly through the MMI from your
Applies to: vehicles with Amazon Alexa Integration
Bluetooth-capable mobile device (such as a cell
phone). You can play various Amazon Alexa content using
the MMI. The voice recognition system is used to
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
operate it.
the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
settings will open on your mobile device during Requirement: Amazon Alexa must be activated
the connection setup. The Bluetooth function and => page 29.
4M8012721BF
visibility of the MMI > page 234 and mobile de-

>» Start Amazon Alexa using the voice recognition
vice must be switched on.
system. >
221
Media
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: ONU reat em Tale)
MEDIA > Source > Amazon Alexa.
Connect your mobile devices to the Audi music in-
@) Note terface in order to operate them through the
MMI and charge the batteries.
be sure to note the connectivity costs section The Audi music interface USB ports are located in
=> page 192. the storage compartment under the front and
rear* center armrest and are labeled with the +<
symbol. If multiple USB devices are connected to
Multimedia connections
the USB ports (for example, a smartphone and a
USB adapter cable USB flash drive), all of these devices can be used
as the playback source.
[RAH-9202
Connecting or charging mobile devices using
a USB adapter
> Connect the matching USB adapter to the Audi
music interface USB port and connect it to the
mobile device, such as a smartphone.
The battery will charge automatically.
Mobile devices connected to the Audi music inter:

Fig. 151 Audi Genuine Accessories: USB adapter face can be started and operated using the MMI
=> page 223.
You can connect your mobile devices through the
Audi music interface to the MMI using the USB Disconnecting a mobile device from the Audi
adapter and charge the battery at the same time. music interface
> Remove the USB adapter cable from the Audi
You can purchase the USB adapter cable from an
music interface.
authorized Audi dealer or at specialty stores:
@ USB adapter for devices with a mi-
cro USB connection
ZA\ WARNING
@ USB adapter for Apple devices with Driving requires your complete and undivided
a Lightning connection attention. As the driver, you have complete re-
sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate
@ USB adapter for devices with USB
mobile devices while driving, because this in-
type C connection
creases the risk of an accident.
@) Note
@) Note
Handle the USB adapter carefully. Do not al-
low it to be pinched. — Pull the cable out of the Audi music inter-
face carefully so that the USB ports are not
G) Tips damaged.
— Use a USB extension cable to connect devi-
Apple devices with a dock connector can only
ces that have an integrated USB connector
be charged using a USB adapter designed for
(such as a USB stick) to reduce the risk of
devices with a dock connector. Data cannot be
damage to your USB device and the Audi
transmitted.
music interface.
— Extremely high or low temperatures that
can occur inside vehicles can damage mobile
devices and/or impair their performance.
222
Media
Never leave mobile devices in the vehicle in — External device: you can connect external devi-
extremely high or low temperatures. ces via Bluetooth and use the Bluetooth audio
player > page 221, or you can connect an exter-
@ Tips nal device directly to the Audi music interface
— Always follow the information found in => page 222.
=> page 82.
— When you switch the ignition off, the USB Accessing media
ports are still supplied with power until the
Playing media files using the MMI
energy management intervenes.
— Do not use an additional adapter cable or > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
USB extension cable to connect mobile devi- MEDIA > Source > a source. Depending on the
ces to the Audi music interface that already connected device, the symbol for a source may
have a cable or that must be connected with change. The device name may be displayed (for
a USB adapter cable (> page 222, fig. 151). example: myPhone).
Using an additional adapter or US extension > Select a track from the categories in the media
cable may impair functionality. center > page 224.
— Functionality is not guaranteed for mobile
Playing media files using the multifunction
devices that do not conform to the USB 2.0 steering wheel
specification.
— USB hubs are not supported. Requirement: a media source must contain me-
— Video playback through the Audi music in- dia files > page 223.
terface is not supported on Apple devices > Select the radio/media tab in the instrument
and MTP devices (such as smartphones). cluster.
— iPod touch or iPhone malfunctions also af- > Turn the left thumbwheel to display the play-
fect the operation of the MMI. Reset your list.
mobile device in these situations. > To switch to a different source, press the
— Audi recommends updating the iPod touch button.
or iPhone software to the latest version. Re- > To select a media file or a source, turn and
fer to your mobile device owner's manual press the left thumbwheel.
for more information. > To switch between radio and media, select in
— The USB adapter on the Audi music inter- the instrument cluster: the LE] button > Switch
face will support iPod touch or iPhone devi- to radio/Switch to media.
ces from the 5th generation or newer with
the lightning connector. G) Tips
—Aselection of supported devices can be — For safety reasons, the video image is only
found in the database for tested mobile de- displayed when the vehicle is stationary. On-
vices at www.audi.com/mp3. ly the sound from the video plays while driv-
ing.
Playing media — Applies to: multifunction steering wheel:
Depending on the selected function, opera-
tion through the MMI may be required.
The following sources can be selected depending

on the vehicle equipment:
— Amazon Alexa > page 221.
4M8012721BF
— USB device > page 222.

— DVD & page 221.
223
Smart playlists
Last played tracks: the tracks that were dis-
Rooke cis played last are displayed.
Most played tracks: the tracks that are played

most frequently are displayed.
Folders
The folder structure or track/chapter list is dis-
Fig. 152 Upper display: media center played.
There are various categories available in the me- » Select: a folder > a song.
dia center. You can also search for media files Compilations
across sources. The current music track continues
playing while you search the MMI. You can control your compilations through the
MMI.
Opening the media center
» Select: a compilation > a song.
MEDIA > Source > a source > a category. Composers
All available composers are displayed.
@ Source symbol
> Select: gd composer > an album > a song.
The symbol for the source that is currently in use
is displayed. Depending on the connected device, iTunes Radio
the symbol for the source may change. As an ex-
>» Press on a radio station.
ample, a USB stick is shown connected to the
Audi music interface. Audio books
@ Source device name You can control your audio books on the MMI.
The device name of the source that is currently in > Press on an audio book.
use is displayed.
Podcasts
@ Categories You can control your podcasts through the MMI.
The media center will display categories depend-
> Select: a podcast > a podcast episode.
ing on the connected device, the selected source
content, and the connection type. Genres
Last played tracks All available genres are displayed.
The last played media file will be played. > Select: a genre > an artist > an album > a song.
Artists Videos
All available artists are displayed. All available video files are displayed.
> Select: an artist > an album > a song. > Press on a video.
Playlists Tracks
All playlists and smart playlists in the source are All available tracks are displayed.
displayed.
> Press ona track.
> Select: a playlist > a song.
224
Media
Albums — For safety reasons, the video image is only

All available albums are displayed. displayed when the vehicle is stationary. On-
ly the sound from the video plays while driv-
> Select: an album > a track. ing.
—When synchronizing a portable device with
@ Note Cloud services, playlists may display incor-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment rectly in the MMI. Use the media center in
— Cloud services and the iTunes radio category the device.
always require an Internet connection. — Applies to: iPod touch/iPhone: Note the in-
— Read the information about Audi connect, formation about the Audi music interface
and be sure to note the connectivity costs and the supported devices > page 222.
section >@ in General information on
page 192.
G@) Tips
— Only the categories supported by the medi-
um are available.
ele mitaraatelary
[RAX-0037,
Diner aecit)
Cra
BUT la arr)
The bigB
ea)
Pn
eae)
nc
@
Fig. 153 Upper display: left side: playback view, right side: playlist
Operating > To open the playlist @, select List in the play-

> Applies to: MMI: To open the playback view @), back view (9.
select on the home screen: MEDIA > Source > a The following functions may be available depend-
source > a category (for example, Artists > Al- ing on the selected media source and the vehicle
bum) > a track. equipment:
Symbol/Description |Description
® aa The media center categories are displayed based on the active
source > page 224.
@ Source Displays sources in the Media menu. >
4M8012721BF
225
Media
Symbol/Description Description
Applies to: playback view: Device name of the source that is current-
ly playing.
Source/device name
Applies to: media center view: Source that you are currently brows-
ing > page 224.
Requirement: a media source with album covers must be selected
or the covers must be available online > page 228, Online addition-
Album cover in the play-
al data.
©
same Displays the current album cover.

Display the playlist: press on the cover.
@ & Settings > page 227.
Current track informa- | Display of Track and Artist. Highlights the track that is currently
tion playing.
© List Browsing in the list: drag your finger upward or downward.
Requirement: a media source with album covers must be selected
Album cover in the play- or the covers must be available online > page 228, Online addition-
© list al data.
Displays the current album cover.
@ More Opens options > page 227.
O Off Switching between off/playlist/track: press @..
() O Playlist The tracks in the current playlist will repeat continuously in a loop.
© Track The current track will repeat continuously in a loop.
Selecting the previous/next track (or station/chapter): press Ki or
Di.
@ ‘aii Fast forward/rewind: to fast forward or rewind within a track, press
and hold Dior K.
Jumping to the beginning of a track: press on K after the first
three seconds of play time.
@ PAI Start or stop playback
@ og When this function is switched on, all files in the playlist will play in
random order.
@ List The playlist @ is displayed.
@ Playback position The bar shows the current playback position in the track.
® Info section Display of Track, Artist, and Album.
DVD functions — Using the DVD main menu: press the desired
Applies to: vehicles with a DVD drive function.
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and — Switching to the media functions: press on the
a DVD must be playing. upper display. Select: *1 > select a chapter, or
start the movie in the DVD main menu and
The following functions are available in the play-
press on the upper display.
back view:
— Adjusting the aspect ratio: press on the upper
— Display the DVD main menu: press on the up- display. Select: Aspect ratio > an aspect ratio >
per display. Press DVD menu. OK > table on page 227.
226
Media
@ Source device name

@) Tips
The system will display the device name of the
— For safety reasons, the video image is only
source that is currently being searched.
displayed when the vehicle is stationary. On-
ly the sound from the video plays while driv- @ Categories
ing.
The media center will display categories depend-
— Applies to: Multifunction steering wheel:
ing on the connected device, the selected source
Depending on the selected function, it may
content, and the connection type. The search is
be necessary to use the MMI.
limited to the active source.
Media center Search

3g If a source supports the search, then the catego-
S ry is displayed > page 230.
Iges
Last played track
The last played media file will be played.
Artists
Fig. 153 Upper display: media center view All available artists are displayed.
>» Select: an artist > an album > a song.

Various categories are available in the media cen-
ter for selecting media files or browsing through Playlists
media sources. All playlists and smart playlists in the source are
You can browse through your music collection us- displayed.
ing the categories in the media center, such as al- > Select: a playlist > a song.
bums. You can browse through the active source
or any available source (for example, an SD card). Smart playlists
While browsing through the media center, the Last played tracks: the tracks that were dis-
music from the active source will continue to played last are displayed.
play.
Most played tracks: the tracks that are played
Opening the media center most frequently are displayed.
> Applies to: MMI: Searching any source: select
Directories
on the home screen: MEDIA > Source > a
source > a category. The folder structure or track/chapter list is dis-
> Searching through the active source: select in played.
the playback view > page 228: a8 > a category. > Select: a folder > a song.
@ Source symbol Compilations
The system will display the symbol for the source You can control your playlists through the MMI.
that is currently being searched. Depending on
the connected device or online media service”, > Select: a playlist > a song.
the symbol for a source may change. As an exam- Composers
ple, a USB stick is shown connected to the Audi
music interface. All available composers are displayed.
4KE012721BE
> Select: ad composer > an album > a song.
227
Media
Online additional data Eight different protection levels can be set for
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the parental control. If you set the parental control
level at level 5, all DVDs from levels 1 - 5 can be
Internet. A data plan must be available
=> page 196. played. Video DVDs with a higher level will not
play.
When the function is switched on, additional in-
formation (such as album cover, artist, track) will Changing the PIN
be loaded depending on the availability from the Requirement: the DVD parental control menu
different providers. must be displayed.
DVD playback parental cntrl. > Select: Change PIN > enter a new PIN for pa-
rental control > OK.
Playback of video DVDs can be restricted based
on age restrictions using parental control. > Repeat the entry and press OK.
Displaying the DVD parental control menu G) Tips

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: — Not all video DVDs have parental control.
MEDIA > ©} > DVD playback parental cntrl.. — The protection levels for the parental con-
> Enter the PIN for parental control. The PIN set trol are based on the US standards from the
at the factory is 1234. Motion Picture Association of America
> Press OK. (MPAA). Note that the age levels for video
DVDs in European countries may differ.
Switching the rating level on and off
— PIN entry for parental control will be locked
Requirement: the DVD parental control menu for approximately one minute if you enter
must be displayed. the incorrect PIN three times in a row. The
> Select: DVD playback parental cntrl. > a rating PIN can only be reset by an authorized Audi
level (for example, level 5) > *, or dealer.
> To remove all restrictions, press Off.
Supported media and file formats

OTe TN]
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- by the DVD drive and the connection for USB stor-
ing properties for media files may be supported age devices:
Audio/video files
DVD drive: audio CDs (up to 80 min) with CD text (artist, album,
song)*, CD-ROMs with a capacity of up to 700 MB; DVD+R/RW; DVD
video; DVD audio with audio tracks that are compatible with a DVD
video player;
Supported media
Audi music interface: mobile devices > page 222 (such as an iPhone,
MTP player, USB storage device in “USB Device Subclass 1 and 6” that
conforms to USB 2.0: USB sticks, USB MP3 players (Plug-and-Play-ca-
pable), external USB flash drives and hard drives
USB storage device: exFAT, FAT, FAT32, NTFS
USB storage device partitions (primary/logical*): 2 per USB connec-
File system
tion
CD/DVD file systems: ISO9660, Joliet, UDF
228
Media
Album cover: GIF, JPG, PNG with max. 800x800 px. The album cover
Metadata from the medium or from Gracenote®* is displayed, depending on
availability.
Playlists -M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX
DVD drive: max. 1,000 files per medium
Number of files USB mass storage device: max. 50,000 files per medium; max. 1,000
files per playlist/folder
Format File extension

MPEG 1/2 Layer 3 -mp3
Up to maximum 320 kbit/s
Windows Media Audio 9/10 .wma
48 kHz sampling frequencies
MPEG 2/4 .m4a; .m4b; .aac
Opus Opus; .0gg; .oga
FLAC flac
ALAC -m4a 48 kHz sampling frequency
Monkey's Audio -ape
Format File extension

MPEG 1/2 -mpg; .mpeg
MPEG4 AVC (H.264) .mp4; .m4v; .mov; .avi
up to maximum 15 Mbit/s and
Windows Media Video 9 .wmv; .asf
1920x1080 px at maximum 30 fps
MPEG-H (H.265/HEVC) -mp4; .mov
VP8/VP9 .webm
Flash video flv; .f4v
not always display, depending on the sys-

tem language.
— The media sources do not support the Win- — The manufacturer of the storage device can
dows Media Audio 9 Voice format. provide information about its “USB Device
— For compressing MP3 files, Audi recom- Subclass”.
mends a bit rate of at least 160 kbit/s. The —Some MTP player functions are not support-
display showing the remaining play time ed, such as rating music tracks and video
may differ for audio files with variable bit playback.
rate.
— Special characters (such as those in ID3 tag
information) may display differently or may
Troubleshooting
4M8012721BF

ment. >
229
Media
Problem Solution
Audi music interface/Bluetooth Read the instructions in the chapter > page 222, Multimedia
audio player: the mobile device is connections/> page 221, Bluetooth audio player.
not supported.
Audi music interface: the mobile For many mobile phones or mobile devices, playback is not possi-
device is not recognized as a ble when the battery level is too low (less than 5% charge level).
source. The mobile device will only be recognized as a media source in
the MMI after connecting if the battery charge level is sufficient.
Audi music interface: malfunc- The Bluetooth audio player function is switched on. Switch this
tions during audio playback function off > page 234 when you are not using the Bluetooth
through an iPod touch/iPhone. audio player.
Audi music interface: audio play- Make sure the USB mode MTP is selected in the settings on your
back through the connected mo- mobile device.
bile device is not possible.
Bluetooth audio player: interfer- Playback interference can occur when using the Bluetooth audio
ence with track display and audio player if a music player app from a third party provider is open.
playback. Audi recommends using the integrated media player on your
Bluetooth device (such as a smartphone).
230
Audi smartphone interface
Audi smartphone CG) Note

interface Read the information about Audi connect, and
Setup
=> page 192.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
You can connect your smartphone to the MMI G@) Tips

with a cable or wirelessly* using the Audi smart- — The functions that can be used depend on
phone interface. Certain content on your smart-
the following factors, among others:
phone is adapted in the MMI while driving and
— The brand of your smartphone
can be operated through the MMI.
— The version of the operating system in
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and your smartphone
the ignition must be switched on. iPhone genera- — The software version of the app used
tion 5 or higher with Lightning connector and iOS — The USB adapter cable and correct connec-
7.1.2 operating system or higher, or smartphone tion
with Android Auto app and Android 5.0 Lollipop — Your cell phone service provider
operating system or higher. — The customized settings on your smart-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: phone
SETTINGS > Connected devices > Audi smart- — One of the factors above or a combination
phone interface > New connection. of any of them could cause your smart-
> Connect your smartphone to the Audi music in- phone to be incompatible with the Audi
terface > page 222 using a USB adapter smartphone interface. Compatibility cannot
=> page 222, fig. 151, or be guaranteed for all types of smartphones.
> To connect your iPhone wireless*, switch on the For more information and assistance, refer
Bluetooth function and Wi-Fi on your iPhone. to the user guide and the manufacturer of
Open the Apple CarPlay settings in your iPhone. your smartphone.
In the MMI, press on your iPhone in the list of — Please note that you can only connect your
displayed devices. smartphone via the front Audi music inter-
> To update the list, press O. face in order to use the Audi smartphone in-
> Follow the system instructions. terface.
> Pay attention to any additional system prompts — Wireless Apple CarPlay* is not available in
on your smartphone, if applicable. all countries.
> Applies to: MMI: If you declined use of Apple — Wireless Apple CarPlay* was a planned func-
CarPlay or Android Auto the first time you con- tion at the time this manual was printed.
nected your smartphone, then select on the Wireless Apple CarPlay* is not available in
home screen: SETTINGS > Connected devices > your vehicle.
Audi smartphone interface > a smartphone. — Wireless Apple CarPlay* is only possible i n
> Follow the system instructions. vehicles without a navigation system or
without a detected vehicle position (GPS da-
Z\ WARNING ta) if the following requirement is met: the
Driving requires your complete and undivided embedded SIM card for the vehicle must be
attention. As the driver, you have complete re- logged into the mobile phone network
=> page 192.
sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate
mobile devices while driving, because this in- — If the connected smartphone has voice con-
creases the risk of an accident. trol, you can operate your smartphone using
4M8012721BF
the external voice recognition system

=> page 29.
231
Audi smartphone interface
— The menu language shown in the MMIis — Usage of the Audi smartphone interface de-
based on the settings in your smartphone. pends on the availability of services through
— Some MMI functions are not available when third party providers.
there is an active Audi smartphone interface — Audi merely provides access to third party
connection. services through the MMI and does not as-
— You cannot connect any mobile devices via sume any responsibility for the content of
Bluetooth when an Audi smartphone inter- these services.
face connection is active.
Troubleshooting
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface

ment.
Problem Solution
Audi smartphone Check the battery charge level on your smartphone.
interface cannot be | Check the USB cable and use a different one if necessary.
opened. Check if Android Auto or Apple CarPlay is available in the country where the vehi-
cle is being operated.
Android Auto: check if the Android Auto app is installed on your smartphone.
Connecting the Make sure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB
smartphone to the | adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface
MMI failed. => page 222.
Apple CarPlay: check if Apple CarPlay is activated on your iPhone.
Android Auto: check in the Android Auto app if Android Auto permits new
vehicles.
Wireless connection: open the settings for Bluetooth and Apple CarPlay on your
iPhone. Remove your vehicle. Open the connection manager in the MMI
= page 235. Delete your iPhone in the Telephone 1 and Audi smartphone inter-
face submenus. Repeat the connection process. Restart the MMI > page 20. Re-
start your iPhone.
The smartphone is | Make sure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB
not automatically adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface
detected. => page 222.
Check if the requirements needed to connect a smartphone have been met.
232
Additional settings
Additional settings
System settings Keyboard
See > page 25.
Introduction
General settings are described in this chapter.

You can find specific settings in the chapters
about those settings. The available settings de- Requirement: an audio source must be active.
pend on the vehicle equipment. > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Sound.
Date and time
Possible settings:
— Treble
SETTINGS > General > Date & time.
— Bass
Possible settings: — Balance/fader
— Speed dependent volume control
— Automatically set date and time
— Subwoofer
— Surround Level
— Date format Focus

— Time format
You can optimize the sound distribution for vari-
— Automatic time zone
ous locations in the vehicle.
— Time zone
3D effect
Measurement units You can adjust the intensity of the 3D effect.
With the Medium setting, you will hear an opti-
mal 3D effect for all sources.
SETTINGS > General > Measurement units.
Possible settings: PUL eee ely
— Speed > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:

— Distance SETTINGS > Announcements & tones.
— Temperature
Possible settings:
— Volume
— Pressure — Announcement volume
— Consumption (engine) — Welcome sound
Language and keyboard Z\ WARNING

Adjust the volume of the audio system so that
signals from outside the vehicle, such as po-
SETTINGS > Language & keyboard.
lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all
Language times.
You can change the languages for the display,

@ Tips
navigation announcements, and the voice recog-
nition system. The volume is automatically adjusted to a pre-
4M8012721BF
set level when the MMI is switched on.
233
Additional settings
Bluetooth — Map material update for the navigation system

=> page 208.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: — Have the software update performed by an au-
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Bluetooth thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Bluetooth Facility. This can result in additional costs.
You can select a setting for visibility of the MMI ZA\ WARNING
to other Bluetooth devices. To connect a new
— Perform the installation only when the vehi-
Bluetooth device, the Visible setting must be se-
cle is stationary. Otherwise, this increases
lected. If Invisible is selected, a Bluetooth con-
the risk of an accident
nection will only be possible with paired devices.
— If the installation fails, contact an author-
If Off is selected, no Bluetooth device can be con-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
nected.
Facility immediately to have the malfunction
Bluetooth audio player corrected.
When this function is switched on, the profile

will load automatically when your Bluetooth au- Online system update
dio player is within range. Applies to: vehicles with online system update
Bluetooth name With the online system update, you can update
the software directly in the vehicle.
The MMI’s Bluetooth name is displayed and can
be changed. Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Factory default settings Downloading updates

Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. Requirement: notification for an online system
update will appear in the upper display.
SETTINGS > System maintenance > Restore > Press on the notification, or
factory settings. > Open the notification in the notification center
> Follow the system instructions. on page 23 and press on the notification.
The settings will be reset. The system will re-
start. This may take some time. You can also check manually if an update is avail-
able.
@ Tips > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > System maintenance > Software
Make sure that not only the settings were de-
update > Search for updates > desired update
leted but also the stored data, if necessary.
> Continue.
Software update
The MMI will start the download. You can check
Introduction the status of the download process in the notifi-
Applies to: vehicles with software update
cation center > page 23.
You can update your vehicle’s software.
Installing updates
The functions depend on the country and vehicle Requirement: an online system update must be
equipment: downloaded and a notification must be shown in
— Update through the online system update the upper display.
=> page 234.
> Stop the vehicle safely.
234
Additional settings
> Press on the notification, or Possible menu items:

> Open the notification in the notification center
— Telephone 1
on > page 23 and press on the notification.
> Follow the system instructions. — Telephone 2
— Audio player
Depending on the scope of the update, the online — Wi-Fi hotspot
system update may only be started if you follow
— Headset
these instructions:
>» Switch the emergency flashers off, if necessary Audi smartphone interface
> Make sure that the starter battery is charged. You can connect your smartphone to the MMI
> To start the update, exit and lock the vehicle.
> page 231.
The MMI will start the installation. When the up-
myAudi app
date has ended, a notification will be displayed.
This function is available if the myAudi app is in-
ZA\ WARNING stalled on your mobile device and started, and if
the mobile device is connected with the vehicle’s
Depending on the scope of the installation,
Wi-Fi hotspot.
the ignition must not be switched on during
the installation to ensure the installation
() Note
completes successfully.
() Note be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=> page 192.
Managing connected devices
Requirement: the connected devices menu must

@ Tips
be displayed > page 235.
The software update may take some time.
Connecting a device
WEE Tel Requirement: Bluetooth visibility must be acti-

Applies to: vehicles with online system update vated in the MMI & page 234 and mobile device.
Online system update: incomplete. Warning! > Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
Vehicle functions limited > To search for and connect your mobile device,
press New connection = page 181.
If an error occurs when installing an online sys-
tem update, certain functions such as the emer- Selecting a connected device
gency call function may not be available. Drive to > Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi > Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
Service Facility immediately to have the malfunc- displayed devices. The connection will be made.
tion corrected.
Disconnecting a connected device
Connected devices > Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
> Press on the connected mobile device. The se-
Displayed connected devices
lected mobile device will be disconnected from
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and the MMI.
the ignition must be switched on.
4M8012721BF
Deleting a device
> Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1. >
SETTINGS > Connected devices.
235
Additional settings
> Press and hold an element until the Options — About Audi connect
menu is displayed. — About the data memory
> Press Delete.
If a device is listed multiple times, it will be de- Audi smartphone interface

leted from all menu items. Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
Requirement: a smartphone must be connected

Additional options to the MMI > page 231.
Depending on the selected function, additional » Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
options may be available. SETTINGS > Connected devices > Audi smart-
phone interface.
Requirement: the connected devices menu must
> Press and hold an element until the Options
be displayed > page 235.
menu is displayed.
> Press ona menu item, such as Telephone 1. > Press Legal notes.
> Press and hold an element until the Options
menu is displayed.
Bluetooth profile Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and

You can switch desired profiles on or off sepa- the ignition must be switched on.
rately in the MMI. > Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func-
Favorite tions tab > page 13.
> Press and hold the =] button on the multifunc-
To set a paired mobile device as the default tion steering wheel until the display appears.
phone, activate this function in the MMI.
Possible options:
When the mobile device is in range and the Blue-
tooth function on the mobile device and in the — Engine code
MMI is switched on, the default phone will be — Software information
given priority over the other Bluetooth devices — Version information
and will be connected directly to the MMI.
Head-up display
Legal information Applies to: vehicles with head-up display
erreur) Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and

the ignition must be switched on. The head-up
Information on the software licenses can be
display is switched on.
found online at www.audi.com/softwareinfo.
Item elem tarts) SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Head-up
display > Display contents > Show the license
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: text in the head-up display.
SETTINGS > General.
Subscriptions
Version information
Legal notes
Possible options:
— Software information
236
Additional information
Additional information
Brands and licenses
This manual does not contain any symbols, such
as ® or ™, to identify trademarks or registered
trademarks. However, the absence of these sym-
bols does not constitute a waiver of any rights as-
sociated with these names.
Apple, iPhone, iPod touch, Apple CarPlay, Light-

ning, and iTunes Radio are trademarks of Apple
Inc.
10S is a trademark or, in the USA and other coun-

tries, a registered trademark of Cisco and is used
under license.
Other product and manufacturer names may be

trademarks of their respective owners.
4M8012721BF
237
Checking and Filling
Checking and Filling @) Note

Fuel — Filling the tank just one time with leaded
fuel or other metallic additives will cause
Types of gasoline permanent deterioration to the catalytic
The correct gasoline grade is stated on the inside converter function.
of the fuel filler door. — When gasoline with an octane rating that is
too low is used, high speeds or heavy engine
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter load can lead to engine damage.
and must only be driven with unleaded gasoline.
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gas-

@® tips
oline. For additional information on TOP TIER De- The vehicle may be filled with fuel that has a
tergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com. higher octane rating than what is required by
the engine.
The individual gasoline grades are differentiated
by octane ratings. This value is given with (R
+M)/2 equating to AKI or in RON. Gasoline mixture
The headings below match the sticker in the fuel Gasoline with alcohol or MTBE (Methyl-Tert-
filler door (examples): Butyl-Ether)
You can use unleaded gasoline mixed with alco-
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY MIN. (R+M)/2 87
hol or MTBE (generally labeled as oxygenated
Regular/ MIN. RON 91 Regular
compounds) as long as the fuel meets the follow-
Use regular gasoline with minimum 87 AKI / ing conditions:
91 RON > ©.
Gasoline with methanol content (methyl alco-
Audi recommends using premium gasoline with hol or methanol)
minimum 91 AKI / 95 RON to achieve the rated — Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
horsepower and torque.
—No more than 3% methanol
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY PREMIUM MIN. (R — More than 2% solvent
+M)/2 91 / SUPER MIN. RON 95
Gasoline with ethanol content (ethyl alcohol or
Using premium gasoline with minimum 91 AKI / ethanol)
95 RON is recommended. — Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
If premium gasoline is not available, you can also —No more than 15% ethanol
use regular gasoline 87 AKI / 91 RON. However Gasoline with MTBE content
this does reduce the engine power slightly.
— Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY PREMIUM MIN. (R —No more than 15% MTBE
+M)/2 93 / SUPER PLUS MIN. RON 98
Gasoline adapted to the season
Using premium plus gasoline with at least 93
Many gasoline fuels are adapted to the seasons.
AKI / 98 RON is recommended.
When the season changes, refueling at high-traf-
If no premium plus gasoline is available, you can fic gas stations is recommended. It is more likely
also use premium gasoline with 91 AKI / 95 RON. that the gasoline will be suitable for the season
However this does reduce the engine power there.
slightly.
@) Note
— Gasoline with methanol content that does
not meet the specified conditions may cause >
238
corrosion damage and damage to plastic or Refueling

rubber components in the fuel system.
— Do not use gasoline that does not meet the
specifications. Messages
— If you are unable to find out if a specific gas-
oline mixture meets the specifications, ask A Tank system: malfunction! Please contact
the gas station operator or their fuel suppli- Service
er. There is a malfunction in the fuel tank system.
— Do not use any gasoline mixture whose Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
composition cannot be identified. Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
— Audi does not assume any responsibility for malfunction corrected.
damage to the fuel system or for perform-
ance problems caused by using gasoline Fueling procedure
mixtures different from those specified.
This type of damage also does not fall under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty or under
the emissions control system warranty.
— If you notice a higher fuel consumption or
poor handling or performance problems due
to such gasoline mixtures, Audi recom-
mends fueling with unblended gasoline.
Gasoline additives
Fig. 154 Right rear side of the vehicle: opening the fuel
An important issue for many automobile manu- filler door
facturers is combustion residue in the engine
that results from the use of certain fuels.
Although types of gasoline differ depending on

the manufacturer, there are similarities. Certain
substances in the gasoline may cause deposits in
the engine. Additives in the gasoline that should
keep the engine and fuel system clean do not all
function equally.
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gas-

Fig. 155 Fuel filler door with attached fuel cap
oline. For additional information on TOP TIER De-
tergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
The fuel filler door is unlocked or locked by the
If you use incorrect fuels over a long period of central locking system.
time, the maximum engine performance may be
> Unlock the vehicle if necessary.
impaired by combustion residue.
> Press on the Left side of the fuel filler door to
open it > fig. 154.
@) Note
> Unscrew the tank cap counterclockwise.
— Damage or malfunctions caused by the use > Place the cap from above on the open fuel filler
of incorrect types of gasoline are not cov- door > fig. 155.
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. > Insert the fuel pump nozzle all the way into the
4M8012721BF
— Only gasoline additives that have been ap- fuel filler neck.
proved by Audi may be used. > Begin fueling. Once the fuel pump nozzle turns
off the first time, the fuel tank is full. Do not >
239
continue fueling, or else the expansion space in

the tank will be filled with fuel.
ZA WARNING
>» After the fuel pump has switched off, wait five Audi does not recommend transporting fuel
seconds before removing the nozzle to allow containers inside the vehicle. Fuel could leak
the rest of the fuel to finish dripping into the out of the container and ignite, especially dur-
fuel tank. ing an accident. This can cause explosions,
> Turn the fuel cap clockwise until it clicks into fires, and injuries.
place. — If you must transport fuel in a fuel contain-
> Close the fuel filler door and then press on the er, note the following:
left side until it latches. — Always place the fuel container on the
ground before filling. Never fill the fuel
The correct fuel type for your vehicle can be container with fuel while it is inside or on
found ona label located on the inside of the fuel the vehicle. Electrostatic discharge can oc-
filler door. For additional information on fuel, see cur while refueling and the fuel vapors
=> page 238. could ignite.
For the tank capacity in your vehicle, refer to the — When using fuel containers made of met-
Technical Data > page 314. al, the fuel pump nozzle must always re-
main in contact with the container to re-
To reduce the risk of fuel leaking out or vapors
duce the risk of static charge.
escaping, make sure that the fuel tank is closed
— Insert the fuel pump nozzle as far as pos-
correctly. Otherwise the EY indicator light will
sible into the filler opening while refuel-
turn on.
ing.
ZA\ WARNING — Follow the applicable legal regulations in

the country where you are driving when
Improper fueling procedures and improper using, storing and transporting fuel con-
handling of fuel can lead to explosions, fires, tainers.
severe burns, and other injuries.
— Make sure that the fuel container meets
— Do not smoke. Keep away from open flames. the industry standards, for example ANSI
— The ignition must be switched off when re- or ASTM F852-86.
fueling.
— Mobile devices, radio devices, and other ra- () Note
dio equipment should always be switched
— Remove fuel that has overflowed onto any
off when refueling. Electromagnetic rays
vehicle components immediately to reduce
could cause sparks and start a fire.
the risk of damage to the vehicle.
— If you do not insert the fuel pump nozzle all
— Never drive until the fuel tank is completely
the way into the filler tube, then fuel can
empty. The irregular supply of fuel that re-
leak out. Spilled fuel can ignite and start a
sults from that can cause engine misfires.
fire.
Uncombusted fuel may enter the exhaust
— Never get into the vehicle when refueling. If
system and increase the risk of damage to
there is an exceptional situation where you
the catalytic converter.
must enter the vehicle, close the door and
touch a metal surface before touching the
@) For the sake of the environment
fuel pump nozzle again. This will reduce the
— Do not overfill the fuel tank, or fuel could
risk of electrostatic discharge that can cause
flying sparks. Sparks can start a fire when leak out when the vehicle is warming up.
refueling. — Fuel should never enter the sewer system or
come into contact with the ground.
)) Depending on the engine and country
240
Gi) Tips Emissions control

The fuel filler door on your vehicle does not system
lock if you lock the vehicle from the inside us- General information
ing the central locking switch.
Z\ WARNING
Fuel filler door emergency release
The temperature of the exhaust system is
Applies to: vehicles with manual fuel filler door release
high, both when driving and after stopping
If the central locking system malfunctions, the the engine.
fuel filler door can be unlocked manually. — Never touch the exhaust tail pipes once they
have become hot. This could result in burns.
— Do not park your vehicle over flammable
materials such as grass or leaves because
the high temperature of the emissions sys-
tem could start a fire.
— Do not apply underbody protectant in the
exhaust system area, because this increases
the risk of fire.
Fig. 156 Right side trim in the luggage compartment: fuel Catalytic converter
filler door emergency release
Observe the safety precautions > page 241, Gen-
The emergency release mechanism is located be- eral information.
hind the right side trim panel in the luggage The vehicle may only be driven with unleaded
compartment
(4) > fig. 156. gasoline, or the catalytic converter will be de-
> To release the fuel filler door, loosen the red stroyed.
loop from the retainer @). Carefully pull on the Never drive until the tank is completely empty.
red loop@>©. The irregular supply of fuel that results from that
> Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to can cause engine misfires. Uncombusted fuel
open it > page 2339, fig. 154. could enter the exhaust system, which could
cause overheating and damage to the catalytic
@) Note converter.
Only pull on the loop until you feel resistance.
You will not hear it release. If you continue to Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
pull, you could damage the emergency re-
lease mechanism. If the S indicator light blinks or turns on, there
is a malfunction that is causing poor emissions
quality and that could damage the catalytic con-
verter. Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
malfunction corrected.
The indicator light can also turn on if the fuel fill-

er cap is not closed correctly > page 239).
4M8012721BF
1) Depending on the engine and country
241
Engine compartment be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is

escaping.
erreur lela)
— The cap on the coolant expansion tank must
Special care is required if you are working in the never be opened when the coolant is hot.
engine compartment The cooling system is under pressure. There
is a risk of burns
For work in the engine compartment, such as —To protect your face, hands, and arms from
checking and filling fluids, there is a risk of in- hot steam or coolant, cover the cap with a
jury, scalding, accidents, and burns. For this
thick cloth when opening.
reason, follow all the warnings and general
— Do not remove the engine cover under any
safety precautions provided in the following in-
circumstances. This increases the risk of
formation. The engine compartment is a dan-
burns.
gerous area in the vehicle. > A.
— Due to the risk of electric shock, never touch
Explanation of warnings (sticker in the engine the ignition cable or other components in
compartment): the electronic high-voltage ignition system
when the engine is running or is starting.
Hot engine components!
@ Rotating parts!
— If a gear is engaged while the vehicle is sta-
tionary and the engine is running, do not
The radiator fan can switch on at any
press the accelerator pedal inadvertently.
LR, time!
Pressing the accelerator pedal will cause the
High voltage! Switch off the engine be- vehicle to move, and this could result in an
fore coming into contact with any igni- accident.
tion system components! — If inspections or repairs must be performed
The catalytic converter can be damaged while the engine is running, moving compo-
"277 if the oil level is too high! nents (such as the ribbed belt, generator,
Always follow the instructions in the op- and radiator fan) pose an additional risk.
oy erating manual. — Set the parking brake first and select the
“p” (Park) selector lever position.
ZA WARNING — Always make sure that no parts of the
— Turn the engine off. body, jewelry, ties, loose clothing, and
— Switch the ignition off. long hair can be caught in moving engine
— Set the parking brake. components. Before any work, always re-
— Select the “P” (Park) selector lever position. move any jewelry and/or ties, tie back long
hair, and make sure all clothing fits close
— Allow the engine to cool.
to the body to reduce the risk of anything
— Keep children away from the engine com-
becoming caught in engine components.
partment.
— Pay attention to the following warnings list-
— Never spill fluids on a hot engine. These flu-
ed when work on the fuel system or on the
ids (such as the freeze protection contained
electrical equipment is required.
in the coolant) can catch fire.
— Avoid short circuits in the electrical system. — Do not smoke.
— Never reach into the radiator fan. The fan is — Never work near open flames.
temperature-controlled and can turn on — Always have a working fire extinguisher
suddenly, even when the ignition is switched nearby.
off. — All work on the battery or electrical system
— Never open the hood when there is steam or in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi-
coolant escaping from the engine compart- cal burns, accidents, or burns. Because of
ment, because there is a risk that you could this, all work must be performed only by an
242
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Opening and closing the hood
Service Facility.
The hood is released from inside the vehicle.
— Limit your exposure to exhaust and chemi-
cals to as short a time as possible.
ZA WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning:
— Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, certain flu-
ids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit
RAZ-0016|
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
— Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds,
to cause cancer and reproductive harms.
Wash hands after handling.
Fig. 158 Unlocked hood: lever
® Note
When filling fluids, be sure not to add any flu- Make sure the wiper arms are not raised up from
ids to the wrong reservoirs. Otherwise severe the windshield. Otherwise the paint could be
malfunctions and engine damage will occur. damaged.
Opening the hood

@ For the sake of the environment
> With the door open, pull the lever 2 below
You should regularly check the ground under
the instrument panel in the direction of the ar-
your vehicle in order to detect leaks quickly. If
row > fig. 157.
there are visible spots from oil or other fluids,
>» Raise the hood slightly > page 242.
bring your vehicle to an authorized Audi deal-
> Press the lever > fig. 158 in the direction of the
er or authorized Audi Service Facility to be
arrow. This releases the hooks.
checked.
> Open the hood.
Closing the hood

> Push the hood down until you override the
force of the strut.
> Let the hood fall lightly into the latch. Do not
press it in. > /\.
Messages
B Warning! Hood is not locked. Stop vehicle
4M8012721BF
and check the lock
2) The &> symbol is not available in all countries.
243
The hood latch is not locked correctly. Stop im- this, always check the hood after closing it
mediately and close the hood. to make sure it is latched correctly. The hood
is latched if the front corners cannot be lift-
A WARNING ed.
— Never open the hood when there is steam or — If you notice that the hood is not latched
coolant escaping from the engine compart- while you are driving, stop immediately and
ment, because there is a risk that you could close it, because driving when the hood is
be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is not latched increases the risk of an accident.
escaping.
— For safety reasons, the hood must always be
latched securely while driving. Because of
Engine compartme
The most important check points.
Observe the safety precautions > page 242, Gen- Sticker* for engine oil specifications
eral information. => page 245
Jump start point (+) under a cover, (-) with Engine oil filler opening (127) > page 247
hex head screw > page 253, Charging the 12 ) Brake fluid reservoir (C)) under a cover
Volt vehicle battery > page 293, Jump start- => page 250
ing Washer fluid reservoir (>) 9 page 254
@ Coolant expansion tank (<E) > page 249 The engine oil filler opening may be located ina
different area depending on the specific engine.
244
Engine oil Eada max. x qt (x l) oil. You can continue

driving
If the engine oil level is too low
Add the amount of oil shown immediately
If you need to add engine oil, use an oil that is => page 247.
listed on the sticker. The sticker is located at the
Reducing the oil level
front of the engine compartment > page 244,
fig. 159. When using the engine oil listed on the =) Please reduce oil level
sticker, you can adjust the oil level as often as
There is too much oil in the engine and there is a
needed.
risk of damaging the catalytic converter or en-
If engine oil that meets the recommended speci- gine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
fication is not available, in an emergency you thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
may add a maximum of 1 quart (1 liter) of engine oil extracted if necessary. Avoid high en-
ACEA C3 or API SN engine oil one time until the gine speeds, full acceleration, and heavy engine
next oil change. loads.
For more information on the correct engine oil Engine oil sensor
for your vehicle, contact an authorized Audi deal-
& Oil level sensor: oil change necessary. Please
er or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have the oil
contact Service
changed by an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Service Facility. Fuel has entered the engine oil. This will cause
the engine oil level to rise slowly and the engine
G) Tips oil quality to decrease. Do not extract engine oil
Audi recommends using engine oils provided to reduce the level, because this will increase the
by Audi Genuine Parts. risk of engine damage. Drive to an authorized
mediately to have engine oil extracted.
Messages
Bs Oil level system: malfunction! Please con-
Engine oil pressure
tact Service
2 Turn off engine. Oil pressure too low
The sensor that checks the engine oil level has
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the malfunctioned. Drive immediately to an author-
engine oil level > page 246. ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty to have the malfunction repaired.
— If the engine oil level is too low, add engine oil
=> page 247. Only continue driving once the in- & Oil pressure sensor: malfunction! Please
dicator light turns off. contact Service
— If the engine oil level is correct and the indica-
The sensor that checks the engine oil pressure
tor light still turns on, turn the engine off and
has malfunctioned. Drive immediately to an au-
do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi
sistance.
Engine warm-up request
Engine oil level
i Please drive to warm up engine
E Please add oil immediately.
Fuel has entered the engine oil, either due to low
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the
outside temperatures or frequent short drives.
engine oil level > page 246 and add engine oil
4M8012721BF
Drive until the engine is warm so that the fuel in

immediately > page 247.
the engine oil will evaporate. Avoid high engine >
245
speeds, full accelerating, and heavy engine loads oil. The oil consumption varies depending
when doing this. on the engine and may change during the
service life of the engine. Engines generally
@) Tips consume more oil at the beginning during
The oil pressure warning = is not an oil level the break-in period. Then oil consumption
indicator. Always check the oil level regularly. stabilizes after the break-in period.
Under normal conditions, oil consumption
depends on the quality and viscosity of the
Checking the engine oil level
oil, the engine RPM, the climate conditions,
The engine oil level can be checked in the MMI. and the road conditions. The dilution of oil
from condensation or fuel residue as well as
the age of the oil also play a role. Because
eral information.
engine wear increases with mileage, oil con-
>» Park the vehicle on a level surface. sumption will increase again over time until
> Shut the engine off when it is warm. it may be necessary to replace worn compo-
> Switch only the ignition back on. nents.
> Wait approximately two minutes. Because all these variables play a role, it is
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- not possible to define an oil consumption
HICLE > Settings & Service > Oil level. standard. Therefore, the oil level must be
> Read the oil level in the display. Add engine oil checked regularly.
if the bar in the oil level indicator is just below If you believe that your engine has in-
“min” > page 247. creased its oil consumption, contact an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
@) Note Service Facility to determine the cause.
If the engine oil level is too low or too high, Please note that an exact oil consumption
there is a risk of engine damage. measurement must be done with the neces-
sary care and accuracy and may take time.
G) Tips An authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility is trained in accurately
The oil level indicator in the display is only an
measuring the oil consumption.
informational display. If the oil level is too
You can find information on engine oil and
low, a minimum oil warning appears in the in-
engine oil capacities for the USA at www.
strument cluster. Add oil and close the hood.
audiusa.com/help/maintenance, or for Can-
The current oil level will be displayed on the
ada at www.audi.ca/ca/web/en/
MMI the next time the ignition is switched on.
customer-area/care-and-maintenance/
@) Tips audi-service-schedules.html, or call
800-822-2834.
The engine oil consumption may be up to
0.5 quart/600 miles (0.5 liter/1,000 km), de-
pending on driving style and operating condi-
tions. In RS models, the oil consumption may
be up to 1 qt/600 mi (0.8 L/1,000 km). Con-
sumption may be higher during the first
3,000 miles (5,000 km). The engine oil level
must be checked regularly. It is best to check
each time you refuel your vehicle and before
long drives.
— Because of the Lubrication and cooling of
the engine, combustion engines consume
246
CG) Note
— The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not
B8K-2120
cover damage or malfunctions if the recom-
mended intended use of the vehicle and
maintenance measures listed in the Audi
Owner's Manual and the Warranty & Main-
tenance Booklet were not followed.
— Only use high-grade engine oil that explicit-
ly meets the Audi oil quality standard for
your vehicle. Using another oil may cause
Fig. 160 Engine compartment: engine oil filling opening severe vehicle damage.
cover (example) — Do not mix any additives with the engine oil.
Additives may cause engine damage that is
Observe the safety precautions > page 242, Gen- not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
eral information. Warranty.
> Turn the engine off.
> Open the hood > page 243. @) For the sake of the environment
> Unscrew the cap % for the engine oil filler — Oil should never enter the sewer system or
opening > fig. 160. come into contact with the ground.
> Carefully add 0.5 quart (0.5 liter) of the correct — Follow the legal regulations in the country
oil > page 245. where you are located when disposing of
> Close the engine oil filler opening cap. empty oil containers.
> Close the hood > page 243.
> Restart the ignition after two minutes and read Changing engine oil
the current oil level in the MMI > page 246,
Checking the engine oil level. Audi recommends having the oil changed at an
» Applies to: using engine oil that meets the rec- authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv-
ommended specification: Add some more en- ice Facility.
gine oil again if necessary.
eral information.
ZA WARNING
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals
— When adding oil, do not let oil drip onto hot
specified in the Warranty & Maintenance Book-
engine components. This increases the risk
let. This is very important because the lubrication
of a fire.
function of the oil gradually declines during regu-
— You must close the cap on the oil filler open-
lar vehicle operation.
ing correctly so that oil does not leak out on-
to the hot engine and exhaust system when The engine oil should be changed more frequent-
the engine is running, because this is a fire ly under certain circumstances. Have the oil
hazard. changed more frequently if you often drive short
— Always clean skin thoroughly if it comes into distances, your vehicle is predominantly in stop-
contact with engine oil. and-go traffic situations, is in very dusty environ-
— Engine oil is poisonous and must be kept out ments, or is operated for long periods of time in
of reach of children. temperatures below zero.
— Store the engine oil securely in the original Cleansing additives in the oil make fresh oil ap-
4M8012721BF
container. pear darker after the engine has run briefly. This
is normal and no reason to change the engine oil
more frequently than recommended. >
247
Because correctly disposing of engine oil is diffi- Cooling system

cult and special tools and technical knowledge
are needed for an oil change, Audi recommends
having your engine oil changed by an authorized
The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
of purified water and coolant additive at the fac-
If you change the engine oil yourself, please note tory. This coolant must not be not changed.
the following important information:
The coolant level is monitored using the g indi-
cator light. However, occasionally checking the
ZA\ WARNING coolant level is recommended.
If you change the engine oil on the vehicle
yourself, the following precautions must be Messages
followed: g Turn off engine and check coolant level. See
— Wear protective eyewear. owner's manual
— Due to the risk of scalding, allow the engine
The coolant level is too low.
to cool down sufficiently.
— Maintain enough distance when you are re- Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the
moving the oil drain plug. While doing this, coolant level > page 249.
keep your forearm parallel to the ground to
— If the coolant level is too low, add coolant
reduce the risk of hot oil dripping down your
=> page 249. Only continue driving once the in-
arm.
dicator light turns off.
— Drain the oil into a container designed for
this purpose that is large enough to hold the /E| Coolant temperature: too high. Please let
full amount of oil in your engine. engine run while vehicle is stationary
— Engine oil is poisonous. Always store out of Let the engine run at idle for a few minutes to
reach of children. cool off, until the indicator light turns off.
— Prolonged contact of used engine oil with
the skin may cause skin damage. Always — If the indicator light does not turn off, do not
wash oil off immediately with soap and wa- continue driving the vehicle. See an authorized
ter to protect your skin. Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
for assistance.
©) Note |_| Coolant system: malfunction! Please turn
Do not mix any additives with the engine oil. off engine
Additives may cause engine damage that is Do not continue driving, shut the engine off, and
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited War- switch the ignition off.
ranty.
— See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
@ For the sake of the environment Audi Service Facility for assistance.
— Before changing the engine oil, make sure Coolant additive

you can dispose of the used engine oil cor-
The coolant additive is made of anti-freezing and
rectly.
corrosion protection agents. Only add the follow-
— Engine oil must always be disposed of cor-
ing coolant additives mixed with distilled water.
rectly. Do not dump it in the yard, in the for-
est, or in open water, river channels, or sew- Coolant additive Specification
ers. Gl12evo TL774L
— Have your used engine oil recycled by bring-
ing it to a used oil collection site or contact The amount of coolant additive that needs to be
a gas station. mixed with water depends on the climate where >
248
the vehicle will be operated. If the coolant addi-

tive percentage is too low, the coolant can freeze
and damage the engine.
[RAZ-0540
5
=
Coolant Freeze protec-
additive tion
Warm min. 40% min. -13 °F
regions max. 45% (25 °C)
Cold min. 50% max. -40 °F
regions max. 55% (-40 °C) MIN
® Note Fig. 161 Engine compartment - Coolant expansion tank:

@ cover with release button; @) markings
— Before the start of winter, have an author-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Observe the safety precautions > page 242, Gen-
Facility check if the coolant additive in your eral information.
vehicle matches the percentage appropriate
for the climate. This is especially important Checking the coolant level
when driving in colder climates. > Park the vehicle on a level surface.
— If the G12evo coolant additive is not availa- > Switch the ignition off.
ble in an emergency, do not add any other > Open the hood > page 243.
additive. You could damage the engine. If » Check the coolant level in the coolant expan-
this happens, only use distilled water and sion tank > page 244, fig. 159 using the outer
restore the correct mixture ratio with the markings (2) > fig. 161. The coolant level must
specified coolant additive as soon as possi- be between the markings (2) when the engine is
ble. cold. When the engine is warm it can be slight-
— Only refill with new coolant. ly above the upper marking.
— Radiator sealant must not be mixed with >» When you add coolant to the expansion tank,
the coolant. please refer to > page 248, Cooling system.
— You can continue driving if the permitted
Adding coolant
G12evo coolant additive was not added.
However, go to an authorized Audi dealer or Requirement: there must be a residual amount of
authorized Audi Service Facility immediately coolant in the expansion tank >@.
to have the coolant replaced to reduce the
If you must add coolant, use a mixture of water
risk of engine damage.
and coolant additive. Audi recommends mixing
— Due to the risk of engine damage, the cool-
the coolant additive with distilled water.
ing system should only be refilled by an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi > Allow the engine to cool.
Service Facility. An authorized Audi dealer or > Place a large, thick towel on the coolant expan-
authorized Audi Service Facility can also pro- sion tank cap.
vide you with important information about > Push the release button @) © fig. 161 on the
the recommended coolant additive. cap and carefully turn it to the left until you
feel resistance > A\.
> Push the release button again and remove the
cap completely.
> Add coolant mixed in the correct ratio
=> page 248 up to the MAX marking.
4M8012721BF
> Make sure that the fluid level remains stable.

Add more coolant if necessary.
249
> Turn the cap to the right to tighten it until you Brake fluid
feel resistance a second time.
BFV-0229]
Coolant loss usually indicates that there is a leak.
Immediately drive your vehicle to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
and have the cooling system inspected. If the
cooling system is not leaking, coolant loss can re-
sult from the coolant boiling due overheating
and then being forced out of the cooling system.
ZX WARNING Fig. 162 Engine compartment: cap on brake fluid reservoir

— The engine compartment in any vehicle is a
potentially dangerous area. Stop the engine, Observe the safety precautions > page 242, Gen-
switch the ignition off, and allow the engine eral information.
to cool before working in the engine com-
Checking the brake fluid level
partment. Always follow the information
found in > page 242, General information. > Slide the cover that is located below the wind-
— Never open the hood if you can see or hear shield wipers on the driver's side toward the
steam or coolant escaping from the engine windshield and remove the cover.
compartment. This increases the risk of > Read the brake fluid level on the brake fluid res-
burns. The cooling system is under pressure. ervoir > page 244, fig. 159. The brake fluid lev-
When you no longer see or hear steam or el must be between the MIN and MAX markings
coolant escaping, you may open the engine ANG
compartment with caution.
The brake fluid level is monitored automatically.
— When working in the engine compartment,
remember that the radiator fan can switch Messages
on even if the ignition is switched off, which GG fi @® Brakes: stop vehicle and check brake
increases the risk of injury. fluid level
— Coolant additive and coolant can be danger-
ous to your health. For this reason, store the Stop the vehicle and check the brake fluid level.
coolant in the original container and away See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
from children. There is a risk of poisoning. Service Facility for assistance.
Changing the brake fluid

© Note
Brake fluid should be changed at regular inter-
Do not continue driving if the coolant expan-
vals. Have the brake fluid changed by an author-
sion tank is empty. Do not add any coolant,
because air could enter the cooling system
ty. The authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
and damage the engine. See an authorized
Service Facility will inform you of the replace-
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
ment intervals.
for assistance.
A WARNING
— If the brake fluid level is below the MIN
marking, it can impair the braking effect and
driving safety, which increase the risk of an
250
accident. Do not continue driving. See an au- Switch off all electrical equipment that is not
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi needed. If necessary, some equipment will be
Service Facility for assistance. switched off automatically. Vehicle functions or
— If the brake fluid is old, bubbles may form in driving stability may be limited. Drive to an au-
the brake system during heavy braking. This thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
could impair braking performance and driv- Facility immediately.
ing safety, which increases the risk of an ac- = Electrical system: low battery charge. Bat-
cident. tery will be charged while driving
— The brake fluid in your vehicle must meet
the standard VW 501 14 and is available at The starting ability may be impaired.
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized If this message turns off after a little while, the
Audi Service Facility. If this brake fluid is not vehicle battery has charged enough while driving.
available, another high-grade brake fluid of
If this message does not turn off, drive immedi-
equivalent quality may be used, and it must
ately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
meet the U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Stand-
Audi Service Facility.
ard (FMVSS) 116 DOT 4, Class 6.
@) Note
Z\ WARNING
When there is an electrical system malfunc-
— If the brake fluid level is above the MAX
tion, vehicle functions may not work and driv-
marking, brake fluid may leak out over the
ing stability may be limited, which increases
edge of the reservoir and result in damage
the risk of an accident. Do not continue driv-
to the vehicle.
ing and switch the ignition off. See an author-
— Do not allow any brake fluid to come into
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
contact with the vehicle paint, because it
cility for assistance.
will corrode the paint.
Battery
Electrical system
lala Memecd)
If the = f B or = indicator light turns on,
there is a malfunction in the power supply, the Because of the complex power supply, all work on
battery, or the vehicle electrical system. batteries such as disconnecting, replacing, etc.,
should only be performed by an authorized Audi
= f B Electrical system: malfunction! Safely
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility > A\.
stop vehicle
Multiple batteries with different technologies
Do not continue driving and switch the ignition
may be installed in your vehicle:
off > A\. See an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility for assistance. — Vehicle battery (for example, for starting the
engine, basic power supply) > page 252, 12
= Electrical system: malfunction! Restart not
Volt vehicle battery or > page 253, Other bat-
possible. Please contact Service
tery types
If you switch the ignition off, you will not be able — Auxiliary battery (for example, for recuperation
to restart the vehicle. Vehicle functions or driving or optional equipment) > page 253, Other bat-
stability may be limited. Drive to an authorized tery types
mediately. Not running the vehicle for long periods of
time
4M8012721BF
= Electrical system: malfunction! Please con-

The battery will gradually drain if the vehicle
tact Service
does not run for long periods of time. To ensure >
251
that the vehicle can still be started, the electrical so that it will not be destroyed by “freezing”
equipment will be limited or switched off. Some => page 253, Charging the 12 Volt vehicle
convenience functions, such as interior lighting battery.
or power seat adjustment, may not be available — There are electrical components under the
under certain circumstances. The convenience cargo floor behind a trim panel that warm
functions will be available again when you start up during operation. To reduce the risk of
the engine. the components overheating, do not store
objects such as blankets under the cargo
Even when electrical equipment is switched off,
floor. If the components overheat, they will
the equipment can still drain the battery if the
switch off temporarily. This will be indicated
vehicle is not driven for Long periods of time.
by a message that will be displayed in the
Deep draining results in a chemical reaction that
instrument cluster until the temperature re-
destroys the inside of the battery. The battery
turns to normal.
must be charged every month to prevent this
=> page 253. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility for more infor- 12 Volt vehicle battery
mation.
Explanation of warnings:
Winter operation
Always wear eye protection.
Cold weather places an especially high load on
the 12 Volt vehicle battery. Have the battery Battery acid is highly corrosive. Always
checked by an authorized Audi dealer or author- wear protective gloves and eye protection.
ized Audi Service Facility before cold weather be-
® Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are
gins.
forbidden.
ZX WARNING A highly explosive mixture of gases can

form when charging batteries.
— All work on the battery or electrical system
in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi- Always keep children away from battery
cal burns, accidents, or burns. Because of acid and the battery.
this, all work must be performed only by an @/ | Always follow the instructions in the oper-
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi (Q | ating manual.
Service Facility.
— Never connect a charging cable or jump @) For the sake of the environment
start cable directly to the 12 Volt vehicle % Lead-acid batteries must be disposed of
battery. Only use the connections in the en- using methods that will not harm the environ-
gine compartment > page 253. ment. Do not dispose of them in household
trash. They contain harmful substances, such
Z\ WARNING as sulfuric acid and lead, and also recyclable
California Proposition 65 Warning: raw materials. Contact an authorized Audi
— Battery posts, terminals and related acces- dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for
sories contain lead and lead compounds, more information.
to cause cancer and reproductive harms.
Wash hands after handling.
@) Note
— If the vehicle will be parked for long periods
of time, protect the battery against the cold
252
Other battery types ing the 12 Volt vehicle battery
Explanation of warnings:
Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are
& forbidden.
Always keep children away from battery
@) acid and the battery.
@/ | Always follow the instructions in the oper-
fQ | ating manual.
Z\ WARNING Fig. 163 Engine compartment: connectors for a charger or

jump start cables
All work on the batteries must only be per-
formed by an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility.
eral information, > /\ in Battery general infor-
— Gases that escape from these different bat-
mation on page 252 and > /\.
tery types can be poisonous or flammable.
— The contents of these battery types can be Requirement: only use chargers with a maximum
corrosive. If any battery contents come into charging current of 14.8 volts. The battery ca-
contact with the skin, flush the affected bles remain connected.
area for at least 15 minutes with clean wa- The charging cable connections are located in the
ter. Then wash the affected area with soap. motor compartment. The ground point ©) is al-
Have the affected area examined by a medi- ways located on the vehicle body.
cal professional.
>» Switch off the ignition and all electrical equip-
@) Note ment.
> Open the hood > page 243.
Components must not be connected to the
> Press the release lever on the positive terminal
battery terminals and wires on these battery
and fold the cover upward > fig. 163.
types because this increases the risk of dam-
> Clamp the charger terminal clamps to the jump
age, for example due to overvoltage.
start pins according to the instructions. (Hex
head bolt under a cover (), ground point on the
vehicle body ©).
“5 J These types of batteries must be dis- > Insert the power cable for the charging device
posed of using methods that will not harm into the socket and switch the device on.
the environment. Do not dispose of them in >» At the end of the charging process, switch the
household trash. They contain harmful sub- charger off and pull the power cable out of the
stances and recyclable raw materials. Contact socket.
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi > Remove the charging device terminal clamps.
Service Facility for more information. > Close the cover on the positive terminal.
> Close the hood > page 243.
ZA WARNING
— Never connect a charging cable or jump
start cable directly to the 12 Volt vehicle
battery. Only use the connections in the en-
4M8012721BF
gine compartment > page 253. >
253
—A highly explosive mixture of gases can form Messages

when charging batteries. Only charge the gs Please add washer fluid
battery in well-ventilated areas.
Fill the washer fluid for the windshield washer
— A drained battery can freeze at tempera-
system and the headlight washer system* when
tures around 32 °F (0 °C). Do not charge or
the ignition is switched off.
use a frozen or thawed battery. If ice forms,
the battery housing can crack and battery
C) Note
electrolyte can leak out, which increases the
risk of an explosion and chemical burns. — The concentration of anti-freezing agent
Contact an authorized Audi dealer or author- must be adjusted to the vehicle operating
ized Audi Service Facility for more informa- conditions and the climate. A concentration
tion. that is too high can lead to vehicle damage.
— Do not connect or disconnect the charging — Never add radiator anti-freeze or other addi-
cable while charging because this increases tives to the washer fluid.
the risk of an explosion. — Do not use a glass cleaner that contains
paint solvents, because this could damage
G) Tips the paint.
Read all of the manufacturer's instructions

for the charger before charging the battery. Service interval display
The service interval display detects when your ve-
Windshield washer hicle is due for service.
system The service interval display works in two stages:
— Inspection or oil change reminder: after driv-

B4M-0135)
ing a certain distance, a message appears in the

instrument cluster display each time the igni-
tion is switched on or off. The remaining dis-
tance or time is displayed briefly.
— Inspection or oil change due: if your vehicle
has reached an inspection or oil change interval
or both intervals at the same time, the mes-
sage Inspection due! or Oil change due! or Oil
Fig. 164 Engine compartment: washer fluid reservoir cap change and inspection due! appears briefly af-
ter switching the ignition on or off.
eral information. Checking service intervals
The windshield washer reservoir © contains the You can check the remaining distance or time un-
cleaning solution for the windshield/rear window til the next oil change or next inspection in the
and the headlight washer system* >fig. 164, Infotainment system.
=> page 244. The reservoir capacity can be found Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
in > page 314. HICLE > Settings & Service > Service intervals.
To reduce the risk of lime scale deposits on the
Resetting the indicator
spray nozzles, use clean water with low amounts
of calcium. Always add window cleaner to the wa- An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
ter. When the outside temperatures are cold, an Service Facility will reset the service interval dis-
anti-freezing agent should be added to the water play after performing service.
so that it does not freeze.
254
If you have changed the oil yourself, you must re-

set the oil change interval.
Applies to: MMI: To reset the display, select on

the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service
> Service intervals.
@) Note
— Only reset the oil change indicator if the oil
was changed.
— Following the service intervals is critical to
maintaining the service life and value of
your vehicle, especially the engine. Even if
the mileage on the vehicle is low, do not ex-
ceed the time for the next service.
4M8012721BF
255
Wheels
Wheels —Always adapt your driving to

Wheels and Tires the road and traffic condi-
General information tions. Drive carefully and re-
duce your speed on icy or slip-
> Check your tires regularly for pery roads. Even winter tires
damage, such as punctures,
can lose traction on black ice.
cuts, cracks, and bulges. Remove
foreign objects from the tire () Note
tread.
—Please note that summer and
>If driving over curbs or similar winter tires are designed for
obstacles, drive slowly and ap-
the conditions that are typical
proach the curb at an angle. in those seasons. Audi recom-
> Have faulty tires or rims re- mends winter tires during the
placed immediately. winter months. Low tempera-
>Protect your tires from oil,
tures significantly decrease
grease, and fuel.
the elasticity of summer tires,
>Mark tires before removing which affects traction and
them so that the same running
braking ability. If summer
direction can be maintained if
tires are used in very cold tem-
they are reinstalled. peratures, cracks can form on
>Lay tires flat when storing and the tread bars, resulting in
store them ina cool, dry location
permanent tire damage that
with as little exposure to light as can cause loud driving noise
possible.
and unbalanced tires.
—Burnished, polished or
J WARNING
chromed rims must not be
—Never drive faster than the used in winter driving condi-
maximum permitted speed for tions. The surface of the rims
your tires. This could cause the does not have sufficient corro-
tires to heat up too much. This sion protection for this and
increases the risk of an acci- could be permanently dam-
dent because it can cause the aged by road salt or similar
tire to burst. substances.
256
Wheels
Tire designations @ Tire construction

“R” indicates a radial tire.
B8K-2316
©) Rim diameter
Size of the rim diameter in inches.
© Load index and speed rating

The load index indicates the tire's
load-carrying capacity.
The speed rating indicates the
maximum permitted speed. Also
see > A in General information on
page 256.
“EXTRA LOAD”, “xl” or “RF” indi-

cates that the tire is reinforced or
Fig. 165 Tire designations on the side-
wall is an Extra Load tire.
Speed rat- /Maximum permitted speed
@ Tires for passenger vehicles ing
(if applicable) P up to 93 mph (150 km/h)
Q up to 99 mph (160 km/h)
“P” indicates a tire for a passen-
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
ger vehicle. “T” indicates a tire
S up to 110 mph (180 km/h)
designated for temporary use. T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
U up to 124 mph (200 km/h)
@ Nominal width
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Nominal width of the tire be- Vv up to 149 mph (240 km/h)?
tween the sidewalls in millime- Zz above 149 mph (240 km/h)?)
w up to 168 mph (270 km/h)?
ters. In general: the larger the
y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)?
number, the wider the tire.
a) For tires above 149 mph (240 km/h),
@) Aspect ratio tire manufacturers sometimes use the
code “ZR”.
Height/width ratio expressed as a
percentage.
4M8012721BF
257
Wheels
@ US DOT number (TIN) and must also specify the materials

manufacture date used in the tire. These include
The manufacture date is listed on steel, nylon, polyester and other
the tire sidewall (it may only ap- materials.
pear on the inner side of the tire): @) Maximum permitted load
DOT... 2220... This number indicates the maxi-
means, for example, that the tire mum load in kilograms and
was produced in the 22nd week of pounds that the tire can carry.
the year 2020. @ Uniform tire quality grade
@) Audi Original Tires standards for treadwear,
traction and temperature
Audi Original equipment tires
resistance
with the designation “AO” have
Treadwear, traction, and tempera-
been specially matched to your
ture ranges > page 274.
Audi. When used correctly, these
tires meet the highest standards @ Running direction
for safety and handling. An au- The arrows indicate the running
thorized Audi dealer or author- direction of unidirectional tires.
ized Audi Service Facility will be You must always follow the speci-
able to provide you with more in- fied running direction
formation. > page 291.
@) Mud and snow capability Maximum permitted
“M/S” or “M+S” indicates the tire inflation pressure
is suitable for driving on mud and This number indicates the maxi-
snow. /\ indicates a winter tire. mum pressure to which a tire can
Composition of the tire cord be inflated under normal operat-
and materials ing conditions.
The number of plies indicates the

number of rubberized fabric lay-
ers in the tire. In general: the
more layers, the more weight a
tire can carry. Tire manufacturers
258
Wheels
Glossary of tire and loading Cord

terminology means the strands forming the
Accessory weight plies in the tire.
means the combined weight (in Cold tire inflation pressure
excess of those standard items means the tire pressure recom-
which may be replaced) of auto- mended by the vehicle manufac-
matic transmission, power steer- turer for a tire of a designated
ing, power brakes, power win- size that has not been driven for
dows, power seats, radio, and more than a couple of miles (kilo-
heater, to the extent that these meters) at low speeds in the three
items are available as factory-in- hour period before the tire pres-
stalled equipment (whether in- sure is measured or adjusted.
stalled or not).
Curb weight
Aspect ratio
means the weight of a motor ve-
means the ratio of the height to hicle with standard equipment in-
the width of the tire in percent. cluding the maximum capacity of
Numbers of 55 or lower indicate a fuel, oil, and coolant, air condi-
low sidewall for improved steer- tioning and additional weight of
ing response and better overall optional equipment.
handling on dry pavement.
Extra load tire
Bead
means a tire designed to operate
means the part of the tire that is at higher loads and at higher in-
made of steel wires, wrapped or flation pressures than the corre-
reinforced by ply cords and that is sponding standard tire. Extra load
shaped to fit the rim. tires may be identified as “XL”,
Bead separation “xl”, “EXTRA LOAD”, or “RF” on
the sidewall.
means a breakdown of the bond
between components in the bead.
4M8012721BF
259
Wheels
Gross Axle Weight Rating Maximum (permissible)

inflation pressure
(“GAWR’”)
means the load-carrying capacity means the maximum cold infla-

of a single axle system, measured tion pressure to which a tire may
at the tire-ground interfaces. be inflated. Also called “maxi-
mum inflation pressure.”
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(“GVWR”)
Normal occupant weight
means the maximum total loaded means 150 lbs. (68 kilograms)
weight of the vehicle. times the number of occupants
Groove seated in the vehicle up to the to-
tal seating capacity of your vehi-
means the space between two ad-
cle.
jacent tread ribs.
Occupant distribution
Load rating (code)
means distribution of occupants
means the maximum load that a
in a vehicle.
tire is rated to carry for a given in-
flation pressure. You may not find Outer diameter
this information on all tires be- means the overall diameter of an
cause it is not required by law. inflated new tire.
Maximum load rating Overall width
means the load rating for a tire at means the linear distance be-
the maximum permissible infla- tween the exteriors of the side-
tion pressure for that tire. walls of an inflated tire, including
Maximum loaded vehicle elevations due to labeling, deco-
weight rations, or protective bands or
ribs.
means the sum of:
Ply
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight means a layer of rubber-coated
(c) Vehicle capacity weight, and parallel cords.
(d) Production options weight
260
Wheels
Production options weight Rim

means the combined weight of means a metal support for a tire
those installed regular production or a tire and tube assembly upon
options weighing over 5 lbs. which the tire beads are seated.
(2.3 kg) in excess of those stand-
Rim diameter
ard items which they replace, not
means nominal diameter of the
previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, in-
bead seat. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to pur-
cluding heavy duty brakes, ride
chase new tires to match the new
levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
rim diameter.
battery, and special trim.
Radial ply tire Rim size designation

means rim diameter and width.
means a pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the Rim width
beads are laid at substantially means nominal distance between
90 degrees to the centerline of rim flanges.
the tread.
Sidewall
Recommended inflation
means that portion of a tire be-
pressure
tween the tread and bead.
see > page 259, Cold tire infla-
tion pressure. Speed rating (letter code)
means the speed at which a tire is
Reinforced tire
designed to be driven for extend-
means a tire designed to operate
ed periods of time. The ratings
at higher loads and at higher in-
range from 93 mph (150 km/h)
flation pressures than the corre-
to 186 mph (298 km/h) > table
sponding standard tire. Rein-
on page 257. You may not find
forced tires may be identified as
this information on all tires be-
“XL”, “xl”, “EXTRA LOAD”, or “RF”
cause it is not required by law.
on the sidewall.
The speed rating letter code,
4M8012721BF
where applicable, is molded on

the tire sidewall and indicates the >
261
Wheels
maximum permissible road parisons among tires. The UTQG is

speeds. See also > A in General not a safety rating and not a guar-
information on page 256. antee that a tire will last for a
prescribed number of miles (kilo-
Tire pressure monitoring
system meters) or perform ina certain
way. It simply gives tire buyers
means a system that detects
additional information to com-
when one or more of a vehicle's
bine with other considerations,
tires are underinflated and illumi-
such as price, brand loyalty and
nates a low tire pressure warning
dealer recommendations. Under
telltale.
UTQG, tires are graded by the tire
Tread manufacturers in three areas:
means that portion of a tire that treadwear, traction, and tempera-
comes into contact with the road. ture resistance. The UTQG infor-
mation on the tires, molded into
Tread separation
the sidewalls.
means pulling away of the tread
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
from the tire carcass.
Number (TIN)
Treadwear indicators (TWI) This is the tire’s “serial number”.
means the projections within the It begins with the letters “DOT”
principal grooves designed to give and indicates that the tire meets
a visual indication of the degrees all federal standards. The next
of wear of the tread. See two numbers or letters indicate
=> page 265, Treadwear indicator the plant where it was manufac-
for more information on measur- tured, and the last four numbers
ing tire wear. represent the week and year of
manufacture. For example,
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
is a tire information system devel- DOT... 2220...
oped by the United States Nation- means that the tire was produced
al Highway Traffic Safety Adminis- in the 22nd week of 2020. The
tration (NHTSA) that is designed other numbers are marketing co-
to help buyers make relative com- des that may or may not beused >
262
Wheels
by the tire manufacturer. This in- number of seating positions. Re-

formation is used to contact con- fer to the table > table on
sumers if a tire defect requires a page 268 for the number of peo-
recall. ple that correspond to the vehicle
normal load.
Vehicle capacity weight
means the rated cargo and lug- New tires or wheels
gage load plus 150 lbs. (68 kilo-
Audi recommends having all work
grams) times the vehicle's desig-
on tires or wheels performed by
nated seating capacity.
an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Vehicle maximum load on the thorized Audi Service Facility.
tire These facilities have the proper
means that load on an individual knowledge and are equipped with
tire that is determined by distrib- the required tools and replace-
uting to each axle its share of the ment parts.
maximum loaded vehicle weight
>New tires do not yet have the
and dividing by two.
optimal gripping properties.
Vehicle normal load on the tire Drive carefully and at moderate
means that load on an individual speeds for the first 350 miles
tire that is determined by distrib- (500 km) with new tires.
uting to each axle its share of the > Only use tires with the same de-
curb weight, accessory weight, sign, size (rolling circumfer-
and normal occupant weight (dis- ence), and as close to the same
tributed in accordance with > ta- tread pattern as possible on all
ble on page 268) and dividing by four wheels.
two. > Applies to: RS models: Only use
tires with the same design, size
Occupant loading and distri- (rolling circumference), and the
bution for vehicle normal load
same tread pattern on all four
for various designated seating
capacities wheels.
>Do not replace tires individually.
Refer to the tire inflation pressure
4M8012721BF
At least replace both tires on the

label > page 266, fig. 168 for the
same axle at the same time. >
263
Wheels
> Audi recommends using Audi

Genuine Tires. If you would like
Z\ WARNING
—Do not use steel rims that are
to use different tires, please
17 inches or larger. Otherwise,
note that the tires may perform
damage to the vehicle and an
differently even if they are the
accident could result.
same size > A.
—Only use tire/rim combina-
>If you would like to equip your
tions and suitable wheel bolts
vehicle with a tire and rim com-
that have been approved by
bination that is different from
Audi. Otherwise, damage to
what was installed at the facto-
the vehicle and an accident
ry, consult with an authorized
could result.
Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility before making a —For technical reasons, it is not
purchase > A. possible to use tires from oth-

er vehicles. In some cases, you
Because the spare tire® is differ- cannot even use tires from the
ent from the regular tires instal- same vehicle model.
led on the vehicle (such as winter —Make sure that the tires you
tires or wide tires), only use the select have enough clearance
spare tire* temporarily in case of to the vehicle. Replacement
emergency and drive carefully tires should not be chosen
while it is in use. It should be re- simply based on the nominal
placed with a regular tire as soon size, because tires with a dif-
as possible. ferent construction can differ
All four wheels must be equipped greatly even if they are the
with tires that are the same brand same size. If there is not
and have the same construction enough clearance, the tires or
and tread pattern so that the the vehicle can be damaged
drive system is not damaged by and this can reduce driving
different tire speeds. For this rea- safety and increase the risk of
son, in case of emergency, only an accident.
use a Spare tire* that is the same —Only use tires that are more
circumference as the regular tires. than six years old when
264
Wheels
absolutely necessary and drive —Driving quickly through curves,

carefully when doing so. rapid acceleration, and heavy
—Do not use run-flat tires on braking increase tire wear.
your vehicle. Using them when —Have an authorized Audi dealer
not permitted can lead to ve- or authorized Audi Service Facili-
hicle damage or accidents. ty check the wheel alignment if
—If you install wheel covers on there is unusual wear.
the vehicle, make sure they al- —Have the wheels rebalanced if an
low enough air circulation to imbalance is causing noticeable
cool the brake system. If they vibration in the steering wheel.
do not, this could increase the If you do not, the tires and other
risk of an accident. vehicle components could wear
more quickly.
Tire wear and damage Treadwear indicator
rr)
+
x
xz
Original equipment tires contain
+
a
treadwear indicators in the tread
pattern, which are bars that are
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) high and are
spaced evenly around the tire per-
pendicular to the running direc-
Fig. 166 Tire profile: treadwear indication > fig. 166. The letters “TWI”
tor or triangles on the tire sidewall
indicate the location of the tread-
Tire wear
wear indicators.
Check the tires regularly for wear.
The tires have reached the mini-
—Inflation pressure that is too low
mum tread depth !) when they
or high can increase tire wear
have worn down to the treadwear
considerably.
indicators. Replace the tires with
new ones > A.
4M8012721BF
D Obey any applicable regulations in the

country where the vehicle is being oper-
ated.
265
Wheels
Tire rotation This can increase the risk of an

Rotating the tires regularly is rec- accident because it has a nega-
ommended to ensure the tires tive effect on handling, driving
wear evenly. To rotate the tires, through curves, and braking,
install the tires from the rear axle and because it increases the
on the front axle and vice versa. risk of hydroplaning when driv-
This will allow the tires to have ing through deep puddles.
approximately the same length of
service life. AT -m as T
For unidirectional tires, make sure
B41L-1383
the tires are installed according to
the running direction indicated on
the tire sidewall > page 291.
Hidden damage
Damage to tires and rims can of-
Fig. 167 Driver's side B-pillar: tire pres-
ten occur in locations that are hid-
sure label
den. Unusual vibrations in the ve-
B8K-1151
hicle or pulling to one side may
indicate that there is tire damage. Pee
‘SEATING CAPACITY
TOTAL FRONT R
NOMBRE DE ‘OTAL /ANT ARRIERE
eed 9 oF pmb
Reduce your speed immediately. TIRE SIZE
, a;
COLD TIRE PRESSURE
PNEU _| DIMENSIONS PRESSION DES PNEUSA FROID
Check the tires for damage. If no FRONT
AVANT i_| a KPA, HM PSI
REAR
damage is visible from the out- ARRERE |
‘SPARE
DE SECOURS a Ga
a KPA,
KPA,
Mi
MM
PSI
PSI
side, drive slowly and carefully to

the nearest authorized Audi deal- Fig. 168 Tire pressure label
er or authorized Audi Service Fa-
The correct tire pressure for tires
cility to have the vehicle inspect-
installed at the factory is listed on
ed.
a label. The label is located on the
B-pillar > fig. 167, > fig. 168.
Z\ WARNING
Tread that has worn too low or Use the tire pressure specified for
uneven tread depths on the a normal vehicle load when the
tires can reduce driving safety. vehicle is partially loaded > table »
266
Wheels
on page 268. If driving the vehi- —Overloading can lead to loss of

cle when fully loaded, you must vehicle control and increase
increase the tire pressure to the the risk of an accident. Read
maximum specified pressure > A. and follow the important safe-
Checking and correcting tire ty precautions in > page 269.
pressure —The tire must flex more if the
tire pressure is too low or if
> Check the tire pressure at least
the vehicle speed or load are
once per month and also check it
too high. This heats the tire up
before every long drive.
too much. This increases the
> Always check the tire pressure
risk of an accident because it
when the tires are cold. Do not
can cause the tire to burst and
reduce the pressure if it increas-
result in loss of vehicle con-
es when the tires are warm.
trol.
>Refer to the sticker > fig. 168
—Incorrect tire pressure increas-
for the correct tire pressure.
>Correct the tire pressure if nec-
es tire wear and has a negative
esSary. effect on driving and braking
behavior, which increases the
>Store the new tire pressure in
the MMI > page 276 or risk of an accident.
> page 278.
@) Note
> Check the pressure in the spare
tire*. Always maintain the maxi- Replace lost valve caps to re-
mum temperature that is speci- duce the risk of damage to the
fied for the tire. tire valves.
© For the sake of the envi-

J WARNING ronment
Always adapt the tire pressure Tire pressure that is too low in-
to your driving style and the ve- creases fuel consumption.
hicle load.
4M8012721BF
267
Wheels
Ncw dee em -])

Please note that the information Make sure that the tire designa-
contained in the following table tion on your tire matches the des-
was correct at the time of print- ignation on the tire pressure label
ing, and the information is sub- and the tire pressure table.
ject to change. If there are any The following table lists recom-
differences, you should always mended tire pressures in cold
follow the tire pressure sticker tires according to the load and
=> page 266, fig. 167. the size of the tires installed.
Qs: 275/50 R20 113H 32 | 220 | 35 | 240 | 35 | 240 | 38 | 260

3.0L 285/45 R21 113Y 32 | 220 | 35 | 240 | 35 | 240 | 38 | 260
G-cylinder = (585/45 R21 113H 32 | 220 | 35 | 240 | 35 | 240 | 38 | 260
285/40 R22 110Y 35 | 240 | 38 | 260 | 35 | 240 | 38 | 260
285/40 R22 110H 35 | 240 | 38 | 260 | 39 | 270 | 42 | 290
285/35 R23 107Y 32. | 220 | 32 | 220 | 36 | 250 | 39 | 270
Sas: 285/45 R21 113Y 32 | 220 | 35 | 240 | 35 | 240 | 38 | 260
4.0L 285/40 R22 110Y 35 | 240 | 38 | 260 | 39 | 270 | 42 | 290
B-cylinder 5357/45 R21 113H 32 | 220 | 35 | 240 | 35 | 240 38 | 260
285/40 R22 110H 35 | 240 | 38 | 260 | 39 | 270 | 42 | 290
285/35 R23 107Y 35 | 240 | 35 | 240 | 41 | 280 |] 44 | 300
268
Wheels
Model/ Tire designation Tire pressure

Engine Normal load Maximum load
(up to 3 people)»
Front Rear Front Rear
PSI kPA PSI kPA PSI kPA PSI kPA
RS Q8: 295/40 ZR22 112Y 32 220 32 220 35 240 38 260
4.0L 155 mph (250 km/h)
8-cylinder o 295/40 ZR22 112Y 38 260 38 260 41 280 44 300
174 mph (280 km/h)
295/40 ZR22 112Y 41 280 41 280 46 320 49 340
190 mph (305 km/h)
295/35 ZR23 108Y 36 250 36 250 39 270 42 290
155 mph (250 km/h)
295/35 ZR23 108Y 44 300 44 300 46 320 49 340
174 mph (280 km/h)
295/35 ZR23 108Y 46 320 46 320 48 330 49 340
190 mph (305 km/h)
@) Two people in the front, one person in the rear

>) The tire pressure depends on the maximum permitted speed for your vehicle.
and sudden deflation that can

Z\ WARNING
cause the vehicle to crash.
Please note the important safe-
ty precautions regarding tire Your safety and that of your pas-
pressure => page 266 and load sengers also depends on making
limits > page 269. sure that load limits are not ex-
ceeded. Vehicle load includes ev-
Tires and vehicle load limits erybody and everything in and on
the vehicle. These load limits are
There are limits to the amount of
technically referred to as the vehi-
load or weight that any vehicle
cle’s Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and any tire can carry. A vehicle (“GVWR”)
that is overloaded will not handle
well and is more difficult to stop. The “GVWR” includes the weight
Overloading can not only lead to of the basic vehicle, all factory in-
stalled accessories, a full tank of
loss of vehicle control, but can al-
so damage important parts of the fuel, oil, coolant and other fluids
plus maximum load. The maxi-
4M8012721BF
vehicle and can lead to sudden

tire failure, including a blowout mum load includes the number of >
269
Wheels
passengers that the vehicle is in- ance sticker label located on the
tended to carry (“seating capaci- driver’s side B-pillar.
ty”) with an assumed weight of
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each passen- Z\ WARNING
ger at a designated seating posi- Overloading a vehicle can cause
tion and the total weight of any loss of vehicle control, a crash
luggage in the vehicle. If you tow or other accident, serious per-
a trailer, the weight of the trailer sonal injury, and even death.
hitch and the tongue weight of —Carrying more weight than
the loaded trailer must be includ- your vehicle was designed to
ed as part of the vehicle load. carry will prevent the vehicle
The Gross Axle Weight Rating from handling properly and in-
(“GAWR”) is the maximum load crease the risk of the loss of
vehicle control.
that can be applied at each of the
vehicle’s two axles. —The brakes on a vehicle that
has been overloaded may not
The fact that there is an upper be able to stop the vehicle
limit to your vehicle’s Gross Vehi-
within a safe distance.
cle Weight Rating means that the
—Tires ona vehicle that has
total weight of whatever is being
been overloaded can fail sud-
carried in the vehicle (including
denly, including a blowout and
the weight of a trailer hitch and
sudden deflation, causing loss
the tongue weight of the loaded
of control and a crash.
trailer) is limited. The more pas-
—Always make sure that the to-
sengers in the vehicle or passen-
tal load being transported -
gers who are heavier than the
including the weight of a trail-
standard weights assumed mean
er hitch and the tongue
that less weight can be carried as
weight of a loaded trailer -
luggage.
does not make the vehicle
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating heavier than the vehicle’s
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
are listed on the safety compli-
270
Wheels
Determining correct load be five 150 lbs. passengers in

Talis your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
Use the example below to calcu-
load capacity is 650 lbs.
late the total weight of the pas-
sengers and luggage or other
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650
lbs.)
things that you plan to transport
5. Determine the combined
so that you can make sure that
weight of luggage and cargo
your vehicle will not be overload-
being loaded on the vehicle.
ed.
That weight may not safely ex-
Steps for Determining Correct ceed the available cargo and
Load Limit luggage load capacity calculat-
1. Locate the statement “THE ed in Step 4.
COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCU- 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
PANTS AND CARGO SHOULD trailer, load from your trailer
NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OR XXX will be transferred to your vehi-
LBS” on your vehicle’s placard cle. Consult this manual to de-
(tire inflation pressure label) termine how this reduces the
=> page 266, fig. 168. available cargo and luggage
2. Determine the combined load capacity of your vehicle.
weight of the driver and pas- >Check the tire sidewall
sengers that will be riding in (=> page 257, fig. 165) to deter-
your vehicle. mine the designated load rating
3. Subtract the combined weight for a specific tire.
of the driver and passengers
from “XXX” kilograms or “XXX” Wheel bolts and rims
pounds shown on the sticker Wheel bolts
=> page 266, fig. 168. Wheel bolts must be clean and loosen/tighten
easily.
4. The resulting figure equals the
Rims
available amount of cargo and
Rims with a bolted rim ring* or with bolted wheel
luggage load capacity. For ex- covers* consist of multiple pieces. These compo-
ample, if the “XXX” amount nents were bolted together using special bolts
4M8012721BF
and a special procedure. You must not repair or

equals 1400 lbs. and there will disassemble them > A\. >
271
Wheels
ZA\ WARNING fi Loose wheel warning: malfunction! See

owner's manual
Wheel bolts that are tightened or repaired in-
correctly can become loose and result in loss There is a system malfunction. Drive immediately
of vehicle control, which increases the risk of to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
an accident. For the correct tightening specifi- Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
cation, see > page 291, Finishing.
— Always keep the wheel bolts and the threads
Z\ WARNING
in the wheel hub clean and free of grease. Wheel bolts that are tightened incorrectly can
— Only use wheel bolts that fit the rim. become loose and result in loss of vehicle con-
— Always have damaged rims repaired by an trol, which increases the risk of an accident.
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi — If a message appears, reduce your speed im-
Service Facility. Never repair or disassemble mediately and avoid any hard steering or
rims yourself, because this increases the risk braking maneuvers. Stop as soon as possible
of an accident. and check the wheel bolts.
— Check your wheels for damage. Have the
damaged wheels checked and/or replaced
Loose wheel warning
immediately by an authorized Audi dealer or
Applies to: vehicles with loose wheel warning
authorized Audi Service Facility.
Within the limits of the system, the loose wheel — Under certain conditions (such as a sporty
warning in the instrument cluster warns you if driving style, winter conditions, or unpaved
one or more wheels are loose. roads), the message may be delayed.
Using the ABS sensors, the loose wheel warning — The driver is responsible for ensuring that
the wheels are attached correctly.
system compares the vibration characteristics of
the individual tires. If one or more wheels are
loose, it will be indicated in the instrument clus-
(i) Tips
ter display with the & indicator light and a mes- — The loose wheel warning system can also
sage. If only one wheel is affected, the location stop working when there is an ESC malfunc-
of that wheel will be indicated. tion.
— Using snow chains may result in a system
Messages
malfunction.
fi Wheel bolts loose. Please safely stop the ve-
hicle and check all wheel bolts!
Loose wheel warning for at least one wheel > A\.

Winter tires significantly improve the vehicle's
Check the wheel bolts on all wheels with the
handling when driving in winter conditions. Be-
wheel wrench (vehicle tool kit). Have the tighten-
cause of their construction (width, compound,
ing specification checked as soon as possible with
tread pattern), summer tires provide less traction
a torque wrench. Drive carefully until then. For
on ice and snow.
the correct tightening specification, see
=> page 291, Finishing. > Use winter tires on all four wheels.
> Only use winter tires that are approved for your
fl Wheel assessment active. Please continue
vehicle.
driving carefully
> Please note that the maximum permitted
After this message appears and you have checked speed may be lower with winter tires > A\ in
the wheel bolts, the assessment phase begins General information on page 256. An author-
when the vehicle is in motion. This may take sev- ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
eral minutes. cility can inform you about the maximum per-
mitted speed for your tires.
272
Wheels
> Check the tire pressure after installing wheels

=> page 266.
ZA\ WARNING
Using incorrect snow chains or installing snow
The effectiveness of winter tires is reduced great- chains incorrectly can result in loss of vehicle
ly when the tread is worn down to a depth of control, which increases the risk of an acci-
0.16 in (4 mm). The characteristics of winter tires dent.
also decrease greatly as the tire ages, regardless
of the remaining tread. (@) Note
— Snow chains can damage the rims and
@) For the sake of the environment
wheel covers* if the chains come into direct
Reinstall summer tires at the appropriate contact with them. Remove the wheel cov-
time, because they provide better handling ers* first. Use coated snow chains.
when roads are free of snow and ice. Summer — Do not install and use snow chainsif there is
tires cause less road noise, tire wear, and fuel a malfunction in the air suspension*, be-
consumption. cause the vehicle height will be very low. If
you drive with snow chains anyway, the
@) Tips wheel housings and other vehicle compo-
You can also use all season tires instead of nents can be severely damaged.
winter tires. Please note that in some coun-
tries where winter tires are required, only win- G@) Tips
ter tires with the 4 symbol may be permit- When using snow chains, it may be advisable
ted. to limit the ESC > page 116.
Tea Low-profile tires

Applies to: vehicles with low-profile tires
Snow chains improve both driving and braking in
winter road conditions. Compared to other tire/rim combinations, low-
profile tires offer a wider tread surface and a
> Only install snow chains on the rear wheels.
larger rim diameter with shorter tire sidewalls.
> Check and correct the seating of the snow
This results in an agile driving style. However, it
chains after driving a few feet, if necessary. Fol-
low the instructions from the manufacturer. may reduce the level of comfort and increase
road noise when driving on roads in poor condi-
> Note the maximum speed of 30 mph
tion.
(50 km/h). Observe the local regulations.
Low-profile tires can become damaged more
Use of snow chains is only permitted with certain
quickly than standard tires when driving over
rim/tire combinations due to technical reasons.
large bumps, potholes, manhole covers, and
Check with an authorized Audi dealer or author-
curbs. Therefore, it is particularly important to
ized Audi Service Facility to see if you may use
maintain the correct tire pressure > page 266.
snow chains.
To reduce the risk of damage to the tires and
Use fine-mesh snow chains. They must not add
rims, drive very carefully on poor roads.
more than 0.40 inch (10.5 mm) in height, includ-
ing the chain lock. Check your wheels regularly every 2,000 mi
(3,000 km) for damage. For example, check for
You must remove the snow chains on roads with-
bulges/cracks on the tires or deformations/cracks
out snow. Otherwise, you could impair driving
on the rims.
ability and damage the tires.
4M8012721BF
After a heavy impact or damage, have the tires

and rims inspected or replaced immediately by >
273
Wheels
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi heat when tested under controlled conditions on
Service Facility. a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Low-profile tires can wear out faster than stand- Sustained high temperature can cause the mate-
ard tires. rial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
item Me Clin meleCel lire) tire failure > A\.
The grade C corresponds to a Level of perform-

— Tread wear
ance which all passenger car tires must meet un-
— Traction AAABC
der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
— Temperature ABC
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher Levels
Quality grades can be found where applicable on of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the tire side wall between tread shoulder and the minimum required by law.
maximum section width > page 257, fig. 165.
For example: Tread wear 200, Traction AA, Tem-

Z\ WARNING
perature A. The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. nering, hydroplaning or peak traction charac-
Tread wear teristics.
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating ZX WARNING

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov- The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
ernment test course.
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the govern- in combination, can cause heat buildup and
ment course as a tire graded 100. possible tire failure.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and ZA WARNING
may depart significantly from the norm due to Temperature grades apply to tires that are
variations in driving habits, service practices and properly inflated and not over or underinflat-
differences in road characteristics and climate. ed.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, Band C. Those grades represent the tire's
system
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured un- (1) General notes
der controlled conditions on specified govern-
ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
marked C may have poor traction performance should be checked monthly when cold and inflat-
oA. ed to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
Temperature tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, tires of a different size than the size indicated on
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate bel, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires).
274
Wheels
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been If the tire pressure monitoring indicator
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system appears
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure tell- Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System in-
dicator
tale when one or more of your tires is significant-
ly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire The tire pressure indicator in the instrument
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and cluster informs you if the tire pressure is too low
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate or if there is a system malfunction.
them to the proper pressure. Driving ona signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- Using the ABS sensors, the tire pressure monitor-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation ing system compares the tire tread circumference
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and vibration characteristics of the individual
and may affect the vehicle's handling and stop- tires. If the pressure changes in one or more
ping ability. tires, this is indicated in the instrument cluster
display with an indicator light @ and a message.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for If only one tire is affected, the location of that
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re- tire will be indicated.
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level The tire pressures must be stored again each
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres- time you change the pressures (switching be-
sure telltale. tween partial and full load pressure) or after
changing or replacing a tire on your vehicle
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS = page 276. The tire pressure monitoring system
malfunction indicator to indicate when the sys- only monitors the tire pressure you have stored.
tem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal- Refer to the tire pressure label for the recom-
function indicator is combined with the low tire mended tire pressure for your vehicle
pressure telltale. When the system detects a > page 266, fig. 168.
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continuously Tire tread circumference and vibration character-
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon istics can change and cause a tire pressure warn-
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- ing if:
function exists. — The tire pressure in one or more tires is too low
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, — The tires have structural damage
the system may not be able to detect or signal — The tire was replaced or the tire pressure was
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions changed and it was not stored > page 276
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the — Tires that are only partially used are replaced
installation of replacement or alternate tires or with new tires
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
Indicator lights
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or If the @ indicator light turns on, there is a loss
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure of pressure in at least one tire .> A\ Check the
that the replacement or alternate tires and tires and replace or repair if necessary. Check and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function correct the pressures of all four tires and store
properly. the pressure again > page 276.
ia Tire pressure: malfunction! See owner's

manual
fe appears after switching the ignition on or

4M8012721BF
while driving and the @ indicator light in the in-

strument cluster blinks for approximately one >
275
Wheels
minute and then stays on, there is system mal- monitoring > Store tire pressure > Yes, store
function. Try to store the correct tire pressures now.
= page 276. Insome cases, you must drive for
several minutes after storing the pressures until @) Tips
the indicator light turns off. If the indicator light
Do not store the tire pressures if snow chains
does turn off or turns on again after a short peri-
are installed.
od of time, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to
have the malfunction corrected.
system
ZA\ WARNING (1) General notes
— If the tire pressure indicator appears in the
display, reduce your speed immediately and Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
avoid any hard steering or braking maneu- should be checked monthly when cold and inflat-
vers. Stop as soon as possible and check the ed to the inflation pressure recommended by the
tires and their pressure. vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
— The driver is responsible for maintaining the tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
correct tire pressure. You must check the tires of a different size than the size indicated on
tire pressure regularly. the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-
— Under certain conditions (such as a sporty bel, you should determine the proper tire infla-
driving style, winter conditions, or unpaved tion pressure for those tires).
roads), the tire pressure monitoring system As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
indicator may be delayed. equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a Low tire pressure tell-
(i) Tips tale when one or more of your tires is significant-
— The tire pressure monitoring system can ally under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
so stop working when there is an ESC mal- pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
function. check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
— Using snow chains may result in a system them to the proper pressure. Driving ona signifi-
malfunction. cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
— The tire pressure monitoring system in your heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
Audi was calibrated with “Audi Original also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
Tires” > page 263. Audi recommends using and may affect the vehicle's handling and stop-
these tires. ping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

Storing tire pressures proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re-
Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System in- sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
dicator
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
If the tire pressure changes or a tire is replaced, to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
it must be confirmed in the MMI. sure telltale.
> Before storing the tire pressures, make sure the Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
tire pressures in all four tires meet the speci- malfunction indicator to indicate when the sys-
fied values and are adapted to the load tem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
=> page 266. function indicator is combined with the low tire
> Switch the ignition on. pressure telltale. When the system detects a
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
HICLE > Settings & Service > Tire pressure mately one minute and then remain continuously >
276
Wheels
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon — Do not change the tire pressure when the
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- temperature of the tire is extremely high.
function exists. This could result in serious damage to the
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, tire and even cause the tire to burst, increas-
the system may not be able to detect or signal ing the risk of an accident.
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions — A tire with low pressure flexes more. This
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the heats the tire up too much. This could cause
installation of replacement or alternate tires or the tread to separate and even cause the tire
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS to burst, increasing the risk of an accident.
from functioning properly. Always check the — The tire pressure monitoring system does
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or not warn about damage or defects in the
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure tire construction that could cause the tire to
that the replacement or alternate tires and burst, for example. Inspect your tires regu-
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function larly.
properly.
G) Tips
General information —If tires are replaced, the sensors and valves
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system do not need to be removed or replaced. Only
replace the valve stem and, if necessary, the
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
valve and the wheel electronics. If you have
the pressure in the four tires when driving.
questions, see an authorized Audi dealer or
The system uses sensors that measure the tem- authorized Audi Service Facility.
perature and pressure in the tires. The data is —An incorrect display or a malfunction in the
sent from these sensors to the control module by tire pressure monitoring system can occur
radio frequency. after using the tire mobility kit*. Have the
sensors replaced by an authorized Audi
The tire pressure monitoring system shows the
current pressures and temperatures of the tires
in the MMI while driving > page 277. It also
compares the current tire pressures with the stor-
=> page 311.
ed tire pressures and gives a warning in the driver
information system if the tire pressure is differ-
ent from what is stored > page 278. Displaying tire pressures and temperatures
Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
The system does not detect if the stored tire
pressures match the recommended tire pres- Requirement: you must be driving the vehicle.
sures. You must store the tire pressures again in > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
each of the following situations > page 278: HICLE > Settings & Service > Tire pressure
— Each time the tire pressures change, for exam- monitoring > Display tire pressure.
ple when the load in the vehicle changes
The current tire pressures are shown in green,
— After replacing a tire
yellow, or red numbers:
— If wheels with new wheel sensors are used
— Green: the current tire pressure and the speci-
Z\ WARNING fied tire pressure are approximately the same.
— The tire pressure monitoring system assists
— Yellow: the current tire pressure is lower than
the driver in monitoring tire pressures. The the specified tire pressure.
4M8012721BF
driver is responsible for having the tires in- — Red: the current tire pressure is much lower
flated to the correct pressure. than the specified tire pressure.
277
Wheels
The specified tire pressure is the last tire pressure Storing new tire pressures
that was stored > page 278. Applies to: vehicles with tire pressure monitoring system
Note that the tire pressure also depends on the The tire pressure specifications must be stored
temperature of the tire. The tire pressure increas- correctly for the tire pressure monitoring system
es as the engine becomes warmer while driving. to function reliably.
Z\ WARNING It is always necessary to store the tire pressures

when the tire pressures are modified, for exam-
Read and follow the important information
ple due to a change in load or when new sensors
and notes > page 277.
are installed.
@) Tips > Before storing the tire pressures, make sure the
tire pressures of all four tires meet the speci-
The tire pressure or temperature is not dis-
fied values and are adapted to the load
played while the vehicle is stationary and in
=> page 266, fig. 168. Only correct and store
adaptation mode. Dashes --.-- are shown in
the pressure in tires whose temperature is ap-
place of the pressure and temperature.
proximately the same as the ambient tempera-
ture. If the temperature of the tire is higher
OB iw sete ot than the ambient air temperature, the tire
pressure must be increased approximately
If the @ indicator light turns on, the tire pres- 3 PSI (0,2 bar) above the value on the sticker.
sure is too low compared to the specified pres- > Switch the ignition on.
sure. Check and store the tire pressure(s) the > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
next time it is possible > page 278. HICLE > Settings & Service > Tire pressure
monitoring > Store tire pressure > Yes, store
® Flat tire! Safely stop vehicle. Please check all
now.
tires and store pressures in MMI
> If the changed tire pressures are not displayed
If the indicator light turns on and the message on the MMI, drive the vehicle for approximately
appears, the tire pressure has reached a critical 10 minutes so that the sensor signal from the
level compared to the specified pressure. Avoid wheels is received again.
unnecessary steering and braking maneuvers.
During this adaptation phase, --.-- is displayed
Adapt your driving style to the situation. Stop as
for the pressure and temperature and the tire
soon as possible and check the tire(s). If it is pos-
pressure monitoring system is only partially
sible to continue driving, see an authorized Audi
available. It only provides a warning if one or
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immedi-
more tire pressures is below the minimum per-
ately and have your tire(s) repaired or replaced.
mitted specified pressure.
Z\ WARNING @ Tire pressure: wheel change detected. Please
Read and follow the important information check all tires and store pressures in MMI
and notes > page 277. If the indicator light turns on and the message
appears, the system has detected that the loca-
tion of the sensors has changed due to a wheel
replacement, or new sensors have been installed.
Store the new tire pressures.
ZA WARNING
Read and follow the important information
and notes > page 277.
278
Wheels
ia Tire pressure: malfunction! See owner's

manual
If the iis indicator light appears after switching

the ignition on or while driving and the @ indi-
cator light also blinks for approximately one mi-
nute and then stays on, then there is system mal-
function. The following are examples of situa-
tions that could cause a malfunction:
— If the message appears at the end of the adap-

tation phase, the system may not detect one or
several of the wheel sensors necessary for pres-
sure monitoring. This may result from one or
more wheels without wheel sensors or with in-
compatible wheel sensors being installed.
—Awheel sensor or another component has
failed.
— Using snow chains can affect the function of
the system because of the shielding effect of
the chains.
— The tire pressure monitoring system is not
available due to a malfunction.
— Transmitters with the same frequency, such as
headphones or remote controlled devices, may
cause a temporary system malfunction due to
the strong electromagnetic field.
Theia indicator light and the message turn off

once the tire pressure monitoring system is avail-
able again. If you cannot correct the malfunction
and the iS indicator light stays on, drive imme-
diately to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction
repaired.
4M8012721BF
279
Care and cleaning
Care and cleaning seals on the side windows, doors, hood, luggage
compartment lid, or sunroof*, or at tires, rubber
General information hoses, insulating material, sensors*, camera
lenses*, or the laser scanner*. Keep a distance of
Regular, proper care helps to maintain your vehi-
at least 16 inches (40 cm).
cle's value. It can also be a requirement when
submitting warranty claims for corrosion damage Do not remove snow and ice with a pressure
and paint defects on the body. washer.
The required cleaning and care products can be Never use cone nozzles or high pressure nozzles.
obtained from an authorized Audi dealer or au-
The water temperature must not be above 140 °F
thorized Service Facility. Read and follow the in-
(60 °C).
structions for use on the packaging.
Automatic car wash
ZA\ WARNING Spray off the vehicle before washing.
— Using cleaning and care products incorrectly
Make sure that the windows and roof* are closed
can be dangerous to your health.
and the windshield wipers are off. Make sure that
— Always store cleaning and care products out
the vehicle is still able to roll during the washing
of reach of children to reduce the risk of poi-
process in the car wash. Follow instructions from
soning.
the car wash operator, especially if there are ac-
cessories attached to your vehicle.
— Purchase environmentally-friendly cleaning If possible, use car washes that do not have
products if possible. brushes.

— Do not dispose of cleaning and care prod- Washing by hand
ucts with household trash.
Clean the vehicle starting from the top and work-
ing downward using a soft sponge or cleaning
Car washes brush. Use solvent-free cleaning products.
The longer that deposits such as insects, bird
Washing vehicles with matte finish paint by
droppings, tree sap or road salt remain on the ve- hand
hicle, the more the surface can be damaged. High
temperatures such as those caused by sunlight To reduce the risk of damaging the paint when
increase the damaging effect. washing, first remove dust and large particles
from your vehicle. Insects, grease spots, and fin-
Before washing, rinse off heavy deposits with gerprints are best removed with a special cleaner
plenty of water. for matte finish paint.
Stubborn deposits such as bird droppings or tree Apply the product using a microfiber cloth. To re-
sap are best removed with plenty of water anda duce the risk of damaging the paint surface, do
microfiber cloth. not use too much pressure.
Also, wash the underside of your vehicle once Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water. Then
road salt stops being used for the season. clean using a neutral shampoo and a soft micro-
fiber cloth.
Pressure washers
When washing your vehicle with a pressure wash- Rinse the vehicle thoroughly again and let it air
er, always follow the operating instructions pro- dry. Remove any water residue using a chamois. >
vided with the pressure washer. This is especially
important in regard to the pressure and spraying
distance. Do not aim the spray directly at the
280
Care and cleaning
ZA WARNING height and width of the inside of the car

wash.
—To reduce the risk of accidents, only wash —To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not
the vehicle when the ignition is off and fol- wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
low the instructions from the car wash oper- —To reduce the risk of damage, do not wash
ator.
decorative decals* with a pressure washer.
—To reduce the risk of cuts, protect yourself —To reduce the risk of damage to the surface,
from sharp metal components when wash- do not use insect removing sponges, kitchen
ing the underbody or the inside of the wheel
sponges, or similar items.
housings.
— When washing matte finish painted vehicle
— After washing the vehicle, the braking effect components:
may be delayed due to moisture on the
— To reduce the risk of damage to the sur-
brake rotors or ice in the winter. This in-
face, do not use polishing agents or hard
creases the risk of an accident. The brakes
wax.
must be dried with a few careful brake appli-
— Never use protective wax. It can destroy
cations.
the matte finish effect.
@) Note — Do not place any stickers or magnetic
signs on vehicle components painted with
— If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car matte finish paint. The paint could be
wash, you must fold the exterior mirrors in damaged when the stickers or magnets
to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors. are removed.
Power folding exterior mirrors* must only
be folded in and out using the power folding (@) For the sake of the environment
function.
Only wash the vehicle in facilities specially de-
—To reduce the risk of damage to the rims
signed for that purpose. This will reduce the
and tires, compare the width between the
risk of dirty water contaminated with oil from
wheels on your vehicle with the distance be-
entering the sewer system.
tween the guide rails in the car wash.
—To reduce the risk of damage, compare the
height and width of your vehicle with the
Cleaning and care information

When cleaning and caring for individual vehicle are not listed, consult an authorized Audi dealer
components, refer to the following tables. The or authorized Audi Service Facility. Also follow
information contained there is simply recommen- __ the information found in > A.
dations. For questions or for components that
Exterior cleaning
Component Situation Solution
Windshield wiper | Deposits Soft cloth with glass cleaner, > page 59
blades
Headlights/ Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®
tail lights
Sensors/ Deposits Sensors: soft cloth with a solvent-free cleaning product
4M8012721BF
camera lenses Camera lenses: soft cloth with an alcohol-free cleaning sol-
ution
Snow/ice Hand brush/solvent-free de-icing spray >
281
Care and cleaning

Laser scanner Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®
Wheels Road salt Water
Brake dust Acid-free special cleaning solution
Exhaust tail Road salt Water, cleaning solution suitable for stainless steel, if nec-
pipes essary
Decorative parts | Deposits Mild soap solution ®, a cleaning solution suitable for stain-
and less steel, if necessary
trim
Paint Paint damage Repair with touch-up paint
Spilled fuel Rinse with water immediately
Surface rust Rust remover, then treat with hard wax; for questions, con-
sult an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility.
Corrosion Have it removed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility.
Water no longer Treat with hard wax (at least twice per year)
beads on the surface
of clean paint
No shine even though Treat with suitable polish; then apply paint protectant if
paint has been pro- the polish that was used does not contain any protectant
tected/paint looks
poor
Deposits such as in- Dampen with water immediately and remove with a micro-
sects, bird droppings, fiber cloth
tree sap, and road
salt
Grease-based con- Remove immediately with a mild soap solution ® and a soft
taminants such as cloth
cosmetics or sunblock
Carbon compo-__| Deposits clean the same way as painted parts > page 280
nents
Decorative decals | Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®
a) Mild soap solution: maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quart (1 liter) of water
Interior cleaning
Window glass Deposits Glass cleaner, then wipe dry
Decorative parts | Deposits Mild soap solution®
and
trim
Plastic parts Deposits Damp cloth
Heavier deposits Mild soap solution @), detergent-free plastic cleaning solu-
tion, if necessary
282
Care and cleaning

Displays/instru- | Deposits Soft cloth with LCD cleaner; dust in the lower area of the
ment cluster instrument cluster can be removed using a soft brush.
Controls Deposits Soft brush, then a soft cloth with a mild soap solution®
Safety belts Deposits Mild soap solution ®), allow to dry before letting them re-
tract
Textiles, Deposits adhering to | Vacuum cleaner
artificial leather, |the surface
Alcantara Water-based deposits Absorbent cloth and mild soap solution®
such as coffee, tea,
blood, etc.
Oil-based deposits Apply a mild soap solution ®), blot away the dissolved oil or
such as oil, make-up, dye, treat afterward with water, if necessary
etc.
Certain types of de- Special stain remover, blot with absorbent material, treat
posits such as ink, afterward with mild soap solution, if necessary)
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish,
etc.
Natural leather Fresh stains Cotton cloth with a mild soap solution®
Water-based deposits Fresh stains: absorbent cloth
such as coffee, tea, dried stains: stain remover suitable for leather
blood, etc.
Oil-based deposits Fresh stains: absorbent cloth and stain remover suitable
such as oil, make-up, for leather
etc. dried stains: oil cleaning spray
Certain types of de- Spot remover suitable for leather
posits such as ink,
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish,
etc.
Care Regularly apply conditioning cream that protects from
light and penetrates into the material. Use special colored
conditioning cream, if necessary.
Carbon compo- Deposits Clean the same way as plastic components
nents
@) Mild soap solution: maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quart (1 liter) of water
Z\ WARNING es the risk of an accident. They can also cause

wiper blade chatter.
The windshield must not be treated with wa-
ter-repelling windshield coating agents. Un-
der unfavorable conditions, such as wetness,
() Note
darkness, and when the sun is low, these coat- — Headlights and tail lights
4M8012721BF
ings can cause increased glare, which increas-
283
Care and cleaning
— Never clean the headlights or tail lights — Remove cosmetics and sunscreen immedi-
with a dry cloth or sponge because the ately because they could damage the
lights could be damaged. paint.
— Do not use any cleaning products that con- — Decorative decals
tain alcohol, because they could cause —To reduce the risk of damage, do not use
cracks to form. any rough powder or abrasive cleaning
— Wheels products.
— Never use any paint polish or other abra- — To reduce the risk of damage, do not pol-
sive materials. ish decorative decals that have a matte or
— Damage to the protective layer on the printed finish.
rims, such as stone chips or scratches, — Due to the risk of damage, do not use an
must be repaired immediately. ice scraper to remove snow and ice on win-
— Camera lenses dows with decorative decals on them.
— Never use warm or hot water to remove — Displays and instrument cluster
snow or ice from the camera lens. This — Make sure that the display and instrument
could cause the lens to crack. cluster are switched off and have cooled
— Never use abrasive cleaning materials or down before cleaning. To switch off the
alcohol to clean the camera lens. This upper and lower display, select on the
could cause scratches and cracks. MMI home screen: SETTINGS > Display &
— Laser scanner brightness > MMI > Screen cleaning.
— Never use abrasive cleaning materials to — Displays, the instrument cluster, and the
clean the laser scanner. This could cause trim surrounding it must not be cleaned
scratches and cracks. with dry cleaning methods because they
— Door windows could become scratched.
— Remove snow and ice on windows and ex- — Make sure no fluids enter the spaces be-
terior mirrors with a plastic scraper. To re- tween the instrument cluster and the
duce the risk of scratches, move the scra- trim, because that could cause damage.
per only in one direction and not back and — Controls
forth. — Make sure that no fluids enter the con-
— Never remove snow or ice from door win- trols, because this could cause damage.
dows and mirrors using warm or hot water — Safety belts
because this could cause cracks to form. — Do not remove the safety belts to clean
—To reduce the risk of damage to the rear them.
window defogger, do not apply any stick- — Never clean safety belts or their compo-
ers on the heating wires on the inside of nents with chemicals or with corrosive flu-
the window. ids or solvents and never allow sharp ob-
— Decorative parts and trim jects to come into contact with the safety
— Never use chrome care or cleaning prod- belts. This could cause damage to the belt
ucts. webbing.
— Paint —If there is damage to the webbing, the
connections, the retractors, or the buck-
— To reduce the risk of scratches, the vehicle
must be free of dirt and dust before pol- les, have them replaced by an authorized
ishing or waxing. Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility.
—To prevent paint damage, do not polish or
wax the vehicle in direct sunlight. — Textiles, artificial leather, and Alcantara
—To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not — Never treat artificial leather or Alcantara
polish away rust spots. with leather care products, solvents, floor >
284
Care and cleaning
polish, shoe polish, spot remover, or simi- ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
lar products. ty. You can receive information about the meas-
— Have a cleaning specialist remove stub- ures to take depending on the conditions for tak-
born stains to reduce the risk of damage. ing the vehicle out of service (duration, location,
— Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard etc.).
sponges, etc. when cleaning.
— Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry
the seat.
— Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
damage to the surface.
— Open hook and loop fasteners, for exam-
ple on clothing, can damage seat covers.
Make sure hook and loop fasteners are
closed.
— Natural leather
— Never treat leather with solvents, floor
polish, shoe polish, spot remover or simi-
lar products.
— Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
damage to the surface.
— Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. when cleaning.
— Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry
the seat.
—To help prevent the leather from fading,
do not leave the vehicle in direct sunlight
for long periods of time. If leaving the ve-
hicle parked for long periods of time, you
should cover the leather to protect it from
direct sunlight.
@ Tips
— Insects are easier to remove from paint that
has been freshly waxed.
— Regular waxing can prevent rust spots from
forming.
— Decorative decals can age due to environ-
mental conditions, which can result in dam-
age such as brittleness. The color may fade
if exposed to excessive sunlight.
Taking your vehicle out

of service
4M8012721BF
If you would like to take your vehicle out of serv-

ice for a long period of time, contact an author-
285
Emergency assistance
Emergency assistance @) Tips
General information The vehicle jack* does not require any mainte-
nance.
> Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving
traffic in the event of a breakdown. In the event
Tire mobility kit
of a flat tire, park the vehicle ona level surface.
If you are ona steep hill, be especially careful.
> Set the parking brake. Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
> Switch the emergency flashers on.
> Read and follow the important safety precau-
> Have the passengers exit the vehicle. They
tions > page 286.
should move to a safe place, for example be-
>» Set the parking brake.
hind a guard rail.
> Select the “P” position.
_Z\ WARNING > Check if a repair with the tire mobility kit is pos-
sible > page 286.
Follow the steps given above. This is for your
protection and the for the safety of others on OE Mame) LS aL
the road. Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
Equipment
B8U-0100
e tool kit, tire mobility kit, a
vehicle jack
Applies to: vehicles with the vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit,
and vehicle jack
Fig. 170 Tire: tire damage that cannot be repaired
The tire repair is only meant for temporary use.

Change the damaged tire as soon as possible
SA.
If the tire is pierced by an object such as a nail,

Fig. 169 Luggage compartment: cargo floor cover do not remove the object from the tire.
The vehicle tool kit, vehicle jack*, tire mobility The tire mobility kit can be used at temperatures
kit*, and compressor* are stored in the luggage as low as -4 °F (-20 °C).
compartment under the cargo floor cover The tire mobility kit must not be used:
> fig. 169.
— If the tire has cuts or punctures that are larger
> Lift the cargo floor using the handle > fig. 169. than 0.16 in (4 mm) @ ©fig. 170
> Applies to: vehicles with spare tire: Turn the — If the rim is damaged (2)
handle counter-clockwise and remove the spare
— If you have driven with very low tire pressure or
tire.
without air in the tire @)
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle tool See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
kit* may be located under the spare tire*, under Service Facility for assistance in these situations. >
another cover, or in the tool box.
286
ZA WARNING Repairing tires

Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
— Please note that the tire mobility kit cannot
be used in all situations, and that it may on-
RAZ-0054}
ly be used temporarily.
— The tire sealant must not come in contact
with skin, eyes, or clothing.
— If tire sealant comes into contact with your
eyes or your skin, thoroughly rinse the af-
fected area immediately with clean water.
— Do not inhale the fumes.
— If you swallow any of the tire sealant, thor-
oughly rinse your mouth immediately and
drink a lot of water. Do not induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.
— Change your clothing immediately if it
comes into contact with tire sealant.
— If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
— Keep the tire sealant away from children.
— In vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring
system*, using tire sealant can result in an
incorrect display or a system malfunction. Fig. 172 Tire mobility kit connection
Drive carefully to the nearest authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- Requirement: the tire mobility kit must be laid
ty out and ready for use > page 286.
Setting up the tire mobility kit

@ Tips
— If sealant leaks, allow it to dry in place. You > Open the cover @) on the compressor!)
can then peel it off like a sticker.
fig. 171.
>» Remove the connector (4) and pressure hose (5)
— Note the expiration date on the sealant bot-
from the housing.
tle. Replace the tire sealant at an authorized
> Connect the compressor pressure hose (5) to
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility.
the flange © on the tire sealant bottle @.
> Insert the sealant bottle with the flange at the
— Radio reception can be interrupted when
bottom into the opening @) on the compressor.
operating the compressor.
> Remove the valve cap from the faulty tire.
— Follow the legal regulations that are appli-
> Connect the filler hose (9) to the valve (7)
cable in the country where you are operating
> fig. 172.
the vehicle.
> Connect the plug @) ° fig. 171 to an outlet in
the vehicle.
> Switch the ignition on.
4M8012721BF
2) The compressor may look different. However, the way it is

operated is generally the same.
287
Inflating a tire — Avoid hard acceleration or braking and driv-

> Move the switch (8) > fig. 172 on the compres- ing fast around curves.
sor into position I. — The vehicle may become more difficult to
> Inflate the tire to between 29 psi (200 kPA) control.
and 36 psi (250 kPA) and read the pressure on — If the tire is too severely damaged, see an
the gauge. authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
> If this tire pressure is not reached, remove the Service Facility for assistance.
filler hose. Drive slowly approximately 33 feet
(10 m) forward or in reverse so that the sealant @) For the sake of the environment
can be distributed in the tire. Inflate the tire You can give the used tire sealant bottle to an
again > A\. authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility for disposal.
Z\ WARNING
— Read and follow the manufacturer's safety @ Tips
precautions on the compressor and in the in- Remember to obtain a new bottle of sealant
structions on the bottle of sealant. from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
— Ifa tire pressure of 29 psi (200 kPA) cannot Audi Service Facility after repairing a tire.
reached after inflating for 6 minutes, then
the tire is too severely damaged. Do not con- Replacing wheels
tinue driving.
— If the tire cannot be repaired with the tire
sealant, see an authorized Audi dealer or au- You must complete the preparation before
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. changing a tire.
G) Tips > Read and follow the important safety precau-

tions > page 286.
Do not operate the compressor for more than
> Set the parking brake.
six minutes continuously, or it can overheat.
> Select the “P” position.
Once the compressor has cooled, you can con-
> When towing a trailer: disconnect the trailer
tinue to use it.
from your vehicle.
> Lay out the vehicle tool kit > page 286 and the
Completing
spare tire > page 292.
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
> Applies to: vehicles with air suspension: Select
> Affix the sticker that says "max. 50 mph (max. on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings &
80 km/h)" that is provided with the tire mobili- Service > Air suspension: wheel change.
ty kit within the driver's field of vision. > Switch the ignition off.
> Stop the vehicle after driving for about 10 mi-
nutes and check the tire pressure. A WARNING
> If the tire pressure is lower than 19 psi (130 — The vehicle must also be secured to prevent
kPA), then the tire is too severely damaged. Do it from rolling when using the vehicle jack*.
not continue driving. Use suitable objects to block the front and
back of the wheel that is diagonal from the
ZA WARNING wheel with the flat tire.
Pay attention to the following after repairing — Applies to: vehicles with active roll stabiliza-
the tire: tion: Switch the ignition off because the sus-
— Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). pension regulation could change the vehicle |>
288
height, which increases the risk of an acci- @) Tips

Note the code number for the wheel bolt
adapter and store it in a safe place separate
Removing the caps from the vehicle. If you need a replacement
\e4
adapter, contact an authorized Audi dealer or
B4L-1337
authorized Audi Service Facility and give them
the code number.
Loosening the wheel bolts
B4S-0221
Fig. 173 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps
> Slide the plastic clip from the vehicle tool kit
onto the cap until it engages > fig. 173.
> Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
SS Ws
Fig. 175 Wheel: loosening the wheel bolts
ON tated 1 re)
Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft wheel bolts > Slide the wheel wrench* from the vehicle tool
kit all the way onto the wheel bolt).
B4H-0470
> Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn to

the left. To achieve the required torque, hold
i ue
the end of the wheel wrench*. If the wheel bolt
will not loosen, press carefully on the wheel
wrench* with your foot. Hold onto the vehicle
securely while doing this and make sure your
footing is stable.
Fig. 174 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and adapter

ZA\ WARNING
To reduce the risk of an accident, only loosen
You need a special adapter in the vehicle tool kit the wheel bolts gently one turn before raising
to remove the anti-theft wheel bolts. the vehicle with the vehicle jack*.
> Remove the cap (2).
> Slide the adapter @) all the way onto the anti-
theft wheel bolt @.
> Slide the wheel wrench* from the vehicle tool
kit all the way onto the adapter @).
> Loosen the wheel bolt > page 289.
4M8012721BF
D_ You need the matching adapter in order to loosen and

tighten anti-theft wheel bolts* > page 289.
289
he vehicle AN WARNING
Applies to: vehicles with vehicle jack
—To reduce the risk of injury, make sure no
one is in the vehicle before raising it.
— Make sure the vehicle jack is stable. The risk
of injury is increased when the ground is
slippery or soft, because the vehicle jack
could slide or sink.
— Only raise your vehicle with the vehicle jack
provided by the factory. If you use a vehicle
jack designed for another vehicle, your vehi-
cle could slip and cause injury.
— Position the vehicle jack only at the desig-
nated mounting points on the side sill and
RAZ-0258 align the jack. Otherwise, the vehicle jack
could slip and cause an injury if it does not
have sufficient hold on the vehicle.
—To reduce the risk of injury, do not raise any
other vehicles or other loads using the vehi-
cle jack provided by the factory.
— Applies to: vehicles with air suspension:
Changes in temperature or load can affect
Fig. 177 Sill: positioning the vehicle jack the height of the stopped vehicle.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, never start
> Place the vehicle jack from the vehicle tool kit the engine when the vehicle is raised.
ona firm surface. Use a flat, stable support if —To reduce the risk of injury, no work should
necessary. On a slippery surface such as tile, be performed under the vehicle while it is
you should use a non-slip pad such as a rubber raised.
mat > /\.
> Find the marking on the sill that is closest to () Note
the tire that will be changed > fig. 176. Behind Do not lift the vehicle by the sill. Position the
the marking, there is a lifting point on the side vehicle jack only at the designated mounting
sill for the vehicle jack. points on the side sill. Otherwise, your vehicle
> Using the hex socket wrench (3) from the vehi- could be damaged.
cle tool kit, turn the vehicle jack under the lift-
ing point on the side sill until it is high enough
that the arm @ 9 fig. 177 is under the desig-
nated plastic mount.
> Align the vehicle jack so the arm @ engages in
the designated Lifting point in the door sill and
the base (2) lies flat on the ground. The base 2)
must be directly under the mounting point (@).
> To lift the vehicle, position the ratchet @) from
the vehicle tool kit with the correct side on the
hex socket wrench @).
> Move the ratchet (@) clockwise back and forth
until the wheel lifts up slightly from the
ground.
290
Removing and installing a wheel > Carefully lower the vehicle using the vehicle
jack*.
@Rg
Tt > Tighten the wheel bolts in a diagonal pattern
“ using the wheel wrench*.
0
oO
The wheel bolts must be clean and loosen and

tighten easily. Check the contact surfaces for the
wheel and hub. Contaminants on these surfaces
must be removed before installing the wheel.
ZX WARNING
— Read and follow the important information
and notes under > page 263.
B8K-1477
— Never use the hex socket in the screwdriver
handle to tighten the wheel bolts. Using the
hex socket will not achieve the required
tightening torque, which increases the risk
of an accident.
() Note
When removing or installing the wheel, the
rim could hit the brake rotor and damage the
rotor. Work carefully and have a second per-
Removing a wheel son help you.
> Remove the top wheel bolt completely using
the hex socket in the screwdriver handle from Unidirectional tires
the vehicle tool kit > fig. 178 and place it ona
A unidirectional tire profile is identified by arrows
clean surface.
on the tire sidewall that point in the running di-
> Then install the alignment pin from the vehicle
rection. You must always maintain the specified
tool kit by hand in the empty wheel bolt hole
running direction. This is necessary to ensure the
> fig. 179”.
tire's optimal performance in regard to adhesion,
> Remove the rest of the wheel bolts.
running noise, and friction, and to reduce the risk
> Remove the wheel >(). The alignment pin re-
of hydroplaning.
mains in the hole while doing this.
To benefit fully from the advantages of the uni-
Installing a wheel directional tire design, you should replace faulty
Read the directions on > page 291 when instal- tires as soon as possible and restore the correct
ling unidirectional tires. running direction on all of the tires.
> Slide the wheel on over the alignment pin >@.

> Install the wheel bolts and tighten them gently
using the hex socket. > Reinstall the caps on the wheel bolts if necessa-
> Remove the alignment pin and tighten the re- ry.
maining wheel bolt.
4M8012721BF
D Applies to: vehicles with ceramic brake rotors*: Use a sec-

ond alignment pin* from the vehicle tool kit for the lowest
hole according to the steps described for the first align-
ment pin.
291
> Store the vehicle tool kit in its designated > Connect the compressor hose to a vehicle sock-
place. et and switch it on.
> If the removed wheel does not fit in the spare > Let the compressor run until the specified value
wheel well, store it securely in the luggage on the tire pressure sticker is reached
compartment > page 83. > page 266, fig. 168 >.
> Check the tire pressure on the installed wheel > Screw the valve cap back onto the valve.
as soon as possible.
Returning to storage
> Correct the tire pressure and store it in the MMI
=> page 276 or > page 278. > To release air, turn the valve insert. See an au-
> The wheel bolt tightening specification must be thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
120 ft lbs (160 Nm). Have it checked as soon as Facility.
possible with a torque wrench. Drive carefully > Turn the valve insert back once the air has been
until then. released.
> Have the faulty wheel replaced as quickly as > Wait several hours before placing the collapsi-
possible. ble spare tire in the spare wheel well. Only then
will it fold down completely so that you can
Collapsible spare tire store it securely.
Applies to: vehicles with collapsible spare tire > Then screw the valve cap back onto the valve.
> Secure the collapsible spare tire with the hand-
The collapsible spare tire is intended for short- wheel.
term use only. Have the damaged tire checked > Fold the cargo floor cover back into place.
and replaced if necessary by an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon Snow chains
as possible. Using snow chains on the collapsible spare tire is
There are some restrictions on the use of the col- not permitted for technical reasons.
lapsible spare tire. The collapsible spare tire has If you have to drive with snow chains and a rear
been designed specifically for your type of vehi- tire fails, mount the collapsible spare tire in place
cle. Do not replace it with the collapsible spare of a front tire. Install the snow chains on the
tire from another type of vehicle. front tire that you removed, and install that in
The collapsible spare tire is located in the lug- place of the rear tire that failed.
gage compartment under the cargo floor cover.
Z\ WARNING
Requirement: the vehicle tool kit > page 286 and
— Only use the collapsible spare tire in emer-
the compressor must be laid out.
gencies and drive very carefully, especially if
Removing it is more than six years old.
— The compressor and the hose can become
> Lift the cargo floor using the handle.
very hot during operation which increases
> Turn the handwheel counter-clockwise and re-
the risk of burn injuries.
move it.
— After installing a collapsible spare tire, the
> Remove the collapsible spare tire.
tire pressure must be checked as quickly as
You must inflate the collapsible spare tire before- possible to reduce the risk of an accident.
hand in order to use it. — Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h)
with the collapsible spare tire. Driving faster
Inflating
than that increases the risk of an accident.
> Remove the valve cap from the collapsible — To reduce the risk of an accident, avoid hard
spare tire. acceleration or braking and driving fast
> Tighten the compressor hose on the collapsible around curves with the collapsible spare
spare tire valve. tire.
292
— Never drive using more than one collapsible ized Audi Service Facility immediately to
spare tire, because this increases the risk of have the vehicle battery checked.
an accident. — Read the warnings when working in the en-
— Normal tires or winter tires must not be gine compartment > page 242.
mounted on the collapsible spare tire rim. — Handling the jump start cables incorrectly
may cause the vehicle battery to explode
@) Note and lead to serious injuries.
The compressor must be switched off after six
minutes at the most to reduce the risk of @) Note
overheating. Let the compressor cool down Jump start cables can cause considerable
for several minutes before using it again. damage to the vehicle electrical system if
they are connected incorrectly.
Jump starting
@ Tips
— There must be no contact between the
You should only perform the steps that follow if vehicles, or else voltage could flow when
you have the necessary tools and technical ex- connecting the positive terminal and drain
pertise. the vehicle battery of the vehicle providing
the jump start.
If the engine does not start because the vehicle — The drained vehicle battery must be con-
battery is drained, you can jump start your vehi-
nected correctly to the electrical system.
cle using another vehicle. Jump start cables are
— Switch off electrical equipment that is not
needed to do this.
needed.
Both vehicle batteries must have 12 V nominal
voltage. The voltage capacity (Ah) of the vehicle
battery that is giving power must not be less
than the capacity of the drained vehicle battery.
Jump start cable
Only use a jump start cable with a large enough

diameter. Note the manufacturer's specifica-
tions.
Only use a jump start cable with insulated termi-

nal clamps.
Positive cable - usually red.
Negative cable - usually black.
ZA WARNING
— A drained battery can freeze at tempera-
tures around 32 °F (0 °C). If the vehicle bat-
tery is frozen, it must be thawed before con-
necting the jump start cables. If it is not,
the risk of an explosion and chemical burns
4M8012721BF
increases. After jump starting the vehicle,

drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
293
anal eile alate) 4. Attach the other end of the negative cable
(black) to the jump-start pin @ on the vehi-
Both jump start cables must be connected in the
cle.
correct order.
Starting the engine
> Start the engine in the vehicle giving the charge
and let it run at idle.
> Now start the engine in your vehicle, which has
the drained battery.
> If the engine does not start, stop the starting
procedure after 10 seconds and then repeat it
after approximately 30 seconds.
> Turn on the rear window defogger in your vehi-
cle in order to reduce any voltage peaks that
Fig. 180 Engine compartment: connectors for jump start
cables or a charger may occur when disconnecting the jump start
cables. The headlights must be switched off.
> With the engines running, remove the cables in
reverse order of the way they were installed.
> Close the red cover on the positive terminal.
Z\ WARNING
— Never connect the jump start cable directly
to your vehicle battery. Only use the connec-
tions in the engine compartment.
Fig. 181 Connecting the jump start cables

— Do not touch the non-insulated parts of the
terminal clamps. The cable must also not
The jump start cable connections are located in come into contact with vehicle components
the engine compartment. that conduct electricity when it is connected
to the positive vehicle battery terminal. This
Follow the information about the vehicle battery
can cause a short circuit.
=> page 251.
—The plugs on the battery cells must not be
Connecting the positive cable (red) to the opened.
positive terminal — Keep ignition sources (such as open flames,
burning cigarettes, etc.) away from the vehi-
> Open the red cover on the positive terminal
cle batteries to reduce the risk of an explo-
fig. 180.
sion.
1. Attach one end of the positive cable (red) to
the jump-start pin @ 9°fig. 181 on your vehi- — Route the jump start cables so they cannot
cle. get caught in the moving parts in the other
vehicle's engine compartment.
2. Attach the other end of the positive cable
(red) to the positive terminal @ on the pow-
er source. @) Note
Please note that the connecting process previ-
Connecting the negative cable (black) to the ously described for the jump start cables is in-
negative terminal
tended for when your vehicle is being jump
3. Attach one end of the negative cable (black) started.
to the negative terminal@) on the power
source.
294
bar is not available. Use a towing cable made of

@) Tips
synthetic elastic cable similar elastic material.
Make sure that the connected jump start ca-
bles have sufficient contact with metal. ZA WARNING
— Towing highly increases the risk of an acci-
Towing dent, for example from colliding with the
General information towing vehicle.

— To reduce the risk of an accident, do not al-
You should only perform the steps that follow if low anyone to remain inside the vehicle
you have the necessary tools and technical ex- when it is being transported by a tow truck
pertise. or a special transporter.
Towing requires a certain amount of practice.

@) Note
Audi recommends contacting a towing company
to have the vehicle transported. — If normal towing is not possible, for exam-
ple if the transmission is faulty or if the
You should only have your vehicle towed by an-
towing distance is greater than 30 miles
other vehicle when disabled in exceptional cir-
(50 km), then transport the vehicle on a
cumstances. Inexperienced drivers should not
special carrier.
tow.
— If the vehicle is towed by a tow truck at the
Notes on towing axle that is not permitted, this can cause se-
vere damage to the transmission.
When the engine is stopped, the transmission
— The vehicle must not be tow started for
will not be sufficiently lubricated if traveling at
technical reasons.
high speeds and long distances:
— The maximum permitted towing speed is 30 @) Tips
mph (50 km/h). — If the power supply is interrupted, then it
— The maximum permitted towing distance is 30 will not be possible to move the selector
miles (50 km). lever out of the "P" position. The parking
lock must be released using the emergency
Additional information on towing with a tow
truck release before towing the vehicle
=> page 100.
The vehicle may only be towed with the front axle
— Switch Audi pre sense* off > page 152 when
raised. Do not wrap any chains or cables around
loading the vehicle onto a vehicle carrier,
the brake lines.
train, ship, or other type of transportation,
Tow bar and towing cable or when towing the vehicle. This can prevent
an undesired intervention from the pre
The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or tow-
sense* system.
ing cable. Both drivers should be familiar with
— Follow the local legal regulations for tow-
the special considerations when towing, especial-
ing.
ly when using a towing cable.
Always make sure the traction force does not ex-

ceed the permitted level and there are no shock
loading conditions. There is always the risk of the Read and follow the important information under
coupling becoming overloaded when driving off- => page 295. >
road.
4M8012721BF
For the most safety and security, drive with a tow

bar. You should use a towing cable only ifa tow
295
Preparations Front towing loop

> Only secure the towing cable or tow bar at the
designated towing loops > page 296,
=> page 297.
> Make sure the towing cable is not twisted. Oth-
erwise it could disconnect from the towing loop
while towing.
> Switch the emergency flashers on in both
vehicles > page 53. However, do not do this if it
prohibited by law.
Towing vehicle (front) Fig. 182 Front bumper: installing the towing loop (version
1)
> Only start to drive when the towing cable is
taut.
> Press the brake pedal very carefully.
> Avoid sudden braking or driving maneuvers.
Vehicle being towed (rear)

> Make sure the ignition is switched on so that
the steering wheel is not locked and so that you
can use the turn signals, the horn, and the
windshield wipers if needed > /\.
> Switching it off before the vehicle has stopped Fig. 183 Front bumper: installing the towing loop (version
may impair the function of the brake booster 2)
and power steering. You would then need to

The threaded opening for the towing loop is lo-
use more force to steer and brake the vehicle.
cated on the right side of the front bumper.
> Release the parking brake > page 106.
> Select the “N” selector lever position. » Remove the towing loop from the vehicle tool
> Make sure the towing cable is always taut. kit > page 286.
>» Press the cap inward with brief, strong pressure
Z\ WARNING > fig. 182 or > fig. 183. The cap will loosen
from the bumper.
— Never tow a vehicle using a tow bar or tow-
ing cable if the vehicle does not have electri- > Tighten the towing eye as far as it will go into
the mount. Use a suitable object to tighten the
cal power.
towing eye completely and securely in the
— If the vehicle runs out of power while it is
mount.
being towed, stop towing the vehicle imme-
> After using, place the towing loop back in the
diately and consult an authorized Audi deal-
vehicle tool kit.
er or qualified repair facility.
ZA\ WARNING
If the towing loop is not tightened until it
stops when installing, the threads may be
pulled out when towing the vehicle and result
in an accident. >
296
Vehicles with a trailer hitch*

@ Tips
> Attach the tow bar or the towing cable to the
Depending on the model, the shape of the cap
trailer hitch.
can vary.
Vehicles with a factory-installed trailer hitch* are
Rear towing loop not equipped with towing loop threads at the
rear.
ZX WARNING
If the towing loop is not tightened until it
stops when installing, the threads may be
pulled out when towing the vehicle and result
in an accident.
® Note
Fig. 184 Rear bumper: installing the towing loop (version To reduce the risk of damaging the trailer
1) hitch*, only use suitable tow bars that are
compatible with it. If a tow bar is not availa-
ble, you can use a towing cable.
GG Tips
Depending on the model, the shape of the cap
can vary.
Fig. 185 Rear bumper: installing the towing loop (version

2)
Vehicles with a towing loop

On vehicles without a factory-installed trailer
hitch*, the towing loop threads are located on
the right rear side of the bumper.
>» Remove the towing loop from the vehicle tool

kit > page 286.
> Press the cap inward with brief, strong pressure
> fig. 184 or > fig. 185. The cap will loosen
from the bumper.
> Tighten the towing eye as far as it will go into
the mount. Use a suitable object to tighten the
towing eye completely and securely in the
mount.
>» After using, place the towing loop back in the
vehicle tool kit.
4M8012721BF
297
Fuses and bulbs
Fuses and bulbs > Remove the screwdriver from the vehicle tool
kit > page 286.
Fuses > Remove the appropriate cover.
> Remove the colored plastic clip from the fuse
oer mie
panel, if necessary.
> Remove the clip from the fuse panel in the driv-
er’s footwell (2).
> Remove the fuse using the clip.
> Replace the blown fuse only with a fuse that
has the same amp rating.
> Reinstall the plastic bracket.
> Install the cover.
Fuse color identification
Color Current rating

in amps
Black 1
Gray 2
Purple 3
Pink 4
Light brown 5
Brown 7.5
Red 10
Fig. 186 Left side of the cockpit: fuse panel cover (@), driv-
er’s footwell: fuse panel cover and clip @) Light blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent [25
Light green 30
Teal 35
Orange 40
ZA WARNING
Do not repair fuses and never replace a blown
Fig. 187 Left side of the luggage compartment: fuse panel
fuse with one that has a higher amp rating.
cover @) This can cause damage to the electrical sys-
tem and increases the risk of fire.
A fuse that has blown will have metal strips that
have burned through. @ Note
The fuses are located on the left front side of the Ifa new fuse burns out again shortly after you
cockpit @, in the driver’s footwell @), and in the have installed it, have the electrical system
left side of the luggage compartment @). checked as soon as possible by an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
> Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment
ty.
off.
> Check the table that follows to see which fuse
belongs to the equipment.
298
Fuses and bulbs
@) Tips
— The following table does not list fuse loca-
tions that are not used.
— Some of the equipment listed in the follow-
ing tables applies only to certain model ver-
sions or certain optional equipment.
Fig. 189 Driver's footwell: fuse panel with plastic clip
Fuse panel (4) (brown)

No. | Equipment
Catalytic converter heating
PR
Engine components
NI
AD) MW) ASWIN/
Engine components
WlLOlI
Engine components
Brake light sensor
Fig. 188 Driver's footwell: fuse panel with plastic clip
Engine components
Engine components
Engine components
Engine components
Oil pressure sensor, oil temperature sensor
BR
Oo
Engine components
Bb
b
Engine components
R
N
Engine cooling
H
Ww
Engine control module

fa
BR
Engine sensors
BR
uw
Fuel pump
Bb
a
Fuse
No. | Equipment
4M8012721BF
1 | Ignition coils
3 | High-voltage heating
299
Fuses and bulbs
4 Compressor | 13 | Left headlight

5 |Engine mount 15 | USB input
6 |Windshield washer system control module
7 LisioTnieNe panel Nas | Equipinent
8 | Climate control system blower T | Ant-theté dlaunsystem
9 |Driver assistance systems control module :
2 | Engine control module
E UL
10. | Emergency 'callsystem 3 | Front seat electronics, lumbar support
11 | Engi
ngine start 4 |Automatic transmission selector lever
Di 5 |Horn
No. | Equipment 6 | Parking brake
1 |Front seat heating 7 |Diagnostic interface
2 |Windshield wipers 8 | Roof electronics control module
3 | Left headlight electronics 9 |48 V drivetrain generator
4 |Panoramic glass roof 10 | Airbag control module
5 |Left front door control module Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC), An-
Il | ‘
6 |Sockets ti-Lock Braking System (ABS)
7 | Right rear door control module 12 | Diagnostic connection, light/rain sensor
9 | Right headlight electronics 13 | Climate control system
10 Windshield washer system/headlight 14 | Right front door control module
washer system control module 15 | Climate control system compressor
11 | Left rear door control module
12 | Parking heater Fuse assignment - left side of cockpit
No. | Equipment
Seat ventilation, seat electronics, rearview
1 mirror, rear climate control system control
panel, diagnostic connection, traffic infor-
mation antenna (TMC)
2 Vehicle electrical system control module,
diagnostic interface
3 |Sound generator Fig. 190 Left side of the cockpit: fuse panel with plastic
4 | Transmission fluid cooling valve ete
5 |Engine start
8 | Night vision assist, active roll stabilization 5
No. | Equipment
9 |Adaptive cruise assist, front wheel sensors - -
2. |Audi phone box, exterior antenna
10 | Exterior sound generator 5
3 | Climate control system, fragrance system
Intersection assistant, driver assist sys- .
11 4 |Head-up display
tems
5 Audi music interface, USB input
7d Steering column lock
300
Fuses and bulbs
Fuse panel (a) (black) Fuse panel (2) (black)

8 |Upper/lower display 10 | Front belt tensioner on driver's side
9 |Instrument cluster Luggage compartment lid central locking,
10 | DVD drive 11 | fuel filler door, luggage compartment cov-
11 | Light switch, switch panels Sf

12 [Steering column electronics 12 |Luggage compartment lid control module
13 | Volume control Fuse panel (2) (red)

14 |MMI Infotainment system control module No. | Equipment
15 | Steering column adjustment 1 | Rear climate control system blower
16 | Steering wheel heating 2 |Sound-amplifier
3 | Exhaust treatment, sound actuator
Fuse assignment 4 |Rear climate control system control panel
ST 5 | Right trailer hitch light
6 | Trailer hitch positioning motor
7 |Trailer hitch release
8 |Left trailer hitch light
9 |Trailer hitch socket
10 |Allroad sport differential
11 | Exhaust treatment
12 |Driver’s side rear safety belt tensioner
Fuse panel @) (brown)

No. | Equipment
Driver assistance systems control module
2. |Audi phone box
« : E -| a fl r al i] " f E 3 Front seat electronics, right lumbar sup-
{ | aE ] | port
- 4 |Side assist
6 |Tire pressure monitoring system
Fig. 191 Left side of the luggage compartment: fuse panel 7 | Bxeharanitenina
with plastic clip 8 Auxiliary heating radio receiver, tank mod-
ule
Fuse panel (@) (black) 10 TV tuner, data exchange and telematics
No. | Equipment control module
1 High-voltage heating, thermomanage- rt Convenience access and start authoriza-
ment tion control module
5. |Air suspension/suspension control 12 | Garage door opener
6 | Automatic transmission control module 13 | Rearview camera, peripheral cameras
: Rear seat heating, rear climate control sys- 14 Convenience system control module, right
4M8012721BF
tem controls tail light

9 |Central locking, left tail light
301
Fuses and bulbs
15 | Passenger’s side rear safety belt tensioner

Front belt tensioner on front passenger's
16
side
No. | Equipment
1 | Active roll stabilization
6 | Voltage converter
9 | Auxiliary battery control module
15 | Thermomanagement control module
No. | Equipment
Not assigned
Bulbs
Your vehicle is equipped with maintenance-free

headlights and tail lights. However, if a light bulb
needs to be replaced, please contact an author-
ty.
302
Data privacy
Data privacy Your vehicle is equipped with electronic control

modules for various vehicle systems such as the
Privacy notice airbags. These vehicle control modules store data
while driving normally that is required by an au-
You can find information about responsibility for
data protection in the MMI.
Facility for diagnosis and repair purposes. Only
Transmitted information certain types of data are recorded for a very short
period of time ifa control module has detected a
Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SET-
system event. No noises, conversations, or im-
TINGS > General > Legal notes > About Audi
ages will be recorded in the vehicle.
connect.
The data may include information such as the ve-
Image recording hicle speed, the direction of travel, and informa-
tion about the brake system, or also the behavior
Surrounding area monitoring of the restraint system in the event of an acci-
Applies to: vehicles with surrounding area monitoring dent. The stored data can be exported and down-
The functionality of the park assist plus requires loaded with special devices, which must be con-
detecting and evaluating the vehicle's path. This nected directly to the vehicle.
is done by cameras installed permanently on the On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)
vehicle that detect objects in the vehicle's sur-
roundings (such as obstacles or guard rails). The There is a diagnostic connector socket in the driv-
live images from the cameras are transmitted to er's side footwell to read out the various control
the applicable control module. modules and the event data recorder. Data re-
garding the function and condition of the elec-
The camera images are transferred to the respon- tronic control modules is stored in the event
sible control module for processing and may be memory. Only have an authorized Audi dealer or
stored, depending on vehicle equipment. The authorized Audi Service Facility read out and de-
control module analyzes the current camera im- lete the event memory.
age using image evaluation software. This image
evaluation software detects anonymized techni- ZA\ WARNING
cal measurements, such as distances to objects.
— Incorrect use of the connection port for the
The control module evaluates these technical
On Board Diagnostic System can cause mal-
measurements and makes it possible for the as-
functions, which can then result in accidents
sist systems to control the vehicle, if necessary.
and serious injuries.
— Only allow an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Data memories thorized Audi Service Facility to read out the
engine data.
5
io.
oO
2
h data recorder
x=
+
oO
Event Data Recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
4M8012721BF
ing how a vehicle's system performed. The EDR is

Fig. 192 Driver's side footwell: connection port for the On designed to record data related to vehicle dynam-
Board Diagnostic System (OBD)
ics and safety systems for a short period of time, >
303
Data privacy
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehi- by ESC, ABS, Audi pre sense’, etc.), and assist
cle is designed to record such data as: systems settings (such as speed settings).
— How various systems in your vehicle were oper- Special devices and access to the vehicle or to the
ating; ASM are necessary in order to read the data from
— Whether or not the driver and passenger safety the ASM memory. In addition to the vehicle man-
belts were buckled/fastened; ufacturer, third parties such as law enforcement
— How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the authorities can also read and analyze the stored
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, data if they have access to the vehicle or to the
— How fast the vehicle was traveling. ASM.
These data can help provide a better understand- Data usage

ing of the circumstances in which crashes and in-
Audi can read out the information stored in the
juries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your
data memories or similar data, or give this infor-
vehicle only ifa non-trivial crash situation occurs;
mation to third parties, especially in the follow-
no data are recorded by the EDR under normal
ing situations:
driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.
name, gender, age, and crash location) are re- — If the vehicle owner or lessee agrees
corded. However, other parties, such as law en- — If there is an official request from the police
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the — Ifa court or authorities request it
type of personally identifying data routinely ac-
If legally permitted, Audi can also use the data
quired during a crash investigation.
for analysis of vehicle operation and safety per-
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip- formance or provide this data to third parties for
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the research purposes.
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, Data memory for autonomous driving!)
that have the special equipment, can read the in- Applies to: vehicles with data memory for autonomous driv-
formation if they have access to the vehicle or the ing
EDR.
When park assist plus is active > page 170, data
Assist system monitor is stored in a memory in the vehicle. This data is
continuously overwritten by more current data
This vehicle is equipped with an Assist System
after a few seconds. The data is erased when the
Monitor (ASM). The ASM collects data that is not
ignition is switched off.
stored by the EDR in the event of an accident. The
main task of the ASM is to make it possible to un- In certain situations, such as if an airbag has
derstand the role and the behavior of the assist been triggered or a parking process was ended,
systems in these accident situations. In addition the corresponding technical data may be stored
to the data that the EDR stores, the ASM records in the data memory for autonomous driving. The
data related to the assist systems starting sever- data memory for autonomous driving is a read-
al seconds before the accident or near-accident. only memory that has a limited amount of stor-
The data collected by ASM depends on the equip- age space. If the storage space is full, the oldest
ment and may include the following information: data will be overwritten with the newest data. >
status information of the assist systems (for ex-
ample, if they are switched on or off, system
events, etc.), control interventions (for example,

ket.
304
Data privacy
Exporting data Transmitted information

You can read out the data memory for autono-
Data collection
mous driving and export this data to a USB stick.
Applies to: vehicles with data collection
Depending on the country, Audi may collect data
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary, the
for the following purposes, for example: offer
automated systems must not be active, and the
and product optimization, public safety, provision
ignition must be switched on. A USB stick must
of Audi connect remote vehicle services, and
be connected to the USB input.
adaptation to customer expectations. For exam-
» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: ple, various technical function data, environmen-
SETTINGS > Data management > Statistics. tal data, driving data, and usage data will be col-
> Follow the instructions in the MMI. lected for a specific purpose and forwarded to
Audi. The data will be sent from the vehicle at
The export will be canceled if you switch menus,
the time the data was collected.
for example.
Applies to: MMI: You can find additional informa-
Recorded data
tion about data collection in the MMI. Select on
— Driver interactions (such as the driver pressing the home screen: SETTINGS > General > Legal
the brake pedal) notes > About Audi connect.
— Vehicle dynamics (such as speed)
If you would like to deny data transmission to
— Status of automated systems
Audi, contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
— Control requests
thorized Audi Service Facility for more informa-
— Relevant measurements from monitoring the tion. You also have the option to deactivate data
surroundings transmission within the privacy settings.
— Image data from monitoring the surroundings
— System status, timestamp, and vehicle location
Privacy settings
when deactivating/activating park assist plus
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect
You can find additional information in the MMI:

— Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SETTINGS > Privacy settings.
SETTINGS > General > Legal notes > About the
data memory. When using Audi connect services or during data
collection, data will be transmitted from the ve-
@) Tips hicle.
> To display additional information about the pri-
— The data is processed and stored locally in
vacy settings and the associated symbols in the
the vehicle. It is not automatically transmit-
status bar, press @ in the MMI.
ted to Audi or other third parties, for exam-
ple through the cloud. The owner or driver is Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
responsible for the data. Audi does not have
access to it. Setting the maximum privacy settings
— For additional information and the evalua- When the Activate privacy mode function is
tion of data, please contact Audi Customer switched on, the data connection is deactivated
Care. or sending of data is restricted, but all safety-re-
lated, legal, or contractually required Audi con-
nect services remain activated. The majority of
the Audi connect services are deactivated.
4M8012721BF
305
Data privacy
When the function is switched off, the data con- of data for Audi connect services and emer-
nection will be available in order to use Audi gency calls, if equipped:
connect services. — The emergency call function will remain
available without restrictions and will con-
Adjusting individual privacy settings
tinue to transmit data.
In the MMI, you can adjust individually which da- — If an online roadside assistance call is ini-
ta should be transmitted from the vehicle. If you tiated, no data will be transmitted, but a
switch on a data category, the data will be trans- call will be made.
mitted. — If the Geofencing Alert, Speed Alert,
You can also deactivate individual services for and/or Valet Alert services have been acti-
your vehicle at my.audi.com if you are logged into vated by the key user, then they will re-
the vehicle as the key user > page 32. These de- main available without restrictions and
activated services will not be available in the ve- continue to transmit data.
hicle. For additional information, visit my.audi. — Stored destinations (favorites, last desti-
com.) nations) are only stored in the vehicle. If
you allow transmission of data again,
@) Note these destinations will be synchronized via
the myAudi account. To prevent synchroni-
You are responsible for all precautions taken
zation of destinations, delete the destina-
for data protection, anti-virus protection, and
tions before you allow data to be trans-
protection against loss of data on mobile de-
mitted again.
vices that are used to access the Internet
through the Wi-Fi hotspot.
G) Tips Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
— The following interfaces are not affected by Audi collects, uses, stores and shares your per-
changes to the privacy settings: Bluetooth, sonal information, such as contact data, vehicle
Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE), Wi-Fi, Audi data, usage data, driving data and precise geolo-
smartphone interface (ASI), Near Field cation, in order to provide you with the products
Communication (NFC), charging communi- and services you have purchased or requested,
cation (high-voltage system), Electronic Toll and for a number of other purposes, for example,
Collect (ETC), On-Board Diagnostic System to track quality issues, to performance and safe-
(OBD) if equipped. ty, to meet our internal compliance or legal re-
— If the maximum privacy settings are switch- quirements and to market to customers and po-
ed on, your vehicle may not receive security tential customers. For a more complete list of
updates and certificates for establishing an the data we collect, how we use it and with
encrypted connection, depending on vehicle whom we share it, please visit your Audi nation-
equipment. In order to receive security up- al/sales region website at www.audi.com.
dates and certificates, switch the maximum
The collection, use and sharing may vary depend-
privacy settings off for at least ten minutes
ing on your model and model year, your subscrip-
every six months. Make sure that your vehi-
tion status, or the service offering. For example,
cle is connected to the Internet. A symbol in
collection, use and sharing may vary between
the MMI status bar indicates if the required
Audi connect services, if you have designated a
data connection is available > page 23.
key user, or if you are driving a model equipped
— If the transmission of data is limited, it will
with persistent data logging. Please review the
have the following effects on the exchange
complete Privacy Statement to understand our >
D_ In certain countries.
306
Data privacy
data handling practices with respect to a particu-

lar service.
You can find additional information about our da-

ta privacy practices in your MMI.
> Applies to: MMI: On the home screen, select:

SETTINGS > General > Legal notes > About
Audi connect.
Information about our privacy practices in con-

junction with the mobile Audi connect applica-
tion can be found in the Application’s Privacy
Statement.
For additional information about the privacy

practices relating to Audi connect, myAudi, or
other websites, applications or online services as
well as your obligations with respect to using
these services, and for additional information re-
garding Audi connect terms and conditions,
please visit your Audi national/sales region web-
site at www.audi.com.
4M8012721BF
307
Accessories and technical changes
Accessories and — Replacement parts may not always be availa-

ble.
technical changes
— Navigation systems for vehicles built for the
Warranty U.S.A. and Canada will not necessarily work in
Europe, and may not work in other countries.
Your vehicle is covered by various warranties:
— New Vehicle Limited Warranty (1) Note

— Limited Warranty Against Corrosion Perforation Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle re-
— Emissions Control System Warranties: Federal sulting from these country-specific differen-
Emissions Control System Defect Warranty, ces.
Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
— Applies to: USA models: Kansas Safety Belt Maintenance, repairs,
Limited Warranty and technical modifi-
— Applies to: USA models: California Emissions
cations
Control Warranties: Short-term Emissions De-
fects Warranty, Long-term Emissions Defects Observe the safety precautions > page 242, Gen-
Warranty, TZEV models Emissions Defects eral information and > page 290, Raising the ve-
Warranty, California Emissions Performance hicle.
Warranty
General information
You can find detailed information in your Warran-
ty & Maintenance Booklet and in the California Due to the increasing complexity of technology in
Emissions Booklet*. these vehicles, as well as the safety and environ-
mental standards that apply, you can only per-
form a very limited amount of repairs and modifi-
Audi Literature Shop cations to the vehicle yourself.
Service information is made available as soon as Proof of maintenance work may be required to
possible after a model is introduced and can be submit a claim within the warranty period.
ordered in the Audi Literature Shop: http://
literature.audiusa.com We recommend that you have your vehicle serv-
iced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility and that Audi Genuine Parts
Driving in other
and Audi Genuine Accessories are used. This
countries helps to ensure that your vehicle's functionality,
Government regulations in the United States and performance, and safety are not impaired.
Canada require motor vehicles to comply with Maintenance and repairs
emissions regulations and safety standards.
Your vehicle was designed to help keep mainte-
Therefore, vehicles that were produced for the
nance requirements to a minimum. Some regular
U.S. and Canadian markets are different from
maintenance is required to help ensure that your
vehicles produced for other countries.
vehicle runs in a safe, economical, and reliable
If you plan to use your vehicle outside of the manner. Please refer to your Warranty & Mainte-
United States or Canada, it is possible that: nance Booklet for more detailed information
— Fuel may have a significantly lower octane rat- about vehicle maintenance.
ing. Unsuitable fuels can cause engine damage. When operating the vehicle under more extreme
— Proper maintenance and repair work may not operating conditions, for example when outside
be possible because special service equipment, temperatures are very low or in very dusty envi-
tools, or measuring devices needed for your ve- ronments, certain maintenance should be per-
hicle may not be available. formed between the specified intervals.
308
Usually maintenance and repair work requires — Never perform any work in the engine com-
special tools, measuring devices, and other partment unless you know exactly how to
equipment that is available to trained vehicle carry out the job and have the correct tech-
technicians in order to help ensure that your vehi- nical information and the correct tools.
cle and all of its systems operate correctly, relia- — If you are uncertain about what to do, have
bly, and safely. Performing work on the vehicle the work performed by an authorized Audi
incorrectly can impair the operation and reliabili- dealer, an authorized Audi Service Facility,
ty of your vehicle and may void one or more of or another qualified workshop. Serious per-
your vehicle's warranties. sonal injury may result from improperly per-
formed work.
Technical Modifications
Interference with electronic components, their @) Note
software, the wiring, and data transfer may cause
— Maintenance work, repairs, or technical
malfunctions. Because of the way electronic com-
modifications to the vehicle (such as instal-
ponents are interconnected, such malfunctions
ling additional equipment) that is not per-
can also impair systems that are not directly in-
formed correctly can cause vehicle damage.
volved. This means that you risk both a substan-
— If emergency repairs must be performed,
tial reduction in the operational safety of your ve-
take your vehicle to an authorized Audi deal-
hicle and increased wear of vehicle components.
er or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon
Some convenience functions, such as the conven- as possible.
ience turn signal function, individual door open- — Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle
ing function, and displays, can be reprogrammed resulting from failure to comply with these
using special workshop equipment. If functions guidelines.
are reprogrammed, the information and descrip-
tions about these functions in this Owner's Man- @) For the sake of the environment
ual may no longer apply to the changed func-
— Regular maintenance can help protect the
tions. Audi recommends that an authorized Audi
environment.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility perform
— Technical modifications to the vehicle can
and verify any reprogramming procedures.
have a negative impact on fuel consumption
ZA WARNING and vehicle emissions.
Maintenance work, repairs, or technical modi- @) For the sake of the environment
fications to the vehicle (such as installing ad-
Certain components in your vehicle such as
ditional equipment) that is not performed
undeployed airbag modules, pretensioners
correctly can cause serious injuries and in-
and remote control batteries may contain Per-
crease the risk of an accident.
chlorate Material - special handling may ap-
ply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
Z\ WARNING perchlorate. When the vehicle or parts of the
The engine compartment in any motor vehicle restraint system including airbag modules
is a potentially dangerous area and can cause and safety belts with pretensioners are scrap-
serious personal injury. ped, all applicable laws and regulations must
— Always use extreme caution when doing any be observed. Your authorized Audi dealer is
work in the engine compartment. Always familiar with these requirements and we rec-
follow commonly accepted safety practices ommend that you have your dealer perform
and use common sense. Never risk personal this service for you.
4M8012721BF
injury.
309
@) Tips @) Note
Because of your vehicle's aluminum body de- A correctly-installed exterior antenna is re-
sign, all service and repair procedures affect- quired for operating radio equipment in the
ing the body should be performed by an au- vehicle. Otherwise, the increased electromag-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv- netic waves can cause malfunctions in the ve-
ice Facility, who will perform the work accord- hicle. Observe the regulations in the country
ing to Audi factory specifications. Only Audi where the vehicle is being operated and the
Genuine Parts are used when Audi experts instructions from the radio equipment manu-
perform repair or service procedures. Failure facturer.
to use Audi Genuine Parts or Audi Genuine Ac-
cessories or performing repairs incorrectly Reporting Safety Defects
may result in severe vehicle damage, such as
corrosion. Applicable to U.S.A.
Accessories and parts If you believe that your vehicle

Consult with an authorized Audi dealer or author-
has a defect which could cause a
ized Audi Service Facility before purchasing ac- crash or could cause injury or
cessories or replacement parts. Audi recom-
death, you should immediately in-
mends having your vehicle serviced by an author-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- form the National Highway Traffic
ty and using Audi Genuine Parts and Audi Genu- Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
ine Accessories.
addition to notifying
Audi does not endorse the use of products and
accessories that it has not evaluated, even if the Audi of America, Inc.
product is approved by a certified testing agency
or government agency.
2200 Ferdinand Porsche Drive
Herndon, VA 20171
ZA WARNING
— Installing unapproved accessories or incor- If NHTSA receives similar com-
rect replacement parts can cause vehicle plaints, it may open an investiga-
damage and can increase the risk of an acci-
dent. tion, and if it finds that a safety
— Never attach accessories, such as telephone defect exists in a group of
holders or cup holders, to the airbag covers
or within the airbag deployment zone, be-
vehicles, it may order a recall and
cause this increases the risk of injury if the remedy campaign. However,
airbag deploys.
NHTSA cannot become involved in
— On vehicles that have factory-installed li-
cense plate brackets on the front of the ve- individual problems between you,
hicle, the brackets may only be replaced your dealer, or Audi of America,
with ones that are the same size and made
of the same material. Do not install any li- Inc.
cense plate brackets on the front of vehicles
that do not have factory-installed brackets.
Otherwise, the function of the system could
be impaired.
310
To contact NHTSA, you may call Tel.: 1-800-333-0510 or

the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll- Tel.: 1-819-994-3328 (Ottawa re-
free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1- gion and from other countries)
800-424-9153); go to http:// TTY for hearing impaired:
www.safercar.gov; 1-888-675-6863
or write to: or contact Transport Canada by
Administrator NHTSA mail at:
1200 New Jersey Ave., Transport Canada
S.E. West Building Motor Vehicle Safety Investiga-
Washington, DC tions Laboratory
20590. 80 Noel Street
You can also obtain other infor- Gatineau, QC
mation about motor vehicle safe- J8Z OA1
ty from http://www.safercar.gov. For additional road safety infor-
Applicable to Canada mation, please visit the Road
Safety website at:
If you live in Canada and you be-
English:
lieve that your vehicle has a de-
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
fect that could cause a crash, in-
motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm
jury or death, you should immedi-
French:
ately inform Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls. http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/
securiteautomobile/menu.htm
You should also notify Audi Cana-
da. Declaration of
Canadian customers who wish to compliance for telecom-
munications equipment
report a safety-related defect to
and electronic systems
Transport Canada, Defect Investi-
Your vehicle may be equipped with various radio
gations and Recalls, may either systems, depending on vehicle equipment. The
call Transport Canada toll-free at: manufacturer is not liable for radio malfunctions
that are caused by unauthorized changes to the
equipment.
4M8012721BF
FCC Part 15.19

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two >
311
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radi-
interference, and (2) this device must accept any ation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrol-
interference received, including interference that led environment. End Users must follow the spe-
may cause undesired operation. cific operating instructions for satisfying RF ex-
posure compliance. This transmitter must be at
FCC Part 15.21
least 20 cm (8 inches) from the user and must
Changes or modifications not expressly approved not be cotocated or operating in conjunction
by the party responsible for compliance could with any other antenna or transmitter.
void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment. @ Tips
Additional information or supplements about
RSS-Gen
the radio systems based on the vehicle equip-
This device contains licence-exempt transmit- ment and country can be found on the follow-
ter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, ing website: www.audi.com/generalinfo
Science and Economic Development Canada’s li-
cence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, in-

cluding interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
RSS 102
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC and ISED radi-
ation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrol-
led environment. This equipment should be in-
stalled and operated with minimum distance of
20 cm (8 inches) between the radiator and your
body. This transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
Integrated Toll Module* - FCC (USA) and

ISED (Canada)
This device complies with FCC rules part 90 and
Innovation, Science, and Economic Development
Canada RSS-137. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference that may be re-
ceived including interference that may cause un-
desired operation. WARNING: The transmitter
has been tested and complies with FCC and ISED
rules. Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the de-
vice.
312
Technical data
Technical data The sticker contains the following vehicle data:
Identification data @ Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

@ Vehicle type, engine output, transmission
Vehicle data label ® Engine and transmission codes
@) Paint and interior codes
XXX X= HKNK WOK XX
RAZ-0668
© Optional equipment numbers
(Hae wrccnce XX XNKKKNKK
Frm XXX XX Vehicle identification number (VIN)
2 XX XKXKKKX XK. XX XK The VIN is located in the following areas:
XXX KW XXX
(3) / SERB XXXX XXX XXX — Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
ENG. CODE / TRANSCODE
@ in | INNENAUSST. HICLE > Settings & Service > Vehicle info.
PAINT NO. J INTERIOR XXXX [XXX XXX / XX
M. -AUSST./ OPTIONS — On the vehicle identification label
EOA 7D5 4UB 6XM 5SG 5RW — At the front behind the windshield
2EH JOZ 1LB 1AS 1BA
3FC SMU 7X1 — Under the carpet under the right front seat
FOA 9G3 0G7 OYH OJF
SH TL6 3KA 8EH UIA X9B QZ7
1xw 8Q3 9Q8 824 D2D
716 CV7 7KO 4X3 2K2 Notes about technical data
34 4KC 3Y0 413 5D2
1SA 7GB QIA 4GQ The values may vary based on special equipment
as well as market-specific equipment and meas-
ee uring methods.
Please note that the specifications listed in the

Fig. 193 Vehicle identification label vehicle documentation always take precedence.
The vehicle identification label > fig. 193 is locat- @ Tips

ed in the luggage compartment under the cargo Any technical data that is missing was not
floor cover. available at the time of printing.
The vehicle identification label information can
also be found in the Warranty & Maintenance
booklet.
Vehicle data
Length (in (mm)) | Width (in (mm)) | Width across the | Height at curb
mirrors (in (mm)) | weight (in (mm))
Q8 196.3 (4,986) 78.5 (1,995) 86.2 (2,190) 67.1 (1,705)
RS Q8 197.3 (5,012) 78.7 (1,998) 86.2 (2,190) 66.7 (1,694)
SQ8 197.1 (5,006) 78.5 (1,995) 86.2 (2,190) 67.2 (1,708)
4M8012721BF
313
Technical data
(er) Feb a(t)
Fuel tank 22.5 gal (85 liters)

Windshield and headlight washer system* 6.3 qt (6 liters)
A/C system refrigerant oil

The exact type and amount of refrigerant oil in
the A/C system is specified on the sticker on the
refrigerant compressor.
Refrigerant oil 110/140 g® +/-10g

@) The specifications depend on vehicle equipment.
Weights
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

B8U-0380
The maximum permitted load on the front axle

@ or the rear axle @) is listed on the safety cer-
tificate on the side area of the door or on the
driver's door pillar.
Load
The maximum permitted load is listed on the tire
pressure label on the driver's door pillar.
Fig. 194 Safety certificate
Roof load
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The maximum permitted roof load is 220 lbs
The maximum permitted total weight@ of the (100 kg).
vehicle is listed on the safety certificate on the
side area of the door or on the driver's door pillar.
Trailer load
Q8, SQ8, RS Q8 7,700 lbs (3,500 kg) 770 lbs (350 kg)
314
A Anti-theft wheel bolts...............0... 289
Apple CarPlay
A/C cooling mode..........-.
eee eee eee ee
refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 231
A/C system refrigerant oil...............
Aspect ratio
Acceleration measurement..............
VIdCO eee eee eee eee eee 225,.227
Accelerator pedal...............--00 000s ASR
also refer to Accelerator pedal...........
refer to Anti-Slip Regulation............ 116
AccessorieS.... 0... 0.00. eee eee
Audi adaptive light...............-.0000- 51
Active lane assist
Audi connect
refer to Lane departure warning.........
refer to CONnNect ; «= = sass ss sees ss eee ee ae 192
refer to Lane guidance................
Audidrive'selecticy, « + scum oz scum « x pewe yoo 111
Adaptive cruise assist................04.
Audi music interface...............2.-- 222
Cleaning the sensors......... 0.0.0.0 005
Audio files.............
0000 c cece eee eee 223
Adaptive cruise control
Audi phone box...........0.-
00 eee eee 183
Predictive control..............000005
Audi presense.......
00... cee eee eee 149
Adaptive dampers « sve « « savece ae scare 6 0 oe
Messages ...........
0.0. e eee eee eee 153
Adaptive speed assist
Audi pre sense front.............-...0-- 150
refer to Adaptive cruise assist..........
Audi side assist
Adjusting the air distribution.............
refer to Side assist. ........
0... cece eee 153
Adjusting the brightness.................
Audi smartphone interface.............. 231
Adjusting the sound................0005
Legalinformation.................005 236
Adjusting the temperature...............
Audi virtual cockpit
Adjusting the vents ccs <= csws + © sews +o oer
refer to Instrument cluster.............. 12
Adjusting the volume.............
eee eee
AUTO
Adjusting the volume (announcements) ... . Automatic headlights................4. 51
Adjusting the welcome sound............ Climate control system.............0005 91
Airbag system... 2.2... eee eee Auto Lock (central locking) ............... 35
AIPSUSPONSION ix o © aowees « 2 mines + omnes 5, v0 Automatic climate control system
Alarm system refer to Climate control system.......... 90
refer to Anti-theft alarm system.......... Automatic luggage compartment lid.... 43,44
Alignment pin (changing the wheel)....... Automatic transmission............-.0005 97
All-weather lights...............-..00005 Parking lock emergency release......... 100
All-wheel steering.............---00005 Automatic wipe/wash system............. 57
ALUS@aSOntineSies. « 3 ssasess «x aimee a & iwesane sw a8 Average consumption................... 16
All wheel drive Average speed..........-.
00. cece eee ee 16
refer to quattro.............0
0. eee
Amazon Alexa integration
Media playback................00000.
B
Operating « « seen s » ewes se eee G s FeeE Ys BOS
Bag hooks ........ 0.0. e eee eee eee eee 83
Band
AMI
refer to Audi music interface........... refer to Frequency band............... 212
Battery
Android Auto
Charging (12 Volt vehicle battery)....... 253
refer to Audi smartphone interface......
Vehicle battery (12 Volt)............... 2511,
Anti-lock braking system................
4M8012721BF
Winter operation (12 Volt vehicle battery) . 252

Anti-Slip Regulation 0.642 5 eccs «sense
ees
Blinds
Anti-theft alarm system...............05.
refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 47
315
Index
BOCK FOURE serene 6 & sense ¥ a cwavens ¥ Ht ceurene ¥ same 206 Cell phone compartment
Blowers « sisi oe cena v6 arenes a omen ow oS Fo 91 refer to Audi phone box.............4. 183
Bluetooth Central locking............0 0... cece eee 35
Audio player...........-000.0000 ee eee 221 AUTO LOCK: « saa s ana. am & § Suis G 3 Have 35
Connecting a device. ....... cece ee eee 235 Convenience key............0 02: e eee eee 40
Connecting a mobile phone............ 181 Convenience opening and closing......... 47
Deleting atdevice rsicse + + scene a + soesene a 6 axece 236 Luggage compartment lid............... 43
Device overview............2..2-00008 235 Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 38
Discoritiecting a device. sc csus xs eweses 235 MESSAGES « snc so smones oo wsme oo eames «soem 37
Displaying profiles................0005 236 Remote control key............--.00005 40
Selecting adevice...............-.04. 235 SGttinGs s x cen » x eee £2 RES Fo wR 3 8 oe 36
Specifying a favorite ............00 000. 236 Vehicle key sccm « 0 sss © a eenme = stonene i 3 omens 40
BOOSE:s » & sais 4 £ Saene & H GRD 4S GES TS ROS 15 Central locking switch...........-...00-. 37
Boost pressure indicator................. 15 Ceramic DrakeSeonie. x a oeinis we seesam o secuwwe oo 5 105
Brake fluid Certificationts, s 2 asws « saun + ¢ sume 2 ¢ cee 311
Checking the brake fluid level........... 250 Changing light bulbs................... 302
BRAKGS cvax = scnay % § eesae ¢ ¥ HGS 7 E HaR FOES 104 Charging
Brake fluid: « 2 weed es wees a eee oo wees 2 250 refer to Power sourceS.........-.-.00-05 82
Emergency braking function............ 107 Charging the battery
(0) 108 Mobilesdevicesis « « ssisin x « seine sw ayseie 0 as 222
New brake pads « weiss + mes se ey 2 ery 105 USB... eee 184
Brands’: « sae: x = comes 5 © pues & eeeeR © Femme « 237 Wirelessis « « saups ¢ © sues x 2 cto xe ees gb 184
Break-in security feature..............0.8. 38 Child safety lock
Breaking in Climate control system controls inthe rear. 45
New brake pads...........-.
cece eeeee 105 Power windows............0000 eee eee AS
INQWrtineSi: « «cerns «0 xenon © 9 semen © moons © 263 REArdGGrSis« + s sean sa awa 2 Aaees s aeeR GS 45
Browser Child safety seats... .. 0.0... cece eee eee 76
refer to Media center...............00. 224 Securing to the top tether anchor........ 80
Bulb replacement..................000- 302 Securing with asafety belt... co. 6 6 coun s 79
Business,addressin.. . cence us oecan os aren wo 206 Securing with LATCH...............-.0. 78
Cleaning... ... cece
eee eee 280
C Cleaning Alcantara...............000005
Cleaning artificial leather............... 283
283
California Proposition 65 Warning........ 243

Cleaning carbon components........ 282, 283
Battery specific..........
0... ee eee 252
Cleaning controls’. « sees se sews & e saws x coe 283
Calllist.. 0.0... 185
Cleaning decorative parts andtrim........ 282
CAME ASH acess © 6 sensens % « omnes 5 vu omen & moments 122
Cleaning exhaust tail pipes.............. 282
Locations ......... cee eee eee eee 123,
Cleaning plastic parts................0. 282
Capacities
Cleaning textiles................0.000. 283
Fuel talk’: 2 sexs = = meen < ¥ tee v o Hes x He 314
Washer fluid reservoir..............005 314 Climate control system...........-...0-- 90
Cargo MOOr ws ss wees « e meme 5 2 eee 2 pew Fe 87 Climate control system controls in the rear
Child safety lock................0 00000. 45
Cargo Nets + 5 wee » o pew e + sees ee Bee Be ee 87
Closing
Gar wash's = <cen « + coms = e peers so Oe ee eR 280
Automatic luggage compartment lid...... 43
Catalytic converter................00005 241
Convenience closing.............+-.05 47
Cell phone
Hood... 1... eee eee eee 243
refer to Telephone...........-0ee
eevee 181
Luggage compartment lid............... 43
316
Luggage compartment lid with foot motion . 44 Cooling MOdetic. i = scciin ee ecenere ee serene wv omen 91
Panoramic glass roof............00
ee eee 47 Cooling system
SUTSHadE (FOOT): + wars a 2 womm a 2 cows © a rey 47 Adding coolant................-000ee 249
Sunshade (windows) ...............0005 46 Checking the coolant level............. 249
Windows........... eee eee cece eee 46 GOOlANE svc 2 x oes ov ewe eo a 2 o oe 248
Closing aid (power closing doors).......... 35 Cornering lighti:. » 2 ces: = ews: o ees ee eee 51
GOEKPIEIMIMING'. & wesisn ee cnncens 6 6 sexuene w ca0ee 55 Cross traffic assist (intersection assistant) .. 157
Cockpit (overview) « «wes e wsen 6 eae seem 6 Cruise control system............000005 134
Collapsible spare tire...............00.. 292 Cup holders. .......
0 cece eee eee eee 82
Collapsible tire Current consumption.............-0
eens 16
refer to Collapsible spare tire........... 292
Coloreodetsss « «cams +s wines + seam oo were wo 313
D
COMBUSTION ENGINE sess ss warms v & sows ve 102
Data module
Coming home/Leaving home
Serial:number (IMED) ¢ esses ss saan ss cause 189
refer to Entry/exit lighting.............. 53
Data plans... .... eee eeeeee 196
Gompartmentsi: « «asec « « wsene 4 + weer «+ ee 83
Data Privacy...... 0... s cee cece eee 306
Goripassin the mirrors « wees s exea as ween as 60
Date... eee eee 16
GComiplianee:: « sews = ¢ sews + o serps + ¢ ees 7 es 311
SGttiliG's s savau 3 ¥ RAH s 4 BeueS 4 E RaER ¢ Esa 2:33:
Conference calles: ¢ «seus 5 « ewes so wee eve 187
Daytime running lights................-. 51
Configuration wizard.................04. 20
Declaration of compliance...........0005 311
connect ..... 0... eee eee 192
DEF (instrument cluster)...............4- 12
Data PlariSe: s seas = x mews < ¢ ewe & eae wy 196
Demo mode
Datta Privacy tious x + sess + a aesuwn v wexeua ¥ theme 306
refer to Presentation mode............. 210
Emergency call................-000ee 197
Infotainent:: = « sees ¢ s cess « v news sp eee 192
Destination onthe map...............4. 203
Infotainment services............00005 193 Details, . a resco « sxanene os stineoue i 6 omens mo auncems 203
Online roadside assistance............. 198 Determining correct load limit........... 271,
Vehicle control services................ 194 Digital:compass sass «seas
oo save oo sare 2 60
Connected devices DIM@NSIONS. « s ween « seems oy noes 6 2 ew & e 3:13
Device overvieW 0... ccc cece cece eens 235 Dimming the exterior mirrors............. 56
Connections Dimming the rearview mirror............. 56
referto Media.............-.+++- 220, 223 Directory........ 0.0.02... cece eee eee ee 186
Consumer information.................- 308 BUSINESS Catdsiies + » news oe wows ¢ pawe ws BE 187
Consumption SOEGINGS cscs « 2 mazes & nenseee « scene © © amt « 189
Reducing...........
0. eee eee eee eee 102 Display
Consumption (fltel) « ssiccw: 2 a cow 2 0 neue © mes 16 Cleaning...........0
0. 283
Contacts Disposal..... 0.02... ce eee eee eee eee ee 308
TIPOFEA pose: « o sxsuess 9 01 ceri «0 umannce © oxenene 189 DistamG@ sericea & ssseie ss owes so covnine oo creme @ os 16
Updating inthe MMI.................. 189 Distance: warning csvevs © « sce vs sseoee wo senses 146
alsovrefer to Directory’: . wiiws v wows o 2 eee 186 Doors
Convenience: key’: « swan: « + qeme sv seme ys seem 35 Child safety lock...................000. 45
Convenience closing ..........0s..enees 47 DOOrCONntactSWitch » + ceau sv sees gc aeam a: 54
also refer to Vehicle key 39 Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 38
Convenience opening and closing Power closing/closing aid............... 35
4M8012721BF
Windows or panoramic glass roof........ 47 Driver information system.............--. 13

Coolant temperature display.............. 14
317
Index
Drives Emissions control system..............- 241

refer to Media.............000
eee 220, 223 ENergyCONSUMErSias « & sone + wae oo wae oo 0 Ly:
Drive select Energy management................005 102
refer to Audi drive select............... 111 Engine
Drive systeM..... ee eee eee ee ee 102, 104 Breaking iin’: « esis <0 cee & ecw ve eon ¥ 102
Audi drive Select s cso 2 ¢ cawe 2 2 gence a ee 111 Coolant. ... 0... 2. eee eee eee eee 248
Driving down hills...............-0.00- 108 Enisrgency StOpiax « «sews + vee s = ees es He 95
DriVinig Program. ¢ «mas
xc ees + cess 98,145 JUMP StARtiNg so sews ov sei oo scones ow sense 293
Driving through water............-..005 109 Start/Stop system. ...... 0... eee ee eee 103
Driving time... .. 6. cece ee eee eee eee 16 Starting/Stopping <x « « seme = seex ss ewe : 95
Driving tips Engine compartment
Driving through water................- 109 Opening and closing the hood.......... 243
Efficientdriving ¢ wuss « ¢ cows se cows xe ea 102 OVERVIEW '« eswisics oo cesses oo stance ow siete © 0 ae 244
Offroad driving............. cee eee eee 108 Safety precautions..................0. 242
Uphill and downhill................00. 108 Engine data
Driving track. . 22... . ee eee eee eee 107 refer to Sport displays.................. 15
Drivinguphills................02..000. 108 Engine oil
AGOING & esccen 3 2 cconoa oe ee ao Sa oe 245
DVDEARIVG is 1 3 cosnees «x cemeeas =o sammate = x amemens © © 221,
Changing........ 2. cece eee eee eee 247
Checking oil level.............---000-. 245
E CONSUIMPUOliiss x 2 czers ¢ = wees 2 & Rew 2 owe 245
ESimaibress « aaueos oo asawtan a x ansuw x aanwrne « ¥ sent 190 Indicator light............... 2.00000 245
Settings................
00. e ee eee 190 Replacement interval................. 254
EDL Temperature display.................-. 15
refer to Electronic Differential Lock...... 116 Engine sound
EDR Audi driveselectix «asco:
ss sseses «x seoune 9 «3 112
refer to Event Data Recorder (EDR)...... 303 Engine’start system war » sw 6 2 awa 8 6 we 96
Efficiency aSSiStie: + 2 swe » 2 mew 2 y aes oe: 135 Engine stop
Predictive comtrobenics + i ices « mesa 2 + sein 141 refer to Start/Stop system............. 103
Electricalisystem’s « « sessce 2 seeona ee ene owe 251 Entry/exit Lightings «+ sci 6 « sae & 6 overan aa 53
Electromechanical parking brake......... 106 Entry aSSistanees. « 2 sews oo sie 9 2 eee oo saree 65
Electronic Differential Lock... 2.0... 006.. 116 also refer to Exit assistance............. 65
Electronic immiobiliZer «0: se ecns ak mows sg os 40 Environment
Electronic Stabilization Control........... 116 Unleaded gasoline..................0. 238
Embedded SIM card............--.00005 193 ESC
EMMERGENCYZASSISE averse « o ssenee © oneuens «6 vnesane 157 refer to Electronic Stabilization Control... 116
Emergency assistance ................2. 286 ESC Offroad... 1... eee ee eee 117
Emergency braking function............. 107 eSIM

refer to Embedded SIM card............ 193
Emergency call ws: <2 sce se vnc ve ee 188, 197
Event Data Recorder (EDR).............. 303
Emergency flashers..............---00-+ 53
Exit assistance... 0.2... eee ee eee 65
Emergency mode.............
essen eeee 101
Exit warning ...............
5 eee sees 15S
Emergency operation
DOONS « sean oo een 2 5 een ©» em 2 ee Yo 38 Exterior antenna.............02-..0
eee 184
FUCUREP OOP a. « sticesus c s want 1 aesene 6 ae 241 Exterior lighting.................02-000. 51
Luggage compartment lid............... 45 Exterior MUPFOPS sic 2 6 wma sv sew © meee © x 55
Panoraftiic Glass TOOT iss « ¢ savns s x eave 2 oc 48 Folding settings ..............0000
0000s 36
318
Index
External voice operation................. 29 Fueling

Fuel filler door..... 0.0...
cece eee eee ee 239
F Fuel filler door emergency release....... 241
Fueltankcapacity'. « 5 con es cone a wanna « 314
Factory default settings
Functions on demand...............0.4. 194
Multi Media Interface................. 234
Functions that require a license.......... 194
EASE OUTS sissses ow snaawee 0 x sons #9 seme a 0 onennns 201
also refer to Functions on demand....... 194
FAVORITOS! & o cowsms w 6 cman 6 8 semua & wexees & renee 22
Bluetooth. .............. 0... eee eee 236
NaVIG@EION:: « + swe 9 o eee 5 ¢ oem & e eee 202 G
Telephone wwe «x cain © aesee e+ ence oo eee 186 Garage door opener............--0ee
eee 48
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) . 311 GarMeNthOokS scesiiss sv cevevee oo ances o a wees 9 0 2 83
File formats (media drives).............. 228 GaSOlING cy « x wares & 2 meee = 2 eee 4 ¢ eee 4 8 238
FOg (WINdOWS)ixw: 5 2 came y 5 anew ay aeew 5 2 Re 92 Additives ...... 0... cece eee eee 239
Folding the rearseats...............0005 86 Gasoline mixture ...............0000ee 238
Footwell temperature.............2.0005 93 GAWR
For the sake of the environment refer to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . 314
Disposing of engine oil................ 247 Gears... eee 97
FUeLIRG!s © anecsns so answers & v annum © ¥ seems WH avose 239 Glossary of tire and loading terminology... 259
Leaks... i eee
eee eee eee 243 Glove compartment..............000
eee 83
Fragrance... ... ee eee eee eee 92,93 G meter
Free text search refer to Sport displays.................. 15
Media....... cee eee eee eee ee 227 Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)........ 314
R&GiOiss = = seus = = saupe & = ems 4 neoRE ee 214 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)...... 314
also refer to Intelligent search.......... 201 GVWR
Freeze protection refer to Gross Vehicle Weight
Coolant... .. 0. eee eee eee 248 Rating (GVWR) « ssope « 2 wecne 2 2 ceuee & 2 ces 314
Windshield washer system............. 254
Frequency band..........-..00 eevee ee 212 H
also refer to Frequency band........... 212
Hanastrees « « asms = eevee § = netR se HOR Se 182
Front center armrest .......
000. cece ee eee 65
Hatids Free Profiles « 2 swcas x x agus ¢ 2 ems 2 182
Front collision warning
refer to Audi pre sense front............ 149 Head-up display
AGjUSUING was +» ences 3 ¢ swe yo ees oy eee = 27
Front passenger’s seat adjustment
Adjusting the brightness................ 55
PRON. « ssweece xo aceane wo axevene ao coenaie w 6 ace 65
Operating...............0 0. cece eee 27
Rear... eee eee eee 65
Headlight range control................05 51
Front wiper blades
ChanGinG’s + x same sy eames ¢ a eae ¢ HER Fe 58 Headlights
Cleaning « « cvs sv even oe enn oe ence oo 58 ClOSNiNG’s = = cams ¢ 5 eas 7 o Seas tS ee Ea: 281
Headlight range control................ 51
FUGls sce ¢ x cage x 2 eee 7 o we Ye eee ee 238
Washer system... 1.2... 00. e cee ee eee 57
TAGAIEIVES «scones x 5 sures @ 2 sxenene © 8 ommrane oa ot 239
Washer system (filling washer fluid).... . 254
Current consumption................... 16
Fueldisplay sec: = s sees ey seen sy eee ge es 12 Head restraints
ACIUSEINGisyes x = sewas 3 2 gas x & eewR = # aR x 67
Fuel-tank. capacity’: « scsi oo cise a 0 caves « 314
Gasoline
Removing and installing................ 67
4M8012721BF
Reducing fuel consumption............ 102 Heated rear window .........000

sees eeeeen 92
Heated steering wheel.................0. 93
319
Index
Heating hwcses vs cscs vo orci we sees oo es oH oes 90 Interior lighting). «+ ccs + ween ev ween ee 54,55
HFP Interior MONItOriNgss «saa.
6 wae as wave os 38
refer to Hands Free Profile............. 181 Intermittent mode (windshield wipers) ..... 57
High beams International travel « « wsws s 2 gaa a x mews 196
High beam assistant............00000ae 52 Internet
Highway lights...................5.0005 51 fefer'to CONNECE se. 2 sie s ween ee ewe ee 192
Hill descent assist.............0000
0008 109 Internet radio
Hill descemticomtrol. «seve
+ « anise a a mmo © © 108 refer to Online radio.............. 216, 217
Hill Hold assist « ccosace es wen v rane ve ramen oe 97 Intersection assistant.................. 156
Home TONIZEf wes oo ssees o 2 srw 2 2 seem oo mR oo eo 92
refer to Home address.............04. 206 iPhone
Hommesaddnessi, = sieves + nmawos «+ wines x 2 eens 206 refer to Audi music interface........... 222
HomeLink
refer to Garage door opener.............
Home screen... ... ee eee eee ee eee
48
19
J
JUMPStartiNG cess 2 waves a v wees ao eeeuoes oo one 293
FHORM « « sonst 6 o arate © oi come © a ane © senor 6
Hotspot
refer to Wi-Fi...........0
0.0 c eee eee 195 K
Ch ee ee ee 35, 39
Convenience opening and closing......... 47
I Key replacement.........ceeeeeereeeee 39
Ignition Mechanical-key’s cccv. 2s ose v sera ee ewe 39
Switching on and off...............0--- 95 INGE RECOGMIZER « « cnsese 6 « ecnsece sn 6 sanaeae « © anseete 96
Imbalance (wheels) ..............000005 265 PANIC button..................0..0005 39
Immobilizer Replacing the battery.................. 41
refer to Electronic immobilizer........... 39 Unlocking and locking..............0005 40
Inclinometer...........-.0
0c eee eee eee 108 Vehicle code... 2.6.6... ee eee eee eee 39
Indicator lights........
0... eee eee eee 7 Key user... 0... eeeeee eee 33
Inspection interval............-..2.200. 254 Kick-down ... 2... eee eee
eee eee 99
Instrument cluster......... 0.00. e eee ee 12
Adjusting the layout................... 13
L
Cleaning’: « ¢ saws so sews oy eeew ee ees ene 283
Lane assist
Engine code............... 0c eee eee 236
refer to Lane departure warning......... 147
Failure... eee eee eee eee 12
refer to Lane guidance..............05 147
On-board computer..............---65- 16
OPeratiigts » mesns s+ asses a 2 mmatews © x cemsene © 5 a 13 Lane departure warning................. 147
Service interval display................ 254 Cleaning the camera area.............. 281
Software information..............005 236 Lane quidanc@sas . sees eevee a enews
wee 140
Switching tabs: « « sosies x + acuise 6 6 cxsueee ww enn 13 Lap'timer’s « = sees ¢ 2 ean x 2 oes yo wees v8: 129.
Switching the view...................0. 13 FaSer Scanners « « aay a eegu 4 x ees x ROE 122
Vehicle TUNCtIONS ¢ esses ¢ ¢ exes be Sees be ee 16 Cleaning wor = 2 wee se anne 2 pes oe wee © 2 x 282
Version information................-. 236 LATCH (securing child safety seats)......... 78
Instrument illumination................. 55 Pane Controle»: + y sagu 2 eqs x worm & & By 100
Integrated assistance...............00-. 20 Leather care and cleaning............... 283
Integrated Toll Module................. 132 Legal information
Intelligent search License subscriptions................. 236
NaVigatiOntice « saeco 2 & sew o same @ 9 Bears 6 201 Software information...............0 236
320
Index
Software:licensesi. « seins ss asros v0 ania © a 236 Map

Version information.............-.00- 236 Changing the scale.............0-0005 203
License plate bracket................0.. 310 Display’: wasn x 2 warn s ¢ mews se BewE s 2 OS 205
Lifting points (vehicle jack).............. 290 Operating’. « & ssw ¥ sncasan ¥ wawens av memes a x 2 204
Light/rain sensor Setting the destination................ 203
Headlights ............. 0.0 e eee eee ee 51 MAP
Intermittent mode (windshield wipers).... 57 refer to Message Access Profile......... 189
Lighting Map preview............0..0..0
eee eee 203
EXteriO?'s sees oo neem oo een 2 2 eon 2 ee 51 Map update............ cece ee eee eee 208
TAGE HOR so scans o 6 siaenve © wn sunctne ew axenene 6 0 « 54 MYAUGLAPD = newer = : saws s 2 eam 2g gee x = 208
LIQWES sscssia es seem ao waver 2 2 aeesiue @ ¥ arenie © ore 51 ONLINE & arises 2s sewre8e swans ao eRe ow imaUNm 208
Listening to music USB connection............-..000005- 208
referto Media..................- 220, 223 Massage function...............-000000) 63
LOAM) scssaree 1 « senor sc « saute st m seviwen mo stenoses 314 Front... 2... ec ee 64
Localiusensss + + sean 2 0 ncawaws a o sesvew s avanawe ov ite 32 Mechanical key..... 0.00.00.

0c eee eee ee 39
Locking and unlocking Media... .... 0... cece eee eee ee eee 220, 223
By remote control..............-.00005 40 DrivVGSiss ¢ = ness ¢ # Beas ¢ 8 HHS + AER at Bee 220

Using the lock cylinder; sass
s saan a 2 nea 38 Supported formats.................-- 228
With the convenience key............... 40 Media-center’. « = sew » ¢ swas x seme 2 x sete 224
Low beam headlights.................... 51 Memory functiones: « s sees = ees ve een ce 71
Lowering the rear of the vehicle........... 85 Menu language
LTE refer to Setting the language........... 233
refer to Exterior antenna.............. 184 Menu Pathisies « » sows x 2 wees © y eae 2 e emi es 19
Luggage compartment.................. 83 Message Access Profile...........-..... 189
Came Flea ensians x « escacn a «cnc we remo 6 ro 87 MessageS....... 22.00. ce eee eee eee eee 189
Cover (manual) ............-----.-5005 84 Mild hybrid drive system..........-...0- 102
GOVEr (POWER) « sews « x meus x ¢ eae 5 eS Fe 85 Mirror compass... ... 02.0...
e eee eee eee 60
Increasing the size..........
eee eee eee 86 Mirrors
Power SOUrCES ... 1. ee eee eee eee 82 Adjusting exterior mirrors............... 55
also refer to Luggage compartment...... 83 DIMMING « = ews & 2 cows xo cen + ees + Bere 56
Luggage compartment lid NAINTEYEIMITNOR®. uss 2 < csename on asete # 9 anes © 57
Closing buttom:s « «csc eo secwsns = aeauans vo see 43 MMI
General information................00. 42 refer to Multi Media Interface........... 20
Mechanically unlocking...............-. 45 Mobile device
Openingiand Closings ss mais a & wea s & oe 43 referto Telephone ...........--eeeeee: 181
Opening and closing with foot motion..... 44
Mobile device reminder signal............ 185
Power opening and closing.............. 43
Mountain passes.........
0. c ee eee aes 108
Lumbar support.............-.0002-000 63
Mountain roads..............0 0000000 108
Multifunction steering wheel
M Buttons .......
2... eee eee 13,31
Maintenance ........
6c eee eee 308 Operating’: = « sees = ssw so pee ae deem oe we 13
Maintenance intervals.................5 254 Programming buttons.................. 31
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)........ 241 Voice recognition system............... 28
Maneuverassist sissies <3 cuces 2 3 somes 2 3 savers a 178

4M8012721BF
Manual shitting: «wees 2s ceos a ¢ eww so een 99
321
Index
Multi Media Interface...............0005 20 Online services

Menus and symbols.............000-008 21 refer toconnect.........e
eee eee eee 192
OPGrAtiNG's + ease x x eee ee Kae s 2 BemE o 18,21 Online system update.................. 234
Switching the displays on or off.......... 20 Online traffic information............... 209
MUEING ies: 2 secon © a women & eee ooo oN Foo eae 31. OPEN Geers so ceseons 3 v cevvans ov sumsees & 2 sume Woe ORE 35
MYAUGI 5 = ees ss pews so pews s eames ee 32,193 Automatic luggage compartment lid...... 43
myAudi navigation................. 200, 203 Convenience opening...............0085 47
MYAUGI USERS ¢ sicts ss caus a x ens ds Bema sa: 32 Fuel filler:dOOP ss: ics cane so eae oe eas ooo 239
HOOd .... cece eee eee 243
N Luggage compartment lid...............

Luggage compartment lid with foot motion . 44
43
Narrow areaS.... 22... cece eee eee 146 Panoramic glass roof.............2-200. 47
Natural leather care and cleaning......... 283 Sltishiade (OT) ss i s cows 4 c teen se ree ei 47
Navigation. ..............0..0..0.000. 200 Sunshade (Windows): s «sso so ieee oo sossan 46
BetteRhOUt@aas 2 x wean s a sana s age & s a 209 Windows..... 02.00.00.
cece eee ee eee 46
CallinGiesnis ¢ = scene v awe ov ween ee wm 8 oe 203 Opening and closing
Changing the scale.............00000e 203 refer to Unlocking and locking........ 35,40
also refertoMap...........--.0e ee eee 204 Operating
Navigation database Head-up display.................00000. 27
Version information.............00005 236 InstruMeNt ClUster s sions & eines & wave ae ove 13
Navigation (instrument cluster) .......... 206 Multifunction steering wheel............ 13
Ns 83 Multi Media Interface............... 18,21
SY, 310 TEXtIN PUB iss 3 2 wien 3 wens a = acer os EM 6 eo 25
Night vision assist...............-..0004 131 Touch display..........
0.00 eee eee eee 18
Cleaning the camera...............4.- 281 Voice recognition system............... 28
Notification center. .......
0... cee eee eee 23 Optional equipment number............. 313
Options
MeGidiwe = » zemy s meme ¢ eee « 5 ee et 227
Oo R@GIO sxisacs 3 smisans @ o amivens & 0 orewaun 2 0 aera 8 217
Octane rating (gasoline)................ 238 Overview (cockpit) «6 cies ce cece sce nees eee 6
Odometer... .... cece eee eee eee 14
ReS@ttinGssssx « = sees ¢ ¢ ees 3 ieee ss res 14
P
Office address
refer to Business address.............. 206 Paint COd@z»: = » saws x 2 wee sy eee a 2 ee 313
Offroad Paint damad@ws« z = sem es ewe se eee es oe 282
refer to Offroad driving................ 108 PANIC button. ..............-.0..00000 39
Offroad driving ees = ¢ swwn 2 2 wen 2 2 were so wee 108 PANIC function... 0.0.0...
c cece eee eee eee 39
OFF (climate control system) ............-. 91 Panoramic glass roof..............00000- 47
Oil Convenience opening and closing......... 47
refer to Engine Oils: «sw s vases owen2 245 Emergency closing..........sceeseeeees 48
On-board computer. .......5-.0.
00 eee ee 16 Quick opening................ eee eae 48
On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)... 241, 303 Parental control
DVD... eee eee eee 227
Online map
refer to Satellite map...............05 207 Park assist plus. ........ 0.0000 e eee eee 170
ONLINE RADIO « swcomss «2 sooness 6 w sevens wo ERE oo 216 Parking ..... 0.6... cee cece eee ee 96
also refer to Online radio.......... 216, 217
Online roadside assistance.............. 198
322
Parking aids. + csssce x2 esemne oo encase ve enmuate ¥ ¥ 159 Predictive messages...............- 99,136
Adjusting the volume.............0005 161 pre sense
Automatic activation.................. 160 refer to Audi presense................ 149
Cleaning the sensors and camera........ 281 Presentation mode...............-.005- 211
Deactivating rear cross-traffic assist. ... . 166 Presets
Park.assist plus; < - eses ss eee% ss eeaes es 170 Radio... 2... 2. eeeeee 215
Parking:aid plus « cisvie s & coe 6 soos ao wre 159 Presets list
Parking space search.................. 167
feferto Presets. «= isas teresa veieas ce 215
Peripheral cameras................-4. 162
Pressure
Rearview cametaies . 2 sccm so ewan vo exe y 162
Tire pressure monitoring system.... 275,276
Remote controlled parking............. 173
THRs. oo sowie oo ceusie © 6 arene © 8 aoe we meee 266
Switching off maneuver assist.......... 179
Profilespietures siswin x + scausm a 3 aimesm © 0 omawene eH 32
Trailerview's 2 ssn sees 2 o meow oo eee 2 ¥ 163
Progressive StESTING’s ¢ & mews ¢ x wows ¢ y news ¢ 114
Parking and maneuvering............... 159
Protectinng:cs < = saves ¢ = saree & © eewie +s owes 282
Parking brake
refer to Electromechanical parking brake. 106
Pyrotechnic elements............-...0- 308
Parking lightSivn « s mew ¢ o mews o ewney 3 ween a SL

Parking lock emergency release.......... 100 Q
Partition Wetec s = ems sv seme s s meen ob eee 86 QGUSUERO's sas « 5 Nees 5 EGS, eB Eo HaeeR 115
Pass-through...........2--..0
eee eee ee 86 Selective wheel torque control.......... 116
Pedals. .... 2.2... cece eee eee eee eee 99
Pedestrian detection................04. 131 R
Perchlorate .......
0... cee eee eee 308 Radio’: = «wes e s secu ss ween 5 s weree © ¥ eee = 212
Performance/torque display Radio text. ....... cece eee eee eee 215
refer to Sport displays.................. 15 Station list... 00... . eee eee eee 212
Peripheral cameras.............--000-- 162 Radio communications equipment........ 310
Phone Radio equipment..............
0c eee eee 310
Connecting a second mobile device...... 182 Radio Standards Specification (RSS)....... 311
Disconnecting a mobile device.......... 183
Railseanrion’s «ssw 2 women ae ones: ao mcm 2 © a 112
Sete S crnics ao serene «meme « w anene © memes w 188
Rain/light sensor
Phonebook
Headlights .........0.0... ce eee ee eee §1
refer to Directory.............0
eee ae 186
Intermittent mode (windshield wipers) .... 57
PIN
Random
4-digit myAudi PIN..............-..00- 32
Fefer to Shute: « 2 gems = 2 gems = noes 3s Fe 225
PROLCCUONica « s wou + & wiseu s & vaewe ¢ ¥ cows 33
RAnGe’s « sane se neue 5 & mem 5 y ae GB ee 16
Playback (media) « « sscs sv sees se eee ve es 223
Reading lights................00.
eee eee 54
Podcast
Rear cross-traffic assist............000.. 166
refer to Online radio............6% 216,217
Rear lid
Polishing iss + « ccavusys @ cqees @ © meres +e Rees eee 282
refer to Luggage compartment lid........ 43
POUlUtane Titers oss x = saeays & 2 emus x = eee a 90
Rear lowering.......... 00.0 e cece eee eee 85
Power closing (doors)..........seeeeeeeee 35
Rear seats... 0... eee cece
eee 65
Power sourceS........-.-0-0-0
eee 82,222
Rearview camera...... 0.0.2... 0 ee ee eee 162
Power window malfunction............... 46
Rear window defogger............-..0--- 92
Power windows...........--.0 eee eee eee 46
4M8012721BF
Rear wiper blades

Malfunctions « < seas ss saws ¢ 2 eee de eee 46
Changing ......... 0. cece ee eee eee eee 59
Predictive control.............0..00000- 141
ClOaNiNG :: « s sees ¢ s ees 4 e een vo eee se oe 59
Index
REAR (climate control system) ............-

Recirculation Mode savin ss swims x sce 6 4 wee
91
92
Ss
Safety belts. ...... 0.0... eee eee eee 68
Recuperationsses «= ses + 2 samen ¥ ¢ ees 9 coe 16
GCl@aNiNG ies « s wei + y ewe » eon ee Dew gE 283
REfrigeranit Ollvs sz wavew xe exes ox meme 2 eae 314 LOEKING sexes ico seesene xe emevene ww maevare ¥ w anetese © 79
RETUGLING « « wews 6 a news oe ees Fe ema ee 239 Securing child safety seats.............. 79
Remote access authorization (key user) ..... 33 Satellite map...... 2... eee eee eee 207
Remote control Saving fuel
Garage door opener........se.ceeeeeees 48 Energy consumers..........-.2-.020005 L7
Remote control key 39 Recuiperationts s sacs s zaee 5 s gees & x geome e 16
Convenience opening and closing......... 47 Screen
Key replacement.............02-.00 eee 39 refer to Touch display ...........0e0eeee 18
| Al SGrEWALIVET iss x = caves x = sae & & eerR 8 & OG s 286
PANIGfUNCHION ¢ s wees ¢ gaseu aan ss een 39
Search function
Replacing the battery...............00. 41
refer to Free text search............... 227
Unlocking and locking..............0008 40
Seat:heating « sci owes 2 wawn se meen 6 ¥ owe 92
also refer to Vehicle key..............-. 39
Seats
Remote controlled parking.............. 173
Adjusting the front seats............... 63
Remote park assist plus
Adjusting the rear seats................ 65
refer to Remote controlled parking...... 173
ClOaniNiG:<« = s gees + sees s been ge wees ae: 283
Remote park assist plus with garage function FOL Giaiss o wscass vo areas 6 Hama v Fame vO 86
refer to Remote controlled parking...... 173
Front passenger’s seat adjustment....... 65
Removing the caps (wheel bolts)......... 289 Head restraititSies x « saws + = semis + eee eo 67
REPAIIS sess 6s mmo © 3 ees © a sume SF er oo 308 Massage function..........0seeeeee eee 63
Replacement key.........--22e
eee eee 39 Memory function..............--000 00 71
Replacement parts............--..20--5 310 Resetting the position.................. 65
Replacing fuses...........
2. eee e ee eee 298 Storing aseat profile................... 71
Reporting Safety Defects................ 310 Seat vertilationsecs so sexes 2 sce 2 2 orm 9 oo 92
RIMS 0. eee eee eee eee 271 Securing the vehicle............-..2+--5- 96
Cl@SNiNG's ¢ = 22m ¢ » wemn 2 2 ees yo eee sz Be 282 Selecting a source (media).............. 223
Road carrier... 0.6.2...
eee eee eee eee 112 Selector lever cs x « news ¢ ¢ hoes ss eee oP eS 97
Rolling... .. cece cece eee eee eee 96 Sensors
Rolling ability COVETAGE ALCS « cercx : s wow so wegs + Rares o 122
Electromechanical parking brake........ 106 LOCATIONS race x « canzone » © camsuae » & sunoane « @ meas 123
Transmission idleis . isan si maven oo ccomea soo 98 Service interval display................. 254
Roof Setting measurement units.............. 233
refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 47 S@ttiNGSiog « 5 wes = © ewes a eee ¢ Ree § Go Be 233
Roof LOad ©» awevis oo cvewsss v seavans ao sueeun ao came 314 Announcements and tones............. 233
ROORKACK asia + aon os waren 6 e naene a 2 BOR He 88 Bluetooth.....................000008 234
also refer to Roof rack..........--..000. 88 Dateanid titties: + saws x 2 eee « «ewe gs 233
Route guidance LANGUAGE « sesso vo sens oo memes vo ERE vo es 233
StOPPING ..... cee eee eee eee eee 204 Measurement units...............0005 233
also refer to Navigation............... 200 Medidicn = 2 gaws : «meee s Hoon 4 > eu os ee 227
Running direction (tires)..............-. 291 Navigationiccs « weve + even 6+ semen sv meres 210
Radio... 2.6... ce cece eee eee eee eee 218
SOUNG :geue ss wee 5 s seme fs meee Ee eee 233
SySteMss «+ assva 2 e eesen 2 v eeie 2 8 eae Foes 233
324
TAIMOZONC Lies « & socveee wo ceeneis ww ewes woo sere 233 SEONG sss oo esesvee a comnts v 6 astoone ¥ & sews Y 6 a
Wi-Fi hotspot........
0... eee eee 195 Audi drive select
Setting the language................... 233 also refer to Steering..........00.e008 114
Setting the time..............2-.00000- 233 Steering lock. ss ices cc eeee ec wee ees 95,114
Shade Steering wheel
Rear window............0.00
000 e eee 57 ACjUStING we ¢ = cases ¢ 2 eees eo eee ce ewe 66
Shift light indicator................0000. 15 Shift paddles... 1.2... . 0. eee eee eee eee 99
SHIP PaAdlesian: » . smmcne x a mame © a wees © wotae 99 Steering wheel heating................. 93
also refer to Multifunction steering wheel. . 13
SRipearrier secon «2 sess xo enews ¥ x woesene a 8 owen 112
Steps for determining correct load limit... 271
SHOP’: = sews sv sews 2 vane ee coe oH ine Fo 194
Stopover (navigation) .................- 204
Shortcut
refer to ShortcutS...........
00 eee eee 24 Stopping..........
00... eee eee eee eee 96
SHOrteultst: « snes x canons a = ronson ov anes x ase 24 Stopping the vehicle..............-..00. 96

SHUTGis 2 o ecu oe wes oe memow 2 mace 8 we 225 SHOPPING ENGIME)) rm» sows ms sete «0 anne 103
Side assists < swe + sane: gs seme a 2 ee a EY 153 StOMaQe lis « o accra + 2 wwe wo cwevane @ ¥ cress © 0 ces 83
Cleaning the sensors.............00005 281 Storage compartment...............0005 83
SIM at sews. 6 v sons % 2 senses a seveee oa meee 193 Stored stations
Sliding/tilting sunroof refer to Presets...............-000
eee 215
refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 47 Subtitles
Smart Favorites DVD... eee eee ee 227
refer to PresetS............0
0-00 e eee 215 Sunshade
Smartphone Rear side windows... ..........0000000e 46
refer to Telephone.............00ee
eae 181 Rear Wind Whew 2 o sews 2 3 wen 2 a meson oo em 57
Snow chainS.........
eee eee ee eee eee 273
Lo0) 47
also refer to Panoramic glass roof........ 47
Socket
SUN VISOFS 2.6.1 eee eeeee 57
refer to Power SOUrCceS ......
0c ee eee neces 82
Suspension ..... 0.0... cece cece eee 112
Software information
Audi drive select............--.000005 112
Legal information..................0- 236
Swapping calls.............-.0002-0
08 187
Software version (MMI)
Version information...............04- 236 Swerve assist... 0.0...
cece eee ee eee 152
Sound Symbols
refer to Adjusting the sound............ 233 NAViGatOlin: « ¢ seme 7 x anes ¢ 5 oemR EB owe 204
TrattiGiese: 2 x ams 2 seein w 2 neuen mw ai Ho 209
Speed limit information
also refer to Indicator lights.............. 7
refer to Traffic sign recognition......... 126
SYNC (climate control system) ............ 91
Speed limits
refer to Traffic sign recognition......... 126 SYStEMISECEINGS « swccens + a vccuaes v oreswee + seins 233
SPEGAOMEtET = veux > oven © & eam G Eee ob 12 T

Speed warning system..........-..2-00. 126
Sport differential...................04. 115 Tachometer ssa 2 e ivinei sw mamas « wavain « @ a 12,14
Sport displays............ 0.0. e eee eee 15 Tail lights
Sporty driving..........-... ee eee eee eee 107 Cleaning. ........
2. cece eee eee 281
Start/Stop system. « « esses « « escene vw wiauers a 103 Technnicalidatais © « awiviss wo ssovese « wecmme @ © cseicu 313.
Messages... 1.22...
cece eee eee eee 104 Technical modifications................. 308
4M8012721BF
Switching offandon..............00ee 103 Telephones s ¢ saws = sews yo een es eee ve 181

Starting to drive: < s eccs se ese ss eeee se pee 96 Accepting/ending acall................ 187
Starting (engine) ...................005 103 Audi phone box.........-..0.--0e eee 183
Index
Charging the battery (USB)............. 184 Top tether anchor (securing the child safety
Charging the battery (wireless) ......... 184 SQat) occ
ce cee cece teen eee eee 80
Connecting a mobile phone............ 181 Touch display
Dialing asnumbet's e:csce e cco ee waneve ¥ 0 ene 187 Adjusting feedback. ..............-.05. 20
Exterior antenna...............200005 184 OPeratinG)s « 2 vices «2 oem = 2 arene © woo vo 18
Mobile device reminder signal.......... 185 TOWI0Gise5 : wee 2 wees & x Here 5 epee 5 2 Bs 295
Options during aphonecall............ 187 Towing lOOp< « ss<2 = seen < sae8 ¢ s oes 296, 297
Playing music........ 0.0... eee ee eee 221
Towing protection monitoring............. 38
Temperature displays
TPMS
refer to Sport displays...............00. 15
Indicator light:: « sss ¢ + sees se zeae ss ews 279
Temperature display (outside temperature).. 15 Tire pressure monitoring system.... 275,276
Temperature gauge Traffic incidents
COOlANt sssan 2 » cqum 3 x aR ot Raw SB Meee Fe 12 refer to Online traffic information....... 209
Text input... 2... eeeee eee 25 Trafficsin formations. « svesese » s sexe 1 amuse 0 0s 210
Text MesSageS .....--.
cee eee eee eee 189 Online traffic information.............. 209
SGttingS coms + waeu & x seeR ee NORE Ey NESE 189 Traffic light information................ 128
also refer to Text messages............ 189
Traffic sign recognition................. 126
Tie2d OWNS: & soso oo sents 2 3 oes oo meme o Bem 87
Traffic SignS.. 0.0... eee eee eee eee 129
Tightening specification
Trailerload cscs vs asccame vo avcnaiis ww ames ww anes 314
Wheel bolttstic si scsues emsie 6 « intaive a 6 amivine 291
Trailer mode
Tightening specification (wheel bolts)..... 291
Airsuspension..................0.005 118
THM: » saees go sae ¢ © Rees oe eH ge eo eB 16
Trailer towing.............. cee eee eee ee 118
tiptronic Tongue weight .......... eee eee eae 118
refer to Manual shifting................ 99 ‘Trailer load): + s see s nome & s were o x som ge 118
Tire Mobility System (tire repair set)....... 286 Trailerwiew « swan « » mess = uses x eee cs see 163
Tit@S e2cses s meses ¢ = waren 2 & weseS 3 & TE sg Re 256 TUPMSSSISC:s sacs = 3 secne 3 8 Bane 3 2 aaceR 4 5 152
Loose wheel warning.................. 272
Turn signals. .... 0.0... sce eee eee eee 52
Low-profile tires..............000
000. 273
RepainSets « awa « « worms s mem 9 be a Be 286
Replacing « srr « susnene x osercm wo sseeone o 5 wees 288 U
Service life... .......... 0... c eee eee 265 Uniform tire quality grading............. 274
Tine PresSut@wes « news: = s gems & x Home EP ae 266 Unlocking and locking.............-..0-- 35
Tire pressure monitoring sys- BY remote control: «= scus <s sees se seas te 40
TEM eee 274, 275, 276 Using the lock cylinder................. 38
Tire pressure table: « sews = ¢ ses + ¢ seeps ¢ 268 With Audi connect vehicle control........ 41
Tire pressure (trailer mode)............ 118 With the central locking switch.......... 37
Treadwear indicators............-..00- 265 With the convenience key............... 40
Unidirectional; << ae. « s wees ce ewes 258, 291 Update (software) ..........
0... e eee eee 234
Uniform tire quality grading............ 274 USB
Tires and wheels Ad aptel inc s wana cs won a 9 eseowa «9 wwe a oe 184
Glossary of tire and loading terminology.. 259 USB charging ports « « even se cwen x nen ec ee 82
Tires and vehicle load limits............ 269
USB drive
Toll Module Supported types/formats.............. 228
refer to Integrated Toll Module......... 132
USB stick
TOGlSis:s s nace 2 & wea = & Seem FE Hee E x De 286 refer to Audi music interface........... 222
Tooltips.........
0... cee eee 20
326
Users Wheels . secs x x eos 2 a cecvme 2 x conan au caoasie 2 256
Local users... .. eee eee eee 32 Cleaning 282
MYAUGIUSES:: s « exes ge oem 5 e ees © eee 32 Glossary of tire and loading terminology.. 259
Using residual heat...............-.00005 92 Loose wheel warning............+..... 272
Replacing......... 0... cee eee eee eee 288
V Tire pressure monitoring system ....

Tires and vehicle load limits............
275,276
269
Vanity Mirror... . 6... eee eee eee eee 57
Wheel wrenehis «nsw 2 ease ss wane ss were 286
Vehicle
Wi-Fi
ANGIE sca « esrsea s pew gs wowed a OR Zs 108 HOtSPOESEEEINGS ie. 5 6 suse 6 & sassese 6 & urna 195
Gare/eleaning sii « came xo wena vo ewer oo 280 Using ahotspot...................00. 193
Dimensions ......... 0.00 c eee eee eee 313
Wild animal recognition................ 131
Identification data................... 313
Windows
Qutof Service sis seas se ews oo wes eee 285
Child safety lock...............0000 eee 45
Raising.......... 0.0.2 e eee eee eee eee 290
Cleaning and removing ice............. 282
StartinGisn s saves & 5 aaeNE @ 3 Hae FE OER gE me 95
Convenience opening and closing......... 47
TANS POT bss +s sree oo vac oo Ras wa Li2
Defrosting........... 2. cece eee eee eee 92
Unlocking and locking.................. 40
Opening anid CLOSING secs vs wowy sy sees 4 es 46
Vehicle care... 2. eee eee 280
POWer WINK OWSisn. so ssavie ov ares 6 eaves ves 46
Vehicle control services..........-...--- 194
Windshield
Vehicle data label................--0.00- 313
Cleaning........ 2... eee eee eee eee eee 57
Vehicle identification number............ 313 also refer to Windshield. ............00% 57
Vehicle jack’: waca zs sews zs wows ve wees oy oe 286 Windshield washer system...........- 57,254
Lifting Points: « css «2 wen oo enw vo wore 290 Reservoir capacity: « 2 ewe, s ¢ sau + ¢ seu 9 314
Tire change mode..............-.0 eee 288 Windshield wipers.............5eeeeeee 57
Vehicle key... 0.0... cee eee eee eee ee 35,39
Winter operation
Vehiclerstartisystem « « ssces o 6 suse ee coma « « 104 Gar Washes « sows so caeces 2 esa 6 nom oo 280
Vehicle:tool:kitt. sis «eee oe ewe ss enw 9 286 Cooling systeM....... ee eee eee eee 248
Ventilation’: = 5 seas 2 ees 2 2 sere a 2 meee a 2 ne 90 Defrosting the windows................ 92
VIEW BURTON: « » gcws x s nome © zeae § emis 5 13 Rear window defogger..............--. 92
VOiceMiail s = vex ¢ © sees ¢ = wee ee eR ee 187 Removing ice from windows............ 282
Voice recognition system..............-.. 28 Seat heating ......... 0.00. cece cece eee 92
Externalicss = s eva « s eee oe sews e wenn a oe 29 SHOW CHAINS wong s songs 2 wee ga deme ox 273
QPeRabiNg 4 « cessaee a o smeens a 0 poner w grwnene a 6 cate 28 Steering wheelheating................. 93
THES oe cee tee ee tees 272
Vehicle battery (12 Volt).............-. 252
Ww Windshield washer system............. 254
Warning lights WINKEF CINE cease se toon 3 3 wears 6 w sense aw 272
refer to Indicator lights.................. 7 Wireless Apple CarPlay
Washing matte finish paint.............. 280 refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 231
Wave band Wireless:charging eis. «6 esses +o cases oo evans 184
refer to Frequency band............... 212
Weights .............
eee eee eee eee 314
Wheel bolts. ............ 0.0. c eee eae 271
ANt-Cheftieac « < sees = os seme ¢ Rew Eo eee 289
4M8012721BF
Tightening specification............... 291
327
These instructions may not be reproduced or @ Forthe sake of the environment
translated in whole or in part without written
consent of AUDI AG. All rights reserved by AUDI Printed on eco-friendly paper (bleached with-
AG. out chlorine, recyclable).
Owner's Manual
English North America 07.2020
4M8012721BF
4M8012721BF www.audi.com

2021 Audi q8 78209

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 Audi q8 78209

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner's Manual

Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trust in us.

About this Owner's Manual...... Panoramic glass roof................. 47

All wheel drive (quattro).............. 115 Using the telephone.................. 185

Parking and maneuvering....... 159 Radio........

Setup... 2.2... cee eee

Audi smartphone interface...... 231: Fuses and bulbs.................. 298

Additional settings.............. 233 Customer information........... 303

Care and cleaning................ 280

DoOuUlt YOuUrSELT ios «pases

This owner's manual describes the equipment

Some sections in this manual do not apply to all

The illustrations in this manual are a guide.

All directions, such as “Left”, “right”, “front” and

* — Optional equipment or vehicle-specific equip-

Door handle ® Lockable glove compartment with:

Central locking switch —CD/DVD drive ...........0005. 220

— Rear window defogger ......... 90

— Operating buttons Depending on equipment, buttons

Instrument cluster ............. — Parking systems 159

— Driver assistance systems ...... 124

With some indicator lights, messages may ap- Steering lock

Air suspension Transmission

=> page 157 Air suspension

Electrical system Side assist

Maneuver assist Other indicator lights

Intersection assist =>page 135 >

Efficiency assist Park assist plus

Park assist plus Speed warning system

Lane departure warning Camera-based traffic sign recog-

Lane departure warning

Fig. 2 Instrument cluster overview (Audi virtual cockpit)

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- @ Tips

Right additional display with speed-

—Gear .. eee eee eee eee eee 97

Operating The following tabs may be available, depending

First tab Vehicle functions > page 16

Adjusting the display

Fig. 4 Left side of multifunction steering wheel

Information is organized within various tabs @)

Selecting a tab Switching the view

Returning to functions at higher levels Adjusting the layout

— The front spoiler also helps to distribute

ZA\ WARNING when approaching the engine speed limit. Shift

indicator Opening sport displays in the instrument

play --- °F (--- °C) appears in the instrument clus-

Temperature — Time and date > page 233

the short-term memory is also displayed. If the

Touch displ Accessing options

The touch display is controlled through the

All touch displays in the vehicle can be operated

Pinching fingers together and pulling ap.

Fig. 6 Touch display: pressing

Selecting a function or button

Fig. 9 Touch display: pinching fingers together and pulling

Zooming in and out on an item

Fig. 7 Touch display: pressing and holding

tating Dragging away from/toward the edge of

Fig. 10 Touch display: rotating

Closing hidden menus

nformation about menu paths